'

.. OPERATOR S INSTRUCTION
·,

..

MANUAL

for
TANK, COMBAT, FULL TRACKED:
152MM GUN/LAUNCHER XM803
(PILOT VEHICLE NO. 7)

June 1972

�t-.� OatiUit Dlasal Allison II

\..� Olvlslon of General Motors Corporation
Military Vehicles Engineering
---
 \
.
'

I
, .
 ,

PREF AC E

This Instruction Manual has been developed for use during the build, assembly, and
contractor tests of MBT/XM803 Pilot Vehicle No.7. The manual covers vehicle operation,
operational maintenance and various supporting theory of operation and higher level
maintenance procedures.

While the format of this manual is specified as contractor's format, certain adherence
to Ordnance specification has been employed to assure consistency of presentation.

Chapters 1, 2, and 3 represent data which would normally be found in an operator's

manual. Chapters 4 and 5 contain data which would be found in higher level maintenance
manuals.

Appendix "A" contains the Vehicle Maintenance Allocation Chart (APE) which has
been included only as a general guide to the level of maintenance at which it is anticipated
various functions would be performed dependent upon the skill level and equipment available
to that specific category of maintenance.

Appendix "B" is a separate volume which contains the "as built configuration parts
list of Pilot Vehicle No. 7.

The Fire Control Subsystem instructions are interim data covering basic operation,
alignments and test equipment information.

Consistent with contract termination instructions, the operating procedures have not
been validated and may require some modification to directly apply to the hardware config­
uration delivered. The procedures are not complete and therefore will not fully evaluate
the capabilities, effectiveness and efficiency of the subsystem. The results of development
testing underway at the time of delivery of these instructions may have an effect on procedure
validity.

The alignment procedures meet organizational needs but are not complete step by step
procedures. The procedures have also not been validated.

The test equipment (Section VI, Chapter 5) for the Fire Control Subsystem has not been
tested with the Fire Control Subsystem, and test information using this equipment has not been
provided for troubleshooting the subsystem. Since only a partial complement of the test equip­
ment is provided, the definition of the signal interface is incomplete. However, the data
presents the capabilities of the test equipment and details how these capabilities can be
utilized.
 TABLE OF CONTENT S

Page No.
CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION

Section I. General 1-1

Purpose and Scope 1-1
Maintenance Forms and Records 1-1
Recommended Improvements 1-1

Section II. Description and Data 1-1

Description 1-1
Tabulated Data 1-16

CHAPTER 2. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. Operating Procedures 2-1

General 2-1
Driver's Station 2-1
Driver's Operating Modes 2-1
Operating Vehicle in Primary Mode 1. 2-3
Operating Vehicle in Emergency Mode 2. 2-3
Operating in Mode 3 -Automatic Loading of Main Weapon 2-4
Operating in Mode 4- Hand Loading Turret Ammunition 2-5
Operating in Mode 5 - Emergency Loading Main Weapon 2-5
Operating in Mode 6- Manual Loading with Ammunition
·

Loader 2-6
Operating in Mode 7 - Restow Ammunition 2-6
Operating In Mode 8 - Stow Ammunition 2-7
Operating in Mode 9 - Bulldozer Operation 2-7
Operating in Mode 10- Silent Watch 2-7
Operating in Mode 11 -Internal Environment 2-7
Operating in Mode 12 -External Environment 2-8
Starting the Engine 2-29
Suspension System 0 peration 2-30
Shifting Transmission 2-30
Accelerating and Decelerating 2-30
Steering 2-31
Pivot Steer 2-31
Braking 2-31
Driving over Obstructions 2-32
Driving over Ditch, Hole , or Trench 2-32
Driving through Snow 2-32
Driving on Ice 2-33
Driving through Mud 2-33
Driving through Sand 2-33
Night Driving 2-33
Engine Shut-Down 2-35
 TABLE .OF CONTENTS -Continued

Page No.
Section 1 .1 Operating Fire Control System
General Description of Fire Control Subsystem 2-36
Fire Control Subsystem Electrical Power Distribution and
Control 2-36
General Notes, Cautions, and Warnings 2-39
Gunner•s Operating Modes 2-41
Gunner•sChecks Prior to Fire Control Subsystem Activation 2-45
Fire Control Subsystem Activation (Turn-Qn) 2-45
Gunner•s Primary Sight Day/Night Operating (Turn-on)
Procedures 2-45
Gunner•s Target Acquisition Tasks 2-47
Gunner•s Manual Range Control Using Gunner•s Primary Sight 2-48
Gunner1s Laser Ranging Tasks 2-49
Gunner•s Weapon Activation and Control Tasks 2-50
Gunner•s Weapon Firing Tasks 2-51
Gunner•s Fire Control Subsystem Weapon Deactivation Tasks 2-55
Shutdown of Gunner•s Fire Control Subsystem 2-55
Secure Weapons for Travel 2-56
Commander•s Operating Modes 2-90
Fire Control Subsystem Activation (Turn-on Tasks) 2-97
Commander•s Fire Control Subsystem Malfunction Detection
and Isolation {MDI) Pre- and Post-Test Checks 2-98
Commander•s Day/Night Sight Activation (Turn-On) Procedure 2-100
Commander•s Target Surveillance Tasks 2-101
Commander1s Target Watch Tasks 2-101
Commander•s Target Designate Tasks 2-102
Commander•s Gunner Monitoring Tasks 2-102
Commander•s Manual Range Control Tasks 2-103
Commander•s Laser Ranging Tasks 2-103
Commander•s Secondary Weapon Activation and Control Tasks 2-104
Commander•s Main Weapon of Machine Gun Activation
and Control Tasks 2-105
Commander•s Machine Gun Activation and Control Tasks 2-106
Commander•s Secondary Weapon Firing Tasks 2-106
Commander•s Main Weapon and Machine Gun Firing Tasks
with Gunner•s Primary Sight Off 2-107
Commander Fires Main WeaponConventional Round 2-107
Commander•s Main Weapon and Machine Gun Firing Tasks
with Gunner•s Primary Sight On 2-109
FireControl Subsystem Deactivation Tasks 2-113
Stowing Ammunition in Automatic Loader 2-146
Restowing Ammunition in Automatic Loader from Inside Turret 2-147
Automatic Transporting and Loading Ammunition 2-148
Bore Scavenging System 2-149
Alignments and Alignment Checks 2-152

ii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued
Page No.

Boresight Gunner's Primary Sight to Main Weapon 2-152

Gunner's Primary Sight Reticle Alignment Check 2-154
Alignment of Commander's Day/Night Sight to Gunner's
Primary Sight 2-154
Boresighting Commander's Day/Night Sight to Main Weapon 2-155
Missile Tracker Alignment 2-157
Range Receiver Alignment Check 2-158
Laser Transmitter Alignment 2-159
Secondary Weapon Alignment and Zeroing 2-160
Main Gun Zeroing (Stabilized) - HEAT Round 2-161
Main Gun Zeroing (Stabilized) - SABOT Round 2-162
Secondary Weapon/Main Weapon Clearance Alignment 2-164
Main Weapon to Autoload Position Alignment 2-165
Miss ile Transmitt er AI ignment 2-165

Section II . Operation of Auxiliary Equipment 2-166

Communication Equipment 2-166
Collective Protector M8A3 2-167

Section llf Operation under Unusual Conditions 2-169

Emergency Driving Controls 2-169
Manual Release of Brakes 2-169
Towing Vehicle 2-171
Engaging Final Drives 2-177
Slaving Vehicle to Start Engine 2-177
Automatic Loader Manual Operating Instructions 2-178
Crew Compartment Combustion Heater 2-179

Section IV. Ammunition 2-181

CHAPTER 3. MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. Lubrication 3-1

Section II. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services 3-11

Section Ill. Troubleshooting 3-17

Section IV. Maintenance 3-24

Crew Maintenance 3-24
Engine Service 3-24
Secondary Fuel Fi Iter Element Replacement 3-27
Fuel Tank Service 3-29
Engine Air Cleaner Element Service 3-30
Transmission Service 3-32

iii
 TABLE OF CONTENTS -Continued
Page No.
Checking Hydraulie System Fluid Level 3-36
Final Drive Service 3-38
Idler and Road Wheel Service 3-39
Headlight Lamp Replacement 3-40
Taillight Lamp Replacement 3-41
Dome lights 3-43
Checking Indicator Lamps on Instrument Panels 3-44
Battery Inspection Procedure 3-45
Inspection of Personnel Heater System 3-48

CHAPTER 4. CHASSIS SUBSYSTEMS

Section I. General 4-1

Scope 4-1
Preventive Maintenance Services 4-1
Repair Parts 4-1
Torque Specifications 4-1
Special Tools 4-1
Painting Vehicle 4-2
Application of Adhesives 4-2

Section II. Vehicle Air Induction, Fuel, and Electrical Systems 4-36
Scope 4-36
Air Cleaner Blower Assembly 4-36
Vehicle Fuel System 4-38
Replacement of Fuel/Water Separator Elements 4-40
Removal/Installation of Voltage Regulator 4-42
Engine Batteries, Battery Boxes, and Electrical Leads 4-43
Driver's Auxiliary Panel 4-46
Headlight Adjustment Procedures 4-47
Remo val/Installation of Auxiliary Power Receptacle 4-48
Remove 1/1 nstallation of Headlight Assemblies 4-50
Disassembly/Assembly of Headlight Assemblies 4-52

Section Ill. Maintenance of Suspension System 4-57

Scope 4-57
Track Assembly 4-57
Track Adjuster Actuator Assembly 4-61
Rbadwheel Arms and Hydraulic Suspension Units 4-61
Final Drive Sprocket 4-61
Idler Wheel Arm Assembly 4-61
Track Support Roller Assembly 4-61
Charging Suspension System Accumulators 4-71
Hydraulic Tubes 4-71
Hydraulic Brake Cylinder 4-72
Cleaning or Replacing Hydraulic System Filter Elements 4-86

iv
 TABLE OF CONTENT S -Continued

Page No.

Section IV. Maintenance of Hull Components 4-89

Scope 4-89
Suspension Ballistic Skirts 4-89

Section v. Power Plant 4-91

Remova 1/1 nsta llation 4-91
Engine Maintenance 4-105
Fuel System 4-111

CHAPTER 5. TURRET SUB SYSTEMS

Section I • Purpose and Scope 5-1

Section II • Armament 5-2

152MM Gun Assembly 5-2
Secondary Weapon 5-4
Coaxial Machine Gun 5-4
Shillelagh Missile System (G & C) 5-5

Section Ill. Automatic Loader 5-13

Mechanical Equipment 5-13
Hydraulic Equipment 5-15
Electrical Equipment 5-16

Section IV. Gun/Turret Drive 5-23

Gun Elevation Drive 5-23
Turret Traverse Drive 5-25
Hydraulic Power Supply 5-27

Section v. Sighting and Fire Control 5-37

Gunner's Primary Sight Group 5-41
Gunner's Auxiliary Telescope (Not installed on Pilot 7) 5-45
Ballistic Computer Group 5-46
Commander's Day/Night Sight, Secondary Weapon Drive,
and Mount Group 5-47
Fire Control Display/Controls, Logic and Interconnect Group 5-51

Section VI. Support Equipment 5-66

Purpose and Scope 5-66
Electrical Test Set 5-68
Hydraulic Test Set 5-76
Weapon/Breech Test Set 5-85
Gun/Turret Drive Test Set 5-87
Automotive Loader Hydraulic System Test Set 5-91
APTE for Fire Control Subsystem 5-104

v
 TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued

Appendix A Maintenance A !location Chart

B Repair Ports Listing

( As bui It configuration )

vi
 WARNING

PERSONAL SAFETY

Operation of this equipment necessitates that all drivers and

test personnel on vehicle shall be equipped with, and use, ap­
propriate safety equipment - i.e., helmets, goggles, eye pro­
tection, and seat restraints, during testing operations. All
Detroit Diesel Allison Division safety rules for track-mounted
vehicles shall be observed.

WARNING

NIGHT OPERATION

of this vehicle may result in over-driving of headlights and rear

lights. Observe following spet::U. limits during night operations
·unless additional lights are added:

HIGH.BEAM - MAXIMUM 20 MPH

LOW BEAM - MAXIMUM 10 MPH
NO REVERSE DRIVING '

3000 PSI HYDRAULI C PRESSURE

is used in operation of this vehicle. Do not replace components

or make adjustments without assurin gthat the 3000 psi hydraulic
.pressure has been bled and the temperature of the hydraulic fluid,
if contacted, is low enough to prevent burns - i.e., less than
°
140 F. Ope�ating and maintenance personnel must at all times
observe hydratdic safety regulations to avoid being sprayed with
hot high-pressure fluid or touching extremely hot components.

WAHNING

ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HAZARDS

Do not replace components or make adjustments inside the equipment

with ·power applied. Lovr voltage energy sources -· i.e., 24 v de bat­
teries, delivering low amperes into a short circuit are hazardous to
personnel contact. Do not permit open flame or sparks near vehicle
storage batteries dueto possible hydrogen build-up to explosive levels
during charging of batteries. OJY=rating and maintenance pBrsonnel
must at all tim es observe electrical safety regulations.

· \

vii
 CHAPI'ER 1
INTRODUCTION

Section I. GENERAL

1-1. Purpose and Scope

This manual is for use during the operation and test of the Tank, Combat, Full

Tracked: 152MM Gun Launcher XM803, Pilot Vehicle No. 7 prior to delivery to the

Government. Instructions are provided for the operation, operational maintenance,

and various higher level maintenance ani theory of operation ( Chapters 4 and 5)
as'represented by the original build and assembly of this Vehicle.

1-2. Maintenance Forms and Records

Maintenance forms and records to be maintained will be specified by departmental

supervision.

1-3. Recommended Improvements

Refer changes or update of installations to Publications Section during the

build and assembly stages of this vehicle. Activity on this publication will cease

upon completion of the assembly and test of this Vehicle.

Section II. DESCRIPriON AND DATA

1-4. Description

a. The vehicle weighs approximately 57 tons and mounts a 152MM /

gun launcher which

is capable of firing either conventional ammunition or launching Shillelagh missiles.

It i's powered by a 1250 HP { gross ) air-cOOled engine, driving through a hydrostatic

transmission. Mobility is provided by a variable height hydropneumatic suspension

system.

b. The crew, consisting of a commander, gunner, and driver, are all located in the

turret basket. The driver 1 s station is a capsule which counter-rotates with respect

to the turret azimuth motion thereby retaining the driver continuously in a forward

driving position. Refer to'Figure 1-10 for arrangement of turret components.

c. The main armament is turret mounted and ammunition is supplied to the weapon

1-1
by an automatic loader. The loader stows a random combination of conventional rounds

or missiles (24) and upon comma nd by either comma nder or gunner will load a selected

round into the gun automatically. Ammunition can be supplied to the weapon during

mobility operations.

d. The fire control system provides a dual axis, stabilized line-of-sight which

has the capability of engaging fixed or moving targets while vehicle is either

stationary or mobile. The system provides weapon stabilization and includes a ball­

istic computer, a laser ranging illumination system, a day/night vision capability

through both the commander's and gunner's sights.

e. The vehicle is capable of executing mobile operations in the offense, defense, · ,.

or retrograde. The vehicle has the following capabilities:

(1) Conduct operations requiring firepower, mobility, armor protection, and

shock effect.

(2) Attack or counterattack, destroy enemy armor, and exploit under hostile fire.

( 3) Support mechanized and infantry units by fire, maneuver, and shock effect.

f. The fUnctional capabilities of the vehicle and crew require that fourteen basic

fUnctions be performed in order to implement a tactical mission. These fUnctions are

diagrammed in Figure 1-3. Vehicle capabilities required to perform the system

fUnctions are identified as Mobility, Firepower and Accuracy, Surveillance, and

Protection. Major components associated with each of these four categories axe1�SMTI

in Figure 1-4. The interrelationship of these and other vehicle components to one or

more of the vehicle capabilities is shown in Figures 1-5 through 1-8.

g. The principle dimensions and components of the XM8o3 Vehicle are shown in

Figure 1-9.

h. The vehicle, when serviced and equipped for existing climatic conditions, will

perform as shown in Table 1-1, Mobility Performance Characteristics, and Table l-2,

Firepower Performance Charateristics.

1-2
Figure 1-1. Tank, Combat, Full Tracked: 152MM Gun/Launcher XM803 - Left Front View

Figure 1-2. Tank, Combat, Full Tracked: 152MM Gun/Launcher XM803 -Left Rear View

1-3
THIS PAGE LEFr BLANK INTENTIONALLY
 r iiYUT TO
.IUYt

...,_ IOIASl
cowun
�NO TAIGfT DlllCTlO, MISSION PHASl ACC�ISHlO ------�
KiTINTIAI.
TAIGlT

I
Ul

�----�s!�·:����,------J

��------

GENERAL LEGEND

@ AND GATE-ALL INPUTS AND OUTPUTS REQUIRED

OR GATE-ONLY ONE INPUT AND ONE OUTPUT I'OSSIIU

1------�+ �������l�sl.!:�no --ID------1 <D AND/OR GATE-AT LEAST ONE INPUT AND ONE OUTPUT
REQUIRED, AND ANY FURTHER
COMBINATIONS ARE POSSIBLE

<.t) AND/OR GATE-AT LEAST ONE INPUT AND ONE OUTPUT

REQUIRED, AND ANY FURTHER
COMBINATIONS ARE POSSIBLE

OUTSIDE COMMUNICATION
I-TARGET DATA FROM OBSERVER
[>--
2.-llfNOEZVOUS INFORMATION
Figure 1 -3. XM803 Mission Functional Flow Diagram
 XM803 WEAPONS SYSTEM

I
f I I I
FIRE POWER
MOBILITY SURVEILLANCE PROTECTION
AND ACCURACY

1. ENGINE 1 . GUN/TURRET 1. VISION BL OCKS 1. TURRET AND HULL

DRIVE SYSTEM STRUCTURES
2. TRANSMISSION 2. RADIO
2. BALLISTIC COMPUTER 2. SUBMERGENCE KIT
3. Fl NAL DRIVE 3. INTERCOM
3. GUNNER'S PRIMARY 3. DESERT KIT
4. SPROCKET 4. COMMANDER'S
SIGHT
DAY/NIGHT SIGHT 4. CREW HEATER
5. TRACK
4. COMMANDER'S DAY/
5. DRIVER'S NIGHT 5. CREW VENTILATION
6- 6. ACCESSORY DRIVE NIGHT SIGHT
VISION
6. WINTERIZATION KIT
7. ROAD/IDLER/SUPP ORT 5. M ISSILE SYSTEM
W HEEL ASSEM3LY 7. CHEMICAL AND
6. FIRE CONTROL
RADIOLOGICAL
8 • HYDRO-PNEUMATIC E LECTRONICS
W ARNING KIT
SUSPENSION UNITS/
7. AUTOMATIC L OADER
PLUMBING 8. FIRE EXTINGUISHER
8. TURRET STRUCTURE
9. DRIVING CONTROLS 9. BILGE P UMP
9. WEAPONS AND
10. HULL STRUCTURE
AMMUNITION
1 J. EXTERIOR LIGHTING
10. SEARCHLIGHT
12. E LECTRIC P OWER
11. GUNNER/COMMANDER
13. FUEL/INDUCTION/ CONTROLS AND
EXHAUST DISPLAYS

14. COOLING

15. HYDRAU UC P OWER

Figure 1 -4. Major Co�nent Categon es

 EMERGENCY
DRIVING
CONTROLS

STEER

PI(IMARY THROTILE
DRIVING
CONTROLS

I ENGINE

�
BRAKE

VISION
DEVICES I
I
I
I
"'-l lXTERIOR
liGHTS
SUBMERGENCE
CONTROLS
_j

SUSPENSION
CONTROLS

TO UTILIZING
EQUIPMENT

TO SUSPENSION
UNITS

11,\'\\ TO UTiliZING
EQUIPMENT

Figure l -5. Mobility Diagram

 LASER RANGE DATA

I f
SIGHT CONTROL SIGHT
,. ELEVATION
�IVE
COMMANDER'S
CONTROL SIGHT
SYSTEM \
SECONDARY WEAPON CONTROL \
AZIMUTH \
�M \
\
\
\

\
\ \
������ \ \

\ \\
WEAPON
FIRE GRENADES
ELEVATION

\\
�M
\

I
I I I
\
\ \\
I
I l',
OVERRIDE WEAPON SELECTION GRENADE
. .. GRENADES
LAUNCHER

�i -$.]1
\

:!l !l!'��rnrl�l
',
,
OVERRIDE FIRE COMMAND r--

III1/1
/I I
_,/ /
/

L I
/

/ II
/
&
� _,"'

I
/
ELECTRIC

I II
/
SEARCHLIGHT

/ II
��
POWER /
/

l t f
/

II III II
/
GUNNER'S 1
I
/

I I
PRIMARY

II II I1
SIGHT CONTROL
-' AZIMUTH AZI� SIGHT
ELECTRONICS DR

/ / I
rr::r:r:G: .U:! -N.: ·:N-:·ER':- ·:lt- ·:l�
� FIRE CONTROL
&

�
MAIN WEAPON
MISSILE I I
II II
·'''':''''''''''''''''F''':::::::\t�=
WEAPON SElECTION STABILIZATION TRANSMITIER

/. I
, ELEC ONKS

BALLISTIC
I ,.
I ELEVATION
ELECTRONICS COAX WEAPON I I
COMPUTER & I

I
FIRE MAIN GUNNER'S
WEAPO N/COAX TELESCOPE I

+ I
I
LASER

I
I J I
RANGE
)! AUTOMATIC FINDER
LOADER
LASER RANGE DATA

Figure 1-6. Firepow�Diagram

 VISION
BLOCKS

COMMANDER'S
DAY/NIGHT
SIGHT

RADIO
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER

GUNNER'S
PRIMARY
SIGHT

AUXILIARY
SIGHT

VISION
BLOCKS

NIGHT VISION
DEVICE

·Figure l-7. Survei I lance Diagram

l-9
 SUBMER­
GENCE
KIT

C._
CREW CHEM/RAD
VENTI­ I .. .. I WARNING TURRET

Jr{
LATION KIT

}
-
FIRE r-
......
I ( -POWER:fRAIN
I

0 EXTIN- ..

GUISHER I
; COMMANDER. I
�ii...�iY�.�-��Jiit :
.. 4
I
CREW
HEATER
WINTER­ 1 1
IZATION
KIT
DESERT
KIT L - !!fi��f���fg- _j
HULL
f LGE P-U -1
s1 MP

Figure 1-8. Protection Diagram

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
 1. COMMANDER'S DAY/NIGHT SIGHT
2. GUNNER'S PRIMARY SIGHT (DAY/NIGHT)
3. TOOL BOX (2)
4. SEARCHLl GHT
5. GUNNER'S STATION HATCH
6 . COMMANDER'S STATION HATCH
7. SNORKEL OPENING (2)
8. EXTERNAL INTERCOM
9. STOWAG E RACK
10. BUSTLE BLOWER
11. CREW COMPARTMENT BLOWER AND
SCAVENGER COMPRESSOR OUTLET
12. DRIVER'S CAPSULE HATCH
13. GUN TUBE SHROUD 4
14. MISSILE TRANSMITTER
15. SECONDARY WEAPON (CAL. .50)
16. CROSSWIND SENSOR
17. GRENADE LAUNCHERS
18. BALLISTIC SKIRTS
I
_.
19. TOWING PINTLE �---- 359.8------��--
to..) --�
20. SINGLE ACTUATOR SUSPENSION UNIT
15
1 2 �---187 .5 --------+

14

46.44

"A" LINE

.I GROUND LINE 19
�� ml
1

21.00 20 1
'

GROUND ,,. WHEEL BASE 179.0 ------..�

- 45 .5 SKIRTS
fol(---1 -..1
CLEARANCE
t.. 150.9 ---�

Figure 1-9. XM803 Principal Components and Dimensions

 Table 1-1. Mobility Performance Characteristics

CHARACTERISTIC CONDITIONS CAPABILITY

Speed *Paved leve I Surface 40 MPH - Forward

(Daytime) 18 MPH - Rearward

*1 00/o Grade 14 MPH - Forward

*Towing 18 MPH Maximum

10 MPH Sustained for 10 miles

*Towed 10 Miles@ 10 MPH with Final

Drives Coupled
10 Miles@ 18 MPH with Final
Drives Uncoupled

Acceleration *Dry Paved leveI Surface 0 to 20 MPH in 12 Seconds

Climbing LongitudinaI 60%@ 3 MPH (F or R)

Lateral 400/o

Braking Dry Paved LeveI Surface 160 Feet@ 40 MPH

Grade Stationary on 600/o

Continuous - Maximum speed of
20 MPH on 7% for 3.7 miles.

Maneuverability Pivot Turn (Paved Surface) 6 RPM

Turning Radius 80 Feet@ 25 MPH

Water Operation Fording Hard-Bottom Top of Turret

without Kit

Submergence with Kit

Trenches At 2 MPH maximum 11 0" Wide x 3611 Deep

Obstacles At 2 MPH maximum 38" High

Ground Clearance Normal 21 ± 111

Maximum 25 * 111
Minimum 6 * 111

° °
* Temperature 45 F to 90 F, Relative Humidity 50 to 95%, 29.2 to 31.0 in. of Hg.

1 -13
 Table 1.2 • F.1repower p erf ormance Charactenst1cs
CHARACTERISTICS CONDITION S CAPABILITY
° ° °
MW (Main Weapon) 0 to 15 Chassis Cant Azimuth ± 360
° °
Azimuth/Elevation Elevation- 10 to +20 less rear
limits deck clearance

MW Tracking Azimuth 0.5 to 65 mi-ls/sec - Direct

Azi'muth 0.5 to 70 mns/sec - Stab.
Elevation 0.5 to 25 mils/sec.

2
MW Azimuth Slew Powered Acceleration • 95 rad/sec
0 to 7 rpm, 6 rpm continuous
°
Engine Off 180

tv\anual 1 0 ± 1 mils/cra·nk rev.

2
MW Elevation Slew Powered Acceleration 15.3 rad/sec
0.5 to 750 miles/sec.

tv\anual 10 :r 1 miIs/crank rev.

MW Accuracy - -

MW Rate of Fire 8 Conventional Rounds -

MW Ammunition MGM- 5lC Shillelagh

MTM- 51C Shillelagh
XM409E6 HEAT-T-MP
XM411E7 TP-T
XM578 APFSDS Kinetic Energy
XM570 Mod 10 Slug
XM625E2 Canister
XM41 0 White Phosphorous
(when developed)
XM617 Beehive (when developed)

° ° °
SW (Secondary Weapon) 0 to 15 Azimuth 360±
° °
Azimuth/Elevation Chassis Cant Elevation-15 to +60 l.ess firing
Limits inhibits

SW Tracking Azimuth 0.5 to 75 mi Is/sec.

Elevation 0.5 to 75 mi Is/sec.

SW Slewing Azimuth 1,530 mi Is/sec.

El·evation 1,020 mils/se·c.

1-14
 Table 1-2. Firepower Performance Characte ristics - Continued

CHARACTERISTJC CONDITIONS CAPABILITY

SW Watch Operation Az/EI Slew- 350 mils/sec. Mino

Az/EI Tracking 1 0 to 75.0
- •

mils/sec.

SW Accuracy - -

SW Ready Rounds 200 Rounds Minimu m

SW Rate of Fire Low 400 to 500 Rounds/Minute

High 800 to 950 Rounds/Minute

Coaxial MG Control Same as Main Weapon

Coaxial Ready Rounds 2700 Rounds

Coaxia I Rate of Fire 650 Rounds/Minute

Grenade System Firing 4 Salvo Left

4 Salvo Right
8 Full Salvo

° °
Grenade System Pattern Dispersion 60 :l- 10
Right and/or Left of Turret
Centerline
Range 125 :l- 25 Feet

1-15
1-5. Tabulated Data

The data listed in Table 1-3 covers essential information for operator/crew use

and includes only vehicular equipment data with which the operator/crew are involved

in servicing. Refer to Figure 1-9 for major vehicle clearances and dimensions. De­

tailed data on individual components will be found in Chapters 4 and 5.

Table 1-3. Tabulated Data

Engine - AVCR-llOG-3B (Figures 4-

Dry weight w/Alternator and Aux. Drive • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4340 lb. , approx

Lubricating oil capacity - dry • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 35 gal.

refill • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 30 gal.

Maximum gross horsepower (26oO rpm) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 1250

Alternator - 650 amp., 28 v. (Engine mounted)

Transmission - XHM-1500-2B (Figures 4-

Weight • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 4650 approx

Oil capacity - gallons • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 50

Final Drives

Oil capacity - Quarts • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 5

Power Train (Ready for Installation) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 10, 500 approx

Fuel Capacity - Gallons

Front Cell • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • (N/A) est

Rear Tanks (2) • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • 218 est

Rate of Fill • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • •
(N/A) est

1-16
 i'l
I I

�-� 3
/--�

14

I
I

I
1. SHELF 110 COMMANDER•s HATCH COVER
* 2. MAIN WEAPON AMMUNITION (A) 12. LOADING TUBE
3. MAIN WEAPON 13. CREW COM PARTMENT VENTI LA TOR
4. BASKET FLOOR DOOR 14 o TRAVERSE GEAR BOX
5o MANUAL TRAVERSE MECHANISM 150 TRAVERSE MOTOR VALVE
6o AZIMUTH INDICATOR 16. TURRET TRAVERSE LOCK
7o GUNNER1S HATCH COVER 1 70 DRIVER•s HATCH COVER
8o COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT 18o VISION BLOCK (3)
9o VISION BLOCK (7) 19. DRIVER•s CAPSULE
1Oo ELECTRONIC RACK ASSEMBLY
* NOT INSTALLED ON PILOT NO o 7 AT ASSEMBLY o

Figure 1-IOo Turret Arrangement

1-17
 CHAPI'ER 2

OPERATING INSTRUOI'IONS

Section I. OPERATING PROCEDURES

2-1. General.

WARNING: If equipment fails to operate, refer to troubleshooting

;procedures in Chapter 3. Perform all "Before" operation

PM Checks and Services before operating equipment.

This Section covers the operation of all functional components of the XM8o3 Tank,

Combat: Full Tracked, 152MM Gun/ Launching Pilot Vehicles No's. 7 and 8 under

normal conditions.

2-2. Driver's Station.

The driver's controls and instruments are illustrated in Figures 2-1 through 2-4

for automotive operation and turret environmental control. Detail illustrations of

controls and displays along with functimnal descriptions are shown in Figures 2-5

through ?-15.

2-3. Driver's Operating Modes.

The twelve modes of operation assigned to the driver involves both mobility

operations of the vehicle and support requirements for fire control operations.

These modes are subdivided into three categories: Primary, Secondary, and Emergency

as listed in Table 2-1. From the breakdown shown in this table primary modes

determine the optimum capabilities in assigned functions. Secondary modes provide

for the accomplishment of other functions which are illiplemented on an as required

basis. The emergency modes permit a third level of capability necessary as the

result of loss of function of some other equipment. Overall performance, either

mobility•and/or fire power, is limited by the emergency condition.

2-1
 Primary Secondary Emergency
MODE
Modes Modes Modes
NO. MODE DESCRIPTION (4) ( 5) (3)

1 OPERATE VEHICLE- PRIMARY CONTROLS X

2 OPERATE VEHICLE- EMERGENCY CONTROLS X

3 LOAD MAIN WEAPON- A UTOMATIC X

4 HAND LOAD- TURRET AMMO X

5 LOAD MAIN WEAPON - EMERGENCY CONTROLS X

6 HAND LOAD- A/L AMMO - NO A/L POWER X

7 RESTOW AMMO X

8 STOW AMMO X

9 BULLDOZER OPERATION X

10 SILENT WATCH X

11 INTERNAL ENV IRONMENT CONTROL X

12 EXTERNAL ENVIRONMENT CONTROL X

TABLE 2-1. DRIVER OPERATING MODES

2-2
2-4. eperating Vehicle in Primary Mode 1.

a. In this mode all primary driving controls are functional. Electrical signals

proportional to driving control movement are transmitted to the transmission servo

valves which operate the various functions required including throttle control ( hand
grips , ) braking ( left foot ,) steering ( control handles ,
) and transmission range

selection ( rotatory knob .

) Malfunction of system is indicated by warning indicator /
lights. The driver's capsule is hull-oriented so that the driver is always facing

the direction of travel of the hull whether it be forward or reverse.

b. Turret operation is controlled by either gunner or commander. This mode may

be accomplished with the driver's hatch either open or closed due to flexability of

the driver's platform and primary driving controls. Night operation is executed

with either white or infrared headlights or a night vision device.

2-5. Operating Vehicle in Emergency Mode 2.

a. In this mode of operation, malfunction of the primary driving controls has

occurred and emergency controls must be connected to provide driving capabilities

for driving functions including throttle, brake, steer, and transmission range

selection.

b. Mechanical controls are attached to the throttle ( right foot ,) brake ( left
foot , ) steer ( control handles , ) and range selector ( hull sponson ) to the trans­

mission by means of quick-connect fittings. Since the driver's capsule is then

mechanically linked to the hull, the turret traverse lock must be engaged to fix

the turret in forward position. A closed hatch with day/ night driving capability is

maintained as described for Mode 1 and driver's seat locked in lowered position.

c. The emergency brake control consists of two push-pull cables attached to the

transmission brake lever at one end and to the driver's brake pedal at the other

end by rod linkage. The emergency brake co ntrol is normally inoperative with the

removal of a rod link. The two push-pull cables are connected at an intermediate

2-3
bellcrank to permit separation by removal of a quick disconnect pin for power

pack removal.

d. The emergency shift control consists of a three position shift quadrant hull­

mounted to the left of the driver. A push-pull cable running along the hull

connects the shift quadrant to a hull-mounted bellcrruik. A rod attached to the

bellcrank transfers motion to the opposite side of the transmission to a rachet

which mates with a gear on the transmission shift shaft. A quick disconnect pin at

the bellcrank permits separation for power pack removal.

e. The emergency steer control utilizes a push-pull cable to transmit steering

motion to the transmission. One end of this push-pull cable attaches to an inter­

mediate lever on the transmission with the other end normally stowed in the hull.

When emergency steer is required, the cable is removed from the hull and attached

to the steer mechanism. At the transmission end, a link assembly is connected

between the intermediate lever and the steer lever. There is a sliding shaft

arrangement to provide free motion when primary steer is in effect. When emergency

steer is used, the detent must be first engaged by pulling the cable before completing

the connections at the turret.

f. The emergency throttle control consists of a push-pull cable running under

the capsule floor from the accelerator pedal, located on the right side, over to

the left side of the capsule. To use this emergency control, a quick disconnect pin

attaches the cable end to a bellcrank on the hull. The emergency throttle cable is

connected to the throttle actuation lever on the transmission through a lost motion

yoke.

2-6. Operating in Mode 3, Automatic loading of Main Weapon.

This is the normal mode of operation for the automatic loader with respect to

main weapon operation. The engine must be operating normally with fUll hydraulic

power available to the automatic loader. If these conditions are satisfied, driver

2-4
selection of AUTOMATIC on the LOADER SELECTOR will turn automatic loader operation

over to either the Gunner or Commander, at their respective control handles, depen­

dent on which one has control of the main weapon. Automatic loader operation may

then be used independent of the mobility situation or turret position.

2-7. Operating in Mode 4, Hand Loading Turret Ammunition.

a. Automatic loader operation is considered to be normal in this mode; but, the

round desired for the main gun is not available in the loader. For this reason, one

of the seven turret-stowed round must be hand-loaded by the driver. To accomplish

this task, the driver disengages the driver's capsule lock to permit capsule rotation.

This allows him to select the desired round and prevent injury in case of turret

azimuth motion.

b. The LOADER SELECTOR is turned to HAND which will position the gun in elevation

for hand-loading and automatically open the breech. With the round loaded, the

LOADER SELECTOR is returned to AUTO, 'Which closes the breech and returns the weapon

elevation control to the Gunner ( or Commander . ) This operation must be repeated

for each round loaded in this manner. Vehicle driving is prohibited during this mode.

2..,8, Operating in Mode 5, Emergency Loading Main 1>-l'eapon

a. Automatic loader operation has malfunctioned relative to the Gunner's ( or

Commander's ) controls and the desired main weapon round in loader can neither be

selected nor loaded. The driver must then use the Loader Control Panel to operate

the loader. The EMERGENCY CONTROL master switch is turned ON and the LOADER

SELECTOR is placed on HAND. The main weapon moves to the load position in elevation

and the breech opens.

/
b. The trru1sfer restow switch is held in the TRANSFER position until the desired

round is located at the rammer. /

The forward reverse switch is held in the FORWARD

position until the round is rammed then moved to the REVERSE position until the

rammer is completely retracted. When the emergency master switch is turned OFF and

. 2-5
AUTO is selected on the loader selector, the main gun breech closes and elevation

control returns to the Gunner ( or Commander ). Vehicle driving is prohibited

during this mode.

2-9. Operating in Mode 6, Manual Loading with Ammunition Loader

a. In this mode, automatic loader operation is not available but it is desired

to use some of the ammunition contained therein. This mode may be performed with

or without other vehicle power to the main weapon since manual controls are also

provided to both position the gun in elevation and to open the breech. If power is

available to the main weapon, its operation is the same as in Mode 4.

b. The emergency hydraulic pump and the Manual Selector Control ( Emergency

Hydraulic ) are used by the driver in .this mode to first, advance the magazine until

the desired round is at the restow part in the bustle firewall, and secondly, to

release the canister grippers on the rom1d. The round is then manually extracted

( by special tool ) from the loader and placed in the main weapon for use. Vehicle

driving is prohibited during this mode.

2-10. Operating in Mode 7, Restow Ammunition.

a. Restowing of ammunition in the automatic loader normally requir es full vehicle

power but can be accomplished on emergency hydraulic power, if desired. For normal

operation, the LOADER SELECTOR is placed to RESTOW which activates the restow

control controls on the Loader Control Panel.

b. Each desired round is then placed in an empty canister ( rear first ) positioned

at the restow port and the contents of this canister is entered into the electronic

count circuitry by use of the appropriate round designating restow control pushbutton

( SABCYr, HE, BH, WP, M, EMP). The magazine is then transported until the next empty

canister is at the restow port and the process repeated. Vehicle driving is pro­

hibited during this mode.

2-6
2-11. Operating in Mode 8, Stow Ammunition.

The stowing of ammunition in the automatic loader requires full vehicle power

and is accomplished from the rear of the bustle, using the Loader Stow Control at

that location. The LOADER SELECTOR is placed in STOW position which activates this

control. Each desired round is then placed in an empty canister (nose first)

positioned at the stow port, and the contents of this canister is entered into the

electronic count circuitry by use of the appropriate round designating stow control

push button (SABCYI', HE, BH, vlP, M, EMP). The magazine is then transported until

the next empty canister is at the stow port and the process repeated.

2-12. Operating in Mode 91 Bulldozer Operation

NOTE: Pilot Vehicle No. 7 Not Equipped with Bulldozer

Bulldozer equipment (kit components) for the vehicle is integrated into the

vehicle through integral mounting provisions for the blade mechanism and the control

panel. Normal vehicle automotive power must be available to provide hydraulics for

blade/vehicle height adjustment and electrical power for the control panel interface.

Use of the bulldozer requires open hatch operation by the driver to ensure necessary

blade visibility.

2-13. Operating in Mode l_O, Silent Watch.

This mode requires only electrical power to the turret for the master switch in

the WATCH position on the auxiliary panel. Operation of this switch furnishes

electrical power to radios, crew comfort, and alarms as well as the fire control

master switch. Driver responsibilities are limited to control of environmental

devices and surveillance within his field of view.

2-14. Operating in Mode 11, Internal Environment.

This mode is actually a submode of the driver's other operating modes but is con­

sidered primary since it has a direct bearing on overall crew comfort and efficient.

2-7
It does not generally exist independent of the other modes. The internal environ­

mental conditions of the turret are regulated by the driver through controls and

displays provided on the Driver's Auxiliary Panel. Specific driver tasks within

the mode include the following:

a. Turret forced ventilation activated by the TURRET BLOWER switch provides

internal fresh air circulation from the intake of filtered air through the turret

roof.

b. Bustle ( Automatic Loader ) forced ventilation is activated by the BUSTLE

BLOWER switch. Two operating positions ( ON, AUTO ) are provided to allow for either

continued air circulation ( ON ) or, as required, air circulation ( AUTO ) depending on

ambient temperature conditions inside the bustle. The purpose of this blower is to

maintain internal bustle temperature levels at or below safe usage temperature

of combustible case ammunition.

2-15. Operating in Mode 12, External Environment

This mode is also a submode of the dri�er's other operating modes but is con­

sidered as primary since it has a direct bearing on overall vehicle safety and

efficiency of operation. It does not generally exist independent of other modes.

External environment conditions effecting vehicle operation are counteracted by the

driver through use of controls and displays provided on the Driver's Auxiliary Panel.

Specific driver tasks within this mode include the followi�g:

a. Engine preheating capability is accomplished with the manifold heater when it

is activated by the PREHEAT switch. This momentary ON-OFF switch ( spring loaded to

the OFF position ) can be used to preheat the engine to vehicle operational

°
temperatures as low as -25 F.

b. Vehicle external illumination is furnished through the DRIVING LIGHTS switches.

Six conditions of external lighting are provided to cover night operations. In

addition, /
the white headlights are controlled by a LOW HIGH BEAM switch.

2-8
 CHEMICAL WARNING
FILTER CHANGER

'

A G ENT CONCENTRATOR

.·,.

\.
EMERGENCY THROTTLE PEDAL 4..--- -.:::....
-
Figure 2-1. Driver's Station (1 of 4)
2-9
 ' '
/. t

jt ,,

. . CHARCOAL FILTER
'(.'".

Figure 2-2. Driver's Station (2 of 4)

2-10
 '

"'
I

ROUND �

=-.r

Figure 2-3. Driver's Station (3 of 4)

 ��M s,)_� ·: H ··: � i:

11
;g;-m;-:
'\-;'.t.\\��
i�
� .....

··z:
,. .

�
�
\ELECTRO-HYDRAULIC
SLIP RING �v:z
\\
..
\ �'
tV
""
I

tV

Figure 2-4. Driver's tion (4 of 4)

CONTRO 1./DISP LAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

TURRET LOCK Depressing handle and pushing toward

(Handle) outside engages turret lock. Pulling handle
toward center of turret disengages lock.
When engaged power traverse mode is
inhibited.

Figure 2-5. Turret Traverse loc k

CONTROl/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Fi Iter Selection Selects either clear lens or a red lens filter

(2-Position Rotary) for night viewing.

2 On-Qff Dimmer Rotating knob energizes lamp. Further rotation

(Switc h-Potentiometer) controls brightness of lamp.

3 lever lock Depressing button unlocks filter selector.

(Pushbutton)

Figure 2-6. Driver•s D ome light

2-13
 4

7��HRO
I \ ST�
R): "6
"
OUUA

El �INE
0 OfF

INtJE.R

3 11

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCT IONAL DESCRIPTION

l • Speedometer/Odometer Reads vehicle speed in miles per hour. Odometer

(Gauge) registers on digital readout distance traveled.

2. Shift Control
(5-Position Rotary)

• PRK Puts transmission and steerin9 in neutral, applies park

brake. (Selector knob full clockwise).

• R Puts transmission in reverse, gives normal steering.

• N Puts transmission and steering in neutral.

• D Puts transmission in forward drive and gives norma I

steering.

• PVT Puts transmission in neutral, gives pivot steer.

3. CENTRAL WARNING Vehicle central warning light (Red) indicates a major

(Lamp) vehicle malfunction.

4. ENGI NE STOP Shuts off fuel to stop engine. (Can be used only when
master switch is ON.)

Figure 2-7. Driver's Main Instrument Panel

2-14
CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

5o PRIMARY CONTROL DISABLE

(2-Position Toggle)

• ON Allows normal use of primary driving controls.

• OFF Disables use of primary driving controls, and

permits use of secondary controls. Can also
be used as an emergency brake when using
primary controlso

6. DEFROSTER
(3-Position Toggle)

• OUTER Activate� defrosting of two side (oblique) vision

block and cover housing over center vision block.

• OFF Deactivates driver•s vision block defroster.

• INNER Activates defrosting center vision block.

7. (Lamp) Illuminates amber to indicate defroster is on.

8. WIPER
(2-Position Toggle)

• ON Activates and deactivates vision block wiper.

• OFF

9. STEER Lamp illuminates (Red) when electrical steering

(Lamp) control has failed.

10. BRAKE Lamp illuminates (Red) when electrical brake

(Lamp) control has failed.

11. Handles Allows driver to steer, accelerate, and decelerate

(Steer and Throttle) vehicle.

Figure 2-7. D river•s M ain Instrument Panel - Legend

2-15
 17

18

1 6
LOADER
1o () SELECTOR
I BLOWER

A
u
AUTO RESTCW BUSTLE TURR£T COOL 2

�
OFT
HAND ON ON

26 V
8.0. SERV
ORIV( LIGHTS

'-------��---o� 'R_· --�---�-- �

� _.--·� --��---4·�--�--�----�
3

2 22
__

9 8 19 1 24 23

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

MASTER SWITCH
(3-Position Rotary)
All electrical power switched off, hydraulic accumulators
• OFF
are bled down, and park brakes are engaged.

• WATCH Provides power to radio system, crew comforts, a I arm system,

and fire control master switch.

• ON Provides power to all vehicle automotive master relays

and provides power to fire control master switch.

2 FUEL Indicates amount of fuel remaining in either NORMAL or

(Gage) RESERVE fuel supply.

3 Fuel Switch
(2-Position Toggle)

• NORMAL Fuel flow from normal tank (ga ge reads total fuel).

• RESERVE Fuel flow from reserve tanks (gage reads total fuel).

4 START Activates starter circuit (spring return).

(Toggle Switch)

5 PREHEAT Activates manifold heater (spring return).

(Toggle Switch)

6 TEMP Over temperature warning light (Red).

(Lamp)

7 PRES Under pressure oiI warning light (Red).

(Lamp)

Figure 2-8. Driver's Au xiI iary Panel

2-16
 CON TROlJDISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

8 Driving Lights
(6-Position Rotary Switch)

• SERV LIGHTS N ormal headlights, taillights, and stoplight on.

• STOP LIGHT Stoplight on.

• OFF Lighting system off.

• BO MARKER Blackout markers and blackout stoplight on.

• BO DRIVE Blackout headlight, blackout markers and blackout stoplight on.

• IR Infrared headlights, blackout markers and blackout stoplight on.

9 BEAM
(2-Position Toggle Switch)

• HIGH Headlights switched to high beam.

• LOW Headlights switched to low beam.

10 BEAM Indicates HIGH BEAM (Blue).

(Lamp)

11 TEMP Over temperature warning light (Red).

(Lamp)

12 PRES Under pressure warning light (Red).

(Lamp)

13 BILGE Lamp (Yellow) illuminates when bilge pump is activated.

(Lamp)

14 Bilge Switch
(2-Position Toggle)

• ON Activates bilge pump.

• OFF Deactivates bilge pump.

15 FORD Lamp (Yellow) illuminates when ford switch is activated.

(Lamp)

16 Switch
(2-Position Toggle)
Turns on and off engine air cleaner blowers, combustion
• ON heater, turret blower, scavenger air compressor, and disengages
transmission cooling fan drives. Allows norma I operation and
• OFF
control of above listed items.

17 LOW VOLT Battery low voltage warning light (Red).

(Lamp)

18 TRACK ADJUST Indicates unlocked track adjuster (Red).

(Lamp)

Figure 2-8. Driver's Auxiliary Panel- Legend

2-17
 CONTROUDISP LAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

19 BUSTLE
(3-Position Toggle Switch)

• ON Activates bustle blower manually.

• OFF Deactivates bustle blower.

• AUTO Activates bustle blower automatically.

20 TURRET
(2-Position Toggle Switch)

• ON Activates turret blower.

• OFF Deactivates turret blower.

21 COOL
(2-Position Toggle Switch)

• ON Activates air conditioner •

• OFF Deactivates air conditioner •

22 HEAT
(3-Position Toggle Switch)

• HIGH Activates maximum heat.

• OFF Deactivates heater.

• LOW Activates minimum heat.

23 ON Lamp (Green) illuminates when heater flame is burning.

(Lamp)

24 NO START Lamp (Red) illuminate if heater does not ignite after:5 minutes.

25 LAMP TEST When pushed, all panel lights and master warning light will
(Pushbutton) come on to check bulbs.

26 LOADER SELECTOR
(4-Position Rotary Switch)

• RESTOW Position for loading the autoloader from within the

turret (restowing.

• STOW Position for loading the autoloader from the rear of ':>ustle
(stowing).

• AUTO Position for automatic operation of autoloader under gunner's

or commander's control.

• HAND Position for hand loading main gun. Main gun elevates,
is locked in position and the hreech rolls open.

Figure 2-8. Driver's Auxiliary Panel - Legend

2-18
\\
'\\ I
I
\
I
I

60° STROKE
I

CONTROl/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1 Hand Pump To be used as on emergency mode for

hydraulics to the autoloader when the
power mode of the autoloader hydraulics
has foiled. located behind driver
station.

2 Pintle Pin Used as a pump handle traveling lock to

keep the handle in a stowed, non-inter­
ference position away from the driver•s
capsule.

Figure 2-9. Autoloader Hydraulic Em erg ency Hand Pump

2-19
 RESTOW CONTROL
�
7
8 §] 8__--r- 1
TRANSPORT [vvp] � [ ] � EMP
a
EMERGENCY CONTROL
DET @ @
@
OVERRIDE TRANSPORT
2
@
3

----,

/r-- "'"\'\
I \ I
( (-l }
\\ ; :I I
''-..-J/
-·-
5

CONTROl/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

SAB, BH, HEAT, WP, Input light (White) indicates ammo input to
M,EMP program control memory.
(6 Pushbuttons)

2 TRANSPORT Moves autoloader magazine to next position

(Pushbutton) and sets program control memory.

3 MASTER
(2-Position Toggle Switch)

• OFF Deactivates the emergency controls.

• ON Activates the emergency controls which

allows the driver to manually perform some
of the functions of the automatic system when
the driver loader control is placed in "HAND"
position.

Figure 2-10. D river's Autoloader Control Panel

2-20
CONTROL/DISPlAY FUNCTIONAL DISPLAY

4 Toggle Switch
(Spring Loaded to Center)
• FORWARD Rammer and loading tube drive forward to
insert round in to wee pon.

• REVERSE Returns loader rammer and loading tube to

full retract position.

5 LOAD Ready light {Green) indicates FORWARD/

(Lamp) REVERSE switch (4) is active when MASTER
switch is ON.

6 Toggle Switch
(Spring Loaded to Center)

• TRANSPORT Switch is held to transport loader magazine to

obtain desired round either at loading tube or
restow port.

• RESTOW Switch in RESTOW position allows driver to

restow or remove a round in magazine from
inside the turret.

7 TRANSPORT Ready light (Green) indicates TRANSPORT/

(Lamp) RESTOW switch (6) is active when MASTER
switch is ON.

8 DET. OVERRIDE Allows loading tube and rammer to retract

(Pushbutton) after a round has been loaded and ammuni­
tion "detent is in" signal is lackingo The
signal, "detent is in", occurs whenever the
ammunition detent is in the gun tube deep
enough to hold a round in position.

Allows automatic loader to remove a missile

cap, after the missile has fired, in the absence
of a detent signal that the cap is in the gun
tube o

Allows auto loading of ammunition or missile

into an empty gun tube in the event the
detent signals that a round is present.

Figure 2-10. Driver's Autoloader Control Panel - Legend

2-21
 () AUTOLOAOCR.
HYD. MANUALE'VA\:.
lifii\ DOG
FIR
� t. AUTOtv".i>-'

-�- � �
- --� -- ::-�
I
-� \

"-' '

Figure 2-11. Autolooder Manual Selector Control and Hydraulic Manual Valve

2-22
CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Handle Emergency means for removing rounds when

(3-Position) programmed automatic loader hydraulics foil.

• GRIPPER RELEASE Allows driver to extract round presently indexed

at loading port by manually pumping hydraulics.
to release gri pper.

• OFF This position is for normal operation of auto­

loader or to manually pump hydraulics when
programmed automatic loQder or hydraulic sys­
tem fai Is to lock the loader or retract loading
tube.

• MAGAZINE Allows drives to advance magazine to next

ADVANCE index position by manually pumping hydraulics.

2 Hydraulic Pressure Indicates: a) Vehicle hydraulic pressure is

(Gauge) sufficient to operate the autoloader; b) Gripper
on ammunition in the canisters is released; c)
loading tube is fully retracted (manual system);
d) Fire door is fully open (manual system).

3 Fire Door, Manual Opens hydraulic system for manually opening

Hydraulics (Valve) the loader fire door.

• Open Opens hydraulic valve of loader system to

permit manual pumping (raising pressure) to
open the loader door in the event of an
emergency.

• Automatic Closes the manua I system for manually

(Closed Valve) retracting the loading tube.

4 loading Tube, Manual Opens hydraulic system for manually retract­

Hydraulics (Valve) ing the loading tube.

• Retract Opens the hydraulic valve of loader system to

permit retraction of the loading tube by means
of a manua I pump.

• Automatic Closes the manual system permitting automatic

(Closed Valve) operation of the loading tube as required during
a loading sequence (ammunition into the gun
tube).

Figure 2-11. Autoloader Manual Selector Control and Hydraulic

M anual Valve - legend

2-23
 2

SYST£M ON BOARD TRAVEL � 3

@ CONTROL VALVES LOCK �

OFF OFF CLOSED LOCKED

RA\SE t ;------

HOLD ....l
..,l.... f LOAT
(CENTER
LOWER+ ________,

4
@BULLDOZER CON1ROL @

Figure 2-12. Bulldozer Control

2-24
CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNC TIONAL DESCRIPTION

1 o SYSTEM CONTROL
(2-Position Toggle Switch)

• ON P ower is provided and system is ready for use.

• OFF Deactivates bulldozer control o

2. ON BOARD VALVES Not utilized.

(Lamp)

• ON OPEN

• OFF CLOSED

3. TRAVEL LOCK The travel lock, a hydraulically actuated pawl,

(2-Position Toggle Switch) engages with the moldboard (blade) assembly when
the blade is raised in the stowed (travel) position.

• OPEN Actuates the travel lock pawl to the open position.

• LOCKED Actuates the travel lock pawl to the closed position.

4. Blade Control Stick Activates the mold board (blade) assembly to either:
(4-Position, dual position raise, hold, lower, or float the blade or in combina­
fmger switch) tion: raise and float or lower and float the blade.

• RAISE

• HOLD (CENTER)

• LOWER

• FLOAT

Figure 2-12. Bulldozer Control- Legend

2-25
CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

AIR INLET
(2-Position )

• OPEN Air is drawn into the M-43 detector for

sampling, by -passing the modular chemical
agent detector (MCAD) vehi cle system.

• CLOS ED Air is drawn into the M-43 detector thru the

MCAD if the pneumatic line is attached.

2 Horn Horn alarm is initiated by the M-43 units

when agent is detected.

Figure 2-13. Chemical Det ection Alarm

2-26
 CONTROVDISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRI PTION

3 ZERO/ADJUST/PRESS Provides calibration of alarm system. When

& TURN pressed and rotated fully clockwise, can
(Rotary and Pushbutton initiate a test of th= alarm system and when
Combo) rotated co:.mter-clockwise the test is deacti­
vated. Sensitivity check is initiated,
terminated by the control.

4 BATTERY TEST Provides a check of the 24-volt system re­

(R otary and Pushbutton quirements (press). An a::lju;tment of the
Combination) horn volume is provided by rotary control o

5 PRIME PRESS & TURN The fast prime crank is used to manu:1lly
(Crank) prime the fluid system of the M-43 detector.

6 Meter

• BATT I ndicates vehicle voltage supplies to MCAD

system when HORN VOL-BATTERY TEST
switch is pressed.

• ZERO ADJUST Provid=s calibration of the alarm system.

Adjustment is by means of knch item 3 ZERO
ADJUST PRESS & TURN o

7 REMOTE Remote binding p:)sts (not used in the vehicle

(Terminals) system) o

8 Air Outlet Port Air exhausts from the pressure port of the
M-43's one liter-per-min\Jte pump assembly.

9 Power R eceptacle 24 Volts DC input receptacle.

I0 Fi Iter Access Provides for installation and removal of air

filters for pre-opera tionaI tests (agent sen­
sitivity check) and operation (a clean
filter) for the systemo

11 Flow Meter Not used with the vehicle system since ihe
(Inside of H andle) ch:::Jrcoal fiIter canister meter measures the
(Not II lustra ted) air flow of the M-43 detector pump (1 liter
per minute) and th·e system auxiliary pump
(2 liters per min:Jte)o

Figure 2-13. Chemical Detection Alarm- Legend

2-27
 c::=JA
I
INT
o\ /ONLY

1
�F
....
� -CJs

CONTROL/DISPL AY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1. MONITOR
(5-Position Rotary)

• ALL All signals from R-442/VRC, receiver/

transmitters and intercom wi II be heard.

• A Only receiver/transmitter RT -246/VRC

wi II be heard.

• INT ONLY Only intercom wi II be heard.

• B Only receiver R-442/VRC will be heard.

• c Not used.

2. VOLUME Controls volume when monitor switch is in

ALL position. Adjust control for the de­
sired volume in audio accessory.

Figure 2-14. Intercommunication Control Set C-2298/VRC

2-28
2-16. Starting the Engine.

a. Place switches and controls in following positions:

(1) Primary control disable switch in "ON".

(2) Rotary shift control switch to "PRK".

(3) Track adjuster switch to "ON".

(4) Fuel switch to NORMAL.

( 5) Master switch to "ON".

(6) �11 other switches on main and auxiliary panel to uOFF''.

NOTE. Transmission and engine oil pressure warning lights should

illuminate. If lights malfunction, check and replace lamps

as necessary. If lights still malfunction, do not start

engine before isolating cause of malfunction.

HARNTNG: Before starting engine clear area around vehicle to avoid

injury to personnel from accidental vehicle movement or

from foreign material being discharged from exhaust.

b. Hold START switch on, depress accelerator to full throttle position until

engine starts, then release accelerator to idle position. Do not crank engine

continuously for more than 60 seconds at a time.

c. vllien engine fires continuously, release START switch.

CAUTION: If warning lights do not go out within 30 seconds after engine

starts, stop engine immediately by pressing ENGINE STOP

button. Isolate cause of malfunction before again attempting

to start engine.

d. Before operating vehicle, turn track adjuster switch to "OFF".

e. During vehicle operation observe all warning lights on Main and Auxiliary

control panels. If at any time any one or more lights come on, stop vehicle and

shut off engine immediately.

2-29
2-17. Suspension System Operation.

a. Engine must be operating and hydraulic system operating in normal condition.

b. Adjust vehicle ground clearance only on hard level surface.

c. Make sure transmission range selector switch is in "N" neutral position and

track adjuster switch is in "OFF" position. Release lock lever (fig. 2-4).

d. Move levers up (fig. 2-31) to raise and down to lower vehicle. Levers may

be operated together unless specific instructions to the contrary are issued in

which case the vehicle may be canted or tilted to desired orientation.

e. When desired height adjustments have been made, move lock lever to lock

position.

NOTE. Exercise suspension system through two complete up/down cycles before

making final trim adjustment to assure precise orientation of vehicle.

2-18. Shifting Transmission.

a. With engine running at idle and suspension adjusted to desired height, move

transmission range selector switch to desired position (R reverse, D forward drive,

or PVT pivot steer).

CAuriON: })) not shift from one mode to another at engine s:2eeds in

excess of 1500 RPM.

b. Depress accelerator and place vehicle in motion.

CAUTION: Vehicle must be brought to a stand-still before Elacing

transmission switch in a different range.

2-19. Accelerating and Decelerating.

WARNING: Avoid accelerating too quickly when maneuvering in a close

area, rough terrain, icy sloEes, rocky area, close to personnel,

or any other area where damage to vehicle or Eersonnel could

result.

2-30
 a. Acceleration is accomplished by rotating throttle control handle (primary

mode) or by depressing driver's right foot pedal (emergency mode ) .

b. Deceleration is accomplished by releasing pressure on throttle control

handle (or foot pedal).

2-20 Steering.

a. To negotiate a right turn in fonrard direction, deflect driver's handle to

right. To negotiate a left turn, deflect driver's handle to left.

b. To negotiate a right turn in reverse, deflect driver's handle to left. To

negotiate a left turn neflect handle to right.

2-21. Pivot Steer.

a. Bring vehicle to a halt and place transmission range selector svitch in PVT

position.

b. Accelerate engine and then deflect driver's handle.

c. The engine must be accelerated before introducing a steer or the engine may

stall. An exact pivot can be achieved at any steer position. limen pivoting the

vehicle, do not apply brake. Adjust turning speed by means of the driver's handle

and the engine speed. A sharp steering angle and a high engine speed •rill result

in a high pivot s�eed.

2-22. Braking.

a. Engine Running. Bra1<es are applied by denressing driver's left foot pedal.

The firmer the pressure on brake pedal, the more positive the brake action. Place

transmission svitch in "N" position to make a complete stop .

b. Engine Off. \<Jhen engine is not in operation, brakes are applied automatically

by the brake cylinder assembly ( Fig. 4-45).

N0I'E. Brakes may be applied by moving Primary Control Disable switch to

"OFF" position in case of emergency should brake pedal malfunction.

2-31
2-23 Driving over Obstructions.

HARTITING: i<Jhen encounterine; an obstruction, slow tank speed and adjust

direction to meet obstruction as squarely as possible. The

driver should varn other cre1.r members to brace themselves.

a. As tank approaches the obstruction, release accelerator, apply brake to

bring vehicle to crawl.

b. Apply full pm·rer when starting over an obstruction, release accelerator on

reaching crest, and permit tank to settle over crest. ( Balance should be such that

tank is on descending side of obstruction. )

c. When front of tracks make contact with ground, apply power and descend

obstruction.

CAUTION: Avoid backing over obstructions whenever possible.

2-24. Driving over Ditch, Hole, or Trerrch

WARNING: Adjust tank speed and direction so that the tank can enter the

obstruction as squarely as possible. The driver should always warn

other crew members to brace themselves.

a. As the tank approaches the ditch, hole or trench, decelerate by releasing

acceleration. Apply brake if required.

b. As soon as tank settles over the crest on entering, or reaches bottom and

tank starts to climb, apply accelerator as required to obtain necessary power for

climbing out of ditch.

2-25. Driving through Snow

Reduce engine speed sufficiently to achieve very slow track speed for forward

movement without slippage. Avoid steep grades. Drive tank as nearly straight up

and down the grade as possible to equalize track load. Avoid sharp turns, ruts

and snow banks.

2-32
2-26. Driving on Ice

Skidding is the general hazard encountered on ice. Select proper speed to move

the tank slowly and steadily. If skidding occurs, decelerate engine and proceed

with caution.

2-27. Driving through Mud

Place transmission in "F" and move tank steadily forward, maintaining sufficient

speed to prevent engine from stalling. To move up a slippery hill or incline,

attach one end of a cable to a track. Attach other end to an anchor. If the other

track slips, apply steering action and move tank until end of cable passes the

rear road •rheels. Stop tank, disconnect cable, and if tank still cannot gain

traction, repeat procedure. If the tank becomes rr.ired, arrange to be towed out of

the mud. \?.hen a drop to below-freezing temperature is expected, make sure that

tank is parked on solid ground or· footing to prevent the tracks from becoming

frozen in the mud. Remove accumulations of mud from tracks and sprockets and

from wheel-contacting surfaces.

NOTE: When a tank becomes bellied ( high centered ) on stumps, rocks, or mire,

attach a log or tow cables to the front or rear of both tracks and

apply power gradually. The log or cables will strike the obstacle and

move the tank forward. Stop the tank when log or cables reach the

front or rear of tank to prevent damage to fenders.

2-28. Driving through Sand

When driving in sand, avoid spinning the tracks. Reduce speed gradually and

do not allow engine to labor unnecessarily.

2-29. Night Driving

WARNING: This vehicle will easily over-drive headlights. Observe following

precautions during night driving operations unless additional

2-33
 BLACKOUT MARKER LIG HT

ILLUMINATES WHEN BRAKE APPLIED

�
ILLUMINATES WHEN BRAKE APPLIED

�
BLACKOUT TAILLIGHT
• ._
BLACKOUT TAILLIGHT

I
When in this position,
during daytime opera-
j;/ tion, the stoplight will
/I illuminate when brake
BO STO P is applied.
BEAM MARKER LIGHT

HIGH

BO SERV.
DRIVE LIGHTS

LOW
IR

LOCATED ON DRIVER1S
AUXILIARY PANEL

INFRARED HEADLIG HT

ILLUMINATES BRIGHTER
ILLUMINATES WHEN BRAKE APPLIED WHEN BRAKE APPLIED

�S-.�·
�� ·9· · /.·
BLACKOUT TAILLIGHT
· .

* SERVICE TAILLIGHT
•

Figure 2-15. Driving Light Chart

2-34
 lights are added. (Refer to Figure 2-15 for driving light chart.)

High Beam - Maximum 20 MPH

I.ovr Beam - Maximum 10 !-1PH

No reverse driving.

2-30. Engine Shut-Dovrn.

CAUTION: After prolonged operation at high speed or high power output, engine

should be idled 5 minutes before stopping engine. This allows

engine to dissipate high temperatures built up during high per-

formance operation.

a. Place transmission range selector in "PRK" position.

b. Depress engine stop switch and hold in until engine stops.

c. Turn master switch to "OFF" position.

d. Perform all after operation services listed in Table 3-1.

2-35
 SECTION I. I OPERATING FIRE CONTROL SUBSYSTEM

2-31. General Description of Fire Control Subsystem

The fire control subsystem provides the tactical mission functions of

target acquisition, stabilized line-of-sight and computer controlled main
weapon corrections under either day or night conditions.

The fire control subsystem is divided into the commander's subsystem

and the gunner's subsystem. Although most functions of the two station sub­
systems can be operated independently, the gunner's subsystem may be
operated from the commander's station.

a. The commander's station fire control subsystem provides the func-

tions associated with the commander's responsibilities of overall vehicle
command, area surveillance, target acquisition and damage assessment,
secondary weapon engagement of ground or air targets and subsystem status
monitoring.

b. The gunner's station fire control subsystem provides the functions

associated with the gunner's responsibility of target acquisition; target
range determination; loading, aiming and firing the main weapon; and engage­
ment of ground targets with the coaxial machine gun.

c. There are sixteen basic fire control operational modes which are
shared by the gunner and commander. The modes (see table > �) are sub­
divided into primary, secondary, emergency, and auxiliary. Four of the
modes are associated with the gunner's operations and the remaining twelve
are associated with the commander's. Primary modes provide the crew with
optimum operating capabilities. Secondary modes provide a weapon system
capability having somewhat reduced capabilities and accuracies. Emergency
modes provide crew members with very limited fire control performance.
Secondary modes determine second level crew member capabilities, and
emergency modes are used only when necessitated by loss of fire control
operating components. Auxiliary modes are standby, or transient modes
which function automatically without crew member direct action.

2-32. Fire Control Subsystem Electrical Power Distributi<;m and Control

Master control of the fire control subsystem is established by the

commander's selection of one of three positions on the fire control master
switch (FIRE CONTROL) on the turret power distribution panel in association
with the vehicle master switch (refer to Figure 2-41).

2-36
 NOTE: A 15-second time delay is mechanized in the fire
control subsystem switching logic when switching
from OFF or WATCH to ON to allow the gyros to
come up to speed. During this period, stabilized
control and direct drive control of the gun and
turret and stabilized control of the secondary
weapon are not available.

a. When the fire control master switch is in the OFF position, all
primary power is disconnected from the fire control subsystem except the
gunner's auxiliary telescope (not installed in Vehicle 7). This eliminates all
fire control subsystem operational modes except manual control of the main
weapon by the gunner. The main weapon may be manually loaded and fired
using the emergency firing device. The commander's station equipment is
inoperative.

b. When the fire control master switch is in the WATCH position and
the vehicle master switch is in the WATCH or ON position, secondary weapon
prime power is provided to the commander's subsystem and enables him to
control the commander's sight for surveillance. This mode is primarily
intended to be used during engine-off periods. The gunner is limited to the
same capability as when in the OFF position.

c. When the fire control master switch is in the ON position and the
vehicle master switch is in the ON position, the secondary weapon prime
power and the fire control prime power are provided to the total fire control
subsystem and enable all operational modes described herein.

d. Fire control subsystem prime power and missile power (28/24 Vdc)
is distributed through three buses, which are identified as; automotive
prime power (APP), secondary weapon prime power (SWPP), and fire control
prime power (FCPP).

e. The occurrence of prime power outside preset voltage limits disables

primary power and downmodes the fire control subsystem to OFF. In addition,
excessive temperatures will downmode all or a portion of the fire control
subsystem. When normal conditions return, power is automl:!-tically restored.

..

2-37
 MODE GUNNER MODE COMMANDER

PRIMARY 1 Controls GPS & MW 4 Control CS (Surveillance)

MODES 2 Loads MW 5 Control CS and SW
(5) 6 Designates Target from
CS to GPS

SECONDARY 7 Monitors Gunner

MODES 8 Controls CS, GPS, & MW
(4) 9 Loads MW
10 Controls CS Direct Drive
(Watch)

EMERGENCY 3 Controls MW 11 Controls CS and MW

MODES Direct Drive (GPS off)
(4) 12 Designates Target from
CS to GAT (GPS off)
13 Monitors Gunner (GPS off)

AUXILIARY 14 Standby /Target 15 Standby

MODES Hold 16 Index SW
(3)

TABLE '2-�. FIRE CONTROL OPERATING MODES

2-38
2-33. General Notes, Cautions, and Warnings

Warnings and cautions used in these procedures have the following

significance:

WARNING

CAUTION

Maintenance or operating procedures, techniques,

etc. , which will result in damage to equipment if
not carefully followed.

WARNING

The laser rang efinder shall be operated only by

personnel aware of the hazards associated with
its use.

Laser Radiation Hazards

1. Laser radiation can cause permanent eye damage if personnel

are exposed to direct or reflected laser energy.

2. Laser radiation can cause skin burns and damage to internal

organs under certain circumstances.

Precautions

1. Treat the laser rangefinder as though it were a weapon. An

area downrange from the laser rangefinder covering a reasonable
distance either side of the intended beam path shall be cleared
of personnel.

2. Do not expose the eyes to the direct (laser beam path) or

reflected laser beam.

3. Avoid exposure of skin surfaces to the laser beam.

4. Power shall be applied to the laser rangefinder during

immediate periods of use only.

2-39
 5. Do not fire laser into reflective surfaces.

WARNING

Electrical and Fire Hazards

High Voltage Hazards

1. The fire control electrical system produces voltages as high

as 2, 000 volts de. Touching a live voltage point while another
part of the body is grounded can cause severe shock, burns,
andjor unconsciousness which may result in death.

2. High voltage arcing may cause fires.

Precautions

1. Always inform other crew members before energizing the

fire control system.

2. Do not disconnect equipment or cabling while power is on.

3. Do not use an all-metal screwdriver to make adjustments.

Use screwdriver provided in vehicle as OEM.

Emergency Procedures

1. Electrical Accidents

a. If crew member is rendered unconscious or "frozen" to

equipment due to electrical shock, set FIRE CONTROL switch
on turret power distribution panel to OFF.

b. Do NOT touch stricken crew member directly. Use

non-conducting material (scarf or shirt) to make a
sling, place sling around the body, and pull crew
member away from equipment and administer first aid.

c. Remove crew member from vehicle, summon medical

assistance, and apply first aid.

2. Fires

a. Tum master control switch to OFF.

b. Evacuate tank.

2-40
 WARNING

Do not apply water in an attempt to extinguish an

electrical fire. Water is a conductor and increases
danger of electrical shock.

c. Combat fire with freon or other appropriate type of

fire extinguisher.

WARNING

Evacuate tank immediately if fire extinguishers fire,

even if no fire exists. Escaping freon in the turret
can displace oxygen and sufficate crew members.

CAUTION

To avoid damage to the cant sensor, the vehicle must

not be subjected to changes in pitch or cant exceeding
+ 25° for at least 15 minutes after power is removed
from the cant sensor. Failure to observe these pre­
cautions could cause permanent damage to cant sensor.

2-34. Gunner's Operating Modes

The gunner is primarily concen1ed with the following four fire control
modes.

a. Mode 1 -gunner controls gunner's primary sight and main weapon.

b. Mode 2 - gunner loads main weapon.

c. Mode 3 - gunner controls main weapon directly.

d. Mode 14 - gunner standby jtarget hold.

NOTE: All material pertaining to the gunner's auxiliary

telescope is for information only as the telescope
is not installed in PV #7.

2-41
2-35. Mode 1 Gunner Controls Gunner's Primary Sight (GPS) and Main
-

Weapon (MW)

In this mode of operation, the gunner's primary sight is operating and is

controlled by rate commands from the gunner's control handles. The gunner's
primary sight, which is gyro stabilized, provides the line-of-sight to the tar­
get and also provides the main weapon with the line-of-fire through a synchro
chain. If a main weapon conventional round is selected for firing, a ballis­
tic computer is used to calculate elevation and lead angle offsets; these
offsets are provided to the gun/turret drive to position the main weapon
for the proper round ballistic trajectory.

During this mode of operation, the gunner may fire the laser rangefinder
or manually set an estimated target range into the fire control system. He
may also fire the main weapon (conventional rounds or missile) or the
machine gun, provided the appropriate weapon is selected.

As a prim ary mode of the gunner, this mode does not affect the selection
or employment, by the commander, of any of the commander's modes.
However, to enable the gunner to operate in this mode, the commander must
not activate his control handles if he has selected MAIN GUN or MG with the
WEAPON ACTIVATE selector and must not press the TARGET DESIGNATE
pushbutton on his control handles if his palm switches are closed.

2-36. Mode 2 - Gunner Loads Main Weapon (MW)

This mode of operation allows the gunner to initiate the automatic loading
cycle for the main weapon. To enter this mode, the gunner places the AMMO
SELECT switch on his weapon control panel to the position for the round type
to be loaded, places the WEAPON A CfiVATE selector on his weapon control
panel to MAIN GUN LOAD or MAIN GUN, actuates either or both palm
switches on his control handles, and presses the LOAD pushbutton on his
control handles. Once the mode is entered, the loading cycle for the main
weapon takes place without further actions or responses from the gunner.
On completion of the loading cycle, the main weapon, which is indexed to
approximately 0° during load, is returned to alignment with the gunner's
primary sight and main weapon elevation control is returned to the gunner.

The automatic loading cycle for the main weapon can be initiated by the
gunner from either of two modes: Mode 1, gunner controls gunner's
primary sight and main weapon; and Mode 3, gunner controls main weapon
indirect drive (gunner's primary sight off). When entered from Mode 1, that
is, when this mode is entered while the gunner's primary sight is operating,
the gunner can continue target tracking with the gunner's primary sight

2-42
throughout the loading cycle. When entered from Mode 3, target tracking
(using gunner's auxiliary telescope) is interrupted because the gunner's
auxiliary telescope is locked at the 0° loading elevation during the loading
cycle.

As a primary mode for the gunner, this mode does not affect the selection
or employment by the commander of any of the commander's primary
modes. However, to enable the gunner to enter this mode, the commander
must not depress his palm switches if he has selected MAIN GUN or MG
with his WEAPON ACTIVATE switch.

This mode, once initiated, can be interrupted until the automatic loader
rammer is fully forward by opening the palm switches.

2-37. Mode 3 - Gunner Controls Main Weapon (MW) Direct Drive

In this emergency mode of operation the gunner provides control inputs

for main weapon and machine gun laying directly from his control handles,
utilizing the gunner's auxiliary telescope as the target sighting and aiming
device. Because the gunner's primary sight is not operating, use of the
gunner's primary sight for target sighting, gunjturret stabilization, laser
ranging, manual range insertion, night vision, and missile firing is inhibited.
Thus this mode of operation may be utilized only for main weapon conven­
tional round firing (with reduced accuracy) and for machine gun firing.

Since the gunner's primary sight is inoperative the ballistic computer

is not employed to provide elevation or lead angle offsets for main
weapon laying. In this case, the offsets are provided by the gunner by
displacing the gunner's auxiliary telescope reticle from the target aim
point by the required amount.

Since gunjturret drive stabilization is not available in this mode, target

tracking and weapon laying during vehicle movement is substantially
degraded. Firing of the main weapon using this mode of operation should be
performed with the vehicle stationary to avoid degradation caused by uncom­
pensated vehicle disturbances.

This mode of operation does not affect the commander's selection and
employment by the commander, of Mode 4, commander controls CS
(surveillance), or Mode 5, commander controls CS and SW. However, with
the gunner's primary sight not operating, Mode 6, commander designates
target from CS to GPS, Mode 7, commander monitors gunner, and Mode 8,
commander controls CS, GPS, and MW, cannot be initiated. However, the

2-43
three commander emergency modes, Mode 11, commander controls CS and
MW (GPS off), Mode 12, commander designates target from CS to MW, and
Mode 13, commander monitors gunner (GPS off) rep lace the inactive modes
so the commander's operational capability remains unaffected (except for
reduced accuracy) by loss of the gunner's primary sight.

2-38. Mode 14 - Gunner Standby/Target Hold

This mode is entered whenever the fire control system is activated and
the gunner has either: the WEAPON ACTIVATE selector on the gunner's
weapon control panel at OFF: or the palm switches on the gunner's control
handles released. With this mode in effect, the main weapon is locked in
elevation, the turret is locked in azimuth and the gunner's primary sight is
synchro slaved to the main weapon.

Main weapon offsets from the ballistic computer are set into the fire
control system (with WEAPON ACTIVATE selector set to MAIN GUN), and
cause an angular displacement of the sight from the main weapon. The main
weapon line-of-fire remains fixed. If the gunner's primary sight was on tar­
get before the offsets are changed the sight is driven off target by �he new off­
sets.- The azimuth and elevation hand cranks may then be employed to bring
the sight back on target (and the main weapon off target by the amount of the
offsets). Because of this feature, the gunner standby /target hold mode may
be used to fire main weapon conventional rounds provided both the target and
the vehicle are stationary. The missile round may also be fired in the target
hold mode. -To actually fire the main weapon, the WEAPON ACfiVATE sel­
ector on the gunner's weapon control must be at MAIN GUN position and the
auxiliary trigg er on the elevation hand crank must be actuated.

If the gunner's primary sight is not operating conventional rounds can be

fired in this mode by using the gunner's auxiliary telescope as a sighting
and aiming device. However, in this case, the main weapon superelevation
and lead angle offsets required for accurate weapon firing must be estimated
by the gunner and these must be used as the basis for displacing the gunner's
auxiliary telescope reticle off the target.

With the gunner's primary sight opera ting and this mode in effect, esti­
mates of target range may be inserted into the fire control system using
manual range controls.

This mode may be terminated by the gunner by assuring that the WEAPON
ACTIVATE selector on the gunner's weapon control panel is set to a position
other than OFF and assuring that either or both palm switches on the gunner's
control handles are depressed. This mode does not affect the selection or
employment, by the commander, of any of the commander's primary modes.
However, to enable the gunner to enter this mode and remain in it, the

2-44
commander must not depress his palm switches if he has selected MAIN
GUN or MG with the WEAPON ACfiVATE selector. Also, the commander
must not press the TARGET DESIGNATE pushbutton on his control handles
if his palm switches are closed.

2-39. Gunners
' Cllecks Prior to Fire Control Subsystem Activation

a. Gunner's control handles released and at null (detent) position.

b. Gunner's searchlight control set OFF/INFRARED/VISIBLE switch

set to OFF.

c. Machine gun safety set to S (safe) position.

d. WEAPON ACfiVATE switch on gunner's weapon control set to OFF.

e. RANGE MODE switch on gunner's primary sight control unit set to

OFF (inhibits laser).

f. WIPER switch set to OFF.

g. DEFROSTER switch set to OFF.

2-40. Fire Control Subsystem Activation (Tum-On)

Perform fire control subsystem activation (tum-on) tasks in accordance

with paragraph 2-62.

2-41. Gunner's Primary Sight Day/Night Operating (Tum-On) Procedures

Listed below are the gunner's fire control subsystem component tum-on
procedures. These procedures are only to be performed as necessary to
accomplish a specific mission.

NO TE: Tasks utilizing the gunner's auxiliary telescope have

not been included as the telescope is not installed in
pilot vehicle #7.

Prerequisites: a. Gunner's checks prior to fire control

subsystem activation performed per
paragraph 2-39.
b. Fire control subsystem activation
performed per paragraph 2-62�

2-45
 NOTE: All controls and displays are on the gunner's
primary sight unless otherwise stated.
/'

a. Gunner's Primary Si�ht Day Qperatin� Procedures (See Fi�rure 2-19)

1) PRIMARY SIGHT ALIGNMENT cover on gunner's primary

sight control unit (over TEST and STAB DRIFT controls)
closed and latched.

2) P. S. DOOR CONTROL set to OPEN.

3) UNITY VISION switch on gunner's primary sight control unit

set to OUT.

4) DAY/NIGHT SELECT control set to DAY.

5) Illuminated reticle in gunner's primary sight field-of-view

observed.

6) RETICLE BRIGHTNESS control set to desiged brightness.

7) DIOPTER ADJUST set to clearest image.

8) LEFT-RIGHT and FORE-AFT browpads adjusted for operator

comfort.

9) FILTER CONTROL set to desired filter (clear, neutral

density, contrast enhancement, or boresight).

10) MAGNIFICATION SELECT set to either 8 or 12 power

magnification.

11) WASHER pump activated as necessary.

12) WIPER switch on gunner's primary sight control unit activated

as necessary.

13) DEFROSTER switch on gunner's primary sight control unit

activated as necessary.

b. Gunner's Primary Sight Night Operation Procedure (See Figure 2- I9)

1) PRIMARY SIGHT ALIGNMENT cover (over TEST and STAB

DRIFT controls) closed and latched.

2-46
 2) P. S. DOOR CONTROL set to OPEN.

3) UNI'IY VISION switch on gunner's primary sight control

unit set to OUT.

4) DAY /NIGHT SELECf control set to NIGHT.

5) WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on gunner's weapon control set

to any position but OFF.

NOTE: Laser hazard. Observe applicable

precautions. See safety data.

6) RANGE MODE switch on gunner's primary sight control

unit set to AUTO, or if necessary as a backup, MANUAL.

7) Palm switches on gunner's control handles activated.

8) Illuminated reticle in gunner's primary sight field-of-view

observed.

9) RETICLE BRIGHTNESS control set to desired brightness.

10) DIOPTER ADJUST set for clearest image.

11) LEFT-RIGHT and FORE-AFT ADJUSTMENT of browbads

adjusted for operator comfort.

12) NIGHT CHANNEL FOCUS control set to clearest irm ge.

13) ILLUMINATOR CONTROLS on gunner's primary sight control

unit set to desired beam width and vision depth for night
viewing.

14) WASH ER pump activated as necessary.

15) WIPER switch on gunner's primary sight control unit

activated as necessary.

16) DEFROSTER switch on gunner's primary sight control unit

activated as necessary.

2-42. Gunner's Target Acquisition Tasks

Prerequisites: a. Gunner's checks prior to fire control sub­

system activation performed per paragraph
2-39.
b. Fire control subsystem activation performed
per paragraph 2-62.
 c. For day use - perform gunner's primary
sight day operating procedures per paragraph
2-41. a.
d. For night use - perform gunner's primary
sight night operating procedures per para­
graph 2-41. b.

NOTE: The following operational restrictions exist

with respect to target acquisition:

To enable the gunner to accomplish his target

acquisition tasks, the commander must not
control main weapon
designate.

a. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on gunner's weapon control set to any

position but OFF.

b. Palm switches on gunner's control handles depressed.

c. Reticle and target in gunner's primary sight field-of-view observed.

d. Reticle centered on target to be observed.

NOTE: Palm switches of gunner's control handles must be

depressed during night viewing to observe target
through gunner's primary sight.

e. Palm switches on gunner's control handles released.

2-43. Gunner's Manual Range Control Using Gunner's Primary Sight

Prerequisites: a. Gunner's checks prior to fire control subsystem

activation performed per paragraph 2-39.
b. Fire control subsystem activation performed
per paragraph 2-62.
c. For day use perform gunner's primary sight
day operating procedures per paragraph
2-4l.a .
d. For night use perform gunner's primary sight
night operating procedures per paragraph 2-41. b.

a. RANGE MODE switch on gunner's primary sight control unit set to

MANUAL.

2-48
 b. NS RANGE G ATE/MANUAL RANGE switch (left handle thumbswitch)
of gunner's control handles depressed until desired range is displayed on
range display in gunner's primary sight eyepiece.

2-44. Gunner's Laser Ranging T asks

Prerequisites: a. Gunner's checks prior to fire control sub­

system activation performed per paragraph
2-39.
b. Fire control subsystem activation performed
per paragraph 2-62.
c. For day use perform gunner's primary sight
day operating procedures per paragraph
2-41. a.
d. For night use perform gunner's primary
sight night operating procedures per para­
graph 2-41. b.

NO TE: Laser ranging is normally not performed when missile

firing is anticipated.

Laser ranging cannot be performed if the WEAPON

ACfiVATE switch on the gunner's weapon control is
in the OFF position.

a. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on gunner's weapon control set to any

position except OFF.

b. RANGE MODE switch on gunner's primary sight control unit set to

AUTO.

c. Palm switches on gunner's control handles depressed.

d. Reticle on target in gunner's primary sight field-of-view observed.

W ARNING

Laser hazard. Observe applicable precaution.

See safety data.

NOTE: If TURRET POWE R, MAIN GUN LOAD or MG was

selected in step a., there will be a 2-second delay
in laser firing when switch is depressed.

e. Laser fire pushbutton (right hand pushbutton) on gunner's control

handles pressed and released.

2-49
 f. Gunner's primary sight field-of-view momentarily blocked.

NOTE: If range warning indicator in gunner's primary sight

eyepiece is lighted amber, re-evaluate steps d.
through g.

a. Zero range value indicates no target retun1.

b. Range value and a warning light indicates
multiple target return.

g. Range display indicator in gunner's primary sight eyepiece indicates

range value.

2-45. Gunner's Weapon Activation and O:mtrol Tasks

Prerequisites: a. Gunner's checks prior to fire control sub­

system activation performed per paragraph
2-39.
b. Fire control subsystem activation performed
per paragraph 2-62.

a. Main Weapon Activation and Control

1) WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on gunner's weapon control set to

MAIN GUN.

NOTE: MAIN GUN WEAPON ACTIVATE indicator will not

be lighted if commander has assumed control of
main weapon or machine gun.

2) MAIN GUN WEAPON ACTIVATE indicator on gunner's weapon

control lighted.

3) AMMO SELECT switch on gunner's weapon control set for

round to be fired.

4) ROUND NOT AVAILABLE lamp on gunner's weapon control

not lighted.

NOTE: AMMO select indicator for given type of round lights

only after round is loaded in breech and does not
go out until round is fired or unloaded. If round
different than that desired is in breech, it must
be unloaded or fired before attempting to load
desired round.

5) AMMO SELECT indicator on gunner's weapon control is not

lighted.
2-50
 6) Palm switches on gunner's control handles depressed.

WARNING
Breech and automatic loader moving hazard.

7) Main weapon load pushbutton (left handle) on gunner's control

handles pressed and released.

NOTE: Palm switches on gunner's control handles must be

depressed throughout complete load cycle.

LOAD IN PROCESS lamp on gunner's weapon control

will be illuminated during loading cycle.

8) Automatic loading of main weapon observed.

9) AMMO SELECT indicator on gunner's weapon control corres­

ponding to round loaded lighted.

b. Machine Gun Activation and Control

1) WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on gunner's weapon control set to

MG.

NOTE: MG WEAPON ACTIVATE indicator on gunner's

weapon control will not be lighted if commander
has assumed control of main gun or machine gun.

2) MG WEAPON ACTIVATE indicator on gunner's weapon control

lighted.

NOTE: Charging of machine gun is required only before

initial use of weapon.

3) Charge handle of machine gun pulled rearward and released.

4) Safety on machine gun set to F (fire) position.

2-46. Gunner's Weapon Firing Tasks

Prerequisites: a. Gunner's checks prior to fire control sub­

system activation performed per paragraph
2-39.

2-51
 b. Fire control subsystem activation performed
per paragraph 2-62.
c. For day use perform gunner's primary sight
day operating procedures per paragraph
2-41. a.
d. For night use perform gunner's primary
sight night operating procedure per paragraph
2-41. b.

a. Firing Main Weapon Conventional Round

1) Perform "Main weapon activation and control" in accordance

with paragraph 2-45. a.

2) Palm switches of gunner's control handles depressed.

3) Reticle and target in sight field-of-view observed.

NOTE: Target tracking (with reticle centered on target)

must be continued before and during the main gun firing.

4) Reticle centered on target observed.

5) Perform laser ranging tasks in accordance with paragraph

2-44, or manual ranging tasks in accordance with paragraph
2-43.

6) Ready-to-fire indicator in gunner's primary sight eyepiece

lighted green.

WARNING

Breech recoil hazard and Breech opening hazard.

7) Weapon trigger on gunner's control handles (left and right

hand fingerswitch) pressed and released.

8) Main gun firing noted.

9) Gunner's primary sight field-of-view momentarily blocked.

2-52
 10) Green ready-to-fire indicator in gunner's primary sight
eyepiece not lighted.

11) Round strike in relation to target observed.

12) AMMO SELECT indicator on gunner's weapon control not

lighted.

NOTE: Steps 13 through 16 are only to be performed if target

engagement and main gun firing are to be continued.

WARNING

Breech and automatic loader moving hazard.

13) Main gun load pushbutton (left handle pushbutton) on gunner's

control handles pressed and released.

NOTE: Palm switches on gunner's control handles must be

depressed throughout complete load cycle.

LOAD IN PROCESS lamp will be illuminated during

loading cycle.

14) Automatic loading of main gun observed.

15) AMMO SELECT indicator on gunner's weapon control

corresponding to round loaded lighted.

16) Ready-to-fire indicator in gunner's primary sight eyepiece

lighted green.

b. Firing Missile

NOTE: Laser ranging is normally not performed for missile firing.

1) Perform "main weapon activation and control" in accordance

with paragraph 2-45. a.

2) Palm switches on gunner's control handles depressed.

3) Reticle and target in gunner's primary sight eyepiece observed.

NOTE: Target tracking (with reticle centered on target) must be

continued before and during firing and throughout missile
flight.

2-53
 4) Reticle centered on target completed.

5) Ready-to-fire indicator in gunner's primary sight eyepiece

lighted green.

WARNING

Breech recoil hazard. Breech and automatic

loader operating hazard.

6) Weapon trigger (left and right hand fingerswitches) on

gunner's control handles pressed and released.

7) Missile fired observed.

8) Target tracking throughout missile flight performed.

9) Green ready-to-fire indicator in gunner's primary sight

eyepiece not lighted.

10) MISSILE AMMO SELECT indicator on gunner's weapon control

not lighted.

11) Expended missile cap removed from breech by automatic

loader (after missile flight or abort) observed.

NOTE: Steps 12 through 14 are to be performed only if target

engagement is to be continued and missile firing is to
be repeated.

WARNI NG

Breech and automatic loader moving hazard.

NOTE: Step 12 shall not be performed until after missile flight

is completed or flight will automatically be aborted.

12) Main gun load pushbutton (left hand pushbutton) on gunner's

control handles pressed and released.

13) MISSILE AMMO SELECT indicator on gunner's weapon

control lighted.

14) Ready-to-fire indicator in gunner's primary sight eyepiece

lighted green.

2-54
 c. Firing Machine Gun

1) Perform "machine gun activation and control" in accordance

with paragraph 2-45. b.

2) Palm switches on gunner's control handles activated.

3) Reticle and target in gunner's primary sight observed.

NOTE: Target tracking must be continued before and during

weapon firing.

4) Reticle centered on target observed.

5) Green ready-to-fire indicator in gunner's primary sight

eyepiece observed.

NOTE: During burst of fire, adjust control handles so target

is centered in zone of fire.

6) Weapon trigger switch (left and right hand fingerswitches) on

gunner's control handles pressed and held to fire desired
burst.

7) Rounds striking target observed.

2-47. Gunner's Fire Control Subsystem Weapon Deactivation Tasks

a. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on gunner's weapon control set to OFF.

b. ALL WEAPON ACTIVATE indicators on gunner's weapon control not

lighted.

2-48. Shutdown of Gunner's Fire Control Subsystem

a. Palm switches of gunner's control handles released.

b. OFF/INFRARED/VISIBLE switch on gunner's searchlight control

set set to OFF.

c. Machine gun safety set to S (safe) position.

d. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on gunner's weapon control set to OFF.

2-55
 e. All WEAPON ACTIVATE indicators on gunner's weapon control not
lighted.

f. All AM MO SELECT indicators not lighted.

g. RANGE MODE switch on gunner's primary sight control unit set to OFF.

h. DEFROSTER switch on gunner's primary sight control unit set to OFF.

i. WIPER switch on gunner's primary sight control unit set to OFF.

j. Primary Sight DOOR CONTROL handle set to CLOSED.

2-49. Secure W eapons for Travel

a. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on gunner's weapon control set to

TURRET POWER.

b. Machine gun safety set to S (safe) position.

c. RANGE MODE switch on gunner's primary sight control unit set to

OFF.

d. Position main gun over travel lock using gunner's control handles.

e. Driver positions azimuth travel lock for securing turret.

f. Palm switches of gunner's control handles released.

g. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on gunner's weapon control set to OFF.

h. Manually position main gun into travel lock.

i. Driver secures main gun clamp.

2-56
 •• PRIMARY SIGHT All GNMENT

\
UNITY VISION
CONTROL

DOME LIGHT
\
I

E MERGENCY TRANSMITTER'
DOOR RELEASE
•
WEAPON CONTROL
PANEL

Figure 2-15.1 Gunner's Station (1 of 3)

 AUXI Ll ARY TELESCOPE '
-r. •...#
;
,. f
..
All GNMENT AUXI Ll ARY TELESCOPE
�....
...
-
�
tC
SAFE-TO-FIRE I NDICATOR
�-'tl
I ·,
/,

I
1'0

en
(X)

> ---., ..

..

(�\
Q �
\�i,, . '
' •
•• •
;;f
� �!
t.'
\•t t, �'
1l i f
I
\'�·�t'
N .�·

;;
.. ...._ .,
�

Figure 2-15.2 Gunner's Station (2 of 3)

 MA IN WE APON ALIGNMENT _, t
66
CONTROL )
'

PR I MARY S IGHT

MISSILE TEST AND

CHECKOUT P ANEL

0,
0

Figure 2-15o3 Gunner's Station {3 of 3)

 1
3 4

@ LOAD IN ROUND NOT

\-J �
PROCESS AVA ILABL E \::!:.)

0 AMMO SELECT
HEAT
WEAPON
ACTIVATE
0 5

QQO
BH WP MG

O
OFF MAIN
TURRET GUN
SABOT MISSILE
POWE R' I

0 D MAIN GUN
LOAD......., 0
DIM/
TEST

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

WEAPON ACTIVATE
(5-Position Rotary)

• MAIN GUN Allows gunner to drive, load, and fire MAIN

(Lamp) GUN utilizing gunner control handles.

Indicator illuminates (green) indicating

gunner control of MAIN GUN.

Enables auxiliary trigger on elevation hand

crank to fire main gun.

Initiates laser capacitor charge and activates

laser Q-switch motor.

• MG Allows gunner to control and fire coaxial

(Lamp) machine gun utilizing control handles.

Enables auxiliary trigger on elevation hand

crank to fire coaxial machine gun.

Figure 2-16. Gunner1s Weapon Control Panel

2-60
 CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Indicator illuminates (Green) indicating gunner

control of coaxia I machine gun.

• OFF Deactivates gunner control of MAl N GUN and

coaxial machine gun, palm switches, and con-
trol switches normally activated by palm switches.

Inhibits firing of laser rangefinder by gunner.

• TURRET POWER Provides turret power to allow gunner to con­

trol main gun and turret, but inhibits load­
ing and firing.

• MAIN GUN LOAD Allows loading and controlling, but inhibits

firing of main gun.

2 AMMO SELECT Selects one of five ammunitions for loading

(5-Position Rotary) (SABOT, BH, HEAT, WP, MISSILE)

SABOT, BH, HEAT, WP, Illuminates (Green) to indicate type of round

MISSILE loaded in breech.
(5 lamps)
lamp remains lighted until round is fired or
removed from main gun.

3 LOAD IN PROCESS Illuminates (White) during automatic loading

(Indicator lamp) of main gun.

4 ROUND NOT AVAILABLE Illuminates (Amber) when round selected for

INDI CATOR loading is not available in automatic loader.
(Indicator lamp)

5 DIM/TEST CONTROL Provides dimming control and test at maximum

(One Turn, Continuous brightness for lamps on weapon control panel
Rotary ) and gunner's primary sight control panel.

Figure 2-16. Gunner's Weapon Control Panel - legend

2-61
1 3
NS RANGE GATE/LASE
MANUAL RANGE FIRE

Figure 2-17. Gunner's Control Handles

2-62
 CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

CONTROL HAND LE Enables azimuth and elevation control of sights

and/or weapons selected when handle is activated.

NS RANGE G ATE/ Provides two speed movement of range gate

MANUAL RANGE during night viewing.
(Thumbswitch, Left Handle)
Provides two speed adjustment of manual range
input to computer in manual range mode.

2 MW LOAD Initiates loading of round selected on the main

(Pushbutton, Left Handle) gun AMMO SEL ECT.

Initiates recycling of missile system when pressed

during missile firing sequence.

3 LASER FIRE Enables gunner to fire the laser rangefinder in

(Pushbutton, Right Handle) AUTO mode.

4 TRIGGERS Enables gunner to fire weapon activated by

(Fingerswitch, Left & Right weapon activation selector.
Handle)

5 PALM Activates/deactivates control handle system for

(Switch on each handle) azimuth and elevation control.

Enables main gun load, laser fire, and weapon

trigger controls on the handles when the weapon
activate switch is appropriately positioned.

Activates pulse gated night viewing system when

NIGHT operation has been selected on Gunner's
Primary Sight.

If released while AUTO range and NIGHT

operation are selected, the range gate viewing
depth and position are reinitiated.

Figure 2-17. Gunner's Control Hand I es - Leg end

2-63
 10 SHOWN WITH COVER REMOVED

9
TRACKER ERROR
TEST

g
LASER ALIGN
STAB DRIFT
�
ELE:.YAT ION 1-
AZIMUTH � 11

lO>
•IN

f
• RCVR

• Xa,tTR

•OUT • STOW ·

�
�
SIGHT WINDOW ILLUM I NATOR CONT ROL
DEFROSTER BE AM WIDTH VIEW DEPTH
•NARROW •MIN

• MEDIUM �
1

UNITY VISION
�2 RA N GE MODE
WIPER

•AUTO

@ � �
5 4 3

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

VIEW DEPTH Allows operator to select desired depth of field during

(2-Position Toggle Switch) night viewing.

• MIN.

• MAX.

2 BEAM WIDTH Provides selection of illuminator beam widths during

(3-Position Toggle Switch) use of night viewing s ystem.

• NARROW

• MEDIUM

• WIDE

Figure 2-18. Gunner•s Primary Sight Control Unit

2-64
 CONTROL/DISPlAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

3 RANGE MODE
(3-Position Toggle Switch)

• AUTO Enables laser rangefinder--allows laser range input to

computer.

• OFF Inhibits laser operation.

• MANUAL Enables manual ranging input to computer utilizing manual

range control on gunner or CDR hand controls.

NOTE: AUTO and MANUAL positions enable continuous

range display in Gunner's Primary Sight; and, if the CDR
has selected MAIN GUN or MG, also in the commander's
sight.

4 U NITY VISION Enables gunner to bypass magnification optics of GPS

(2-Position Toggle Switch) telescope with unity power optics. Inhibits laser firing
when unity power optics is selected.
• IN-GUT

5 WIPER Activates wiper for GPS window.

(2-Position Toggle Switch)

• ON-OFF

6 DEFROSTER Illuminates (amber) when defroster is activated.

(Lamp)

7 DEFROSTER Activates defroster for GPS window.

(2-Position Toggle Switch)

• ON-QFF

8 LASER ALIGN Enables·alignment checks of laser receiver and transmitter.

(3-Position Toggle Switch) (Stow defines normal position of roof prism during opera­
tional use. Switch is forced to this position when panel
• RCVR
cover is closed.)
• XMTR

• STOW

9 TRACKER ERROR Enables gunner to introduce a known error into GPS

(2-Position Toggle Switch) optics during missile tracker alignment checkout.

• IN-GUT

10 ELEVATION Provides elevation drift correction input to gunner's

(One Turn, Continuous Rotary) primary sight electronics.

11 AZIMUTH Provides azimuth drift correction input to gunner's

(One Turn, Continuous Rotary) primary sight electronics.

Figure 2-18. Gunner's Primary Sight Control Unit - Legend

2-65
 9

15

10

11
5

Figure 2-19. Gunner's Primary Sight

2-66
CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DE SCRIPTION

RETICLE BRIGHTNESS Controls brightness of GPS reticle lamp.

2 MAGNIFICATION Allows selection of either 8 power or 12 power magnification

SELECT by gunner.

3 FILTER CONTROL Allows selection of neutral density or orange-yellow filter.

Additionally, provides boresight focus for use when checking
alignment of GPS to main gun.

4 DAY-NIGHT SIGHT Selects optical channel for day or night use. Enables laser
pulse gated vision system for night operation.

5 FIELDSTOP LAMP Activates fieldstop lamp (used in conjunction with Laser Align
(2-Position Toggle) control on Gunner Primary Sight control panel during laser
XMTR and RCVR align checks and XMTR alignment.)

6 NIGHT CHANNEL FOCUS Used to focus during night viewing.

7 LA SER FIRING EVlNTS Displays total number of times laser has been fired.
(Digita I Counter)

8 TRAN SMITTER ALIGNMENT Used to align laser transmitter.

(Covered Controls)

9 UNITY VI SION WINDOW Provide gunner with non-magnified view thru periscope.

10 DIOPTER ADJUST Used to adapt GPS telescope optics to viewer's eyesight

- ± diopters.

11 ALIGNMENT CONTROL Used to align missile tracker to gunner line of sight.

12 FORE-AFT ADJU STMENT Provides browpad adjustment for use of sight.

LEFT-RIGHT ADJUSTMENT Provides browpad adjustment for right eye or left eye use
of sight.

13 (Refer to Figure 4-25)

14 P.S. DOOR CONTROL Mechanically actuates the primary sight ballistic door.
(Lever)

• OPEN

• CLOSED

15 EMERGENCY TRAN SMIT­ Hydraulically and/or mechanically actuates the missile

TER DOOR RELEASE transmitter door to the open position. The "door open"
(Lever) condition for missile firing will provide a "Ready to Fire"
green light indication in the gunner's and commander's
sight display which would otherwise be inhibited by a
closed transmitter door. (See handle decal.)

Figure 2-19. Gunner's Primary S ight -Legend

2-67
 0 5
�' I I I I

SCALE IN M ILS

4
RANGE WARNING READY- TO-FIRE
(AMBER) (GREEN)
2
RANGE DISPLAY DARK BACKGROUND
(RED) AREA

CONTROUDISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Illuminated Reticle Modified NATO reticle with provisions

(Eyepiece Display) for missile firing.

2 Range Display Indicator Four di git range display.

{Eyepiece Display)

3 Ready-to-Fire Indicator Illuminated indication in GPS e yepiece.

(Eyepiece Display)

4 Range Warning Indicates mu Itip le target returns or

(Eyepiece Display) no return.

Figure 2-20. Gunner's Prirnury Sight Eyepiece Display

2-68
 GPS BORESIGHT
ELEVATION AZIMUTH
ON UP L R

'®) {
' � MAIN GUN ZEROING
EL HEAT - AZ
2

ON o UP L o R

4
s

Figure 2-21 . /v'\ain Weapon Alignment Control Panel

2-69
 CONTROL/DISPL AY FUNCTIONAL DESCRI PTION

ELEVATION Used to align GPS to main gun in elevation.

(Rotary, Screwdriver tion.
adjust)

2 AZIMUTH Used to align GPS to main gun in azimuth.

(Rotary, Screwdriver
adjust)

3 I NDEX Used to align main gun breech to outer

(Rotary, Screwdriver loader when main gun is indexed for.
adjust) automatic loading.

4 HEAT EL
(Rotary, Screwdriver
Adjust) Used to compensate for main gun "jump"
in elevation and azimuth when HEAT or WP
5 HEAT AZ rounds are fired.
(Rotary, Screwdriver
Adjust)

6 SABOT EL
(Rotary, Screwdriver
Adjust) Used to compensate for main gun "jump"
in elevation and azimuth when SABOT rounds
7 SABOT AZ are fired.
(Rotary, Screwdriver
Adjust)

Figure 2-21. Main '/\.'capon Alignment Control Panel -Legend

2-70
Figure 2-22. Gunner's Azimuth Indicator and Manual Traverse Handle

2-71
 CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1 • Resetter Knob Depressing and rotating knob allows resetting

of pointers.

2. Inner Scale Fixed scale which reads in mils in hundredso

3. Inner Seale Pointer Rotates with turret to give one revolution

(6400 miIs) for one turret revolution.

4. Middle Scale Fixed scale which reads mils.

5. Middle Scale Pointer Rotates 64 times for each turret revolution.

6. Outer Seale Hand rotatable scale which is set by hand to

zero on middle dial pointer. D ial then reads
left and right azimuth in mils as middle dial
pointer rotates from set point.

7. Handle Depressing finger switch allows manual rota­

tion of turret, and declutches hydraulic power
and removes hydraulic anti-backlash preload
pressure.

Lamp Switch (Not Shown)

(2-Position Toggle)

• ON/OFF Activates indicator lamp.

Rotary Knob Selects either red or clear light source for

(Not Illustrated) night viewing. Controls the brightness of the
lamp.

Figure 2-22. Gunncr•s Azimuth Indicator and Manual Traverse Handle- Legend

2-72
CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Washer Activation results in the application

(Push Lever) of washer fluid to the gun ner's
primary sight periscope window.

Figure 2-23. Primary Sight Window Washer

2-73
CONTROLJDISP LAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1. Hand Pump Allows manua I elevation of the main

weap:m.

2. Trigger Auxiliary trigger for firing the main weapon

or coaxial machine gun when fire control
system is activated.

3. Lock Allows locking of trigger mechanism.

Figure 2-24. Gun Elev ation Hand Control

2-74
 1

C ONTROLJDISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1. SafetyPin Emergency firing device is ready �or use

·

when pin is pulied.

2. Crank Turning crank in either direction at a

minimum spead of 120 RPM for a minimum
of two revolutions wi II provide emergency
electrical current for firing main weapon.

Figure 2-25. G u n n er ' s Emergency Fir ing Dev i ce

2-75
 1

CONTROl/DISPlAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Filter Selection Selects either clear lens or a red lens filter

(2-Position Rotary) for night viewing.

2 On-Qff Dimmer Rotating knob energizes lamp. Further rotation

(Switch-Potentiometer) controls brightness of lamp.

3 Lever Lock Depressing button unlocks filter selector.

(Pushbutton)

Figure 2-26. Gunner's Dome Light

2-76
CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1. Elevation Scale Readout of elevation in one hundred mil

increments from minus 200 to plus 600 mils.

2. Micrometer Sea I e Readout of elevation in mi I increments.

(Adjustment)

3. Lev el Vial Level vial with bubble centers when desired

elevation is achieved.

4. Mirror For indirect viewing of bubble in vial.

Figure 2-27. Gunner ' s Elevation Quadrant M -13

2-77
 '

\
\

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Recoi I Precharge Indication of main gun recoil mechanism

Pressure Indicator precharge pressure is given by a rod pro­
(Protruding Rod) truding through a stepp=-:1 indicator. When
ro:l protrud=s b=yond indicator step, pressure
is too low; when it is recessed behind
1.
surface of indicator, pressure is too high.
(Low Pressure)

(High Pressure)

Figure 2-28. Gunner's Safe-to-Fire Indicator

2-78
 2 3

0 0
JI
J2

0
@CIRCUIT
TEST

COMPACT BEAM

0 0
LOCAL
VISIBLE
1 1 REMon

��::·- {J'
OFF
\_.!}
0 0
SPARE SPARE J4
2A lA

0 0 0 0

6 7 5 4

Figure 2-29. Gunner1s Search light Control Set

2-79
CONTROL/DJSP LAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION
-

l. Switch When not in O PERATING POSITION, each

(8-Position Rotary) position, 2 thru 7, will test a circuit of the
system.

20 CIRCUIT TEST Illuminates at each test position of the

(White Light) circuit test control switch (item 1) when the
system is operable.

3. Switch Controls the searchlight beam spread from

(3-Position, Spring 1 to 7 degrees.
Loaded to Off, Center)

• SPREAD BEAM

• COMPACT BEAM

4. Switch Allows control of se-::lrchlight operation from

(Rotary Switch) either main or remote control b·::>x. (Remote
Control Box is not used.)
• LOCAL

• REMOTE

5. Switch Permits use of visible or infrared light.

(3-Position) Pu II to
throw

• OFF

• INFRARED

• VISIBLE

6. OVER TEMP Illuminates when the bloNer motor is

(Red Lamp) overheated.

7. LAMP ON Illuminates when Visible/Infrared/Off

(Green Lamp) switch is ON.

Figure 2-29. Gunner's Searchlight Control S et -Legend

2-80
 INT
/ONLY

-Ds

C ONTR OL/DI S PLAY FUNCTI ONAL DESCRI PTI ON

1. MONITOR
(5-Position Rotary)
• ALL All signals from R-442/VRC, receiver/
transmitters and intercom will be heard.

• A Only receiver/transmitter RT-246/VRC

wi II be heard.

• I NT ONLY Only intercom wi I I be heard.

• B Only receiver R-442/VRC wi II be heard.

• c Not used.

2. VOLUME Controls volume when monitor switch is in

ALL position. Adjust control for the
desired volume in audio accessory.

Figure 2-30. I ntercommunication Control Set C -2298/VRC

2-8]
 FRONT REAR FRONT
LEFT RIGHT

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTION AL DESCRIPTION

LOCK Mechanically locks or unlocks three control levers.

(Lever).

2 FRONT LEFT Lever controls three left front suspension units for raising
or lowering the left front quadrant of vehicle.

3 REAR Lever controls three rear left and three rear right suspension
(Lever) units for raising or lowering rear quadrant of vehicle.

4 FRONT RIGHT Lever controls three right fro:-�t suspension units for raising
(Lever) and lowering the right front quadrant of vehicle.

5 TRACK ADJUST
(2-Position Toggle
Switch)
• ON Unlocks track adjuster for raising or lowering the vehicle.
• O FF Locks track adjuster.

6 (Lamp) Lamp (Red) illuminates when track adjuster switch is ON.

Figure 2-31. Suspension Control Panel

2-82
 3
2

l
r

1 4

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Scrambler is located behind gunner. Func­

tional description is not available at this
writing.

1. Switch
(2-Position Toggle)

• ON

• OFF

2. Switch

3. Switch

4. Gun

Figure 2-32. Scrambler

2-83
 16 15 14 13 11

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Null Meter Indicates alignment of tracker during tracker

(Meter) alignment test and operational condition of rate
sensor during system seIf test.

2 XMTR Illuminates (red) to indicate a malfunction of

(Lamp) the transmitter during system self test.

3 CHECKOUT PA NEL Illuminates (red) to indicate a malfunction of

the test checkout paneI during system seIf test.

4 TRACKER Illuminates (red) to indicate a malfunction of

(Lamp) the tracker during system self test.

5 POWER SUPPLY Illuminates (red) to indicate a malfunction of

(Lamp) the power supply during system self test.

Figure 2-33. f·.".issil e Test and Checkout Panel

2-84
 CONTROl/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

6 SIG DATA CONV Illuminates (red) to indicate a malfunction of

(Lamp) the signal data converter during system self test.

7 PRIME VOLTAGE Illuminates (amber) to indicate low vehicle power.

(Lamp)

8 MOD Illuminates (red) to indicate a malfunction of

(Lamp) the moduIator during system seIf test.

9 GO Illuminates (green) to indicate that guidance

(Lamp) and control system are operational.

10 DIMMER Adjusts brightness of aII lamps except the

(Continuous Rotary) red NO/GO lamps.

11 RESET Turns on/off all control signals. Used during

(2-Position Toggle) tracker alignment test, system self test, and
transmitter test.

12 LAMP & METER TEST Initiates the test of all lamps and the null meter
(2-Position Toggle) on the test checkout pane I.

13 XMTR TEST Lamp illuminates (white) to indicate switch has

(2-Position Toggle) turned on both transmitter lamps during
(Lamp) transmitter test.

14 TRACKER ALIGN Lamp illuminates (white) to indicate switch has

(2-Position Toggle) initiated alignment test of the tracker.
(Lamp)

15 SYSTEM TEST Lamp illuminates (white) to indicate switch has

(2-Position Toggle) initiated the system self test.

16 AZ/EL Selects azimuth and elevation signals from the

(2-Position Toggle) rate sensor for test. It is aIso used during the
(Lamps) alignment test of the tracker to indicate azimuth
and elevation alignrnent.

Figure 2-33. Missile Test end Checkout Panel -Legend

2-85
Figure 2 - 3[1,· . (OOXIO .
. I tv\achme Gun System

2-86
CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1 Charging Handle Permits charging (cocking) of the machine

gun as result of putting the handle rearward.

2 tv\anual Trigger Enables gunner to manually fire the machine

(Thumb Switch) gun.

3 Manual Safety
(Sliding Lock, 2-Position)

• SAFE Prevents electrica I or manual firing of

coaxial machine gun.

• FIRE Permits electrical or manual firing of

coaxial machine gun.

4 Booster Activates an electric motor to pull the

(2-Position Toggle) ammunition belt from the ready box and
provide slack.

5 Booster Clutch Disengages the booster sprocket from the

Disengage motor so that the sprocket free wheels to
(Pushbutton) facilitate threading the ammunition belt
through the feed chute.

6 Boresight Adjustment
(Screws)

• Azimuth Used to align (boresight) coaxial machine

gun in elevation and azimuth to the main
• Elevation gun.

Figure 2-34. Coaxial Machine Gun System -L egend

2 -87
 mbly
Seat Asse
34. 1 Gunner's
figure 2-
.

2-88
CONTROl/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Adjustments FORWARD/AFT and UP /DOWN adjustments

to accommodate 5th through 95th percentile
Forward-Aft (Pan & Back) man for eye alignment with his optics.

2 Up-Down (Pan)

3 Up- Down (Back

4 Two Straps The strap adjustments accommodate the 5th

through 95th percentile man in all climatic
environments.

5 Inertia Reel Release Releases the shoulder restraints to permit the

operator to lean forward or stand up.

6 Harness Lock/Unlock Releases or locks the restraint system straps.

(Quick Release) Permits a restrained standing position by
attachment of the crotch strap and shoulder
strap points, and releasing the pelvic points.

7 Arm-Leg Guard Provides left arm and leg protection for

(Removable) gunner from the main gun and breech in
motion during elevation, stabilization and
gun firing.

Figure 2-34. 1. Gunner's Seat Ass embly - Legend

2-89
2-50. Commander's Operating Modes

The commander is primarily concerned with the following t welve fire control
modes.

a. Mode 4 - commander controls commander's sight (surveillance).

b. Mode 5 - commander controls commander's sight and secondary weapon.

c. Mode 6 - commander designates target from commander's sight to gunner's

primary sight.

d. Mode 7 - commander monitors gunner with gunner's primary sight on.

e. Mode 8 - commander controls commander's sight, gunner's primary sight,

and main weapon.

f. Mode 9 - commander loads main weapon.

g. Mode 10 - commander controls commander's sight d irect drive (watch).

h. Mode 11 -commander controls commander's sight and main weapon (gunner's

primary sight off).

NOTE: The following material is related to modes 12 and 13 and is for

information only as a gunner's auxiliary telescope is not
installed in pilot vehicle #7.

i. Mode 12 commander designates target from commander's sight to

-

gunner's auxiliary telescope (gunner's primary sight off).

j. Mode 13 - commander monitors gunner w ith gunner's primary sight off.

k. Mode 15 - commander standby.

1. Mode 16 - index secondary weapon.

2-51. Mode 4 - Commander Controls Commander's sight (Surveillance)

In this mode of operation the commander's day/night sight is controlled by rate

commands for the commander's control handles and can provide a gyro stablized
line-of-sight or direct drive operation to enable the commander to perform sur­
veillance and target acquisition activities. When this mode is initiated, the sec­
ondary weapon is indexed to and locked at 2° in elevation; and, the commander's
weapon triggers are disabled. For an explanation of secondary weapon indexing
(Mode 16) upon initiation of this mode, refer to Paragraph 2-61.

During this mode of operation, the commander may employ the commander's day/
night sight for a full 360° surveillance of the surrounding terrain, regardless of turret
movement and/or vehicle disturbances. Weapon laying and firing cannot be performed
since none of the three weapons are under the commander's control in this mode,
Similarly, as the gunner's primary sight is not controlled by the commander in this

2-90
mode, the laser rangefinder/illuminator cannot be utilized by the commander. How­
ever, as the commander's day/night sight has a passive night vision system independ­
ent of the gunner's primary sight and the laser rangefinder/illuminator, the com­
mander may operate in this mode at night as well as during the day.

As a primary mode for the commander, this mode of operation does not affect
the selection or employment, by the gunner, of any of his operating modes.

2-52. _Mode 5- Commander Controls Commander's Sight And Secondary Weapon

In this mode, the commander's day/night sight can operate stabilized and
is controlled by rate commands from the commander's control handles. The
commander's day/night sight, provides the commander with a controlled sec­
ondary weapon line-of-fire to the target via a synchro chain in elevation and
physical attachment to the stabilized sight head in azimuth. The weapon trig­
gers on the commander's control handles are activated to enable firing of the
secondary weapon and the main gun load/cal . 50 charge pushbutton is acti viated
to enable charging of the secondary weapon.

This mode is initiated by the commander by placing his WEAPON ACTIVATE

selector to either CAL . 50 NORM or CAL 50 AIRCRAFT and closing the palm
•

switches on his control handles. When this mode is entered, the CAL . 50 indi­
cator on the commander's weapon control panel lights to indicate that the sec­
ondary weapon is activated.

With CAL. 50 NORM selected, normal sight and weapon azimuth and elevation
tracking rates are provided by the control handles, with CAL 50 AIRCRAFT selected,
•

weapon azimuth and elevation tracking rates are increased for the same control handle
displacement.

As a primary mode for the commander, this mode of operation does not affect the
selection or employment, by the gunner, of any of his operating modes.

2-53. Mode 6- Commander Designates Target From Commander's Sight to Gunner's

primary Sight

This mode may be initiated by the commander only while he controls his stabilized
sight for surveillance (Mode 4) or he controls his stabilized sight and the secondary
weapon (Mode 5). Further, the gunner must be in control of the main weapon and
turret (Mode 1) or gunner standby/target hold (Mode 14). Under these conditions, the
commander's day/night sight is operating and is controlled by rate commands
from the commander's control handles. On entry into this mode, the gunner's
primary sight becomes synchro slaved to the commander's day/night sight and
the gunner's control handles become disabled. Thus the gunner's primary
sight line-of-sight and the main weapon line-of-fire are brought into alignment
with the commander's sight line-of-sight, allowing the commander to auto-
matically designate a target to the gunner.

Weapon firing is inhibited while this mode is in effect. If this mode is initiated
while the commander is in active control of the secondary weapon (Mode 5), the
secondary weapon is automatically indexed to 20 in elevation and locked. For an ex­
planation of secondary weapon indexing (Mode 16), refer to Paragraph 2-61.

2-91
 After the gunner announces that he has acquired the target specified by the com­
mander, the mode may be terminated by the commander. This termination takes place
when the commander releases the TGT DES (target designate) pushbutton or releases
the palm switches on the commander's control handles. On termination, control of the
main weapon and turret reverts back to the gunner. If the commander releases the
pushbutton with the control handles activated and the secondary weapon selected (Mode
5}, the commander resumes normal control of the secondary weapon. The command­
er has normal control of his sight before, during, and after the target designation
activity, except after he terminates the mode by releasing the palm switches on his
control handles.

2-54. ;Mode 7 - Commander Monitors Gunner With Gunner's Primary Sight On

This mode enables the commander to monitor the gunner's primary sight line-of­
sight by slaving the commander's day/night sight to the gunner's primary sight. To
enter this mode, the gunner's primary sight must be operating and the gunner must be
in control of the main weapon and turret or be in standby/target hold condition. Upon
initiation of this mode, the commander's day/night sight becomes synchro slaved to the
gunner's primary sight and the two line-of-sights are aligned, enabling the commander
to monitor the gunner's line-of-sight.

If the fire control system has been in operation and the commander controls the
commander's day/night sight (Mode 4) or that sight and the secondary weapon (Mode 5),
he may initiate the monitor mode by releasing the palm switches on the commander's
control handles and placing the WEAPON ACTIVIATE selector on the commander's
weapon control panel to MG or MAIN GUN. If the fire control system is activated with
the WEAPON ACTIVATE selector on the commander's weapon control panel at MG or
MAIN GUN, special circuits inhibit entry into this monitor mode until the WEAPON
ACTIVATE selector is switched to SURV or SW and back to MG or MAIN GUN or the
palm switche(s) on the commander's control handles are closed and released. This
inhibit is incorporated to prevent unexpected mo':'ement of the commander's day/night
sight and secondary weapon on activation of the system.

Once this mode is initiated, operation using this mode may be continued by the
commander until he elects to terminate the mode. While this mode is in effect, the
gunner maintains complete control of the gunner's primary sight, the main weapon,
and the turret. When the commander elects to terminate this mode, he may do so by
closing the palm switches on commander's control handles and thus obtaining control
of the gunner's primary sight, main weapon, and turret (Mode 8). (Refer to following
paragraph for an explanation of Mode 8). He may also elect to place the WEAPON
ACTIVATE selector on his weapon control panel to SURV or SW before he activates his
control handles, thus entering the surveillance mode (Mode 4) or the secondary weapon
control mode (Mode 5). If either of the two latter modes are entered, the gunner
would continue in control of the gunner's primary sight, the main weapon, and the
turret.

2-55. Mode 8 - Commander Controls Commander's Sight, Gunner's Primary Sight,

And Main Weapon

This mode enables the commander to obtain control of the main weapon and turret
via the gunner's primary sight. To enter this mode the gunner's primary sight must
be operating and the gunner must be in control of the main weapon and turret or be in
standby/target hold condition. After establishing this mode, the commander's

2-92
day/night sight becomes synchro slaved to the gwmer's primary sight. The gwmer's
control handles are disabled and the commander's control handles provide rate com­
mands to the gunner's primary sight and to the main weapon a nd turret. Thus the
commander takes control of the gwmer's primary sight, the main weapon, and the
turret as well as his sight, allowing him to aim and fire the main weapon or machine
gun, depending on the setting of the WEAPON ACTIVATE selector on the commander's
weapon control panel.

Because the commander controls the gwmer's primary sight, he is able to utilize
the laser rangefinder in this mode to determine target range, and he is able to fire
the missile. When this mode is employed for firing of main weapon conventional
rounds, the ballistic computer provides main weapon elevation and lead angle
offsets based on target range, crosswind, turret cant, and other factors. If
desired by the commander, an estimated target range can be fed into the fire
control system through operation of manual range controls.

To enter this mode, the commander places the WEAPON ACTIVATE selector on
his weapon control panel to MG or MAIN GUN and closes the palm switches on his con­
trol handles. The fire control system then automatically enters the target designate
mode (Mode 6) and remains in this mode until the gunner's primary sight is aligned to
the commander's day/night sight. When this alignment is effected the system auto­
matically slaves the commander's day/night sight to the gunner's primary sight and
provides the gunner's primary sight with control inputs from the commander's control
handles.

Because control of the gunner's primary sight, main weapon, and turret is trans­
ferred from the gwmer's to the commander's station, the gwmer cannot perform any
fire control system operations while this mode is in effect. He can, however, still
monitor the gunner's primary sight field-of-view in an effort to assist the commander
in target engagement activities. To terminate this mode, the commander need only
release the palm switches on the commander's control handles or place the WEAPON
ACTIVATE selector on his weapon control panel to SURV or SW. If he releases his
palm switches, the monitor mode is entered (Mode 7) and the commander can observe
the gunner's primary sight field-of-view while the gunner resumes control of his sight,
the main weapon, and the turret. If SURV is selected, the surveillance mode (Mode 4)
is entered. If SW is selected, the secondary weapon mode (Mode 5) is employed by the
commander. In both of the above selections, the gwmer resumes control of the
gwmer's primary sight, the main weapon, and the turret.

2-56. .Mode 9 - Commander Loads Main Weapon

This mode may be employed by the commander to initiate automatic loading of the
main weapon, provided he is in control of the main weapon through employment of
Mode 8 (commander controls CS, GPS, and MW) or Mode 11 (commander controls CS
and MW with GPS off) and provided the WEAPON ACTIVATE selector is set at MAIN
GUN, and AMMO SELECT is set to type of ammo to b e loaded, on the commander's
weapon control panel.

2-93
 To enter this mode the commander places the WEAPON ACTIVATE selector on
the commander's weapon control panel to MAIN GUN, places the Ammo Selector
switch on the commander's weapon control panel to the type round to be loaded,
closed either or both palm switches on the commander's control handles, and presses
the main gun load/cal 50 charge pushbutton on his control handles. Once the mode
•

is entered, the loading cycle takes place without further action or response from the
commander.

The commander may continue target tracking with the commander's day/night
sight throughout the loading cycle. After the mode is initiated, and the automatic loader
rammer has moved fully forward, it cannot be interrupted by either the commander or
the gunner.

Because control of the main weapon and turret is assumed by the commander in
order to enter this mode, the gunner cannot perform any fire control system opera­
tions while this mode is in effect. The gunner, however, can still monitor the
gunner's primary sight field-of-view (if operating) in an effort to assist the commander
in target engagement.

2-57. _Mode 10 - Commander Controls Commander's Sight Directly (Watch)

In this mode of operation, the commander's day/night sight, the commander's

weapon control, commander's sight control and alignment unit, control logic
electronics unit, commander's sight power supply, and 400 hz power supply, are
activated with vehicle prime power. Power is not provided for fire control system
operation from the gunner's station, and firing of all weapons is inhibited. This mode
of operation is provided to enable commander surveillance activities while the engine
is off with minimum battery power drain.

During this mode, the commander's day/night sight is operated without gyro
stabilization. The commander's control handles provide rate commands to the sight.
While this mode is in effect, the secondary weapon is locked in elevation.

To enter this mode of operation, the commander positions the WEAPON ACTI­
VATE switch on the commander's weapon control panel to SURV, places the FIRE
CONTROL selector on the turret power distribution panel to WATCH, and closes either
or both palm switches on the commander's control handles. To terminate the mode,
the commander need only switch the FIRE CONTROL selector out of WATCH.

2-58. Mode 11- Commander Controls Commander's Si�ht and Main Weapon
(Gunner's Primary Sight Off). And Mode 13, Commander Monitors Gunner
With Gunner's Primary Sight Off

Mode 11 enables the commander to obtain control of the main weapon and turret
when the gunner's primary sight is inoperative or turned off. With this mode in effect,
the main weapon and turret, which are normally synchro slaved to the gunner's pri­
mary sight, are synchro slaved to the commander's day/night sight and
secondary weapon. The gunner's control handles are disabled and the commander's
control handles provide rate commands to the commander's day/night sight. Through
this mechanization the commander is capable of controlling the main weapon (for con­
ventional round firing only) or controlling and firing the machine gun, depending on the
setting of the WEAPON ACTIVATE selector on the commander's weapon control panel.

2-94
 Because the gunner's primary sight is inoperative, the commander is unable to
utilize the laser rangefinder in this mode to determine target range, and he is also un­
able to fire a missile round. In this mode the fire control does not provide main wea­
pon superelevation and lead angle offsets from the commander's day/night sight line­
of-sight, therefore the commander must estimate the proper superelevation and lead
angles and offset his sight reticle from the target center by these angles to assure
proper main weapon aiming.

To enter mode 11, the commander places the WEAPON ACTIVATE selector on his
weapon control panel to MG or MAIN GUN, and closes either or both palm switches on
his control handles. The main weapon and turret are then automatically slaved to the
commander's sight and secondary weapon, and the secondary weapon, in turn, is
slaved to the commander's day/night sight.

NOTE: The following material is for information only as the gunner's

auxiliary telescope is not installed in pilot vehicle # 7.

Because control of the main weapon and turret is assumed by the commander, the
gunner cannot perform any fire control system operations while this mode is in effect.
He can, however, monitor the main weapon line-of-fire using the gunner's auxiliary
telescope in an effort to assist the commander in target engagement activities.

To terminate mode 11, the commander may _release the palm switches on the
commander's control handles or place the WEAPON ACTIVATE selector on his weapon
control panel to SURV or SW. If the commander releases his palm switches, the moni­
tor mode is entered (Mode 13) and the commander can observe the main weapon line­
of-fire. If SURV is selected, the surveillance mode (Mode 4) is entered. If SW
is selected, the secondary weapon mode (Mode 5) is employed by the commander.
In all of the above selections, the gunner resumes control of the main weapon and
turret.

2-59. Mode 12 - Commander Designates Target From Commander's Sight To

Gunner's Auxiliary Telescope (Gunner's Primary Sight Off)

NOTE: The following material is for information only as a gunner's

auxiliary telescope will not be installed in pilot vehicle #7.

This mode may be ini.tiated by the commander only while he controls his sight
(stabilized) for surveillance (Mode 4) or he controls his sight (stabilized) and the
secondary weapon (Mode 5). Under these conditions the commander's day/night
sight is operating and is controlled by rate commands from the commander's con­
trol handles. The gunner's primary sight is not operating and the main weapon and
turret may be controlled directly by rate commands from the gunner's control
handles. The gunner utilizes the gunner's auxiliary telescope for target sighting
and weapon aiming. On entry into this target designate mode, the main weapon and
turret become synchro slaved to the commanders sight and secondary weapon with
the secondary weapon synchro slaved, in turn, to the commander's day/night sight�and
the gunner's control handles become disabled. The gunner's auxiliary telescope line­
of sight and main weapon line-of-fire are brought into alignment with the commander's
day/night sight line-of-sight, allowing the commander to automatically designate a
target to the gunner. While this target designate mode is in effect, weapon firing is
inhibited. To terminate this mode the commander must release the target desig-
nate switch or palm switch on the commander's control handles.
2-95
2-60. .Mode 15 - Commander Standby

This auxiliary mode for the commander is entered whenever the fire control system
is activated, the commander selects the secondary weapon or surveillance, and
the commander releases the palm switches on his control handles. With this
mode in effect, the secondary weapon is locked in the orientation it had immed-
iately before mode entry by elevation and azimuth brakes. As the secondary
weapon is mechanically coupled in azimuth to the commander's day/night sight,
the sight also becomes fixed in azimuth when this mode is entered. The com-
mander's day/night sight is synchro slaved to the secondary weapon in elevation
and through this slaving is aligned to the weapon line-of-sight in elevation.
Firing of the secondary weapon is inhibited during this mode.
Termination of this mode is accomplished by the commander either by closing the
palm switches on his control handles to obtain active control of the commander's day/
night sight (Mode 4) or of the commander's day/night sight and secondary weapon
(Mode 5) or by switching the WEAPON ACTIVATE selector on the commander's
weapon control panel to a position other than cal 50 or surveillance.
•

This mode does not affect the selection or employment, by the gunner, of any of
the gunner's operating modes.

2-61. Mode 16 - Index Secondary Weapon

This mode is actually a submode of other commander's operating modes and cannot
exist independent of these modes. This mode is established under the following con­
ditions:

Mode 5 is exited to any mode except mode 16 (Standby)

Mode 11 is exited to any mode except mode 5, 12, or 13
Mode 12 is exited to any mode except mode 5, 11, or 13
Mode 13 is exited to any mode except mode 5, 11, or 12
Mode 5 is established and the SW last round or hatch interlock discretes
are interrupted

The SW index position is adjustable (nominally +2°) because it is also used as the ref­
erence position to inhibit SW firing in the MW sector.

Since the secondary weapon is mechanically coupled to the commander's day/night

stabilized sight head, azimuth indexing of the- weapon is-not necessary. Thus this
mode affects only the elevation orientation of the secondary weapon.

After the secondary weapon is indexed in elevation, it remains indexed throughout

operations utilizing the mode that initiated the indexing. If another mode is entered
that requires slaving of the secondary weapon to either the gun/turret drive or to the
commander's day/night sight, the secondary weapon elevation brake is released,
enabling secondary weapon e levation movement. Also the secondary weapon elevation
synchro is coupled to a synchro in the gun elevation drive loop or the sight elevation
drive loop to effect synchro slaving. If another mode is entered that includes index
SW as a part of that mode, the index secondary weapon sequence is repeated.

Because this sub mode cannot exist independently of the other commander's
operating modes, a specific control and display action for this mode alone does not
exist.

2-96
2-62. _Fire Control Subsystem Activation (Turn-on Tasks)

Prerequisite: Gunner's checks prior to fire control subsystem

activation performed per paragraph 2-39.

a. Commander's control handles released and at null (detent) position.

b. GRENADE LAUNCH circuit breaker on turret power distribution panel set to

OFF.

c. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control panel to SURV.

d. NIGHT SIGHT switch on commander's day /night sight set to OFF.

e. GUNNER/DRIVER HATCH switch on CAL . 50 OVERRIDE portion of com­

mander's sight control and alignment panel set to OFF.

f. RELOAD switch on CAL . 50 OVERRIDE portion of commander's sight control

and alignment panel set to 0 FF.

g. WIPER switch on commander's sight control and alignment panel set to OFF.

h. DEFROSTER switch on commander's sight control and alignment panel set to

OFF.

i. FCS / RADIO PROTECTION switch on turret power distribution panel set to IN.

j. V ISION BLK/WIND SENSOR HTR switch on turret power distribution panel set
to OFF.

k. All circuit breaker (except GRENADE LAUNCH) on turret power distribution

panel set to ON.

2-97
 NOTE: With FIRE CONTROL switch at WATCH, only the com­
mander's controls and displays, and sight can be acti­
vated. The watch mode is a non-stabilized surveillance
mode in which fire control activation is limited to con­
serve power and avoid detection. With FIRE CONTROL
switch at ON, all fire control equipment can be acti­
vated. To provide hydraulic power for extended turret
and main weapon control, and to avoid battery discharge,
the vehicle engine must be running when FIRE CONTROL
switch is at ON.

1. FIRE CONTROL switch on turret power distribution panel set to either WATCH
or ON.

2-63. C<:>�mander's Fire Control Subsystem Malfunction Detection and Isolation

(MDI) Pre and Post-Test Checks

Perfo rm the following pre and post checks prior to performing any mission activi­
ties and at the conclusion of any m ission activities.

NOTE: The malfunction detection isolation panel (figure 2-42)

shall be on for a minimum of 2 minutes before per­
forming the following tests.

a. Lamp Test and Component Test

Prerequisites: a. Gunner checks prior to fire control subsystem

activation performed per paragraph 2-39.
b. Fire control subsystem activation performed
per paragraph 2-62.
c. Commander's day/night sight day operating
procedures performed per paragraph 2-64. a.
d. Gunners primary sight day operating pro­
cedures performed per paragraph 2-41a.

1) Gunner's primary sight door control placed to closed position.

2) Range mode switch on gunner's primary sight control unit set to AUTO.

3) Reset NULL TEST and LOOP TEST switches o n commander's mal­

function detection and isolation control panel.

4) LAMP TEST/COMPONENT TEST switch on commander's malfunction

detection isolation control panel set to LAMP TEST. All malfunction
indicators shall be illuminated.

2-98
 5) LAMP TEST/COMPONENT TEST switch set to center position.

6) LAMP TEST /COMPONENT TEST switch set to COMPONENT TEST. No

malfunction indicators shall be illuminated.

7) LAMP TEST/COMPONENT TEST switch set to center position.

b. Commander Controls Commander's Day/Night Sight and Secondary Weapon

_Loop Test

Prerequisites: a. Fire control subsystem activation performed

per paragraph 2-62.
b. Commander's day/night sight day operating
procedures performed per paragraph 2-64. a.

1) WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control set to CAL

. 50 NORM.

2) Palm switches on commander's control handles depressed.

3) LOOP TEST momentary switch on commander's malfunction detection

isolation panel pressed and released. No malfunction indication
indicated.

C. Commander Controls Commander's Day/Night Sight, Gunner's Primary

;3ight, and Main Weapon Loop Test

Prerequisites: a. Gunners checks prior to fire control

subsystem activation performed per
paragraph 2-39.
b. Fire control subsystem activation performed
per paragraph 2-62.
c. Gunners Primary Sight day operating pro­
cedures performed per paragraph 2-41. a.
d. Commander's day/night sight day operating
procedures performed per paragraph 2-64. a.

2-99
 1) WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control set to
MAIN GUN.

2) Palm switches on commander's control handles depressed.

3) LOOP TEST momentary switch on commander's malfunction detection and

isolation panel pressed and released. No malfunction indication noted.

2-64. Commander's Day/Night Sight Activation (Turn-on) Procedures (Figure 2- 38 ),

Prerequisite: Fire Control Subsystem Activation (turn-on) Tasks

performed per paragraph 2-62.

a. <�gmmander's Day/Night Sight Day Operating Procedures

NOTE: All controls and displays are on commander's day/night

sight unless otherwise stated.

1) NIGHT SIGHT switch set to O FF.

2) Sight azimuth brake in operating position.

3) STABILIZATION switch set to ON.

4) Left-right and fore-aft browpad adjustments set to desired position for use.

5) Illuminated reticle in sight field of view observed.

6) Diopter adjustments adjusted for eye accommodation.

7) RETICLE BRIGHTNESS control set to desired brightness.

8) FILTERS switch set to desired filter (GLARE, NORM, or CONTRAST).

9) MAGNIFICATION selector set to desired magnification.

10) WIPER switch on commander's sight control and alignment panel

activated as necessary.

11) WASHER pushbutton on commander's sight control and alignment panel

depressed and released as necessary.

12) DEFROSTER switch on commander's sight control and alignment panel

activated as necessary.
b. Commander's Day/Night Sight Night Operating Procedures.

NOTE: All controls and displays are on the commander's

day/night sight unless otherwise stated.

1) NIGHT SIGHT switch set to ON.

2) Sight azimuth brake in operating position.

2-100
 3) STABILIZATION switch set to ON.

4) Left-right and fore�aft browpad adjustments set to desired position for use.
5) Illuminated reticle in sight field of view observed.

6) Diopter adjustments adjusted for eye accommodation.

7) RETICLE BRIGHTNESS control set to desired brightness.

8) NIGHT FOCUS switch set to desired position (FAR or NEAR) .

9) FILTERS switch set to NORM.

10) MAGNIFICATION selector set to LOW.

11) WIPER switch on commander's sight control and alignment panel

activated as necessary.
12) WASHER pushbutton on commander's sight control and alignment panel
pressed and released as necessary.

13) DEFROSTER switch on commander's sight control and alignment panel

activated as necessary.

2-65. Commander's Target Surveillance Tasks

Prerequisites: a. Fire control subsystem activation tasks

performed per paragraph 2-62.
b. For day use - commander's day/night
sight day operating procedures performed
per paragraph 2-64a.
c. For night use - commander's day/night
sight night operating procedures per
paragraph 2-64b.

a. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control set to SURV.

b. Palm switches on commanders control handles activated.

c. Reticle and target in commander's day/night sight field-of-view observed.

d. Reticle centered on target to be observed.

e. Palm switches on commander's control handles released.

2-66. Commander's Target Watch Tasks

a. FIRE CONTROL selector on turret power distribution panel set to WATCH,

and tank engine not running.

b. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control set to SURV.

2-101
 c. For day watch - commander's day/night sight day operating procedures
performed per paragraph 2-64a.

For night watch - commander's day/night sight night operating procedures

performed per paragraph 2-64b.

d. Palm switches on commander's control handles activated,

e. Reticle and target in commander's day night sight field of-view observed.

f. Reticle centered on target to be observed.

g. Palm switches on commander's control handles released.

2-67. Commander's Target Designate Tasks

Prerequisites: a. Gunner's checks prior to fire control subsystem

activation performed per paragraph 2-39.

b. Fire control subsystem activation tasks performed

per paragraph 2-62.
c. For day use - commander's day/night sight day
operating procedures performed per paragraph
2-64a.
Gunner's primary sight day operating procedures
performed per paragraph 2-41a.
d. For night use - commander's day/night sight
night operating procedures performed per
paragraph 2-64b.
Gunner's primary sight night operating procedures
performed per paragraph 2-41b.

a. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control panel set

, SURV or , 50 CAL.

b. Palm switches on commander's control handles activated.

c. Reticle and target in commander's day/night sight field-of-view observed.

d. Reticle centered on target to be designated.

e. Target designate switch (on right handle of commander's control handles)

pressed and held until gunner verifies target is being viewed in his gunner's primary
sight.

f. Palm switches or target designate switch on commander's control handles

rel ased.

2-68. Commander's Gunner Monitoring Tasks

Prerequisities: a. Gunner's checks prior to fire control subsystem

activation performed per paragraph 2-39.
b. Fire control subsystem activation tasks
performed per paragraph 2-62.
2-102
 c. For day use - commander's day/night
sight day operating procedures performed
per paragraph 2-64a.
Gunner's primary sight day operating
procedures performed per paragraph 2-41a.
d. For night use - commander's day/night sight
night operating procedures performed per
paragraph 2-64b.
Gunner's primary sight night operating pro­
cedures performed per paragraph 2-41b.

a. Palm switches on commander's control handles released.

b. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control set to MG or

MAIN GUN

c. Gunner's target viewed in commander's day/night sight field-of-view

d. Commander's reticle centered on object being viewed by gunner.

2-69. Commander's Manual Range Control Tasks.

Prerequisites: a. Fire control subsystem activation tasks

performed per paragraph 2-62.
b. Commander's day/night sight day or night
operating procedures performed per paragraph
2-64a or 2-64b.
a. RANGE MODE switch on gunner's primary sight control unit set to MANUAL.
b. WEAPON ACTIVATE selector on commander's weapon control panel set to
MAIN GUN.
c. Palm switches on commander's control handles activated.

d. MANUAL RANGE switch (left handle thumbswitch) of commanders control

handles depressed until desired range is displayed on range display in commander's
day/night sight eyepiece.

2-70. 9ommander's Laser Ranging Tasks

Prerequisites: a. Gunner's checks prior to fire control subsy�tem

activation performed per paragraph 2-39.
b. Fire control subsystem activation tasks
performed per paragraph 2-62.
c. For day use - perform commanders
day/night sight day operating procedures
per paragraph 2-64a, and gunner's
primary sight day operating procedures
per paragraph 2-41a.
d. For night use -perform commander's
day/night sight night operating procedures
per paragraph 2-64b, and gunner's
primary sight night operating procedures
per paragraph 2-41b.

2-103
 NOTE: Laser ranging is normally not performed when missile
firing is anticipated.

a. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on co mmander's weapon control set to MAIN

GUN or MG.

b. RANGE MODE switch on gunner's primary sight control unit set to AUTO.

c. Palm switches on commander's control handles depressed.

d. Reticle centered on target in commander's day/night sight field-of-view

observed.

WARNING

Laser hazard. Observe applicable precautions.

See safety data.

e. Laser fire pushbutton (right handle pushbutton) on commander's control

handles pressed and released.

f. Commander's day/night sight field-of-view momentarily blocked.

NOTE: If range warning indicator is lighted amber, re-evaluate

steps d through g.

A zero range value indicates no target return.

A range value and a warning light indicate multiple

target return.

g. Range display indicator in commander's day/night sight eyepiece indicates

range value.

2-71. Commander's Secondary Weapon Activation and Control Tasks

Prerequisites: a. Fire Control subsystem activation tasks

performed per paragraph 2-62.
b. For day use - commander's day/night
sight day operating procedures performed
per paragraph 2-64a.
c. For night use - commander's day/night
sight night operating procedures performed
per paragraph 2 64b.

a. GUNNER/DRIVER HATCH switch on CAL . 50 OVERRIDE portion of

commander's sight control and alignment panel set to OFF.
b. RELOAD switch on commander's sight control and alignment panel set to OFF.

c. WEAPON ACTIVATE selector on commander's weapon control panel set to

either CAL • 50 AIRCRAFT or NORM.

2-104
 d. Palm switches on commander's control handles depressed.

e. Reticle and target in commander's day/night sight field-of-view observed.

NOTE: Secondary weapon charging circuit is not installed in pilot

vehicle #7. Charge secondary weapon by pulling lanyard
rearward and releasing.

f. MW LOAD/CAL 50 CHG pushbutton (left handle pushbutton) pressed to

•

initiate charging cal . 50 machine gun.

g. Ready-to-fire indicator viewed in commanders day night sight eyepiece

lighted green.

2-72. Commander's Main Weapon or Machine Gun Activation and Control Tasks

Prerequisites: a. Gunner's checks prior to fire control subsystem

activation performed per paragraph 2-39.
b. Fire control subsystem activation tasks
performed per paragraph 2-62.
c. For day use - commander's day/night sight
day operating procedures performed per
paragraph 2-64a, and gunner's primary
sight day operating procedures performed
per paragraph 2-41. a.
d. For night use - commander's day/night
sight night operating procedures performed
per paragraph 2-64b, and gunner's primary
sight night operating procedures performed
per paragraph 2-41. b.

a. �ommander's Main Weapon Activation and Control Tasks

1) WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control panel

set to MAIN GUN.

2) Palm switches on commander's control handles depressed.

3) MAIN GUN WEAPON ACTIVATE indicator on commanders weapon

control panel lighted.

4) AMMO SELECT switch on commander's weapon control panel set

for round to be fired.

5) ROUND NOT AVAILABLE lamp on commander's weapon control

panel not lighted.

NOTE: AMMO SELECT indicator for given type round

lights only after round is loaded in breech and
does not go out until round is fired or unloaded.
If round different than that desired is in breech
it must be unloaded or fired before attempting to
load desired round.

2-105
 6) AMMO SELECT indicator on commander's weapon control panel
is not lighted,
WARNING

Breech and automatic loader moving

hazard.

7) MW LOAD/CAL • 50 CHG pushbutton (left handle pushbutton) on

commander's control handles pressed and released.

NOTE: Palm switches on commander's control handles

must be activated throughout complete load cycle,

LOAD IN PROCESS lamp will be illuminated during

loading cycle.

8) Automatic loading of main weapon observed.

9) AMMO SELECT indicator corresponding to round loaded lighted.

10) Ready-to-fire indicator in commander's day/night sight eyepiece lighted

green.

b. Commander's Machine Gun Activation and Control Tasks

1) WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control panel set

to MG.

2) Palm switches on commander's control handles activated.

3) MG WEAPON ACTIVATE indicator on commander's weapon control panel

lighted.
NOTE: Charging of machine gun is required only
before initial use of weapon.

4) Charge handle of machine gun pulled rearward and released by gunner.

5) Safety on machine gun set to F (fire) position by gunner.

6) Ready-to-fire indicator in commander's day/night sight eyepiece lighted

green.

2-73. Commander's Secondary Weapon Firing Tasks

Prerequisites: a. Fire control subsystem activation tasks performed

per paragraph 2-62.
b. For day use - commander's day/night sight
day operating procedures performed per
paragraph 2-64a.
c. For night use - commander's day/night sight
night operating procedures performed per
paragraph 2-64b,

2-106
 a. Perform commander's secondary weapon activation and control tasks per
pagraph 2-71.

b. Palm switches of commander's control handles depressed.

c. Reticle and target in sight field-of-view observed.

d. Reticle centered on target to be engaged.

e. Gwmer and Driver hatches closed.

f. Ready-to-fire indicator in commander's day night sight eyepiece lights green.

NOTE: During burst fire, adjust control handles so target is

centered in zone of fire.

g. Weapon trigger switch (left and right hand fingerswitches) on commander's

control handles pressed and held to fire desired burst.

2-74. _Commander's Main Weapon and Machi ne Gun Firing Tasks With Gwmer's
Primary Sight Off.

Prerequisites: a. Fire control subsystem activation tasks

performed per paragraph 2-62.
b. For day firing - commander's day/night
sight day operating procedures performed
per paragraph 2-64a.
c. For night firing - commander's day/night
sight night operating procedures performed
per paragraph 2-64b.

a. Commander Fires Main Weapon Conventional Round

1) Perform commander's main weapon activation and control tasks per

paragraph 2-72a.

2) Palm switches on commander's control handles depressed.

3) Reticle and target in sight field-of-view observed.

NOTE: Target tracking (with reticle centered on

target) must be continued before and during
gun firing.

4) Reticle centered on target observed.

5) Main gun offsets estimated, and commander's day/night sight reticle

displaced from center of target by estimated amount prior to firing.

6) Ready-to-fire indicator in commander's primary sight eyepiece lighted

green.

2-107
 WARNING

Breech recoil hazard and breech opening

hazard.

7) Weapon triggers on commander's control handles (left and right hand

fingerswitches) pressed and released.

8) Main gnn fired noted.

9) Commanders day/night sight field-of-view momentarily blocked.

10) Green ready-to-fire indicator in commander's day/night sight not lighted.

11) Ronnd strike in relation to target observed.

12) AMMO SELECT indicator on commander's weapon control panel not

lighted.

NOTE: Steps 13 through 16 are only to be performed if target

engagement and main gun firing are to be continued.

WARNING

Breech and automatic loader moving

hazard.

13) MW LOAD/CAL • 50 CHG pushbutton (left handle pushbutton) on

commander's control handles pressed and released.

NOTE: Palm switches on commander's control handles must

be depressed throughout complete load cycle.

LOAD IN PROCESS lamp will be illuminated during

loading cycle.

14) Automatic loading of main gnn observed.

15) AMMO SELECT indicator on commander's weapon control panel

corresponding to round loaded lighted.

16) Ready-to-fire indicator in commander's primary sight eyepiece

lighted green.

b. Commander Fires Machine Gnn

1) Perform commander's machine gnn activation and control tasks per

paragraph 2-72b.

2) Palm switches on commander's control handles depressed.

2-108
 3) Reticle and target in sight field-of-view observed.

NOTE: Target tracking (with reticle centered on target) must

be continued before and during gun firing.

4) Reticle centered on target observed.

5) Ready-to-fire indicator in commander's day/night sight eyepiece
lighted green.

NOTE: During burst of fire, adjust control handles so target

is centered in zone of fire.

6) Weapon triggers on commander's control handles (left and right

hand fingerswitches) pressed and held to fire desired burst.

7) Round striking target observed.

2-75. Commander's Main Weapon and Machine Gun Firing Tasks With Gunner's
Primary Sight On

Prerequisites: a.
Gunner's checks prior to fire control subsystem
activation performed per paragraph 2- 39.
b. Fire control subsystem activation tasks
performed per paragraph 2-62.
c. For day firing - commander's day/night sight
day operating procedures performed per
paragraph 2-64a.
gunner's primary sight day operating
procedures performed per paragraph 2-41a.
d. For night firing - commander's day/night
sight night operating procedures performed
per paragraph 2-64b.
Either gunner's primary sight day or night
operating procedures performed per para­
graph 2-41a or 2-41. b.
a. Commander Fires Main Weapon Conventional Round

1) Perform commander's main weapon activation and control tasks

per paragraph 2-72a.

2) RANGE MODE switch on gunner's primary sight control unit set

to AUTO.

3) Palm switches of commander's control handles depressed.

4) Reticle and target in commander's day/night sight field-of-view observed.

2-109
 5) Reticle centered on target observed.

WARNING

Laser hazard. Observe applicable pre­

cautions. See safety data.

6) Laser fire pushbutton (right handle pushbutton) on commander's control

handles pressed and released.

7) Commander's day/night sight field-of-view momentarily blocked.

NOTE: If range warning indicator is lighted amber,

re-evaluate steps 4 through 8.

A zero range value indicates no target return.

A range value and warning light indicates

multiple target return.

8) Range display indicator in commander's day/night sight eyepiece

indicates range value.

9) Ready-to-fire indicator in commander's day/night sight eyepiece

lighted green.

NOTE: Target tracking (with reticle centered on target)

must be continued before and during main gun
firing.

WARNING

Breech recoil hazard and Breech opening

hazard.

10) Weapon triggers on commander's control handles (left and right hand
fingerswitches) pressed and released.

11) Main gun fired noted.

12) Commander's day/night sight field-of-view momentarily blocked.

13) Green ready-to-fire indicator in sight eyepiece not lighted.

14) Round strike in relation to target observed.

15) AMMO SELECT indicator on commanders weapon control panel not

lighted.

2-110
 NOTE: Steps 16 through 19 are only to be performed if
target engagement and main gun firing are to be
continued.

WARNING

Breech and automatic loader moving hazard.

16} MW LOAD/CAL 50 CHG pushbutton ( left handle pushbutton} on

•

commanders control handles pressed and released.

NOTE: Palm switches on commander's control handles

must be depressed throughout complete load cycle.

LOAD IN PROCESS lamp will be illuminated during

loading cycle.

17} Automatic loading of main gun observed.

18} AMMO SELECT indicator on commander's weapon control panel

corresponding to round loaded lighted.

19} Ready-to-fire indicator in commander's day/night sight eyepiece

lighted green.

b. Commander Fires Missile

NOTE: Laser ranging is normally not performed for missile

firing.

1} Perform commander's main weapon activation and control tasks per

paragraph 2-72a.

2} Palm switches on commander's control handles depressed.

3} Reticle and target in commander's day/night sight observed.

NOTE: Target tracking (with reticle centered on target}

must be continued before and during firing and
throughout missile flight.

4} Reticle centered on target to be engaged.

5) Ready-to-fire indicator in commanders day/night sight eyepiece

lighted green.

WARNING

Breech recoil hazard. Breech and automatic

loader operating hazard.

2-111
 6) Weapon trigger (left and right handle fingerswitches) on commander's
control handles pressed and released.

7) Missile fired observed.

8) Target tracking throughout missile flight performed.

9) Green ready-to-fire indicator in commander's day/night sight

eyepiece not lighted.

10) MISSILE AMMO SELECTOR indicator on commander's weapon control

panel not lighted.

11) Expended missile cap removed from breech by automatic loader

observed.

NOTE: Steps 12 through 15 are to be performed only

if target engagement is to be continued and
missile firing to be repeated.

WARNING

Breech and automatic loader moving

hazard.

NOTE: Step 12 shall not be performed until after missile

flight is completed or flight will automatically be
aborted.

12) MAIN WEAPON LOAD/CAL . 50 CHG pushbutton (left handle pushbutton)

on commanders control handles pressed and released.

NOTE: Palm switches on commander's control handles

must be activated throughout complete load cycle.

LOAD IN PROCESS lamp will be illuminated

during loading cycle.

13 ) Automatic loading of main gun observed.

14 ) MISSILE AMMO SELECT indicator on commander's weapon control lighted.

15) Ready-to-fire indicator in commander's day/night eyepiece lighted green.

c. Commander Fires Machine Gun

1) Perform commander's machine gun activation and control tasks per

paragraph 2-72b.

2) Palm switches on commander's control handles depressed.

3) Reticle and target in commander's day/night sight eyepiece observed.

2-112
 5) Green ready-to-fire indicator in commander's day/night sigh� eyepiece
observed.

NOTE: During burst of fire adjust control handles so target is

centered in one of fire.

6) Weapon trigger switch (left and right handle fingerswitches) on

commander's control handles pressed and held to fire desired burst.

7) Rounds striking target observed.

2-76. Fire Control Subsystem Deactivation Tasks

a. Perform gunner's fire control subsystem weapon deactivation tasks

in accordance with paragraph 2-47.

b. If necessary, secure weapon for travel in accordance with paragraph 2-49.

c. Perform shutdown of gunner's fire control subsystems in accordance with

paragraph 2-48.

d. Commander's control handles released.

e. WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control panel set to

SURV.

f. NIGHT SIGHT switch on commander 's day/night sight set to OFF

g. FIRE CONTROL switch on turret power distribution panel set to OFF.

When switching from ON to OFF, pause momentarily in the WATCH position to
allow the secondary weapon to index in elevation.

2-113
'

"·
. .

.....

Figure 2-35. l Commander's St-ation (l of -1.)

2-114
 "'"

(
('
.....

..
(
�·

0:::
I­ .�
. V') u.

O....J•
w

ffi z.
3:�
0
....J 0..

.��
•·
1-
- UJ
0:::
I- "�I 0:::
;:- .z - :::>
z 0
0 I-
0.. u
<t:
UJ 0
3: �
z
<t:
�

:2-11'5
 DAY/NIGHT SIGHT CONTROL �
AND ALIGNMENT PANEL t' �Itl ·.,.=::r

\
EL ECTRONIC EQUIPMENT RACK
•
t

N
.--
::: \ ....... I" •
o- RADIO RECEIVER (FIG. 4-16)
I

·
)t
......

Figure 2-35.3 Cc·rnmancll r's Station (3 of!,)

 I

SEAT ADJUSTMENT
CONTROL HANDLE

Fi9urc 2-35.4 Ccrrmcn<kr's Slolion ('I d -1)

2-117
 3

(§)
WARNING
�;;;;;;;�
WEAPON
ACTIVATE
BH
HEAT
P
CAL MG
Q 0 OMISSI
W

NrM I
SURV

SABOT
n ()MAIN
Y
GUN
0 D A
CRAFT
I
f!';::t" D
DIM/
�

TEST

-\
CONTROlJDISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

WEAPON AC TIVATE
(5-Position Rotary)

• MAIN GUN Illuminates (Green) to indicate commander

(Lamp) control of main gun.

Allows commander to drive, load, and fire main

gun utilizing commander control handles.

Initiates laser capacitor charge and ac tivates laser

Q-switch motor if palm switch is closed.

• MG Illuminates (Green) indicating commander con­

(Lamp) trol of coaxial machine gun.

Allows commander to control and fire coaxial

machine gun utilizing commander control handles.

Note: Selection of either of the above

positions with the commander palm
switches released wi II enable com­
mander to monitor gunner.

Figure 2-36. Comm ander1s Weapon Control Panel

2-118
CONTROL/D ISPLAY FUNCTION D ESCRIPTION

• SURV Allows commander to control commander sight

utili zing commander control handles.

• CAL. 50 (NORM or Illuminates (Green) indicating commander control

AIRCRAFT) of CaI. 50 machine gun.
(Lamp)
Allows commander to control, charge, and fire
Cal. 50 machine gun.

Note: Firing rate established by selector

position on weapon.

• NORM Provides tracking rates up to 75 mils/s for

normal tracking of ground targets.

• AIRCRAFT Provides increased tracking rates (up to 400 mils/s

in Az and up to 150 mils/s in El) to ollow track­
ing of aircraft.

2 AMMO SELEC Allows selection of one of five ammunitions for

(5-Position Rotary) loarling (SABOT, BH, HEAT , W P, MISSILE).

SABOT, BH, HEAT, WP, Illuminates (Green) to indicate type of round

MISSILE located in breech. Lamp remains liqhted until
(5 lamps) round is fired or removed from main gun.

3 MASTER WARNING Illuminates (Red) when a functional failure

(Lamp) mode is detected .

4 LOAD IN PROCESS Illuminates (White) during automatic lo:�ding

(Lamp) of main gun.

5 ROUND NOT Illuminates (Amber) when round selected for

AVAILABLE (Lamp) loading is not available in automatic loader.

6 D IM TEST Provides dimming control for lamps on weapon

control panel, CS control and alignment panel,
and TPDP vision block heater lamp.

Provides test at maximum brightness for above

lamps plus ammo overtemp indicator lamps on
TPDP , and ready-to-fire lamp in commander's
sight.

Figure 2-36. Commander's Weapon Control Panel -L egend

2-119
 6
2 TGT DES
MW LOAD/
1 CAL. SO CHG 3
MANUAL LASER
RANGE Fl RE

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Handle Adjustment Provides adjustment of the control handles

in height and angle for 5th through 95th
(Not Illustrated)
percentile commander's requirements in
• Elevation either open or closed hatch modes. The
handles also position forward to permit
• Angle
commander to move past the handles into
the center of the turret.

Figure 2-37. Commander•s Control Handles

2-120
CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCR IPTION/( lASSIFICATION

CONTROL HANDLE Enables azimuth and elevation control of sights

and/or weapons selected when handle is activated.

MANUAL RANGE Enables commander to insert manual range into FCS

(Thumbswitch-Left computer provided manual range is selected and
Handle) commander controls main gun or coaxial machine
gun.

2 MW LOAD/CAL .50 Initiates load of round as selected by main gun ammo

CHG selector switch when commander controls main gun.
(Pushbutton-Left Handle)
Initiates charging of Cal. 50 machine gun when
commander controls weapon.

Initiates recycling of missile system when depressed

during a missile firing sequence.

3 LASER FIRE Enables commander firing of laser rangefi nder when

(Pushbutton- Right Handle) commander controls the main gun or coaxial machine
gun and laser is in AUTO mode.

4 PALM Activates/deactivates control handle system for

(Switch on Each Handle) azimuth and elevation control.

Enables other commander control handle switch

functions.

Enables charging of laser capacitor and activation

of laser Q-switch motor when MAIN GUN is
selected.

Removes Cal. 50 machine gun safety when Cal. 50

is selected.

5 TR IGGER S Enables commander to fire the weapon activated by

(Fingerswitches) the weapon activation selector.

6 TGT DES Enables commander to designate a target from the

commander's sight to the gunner's primary sight/main
weapon. Inhibits laser firing while activated. Target
Designate also recycles the missile system prior to
turret movement in azimuth.

Figure 2-37. Commander's Control Handles -Legend

2-121
 0

9
0

AZIMUTH

0
o��G�S 0

4 STABILIZATION � 6

3� I
NIGHT FOCUS FILTER S
RETiCLE 0
BRIGHTNESS OFF

•FAR 0GLARE

� I �: � : E AR N
O R

R A !

STAB DRIFT

ELEVATION AZIMUTH

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

STAB DRIFT-AZIMUTH Provides azimuth drift correction to commander's sight

(Continuous Rotary) electronics.

2 STAB DRIFT-ELEVATION Provides elevation drift correction to commander's sight

electronics.

3 NIGHT FOCUS Provides night sight FAR/NEAR focusing capability when

(Momentary On-Off) night sight is selectedo

Figure 2-38. Commander's Day/Night Sight and Controls

2-122
 CONTROL/DJSPLA Y FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

4 FILT ERS Enables operator to select either neutral density or

( 3-Position Toggle) orange-yellow fi Iter.

• GLARE

• NORMAL

• CONTRAST

5 NIGHT SIGHT Provides power to drive mechanism to position telescope and

(2-Position Toggle) provide power for night operation in the ON position. In
the OFF position the telescope optics are positioned for
day operation.

• ON/OFF

6 STABILIZATION Enables selection of stabilized or direct drive mode for com­

(2-Position Toggle) mander sight and cal. 50 machine gun during normal operation.

• ON/OFF

7 RETICLE BRIGHTNESS Provides brightness control for reticle lamp.

8 BORESIGHT Utilized to focus on the target board while checking align-

(2-Position Toggle) ment of commander's sight to main gun and co I. 50 machine gun.

• ON/OFF

9 MAGN IFICATION Provides power to drive mechanisms which will position tele­
(2-Position Lever) scope optics for. corr ect magnification when day viewing
is selected.

10 Diopter Adjustments Provides ± 4 diopter adjustment for eye accommodation.

11 Left-Right and Fore- Provides !::>rowpad adjustment for use of sight.

Aft Adjustment

12 AZIMUTH Indicates azimuth relationship (in mi Is) of CDNS and MAIN GUN.

13 Sight Azimuth Brake Provides means for disengaging the C DNS azimuth brake to
(2-Position Lever) permit a manual rotation of the sight whenever the sight drive
azimuth system is de-energized.
• Operating Position

• Brake Release Position

Focus, Image Intensifier Provides manual focus adjustment of intensifier tube image.
(Not Illustrated)

Figure 2-38. Commander's D ay/Night Sight and Controls - Legend

2-123
 DARK BACKGRO UND
AREA MALFUNCTION
IND I CATO R (RED)

�
0 5
.. I I e 'I
SCALE IN MI LS
I

4
RANGE WARNING READ Y-TO -FIRE
(AMBER) (GREEN)

RANGE DISPLAY DARK BACKGROUND

(RED ) AREA

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCR IP TION

Illuminated Reticle Modified NATO reticle with provisions

(Eyepiece Display) for missile firing.

2 Range Display Indicator Indicates range input to the ballistic com­

(Eyepiece Display) puter in meters if commander has selected
MAIN GUN or MG.

3 Ready-to-Fire Indicator Indicates weapon selected is ready to fire.

(Eyepiece Display)

4 Range Warning Indicates multiple laser returns or no

returns.

5 Malfunction Indicator lndi cates a functional failure detected.

(Red)

Figure 2-39. Commander's D ay/Night Sight Eyepiece Display

2-124
 � CDR SIGHTALIGN <> CMPTR CONTROL �

0
AIR PRESS

320 34 --
·:.d
2
-PRIMARY SIGH T -
ELEVATION A ZIMUTH
16 ON UP L R

�®)
�8

'0"
1s A I N GU N AIR T EMP

14 � I ELEVAT �
UP
N
L
A Z IMUTH
R
40

13
I@®J (@) CAL. 50 ALIGN -40

POWDER
120

TEMP
�9
@
MAIN GUN
CDR SIGHT CLEARANCE 40

'0�10
"
ON UP ON UP
12

11 �®) ® SIGHT WINDOW

-40

CAL. 50 OVERRIDE
1£0

@
WIPER WASHER GUNNER/DRIVER HATCH

-RELOAD-

4 7

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

WASHER Depressing pushbutton energizes pump in washer reservoir and

(Pushbutton Momentary pump assembly for application of washing fluid to sight window.
Contact)

2 WIPER ON/OFF Activates commander sight window wiper.

(2-Position Toggle)

3 DEFROSTER Illuminates to indicate that defroster is switched on.

(Amber I ndicator)

4 DEFROSTER ON/OFF Activates the commander sight window defroster.

(2-Position Toggle)

Figure 2-40. Commander's Sight Control and Alignment Control

2-125
 CONTROUDISPIAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

5 GUNNER/DRIVER HATCH
Allows firing of cal. 50 machine gun when gunner's or
• ON
driver's hatch is open.

• OFF (Norma I Position) Firing of cal. 50 machine gun is inhibited when gunner's
or driver's hatch is open.

6 RELOAD
(2-Position Toggle)

• ON Enables firing of all remaining cal. 50 rounds.

• OFF Inhibits firing of cal. 50 machine gun when all but last few
rounds have been fired.

7 RELOAD Illuminates to indicate that co I. 50 machine gun needs to be

(Amber I ndico tor) reloaded. Lamp illuminates and fire is inhibited when
machine gun has fired all but a small number of rounds. Lamp
illuminates regardless of Reload Control Switch position.

8 AIR PRESS Allows commander to manually input estimated atmospheric

(Continuous Rotary) pressure into the FCS computer.

9 AIR TEMP Allows commander to manually input estimated air tempera­

(Continuous Rotary) ture into the FCS computer.

10 POWDER TEMP Allows commander to manually input estimated powder temper­

(Continuous Rotary) ature into the FCS computer.

11 MAIN GUN CLEARANCE Allows adjustment of the cal. 50 elevation fire inhibit circuitry
(Rotary, Screwdriver to preclude damage to the main gun and/or missile transmitter
Adjust) while firing the cal. 50 in the turret forward sector.

12 CDR SIGHT Aligns the cal. 50 machine gun to the commander's sight in
(Rotary Screwdriver Adjust) elevation.

13 MAIN GUN AZIMUTH Used to align the commander's sight to the main gun in azimuth.
(Rotary, Screwdriver Adjust)

14 MAIN GUN ELEVATION Used to align the commander's sight to the main gun in elevation.
(Rotary, Screwdriver Adjust)

15 PRIMARY SIGHT AZIMUTH Used to align the commander's sight line of sight to the primary
(Rotary, Screwdriver Adjust) sight in azimuth.

16 PRIMARY SIGHT ELEVATION Used to align the commander's sight line of sight to the primary
(Rotary, Screwdriver Adjust) sight in elevation.

Figure 2-40. Commander's Sight Control and Alignment Control -L eg end

2-126
 8 1

----

0 0 ®
@) <' TURRET POWER (> UI•O

,.(
OWf"l{"''

110 ""'[ 110

0 0
•ov"o s••ot

liiiOlt., '"

.., I l I C �I
"'�' C· • Olf

© ·o © 0 © © © © © © © ©

@) 0 ... � , ......
0 0 0 0
""
'" '"'
'''"'

3
7

CONTROL/ DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

FIRE CONTROL
(4-Position Rotary Switch)
AC and DC power and turret hydraulies for aII fire control
• ON
equipment is switched on.

• WATCH AC and DC power supplied only to commander's day/night

sight group, control handles, and 400 Hz power supply.

• OFF AC and DC power for all fire control equipment is de-energized.

• HYDR PWR Only turret hydraulic power is supplied.

2 FCS/RA DIO PROTECTION Enable commander to remove ERA (Electronics Rack Assembly)
(2-Positioned Covered and CS (Commander's Sight) power supply thermal protective
Toggle) Safety Wired circuitry. Additionally, radio transient suppression is removed.
In the IN position the above protective circuits are operating.
• IN

• OUT

3 CB STATUS Enables check of circuit breaker status by activating circuit

(2-Position Toggle) breaker status lamps. Status lamps illuminate when the circuit
breaker status toggle switch is moved to TEST to indicate
• TEST/OFF
that the corresponding circuit breaker is on.
(Spring Return-to-OFF)
(25 Lamps)

Figur e 2-41. Turret Power Distribution Panel (T PD P)

2-127
 CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

4 CLTV PROT AIR INTAKE

(Continuous Rotary Switch)

• OFF Enables commander to control air flow through collective

protector unit. Clockwise rotation of this control increases
• LO
the flow of air.
• HI

5 AMMO OVERTEMP (2) Two indicator lamps, controlled by sensors in bustle illuminate
FIRE NO SABOT (Amber) when operating temperatures for the indicated ammo are
FIRE NO ROUND (Red) exceeded.

6 VISION BLK/WIND SENSOR HTR

(2-P osition Toggle) Enables activation/deactivation of the commander's vision
block and wind sensor heaters.
• ON/OFF
Lamp illuminates (Amber) to indicate that the vision block and
• (Lamp)
wind sensor heaters are activated.

7 CIRCUIT BREAKERS (11) The circuit breakers control the supply of power to protect
and enable the operation of the identified fire control equipments.

• RADIO/INTERCOM
• CONTROL LOGIC
The red MDI lamp when lit indicates a functional failure mode in the
circuits associated with that circuit breaker. Tripping the
circuit breaker will extinguish the associated lamp and master
warning indicators.

• MALF DET SYS

• MAIN GUN HV High voltage for firing circuit.

• AUTOLOADER

• GUN/TURRET DRIVE
(Red MDI Lamp)

• CDR SIGHT
(Red MDI Lamp)

• 400 HZ POWER
(Red MDI Lamp)

Figure 2-41. Turret Power Distribution Panel (TPD P) -L egend

2-128
 CONT ROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL D ESC RIPTION

7 CIRCUIT BREA KERS (11)

-Continued

• LASER
(Red MDI Lamp)

• COMPUTER
(Red MDI Lamp)

• GUNNER PRIMARY SIGHT

(Red MDI Lamp)

8 CIRCUIT BREAK ERS (13) The circuit breakers control the supply of power to protect and
enable operation of the identified fire control equipments.
• CLTV PROT

• ENGINE ELEC Note: Circuit breakers have associated white indicator

• LIGHTING AND HEATING
• TUR BLO
• HD LT/BUSTLE BLOWER
• SCHLT
• AUX TLSCP/C-R DET
lamps which illuminate if CB is ON when circuit
breaker status check is made. Exceptions are
amber indicators for; FCS blowers which illuminates
if FCS blowers are off when either WATCH or ON
position of fire control switch is selected: SCAV
which illuminates if HYD PWR is selected on fire
control switch.

• MG

• SCAV

• MSL PWR

• BREECH MOTOR

• G RENADE LAUNCH

• FCS BLOWERS

Figure 2-41. Turret Power Distribution Panel (TPDP) - Legend

2-129
MDI TEST CONNECTOR f.MINTENANCE DISPLAY COMMANDED FCS CHECKOUT

6 5 1 2 3

a@@@@@@@o© 4

©©©©©©©©©
©©©©©©©@© L
���T
COMPONENT
TEST
LOOP TEST

� 0 �

� 0 0

1 GPS POWER SUPPLY · OC 15 CS ELEVATION RATE

2 GPSAZIMUTH 16 SW ELEVATION
3 GPS ELEVATION 17 CONTROL LOGIC
4 LASER 18 POWER SUPPLY ·400HZ
5 GTD POWER SUPPLY · OC 19 HYDR ·FLUID OVERTEMP
6 OFFSET 20 HYDR ·PRESSURE LOW
7 TURRET AZIMUTH 21 BALLISTIC COMPUTER

MAGNETIC 8
9
MW ELEVATION
HULL AZIMUTH RATE
22
23
CANT SENSOR
CROSSWIND SENSOR

LATCHING 10
11
TURRET ELEVATION RATE
TURRET ROLL RATE
24
25
SPARE
SPARE
SPARE
INDICATORS 12 CS POWER SUPPLY 26
13 CS AZIMUTH 27 SPARE
14 CS ELEVATION 28 SPARE

COVERS (SHOWN DOWN)

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1. MDI DELAY Illuminates (A mber) for two minutes indicating a delay

of MDI operation following FCS prime power turn-on
or re-establishment after a prime power interruption.
When a LOOP TEST is commanded, lamp indicates if
the proper mode has not been selected.

2. TEST IN PROCESS Illuminates (White) to indicate that a malfunction

( Indicator Lamp) detection/isolation test is in process. The test may be
either operator-initiated (LOOP, COMPONENT, or
NULL), or automatic (COMPUTER).

3. TEST NO-GO Illuminates (Red) to indicate that a functional failure

(Indicator Lamp) mode has been detected during either an operator­
initiated test or an automatic computer test.

Figure 2-42. Commander1s Malfunction Detection and Isolation Control Panel (MDI)

2-130

- Leaend
 CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

4. L OOP TEST/OFF/RESET
(3-Position Toggle Switch,
Spring Return-to-Center)

• LOOP TEST Provides discrete which initiates control loop mal­

function detection/isolation sequence, provided
the proper mode is selected.

• RESET Resets all MDI timing circuits.

5. COMPONENT TEST/OFF/
LAMP TEST
(3-Position Toggle Switch,
Spring Return-to-Center)

• COMPONENT TEST Provides discrete to initiate special component tests

of computer, cant sensor, and laser. Also tests
Range Display and Range Warning lndi cator in GPS
and CS eyepieces.

• LAMP TEST Causes the following indicator lamps to be illumin­

ated: TEST IN PROCESS LAMP on MDI, TEST NO­
GO lamp on MDI, MDI DELAY lamp on MDI,
Six (6) red functional failure mode indicators on
TPDP, MASTER WARNlNG on commander's weapon
control panel, and master warning indicator in
commander's sight eyepiece.

6. NULL TEST/OFF/RESET
(3-Position Toggle Switch,
Spring Return-to-Center)

• NULL TEST Enables MDI circuitry to monitor signal levels in

the control loops for null conditions.

• RESET Resets all magnetic latching failure indicators on

the MDI panel.

7. FAILURE INDICATORS Set to indicate a functional failure mode detected.

(28 Magnetic L atching
Indicators)

F igure 2-42. Commander's M alfunction D etection and Isolation Control Panel (MDI)

2-131
 s B H w M 1

1 A H E p
8 A
T

@ MODE I
I RAM NOT BACK
MODE II
I NO SIG WPN TO L "POS
2 L TUBE NOT CLEAR 2 WPN NOT READY
D@
3 MAG NOT IND 3 FIRE DR NOT OPEN
4 CSTR GRIPPER REL 4 WPN DETENT
5 WPN NOT EMPTY 5 CSTR GRIPPER NOT REL
6 RD NOT SELECT 6 L TUBE NOT FUll BACK
7 STOW REST OBST 7 RAM NOT FULL FWD
8 MAN CONT ON 8 MAN CONT ON
l@YD POWER LOW 9 HYD POWER LOW @

Figure 2-43. Commander•s Counter Panel

2-132
CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1. Ammunition Counters

• SAB Displays count of SABOT (XM578)

rounds in loader.

• HEAT Displays count of HEAT (XM409) rounds

in loader.

• M Displays count of MISSILE (MGM-51C)

rounds in loader.

• BH Displays count of BH (XM625) rounds

in looder.

• WP Displays count of WP (XM410) rounds

in loader.

2. COUNT Push button to reset counter display.

(Recessed Cuppad
Pushbutton)

3. Autoloader MDI System This panel is normally covered and is

opened for MDI checks. Each warnin3
light (Red) or combinations of lights
indicates a malfunction.

Figure 2-43. Commander•s Counter Panel -Legend

2-133
 GRENADE LAUNCHER 3

FIRE
READY

LEFT
SALVO

4 �,,FF

u
CONTROL/DISPlAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

(2-Position Toggle)
• LEFT SALVO Selects all four left launchers to give an equally
spaced fan-shaped pattern from main weapon
centerline to 60 degrees to the left.

• OFF LEFT SALVO deactivated.

2 (2-Position Toggle)
• RIGHT SALVO Selects all four right launchers to give an equally
spa�ed fan-shaped pattern from the main weapon
to centerline to 60 degrees to the right.

• OFF RIGHT SALVO deactivated.

3 READY Ready light (green) comes on when left and/or

(Lamp) right salvo(s) are selected.

4 FIRE With safety pin pulled, raise toggle to fire

( Toggle-spring Loaded) selected SALVO(s).

Figure 2-44. Grenade Launcher Control Panel

2-1 34
CONTROL/DISPlAY FUNCTIONAL DESC RIPTION

Fi lter Selecti on Selects either clear lens or a red lens filter

(2-Position Rotary) for night viewing 9

2 On-Off Dimmer Rotating knob energizes lamp. Further rotation

(Switch-Potentiometer) controls brightness of lamp.

3 Lever Lock Depressing button unlocks filter selector.

(Pushbutton)

Figure 2-45. Commander1s D ome Light

2-135
 4
1-

CONTR OL/DISPlAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

sw Obtains control of RT -246/VRC(momentary

(2-Position Toggle) switch). RT -246 power switch must be in remote.

2 CHAN SEL Selects l of l 0 channels pre-set on RT -246/

(Rotary Switch) VRC.

3 CONTROL Illuminates (yellow) to indicate C-2742/VRC

(lamp) has control of RT -246/VRC.

4 PWR Three-position switch controls power applied

(Rotary Switch) to RT -246/VRC,

• OFF Turns off power.

• LO Turns RT-246/VRC receiver power on.

Transmitter has low output power when trans­

mitting.

• HI Turn RT -246/VRC receiver power on.

Transmitter has h igh output power when trans­

mitting.

Figure 2-46. Frequency Selector Control C -2742/VRC

2-136
 3 -
-- ��
-0 ����1
:---
-

��-
ALL A
SIG --- 4

0
� I tNT
/ONLY
�ON1)'
�
� o --Ds

� �� VOLUME
-1> o-D e

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION S

MONITOR Selects the audio signals heard and the receiver­

(5-Position Rotary) transmitter controlled by audio accessory
connected to C-2297/VRC.

• ALL All signals from R-442/VRC, RT-246/VRC receiver­

transmitters and intercom will be heard.

• A Only receiver/ transmitter RT-246/VRC wi II be heard.

• INT ONLY Only intercom wiII be heard.

• B Only receiver R-442/VRC will be heard.

• c Not used.

2 VOLUME Controls volume. Adjust control for the desired

volume in audio accessory.

3 Lamp illuminates (Yellow) when SIGNAL switch is

(Lamp) placed in EXT (exterior) position.

4 SIG EXT When switch is placed in SIG EXT (signal exterior)

OFF position, the commander can communicate with
(3-Position Rotary) exterior intercommunications set C-2296/VRC.

• OFF D isconnects control connections to C-2296/VRC.

• EXT Connects control connections to C-2296/VRC/EXT

lamp lights.

• SIG Signals operator at C-2296/VRC/EXT lamp lights

(spring-looded position).

Figure 2-47. Intercommunication Control S et C -2297;\tRC

2-137
 1

NORM-

INT
-
(j} CDR+
CRE W'
CDR ONLY-
(jj;
RADIO TRANS

ijl
ONLY ®
OFF
../
0
LISTENING-" �� 3
SILENCE

ON
5--t:---�0 � D POWER
� CKT BKR
8
OFF F -----J4
.__

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTION AL DESCRIPTION

MAIN PWR Three-position switch that controls radio set system

(3-Position Rotary) power.

• OFF Turns system power off.

• INT ONLY Turns on system power for intercommunication when

INSTALLATION SWITCH is in INT ONLY.

• NORM Turns on system power for radio and intercommuni­

cations.

2 INT ACCENT Adjusts relative loudness of intercom and radio

(2-Position Rotary) signaIs.

• OFF Radio and intercom signals have same loudness.

• ON Intercom signals are louder than radio signals.

Figure 2-48. Audio Frequency Amplifier AM-1780/VRC

2-138
CONTROL/DI SPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

3 RADIO TRANS Determine which boxes can control receiver ­

(3-Position Rotary) transmitters.

• CDR & CREW Commander and crew boxes can control receiver­
transmitter.

• CDR ONLY Only the commander's box can control receiver­

transmitter.

• LISTENING Neither commander nor crew boxes can control

SILENCE receiver-transmitter.

4 POWER Illuminates (Yellow) to indicate POWER CKT BKR

(Lamp) is ON and power is applied.

5 POWER Controls power to C-2296/VRC, C-2297/VRC,

CKT BKR C-2298/VRC, C-2299/VRC, and AM-1780/VRC
(2-Position Toggle) and provides overload protection.

6 AUDIO INPUT Connection for line AAAIS receiver.

(Binding Posts)

7 LINE Connection for field telephone line to AM-1780/

(Binding Posts) VRC.

8 INSTALLATION The INSTALLATION SWITCH is not an operator's

SWITCH control. It is to be operated only by higher
echelon personnel.

Figure 2-48. Audio Frequency Amplifier AM-1780/VRC - L egend

2-139
 1 2 3 1

� �if30-52 0 ��
ANT BAND CALL ANT @

�c 53-75 0�\w @ ® �S
e
LIGHT
4 - ---:-----:---40 OFF

TUNE - KC

®�.1___ 8
NEW SQUELCH

@
10

CONTROLiDISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

1 ANT Provides connections for coaxial cable between

(Connector) antenna and R-442/VRC or between two R-442/VRC 's.

2 BAND Selects frequency band A or B.

(2-Position Rotary)

• A 30-52

• B 53-75

Figure 2-49. Receiver - Radio R -442/VRC

2-140
 CONTROL/DI SPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

3 CALL Illuminates (Yellow) to indicate a signal is

(Lamp) received if LIGHT switch and SQUELCH switch are on.

4 LAMP Illuminates channel dial.

( Lamp)

5 LIGHT Controls power to dial lamp and CALL indicator.

ON/OFF
(2-Position Rotary)

6 Channel D ial Indicates channel to which R-442/VRC is tuned.

(Digital Readout)

7 MC T UNE Tunes R-442/VRC in 1- mc steps as indicated by

(Rotary Switch) channel dial.

8 KC TUt'-IE T unes R-442/VRC in 50-Kc steps as indicated by

(Rotary Switch) channel dial.

9 POWER Controls main power ON and OFF; turns off power

(2-Position Toggle) in case of an overload.

10 VOLUME Adjusts audio output.

(Potentiometer)

11 SQUELCH Selects types of squelch.

(4-Position Rotary)

• OLD-OFF No squelch .

• OLD-ON Noise-operated squelch •

• NEW-OFF No squelch.

• NEW-ON Squelch operated by tone f rom distant

transmitter.

12 AUDIO Connections for audio accessories.

(2-Connectors)

Figure 2-49. Receiver -Radio R-442/VRC -Legend

2-141
 4 10
3 ' 9 7 8 6

RE
:��� ��
PO R

LOW

OFF
BREAKER-RESET

SQUELCH
NEW

11 16 17
15

CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

CALL Illuminates to indicate a signal is received

(Lamp) if L1 GHT switch and SQUELCH switch are on.

2 L1 GHT ON/OFF Controls power to dial lamp and CALL

(2-Position Rotary) indicator.

3 LAMP Illuminates channel dial.

4 BAND Selects frequency band A or B or push­

(3-Position Rotary) button tuning using AUTO.

• A 30-52

• B 53-75

• AUTO

5 Pushbuttons Selects a pre-set channel if BAND switch

1 thru 1 0 is in AUTO.

6 ANT Provides connection for coaxial cable b·ztween

(Connector) MX-2799/VRC and RT-246/VRC.

7 MC TUNE Tunes RT-246/VRC in1-mc steps as indicated

(Rotary Switch) by channel dial.

8 KC TUNE Tunes RT -246/VRC in 50-Kc steps as indi­

(Rotary Switch) cated by channel dial.

Figure 2-50. Receiver -Transmitter Radio RT-246/VRC

2-142
CONTROL/DISPlAY FUNCT IONAL DESCR IPTION

9 CHAN NEL D IAL Indicates channel to which RT-246/VRC is

(D igital Readout) tuned.

10 POWER F�ur-position switch that controls main power

(4-Position Rotary) to RT-246/VRC.

• OFF BREAKER Turns off power to RT-246/VRC and resets

RESET circuit breaker if tripped.

• LOW Turns receiver on; transmitter has low output power.

• H IGH Turns receiver on; transmitter has high output power.

• REMOTE Permits remote control of power to RT-246/VRC

from a C-2742/VRC.

11 SQUELCH Selects types of squelch.

(4-Position Rotary)

• OLD-OFF No squelch.

• OLD-ON Noise-operated squelch.

• NEW-OFF No squelch.

• NEW-ON Squelch operated by tone from distant transmitter.

12 VOLUME Adjusts audio output.

(Potentiometer)

13 RETRANSMIT Connection for retransmission with certain other

R/W MIKE types of radio sets.
(Connector)

14 SPKR MIKE Connection for audio accessory.

(Connector)

15 ANT CONT Connector for control cable to MX-2799 /VRC.

(Connector)

16 REMOTE Connection for control cable to C-2742/VRC to

(Connector) permit remote operation of equipment.

17 X-MODE Connection for cable to X-mode equipment.

(Connector)

Figure 2-50. Receiver -Transmitter Radio RT -246/VRC - L egend

2 -143
 l......._ ....i
.

�at Assem bl
y
Comm onder's S
Figure 2-Sl.
2- 144
CONTROL/DISPLAYS FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

Elevation Adjustment UP and DOWN adjustment to accommo­

date 5th through 95th percentile man for
eye alignment with his optics. Seat works
independently of platform.

2 Back Adjustments Permits removal of seatback to gain access

to commander•s electronic rack and to
raise and lower the seatback.

3 Elevation Adjustment UP and DOWN adjustment to accommodate

(Foot Release) 5th through 95th percentile man. Platform
works independently of seat and in raised
position allows open hatch viewing while
standing

4 Knee Guard Provides protection for commander•s left

knee during main gun recoil. Removal of
a quick release pin permits the guard to
fold down for crewman access into turret
center.

5 Adjustment Straps The two strap adjustments accommodate

the 5th through 95th percentile man in
all climatic environments (amount, type
of clothing worn).

6 Inertia Reel Release Releases the shoulder restraints to permit

the operator to lean forward or stand up.

7 Harness Buckle Releases or locks the restraint system straps.

(Quick Release Rotary Permits a restrained standing position by
Buckle) attachment of the crotch strap and shoulder
strap points, and releasing the pelvic strap
points.

Figure 2-51. Commander•s Seat Assembly - Legend

2-145
 \

2-77. Alignments and Alignment Checks

The following thirteen paragraphs comprise the Fire Control Subsystem

alignments and alignment checks for which level 1 maintenance is responsible.
These activities should be performed periodically to maintain combat readi­
ness and accuracy. These activities can also be used in the performance of
trouble analysis. Further, successful performance of these activities
constitute verification of the system prior to use. The activities include the
following:

a. Boresighting the gunner's primary sight to the main weapon,

paragraph 2-78.

b. Gunner's primary sight reticle alignment check, paragraph 2-79.

c. Alignment of the commander's sight to the gunner's primary sight,

paragraph 2-80.

d. Boresighting the commander's sight to the main weapon, paragraph

2-8 1 .

e. Missile tracker alignment, paragraph 2-82.

f. Range receiver alignment check, paragraph 2-83.

g. Laser transmitter alignment, paragraph 2-84.

h. Secondary weapon to CS alignment, paragraph 2-85.

i. Main Gun zeroing (stabilized) - HEAT round, paragraph 2-86.

j. Main Gun zeroing (stabilized) - SA�. �T round, paragraph 2-87.

k. Secondary WeaponjMW Clearance Alignment, paragraph 2-88.

1. Alignment of MW for Automatic Loading, paragraph 2-89.

m. Missile Transmitter Alignment, paragraph 2-90.

2-78. Boresight Gunner's Primary Sight to Main Weap on

Perform a boresighting operation in accordance with the following proce­

dure to insure that the gunner's primary sight (GPS) is accurately aligned to
the main weapon (MW).

2-146
 a. Establish a flat, vertical target surface and mark with two aim
points, displaced as shown below, corresponding with lines of sight (LOS's)
of the MW and GPS:

•
13. 68"

•-------+--�-
1
'
26.75"

b. Position vehicle approximately 300 meters from target surface,

visually aligning vehicle so that the LOS's of MW and GPS are perpendicular
to target surface and aligned to their respective aim points when the MW is
°
at approximately 0 elevation with respect to the turret. (Use elevation hand
crank.)

c. Level vehicle.

d. Install borescope in open breech of MW.

e. Fix set of crosshairs in MW muzzle.

f. Make gunner's preactivation checks per paragraph 2-39.

g. Turn on FCS per paragraph 2-62, but do not tum on BREECH

MOTOR circuit breaker.

h. Prepare GPS for use per paragraph 2-4la.

i. Verify that commander's station does not control MW, machine

gun or target designate during the boresighting process.

j. Set WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on gunner's weapon control to MG.

k. Depress palm switches on gunner's control handles and center GPS

reticle on upper aim point of target surface. Then release palm switches.

I WARNING I
Do not depress palm switches - gunner's or
commander's - while sighting through borescope.
Personnel injury may be caused through movement
of the breech.

2-147
 l. Lay axis of MW on lower aim point of target surfac
e by operating
azimuth and elevation hand cranks and by sighting through borescope.

m. Observe target through GPS and determine displacement in mils

from the reticle center, in azimuth and elevation, with respect to original
sighting on upper aim point. (The small circle in center of reticle is one mil
in diameter. )

n. Eleminate misalignment using GPS AZIMUTH and ELEVATION

BORESIGHT controls on the main weapon alignment control panel (1 and 2,
Figure 2-21) if either displacement exceeds +0. 3 mil.

2-79. Gunner's Primary Sight Reticle Alignment Check

Perform the following procedure to insure that the GPS reticle is proper­
ly aligned to the checksight reference.

Prerequisites: a. Gunner's preactivation checks per paragraph

2-39.
b. FCS turn on per paragraph 2-62.
c. Prepare GPS for use per paragraph 2-41a.

a. Close GPS blast door.

b. Set TRACKER ALIGN switch (14, Figure 2-33) on gunner's missile

test and checkout panel to the ON position to illuminate the checksight image.

c. Observe the position of checksight image with respect to GPS day

reticle. Olecksight image should be centered on GPS reticle center.

d. Report any misalignment greater than 0. 2 mil to next level of

maintenance for their corrective action.

e. Activate, momentarily, the RESET switch (11, Figure 2-33) on

gunner's missile test and checkout panel. Checksight image disappears.

2-80. Alignment of Commander's Day(Night Sight to Gunner's Primary Sight

Perform the following procedure to insure that the synchro chain between
the commander's day (night sight (CS) and the GPS provides alignment of one
sight with the other.

a. Establish a flat, vertical target surface and mark with a single

aim point.

2-148
 b. Position vehicle approximately 1900 meters from target surface,
visually aligning vehicle so that LOS's of GPS and CS are perpendicular to
°
target surface and the LOS's are at approximately 0 elevation with respect
to the turret. (Use elevation hand crank.)

c. Level vehicle.

d. Make gunner's preactlvation checks per paragraph 2-39.

e. Turn on FCS per paragraph 2-62.

f. Prepare commander's sight for use per paragraph 2-64a.

g. Prepare GPS for use per paragraph 2-41a.

h. Verify that commander's station does not control MW , machine gun

or target designate during the boresighting process.

L Set WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on gunner's weapon control to

MAIN GUN.

j. Depress palm switches on gunner's control handles.

k. Center GPS reticle on aim point and release palm switches.

1. Set WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control to

MAIN GUN. Commander's reticle shall center on or near aim point.

m. Observe target through commander's day/night sight and determine

displacement in mils from the reticle center, in azimuth and elevation, with
respect to original sighting on aim point. (The small circle in center of
reticle is one mil in diameter.)

n. Eliminate misalignment using CDR SIGHT ALIGN/PRIMARY SIGHT

AZIMUTH and ELEVATION controls (15 and 16, Figure 2-40) on the comman­
der's sight control and alignment panel if either displacement exceeds +0.17
-
mil.

2-81. Boresighting Commander's Day/Night Sight to Main Weapon

Perform a boresighting operation in accordance with the following proce­

dure to insure that the CS is accurately aligned with the MW.

2-149
 a. Establish a flat, vertical target surface and mark with a single aim
point.

b. Position vehicle approximately 1200 meters from target surface,

visually aligning vehicle so that LOS's of MW and CS are perpendicular to
target surface and the MW is at approximately 0° elevation with respect to
the turret. (Use elevation hand crank.)

c. Level vehicle.

d. Install borescope in open breech of MW.

e. Fix set of crosshairs in MW muzzle.

f. Turn off BREECH MOTOR and GPS circuit breakers on TPDP.

g. Turn on FCS per paragraph 2-62.

h. Prepare CS per paragraph 2-64a.

i. Set WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control to

MAIN GUN.

j. Depress palm switches on commander's control handles.

k. Center CS reticle on aim point of target surface. Then release

palm switches.

I WARNING I
Do not depress palm switches - gunner's or
commander's - while sighting through borescope.
Personnel injury may be caused through movement
of the breech.

1. Lay axis of MW on aim point by operating manual azimuth and

elevation hand cranks and by sighting through the borescope.

m. Observe target surface through CS and determine displacement in

mils from reticle center, in azimuth and elevation, with respect to original
sighting on aim point. (The small circle in center of reticle is one mil in
diameter.)

2-150
 n. Eliminate misalignment using CDR SIGHT ALIGN/MAIN GUN
AZIMUTH and ELEVATION controls (13 and 14, Figure 2-40) on commander's
sight control and alignment panel, if either displacement exceeds +0.3 mil.

2-82. Missile Tracker Alignment

Perform missile tracker alignment in accordance with the following pro­

cedure to insure that the missile tracker null axis is aligned to the checksight
reference.

Prerequisite: GPS reticle alignment check per

paragraph 2-79.

a. Make gunner's preactivation checks per paragraph 2-39.

b. Tum on FCS per paragraph 2-62.

c. Prepare GPS for use per paragraph 2-41a.

d. Set TRACKER ALIGN switch (14, Figure 2-33) on the gunner's

missile test and checkout panel to the ON position to (1) energize check
source lamp and chopper motor, and (2) position roof prism within gunner's
periscope so that checksight image is projected in field of view of GPS.

e. Set AZ/EL switch (16) on gunner's missile test checkout panel first
to AZ and then to EL and observe the TRACKE R ALIGN AND SYSTEM TEST
null meter (1, Figure 2-33):

(1) If both positions provide nulls (within green zone), the

missile tracker alignment requires no correction.
(2) If both positions do not provide nulls but both meter
readings are within meter range (i.e. , not pegged),
proceed to step f.
(3) If one or both positions are off scale (pegged),
proceed to step j.

NOTE: The alignment control knob (11, Figure 2-19)

under GPS causes two optical wedges to rotate
or causes just one of the wedges to rotate,
depending on which of the two vertical detent
positions the knob is in. Further, the knob
requires 5. 136 revolutions to rotate the wedge
(or wedges) through 360 degrees.

2-151
 f. Select elevation loop (set AZ/EL switch on gunner's missile test
checkout panel - 16, Figure 2-33 - to EL), push alignment control knob in,
and rotate single wedge to null the meter.

g. Select azimuth loop (set AZ/EL switch to AZ), pull out knob, and
rotate both wedges to null the meter. If there is no noticeable change in null
meter for this action, proceed to step h. If meter does null, repeat steps f
and g until both loops are nulled. If both loops are close to null but the error
begins to increase during the last step, repeat steps f and g but correct for
only one-half of the distance to null in each step.

h. Monitor azimuth loop and rotate single wedge (control pushed in) to
null or minimize the error.

i. Monitor elevation loop and rotate both wedges (control pulled out)
to null or minimize the error. Repeat steps h and i until both loops are
nulled. At this point the procedure is complete.

j. Select loop with greatest error or, if this is impossible, select

azimuth loop and rotate both wedges (control pulled out) through 360 degrees.
Find and stop at position closest to null (and with steadiest signal). If
throughout the 360 degrees there is no noticeable effect, rotate the single
wedge (control pushed in) to achieve the closest-to-null condition.

k. Select the alternate loop (AZ or EL position) and rotate alternate

wedge arrangement to achieve a closest-to-null condition.

1. Repeat steps j and k until both errors are on scale, and then pro-
ceed to step f.

m. Activate, momentarily, the RESET switch (11, Figure 2-33) on

gunner's missile test and checkout panel to reset the missile system.

2-83. Range Receiver Alignment Check

Perform the following procedure to verify that the range receiver is pro­
perly aligned to the GPS reticle.

a. Make gunrer's preactivation checks per paragraph 2-39.

b. Turn on FCS per paragraph 2-62.

c. Prepare GPS for use per paragraph 2-41a.

2-152
 d. Close GPS blast door.

e. Set FIELDSTOP LAMP toggle switch (5, Figure 2-19) on GPS to the
ON position to activate fieldstop lamp for projecting light from alignment lamp
through fieldstop.

f. Set LASER ALIGN toggle switch (8, Figure 2-18) on GPS control
unit to R CVR position to drive roof prism (within GPS) into proper position
for check. Fieldstop image shall be visible, along with day reticle, in field­
of-view of GPS.

g. Observe alignment of fieldstop image with respect to day reticle.

h. Report any misalignment greater than 0. 1 mil in either axis to

next level of maintenance for their corrective action.

2-84. Laser Transmitter Alignment

Perform the following procedure to insure that the alignment of the laser
transmitter with respect to the day viewing channel is correct.

Prerequisites: a. GPS reticle alignment check per paragraph

2-79.
b. Range receiver alignment check per para­
graph 2-83.

a. Perform steps a through d of paragraph 2-83.

b. Set LASER ALIGN toggle switch (8, Figure 2-18) on GPS control
unit to XMT position to drive roof prism (within GPS) into proper position for
reflecting light projected through the fieldstop into the laser transmitter
resonant reflector. Fieldstop image shall be visible, along with day reticle,
in field-of-view of GPS.

c. Observe alignment of fieldstop image with respect to day reticle.

d. Adjust the azimuth and elevation transmitter alignment controls (8,

Figure 2-19) on laser transmitter (covered controls) until fieldstop image is
aligned to GPS day reticle.

2-85. Secondary Weapon Alignment and Zeroin g

a. Position tank i n a reasonable level area for firing o n a target 500

meters from tank.

2-153
 b. Activate (turn-on) fire control subsystem per paragraph 2-62.

c. Turn-on commander's day/night sight for day use per paragraph

2-64a.

d. Activate secondary weapon per paragraph 2-71.

e. Set WEAPON ACfiVATE selector on commander's weapon control

panel to CAL . 50 NORM.

f. Release palm switches.

g. Observe to ensure weapon bore (or barrel line) is directed toward

same area of target as viewed through commander's day/night sight.

h. If secondary weapon is not positioned toward the same area of tar-

get in elevation as viewed through commander's day/night sight

1) Set BORESIGHT switch (8, Figure 2-38) on commander's

day/night sight and controls to ON.

2) With palm switches released, adjust CAL . 50 ALIGN CDR

SIGHT control (12, Figure 2-40) on commander's sight
control and alignment panel until the commander's day/
night sight reticle is aligned toward same target as
secondary weapon.

3) Set BORESIGHT switch on commander's sight and controls

to OFF.

NOTE: Fire a short burst and observe center of round impact

pattern relative to sight-reticle aim point.

Do not release palm switches.

i. Perform secondary weapon firing at target per paragraph 2-73.

NOTE: If adjustments are necessary in step j, the CAL . 50

ALIGN CDR SIGHT control must be adjusted opposite
the markings on the control. To adjust the secondary
weapon burst downward, the control must be turned
for an upward adjustment (clockwise). This condition
is only true when the palm switches are depressed and
the secondary weapon is being adjusted toward the
commander's day/night sight target.

0
2-154
 j. If necessary, with the palm switches depressed, adjust CAL . 50
ALIGN CDR SIGHT control on commander's sight control alignment panel to
align the secondary weapon to commander day /night sight. Perform step i
and j as required until accurate zeroing is obtained.

2-86. Main Gun Zeroing ( Stabilized) - HEAT Round

Perform zeroing using HEAT round in accordance with the following pro­
cedures to ensure main gun and gunner's primary sight are aligned accurately.

Prerequisite; Boresighting gunner's primary sight to main

weapon per paragraph 2-78.

a. Select a suitable target 300 meters from the tank.

b. Position tank in a reasonably level position for firing on target.

c. Perform gunner's checks prior to fire control subsystem activation

per paragraph 2-39.

d. Activate (tum-on) fire control subsystem per paragraph 2-62.

e. Perform gunner's primary sight day operating procedures per

paragraph 2-41a.

f. Adjust AIR PRES S, AIR TEMP, and POWDER TEMP controls (8, 9
and 10, Figure 2-40) on commander's sight control and alignment panel to
estimated ambient conditions.

g. Depress palm switches on gunner's control handles and observe

reticle and target in gunner's primary sight field-of-view.

h. Perform main gun activation per paragraph 2-45a. Set AMMO

SELECT switch to HEAT when performing procedures.

i. Center reticle on target aim point.

NOTE: Laser ranging should be performed if possible.

If it is not, perform manual ranging. It is only
necessary to range before firing initial round.

j. Fire 5 rounds at target using main weapon firing procedure,

paragraph 2-46a, steps 5 through 16. Note impact point of each round and
recenter reticle on target aim point prior to firing each round.

2-155
 k. With reticle on target aim point, release palm switches of
gunner's control handles.

1. Adjust MAIN GUN ZEROING HEAT EL and AZ controls (4 and 5,

Figure 2-21) on main weapon alignment control panel until gunner's primary
sight reticle is positioned in center of impact area of rounds fired.

m. Repeat steps i through j. Fire only 3 rounds to verify accurate

zeroing. If satisfactory zeroing is not ac hieved repeat above procedure.

2-87. Main Gun Zeroing (Stabilized) - SABOT Round

Prerequisite: Boresighting gunner's primary sight to

main weapon per paragraph 2-78.

Perform zeroing using SABOT round in accordance with the following

procedures to ensure main gun and gunner's primary sight are aligned
accurately.

a. Select a suitable target 500 meters from tank.

b. Position tank in a reasonably level position for firing on target.

c. Perform gunner's checks prior to fire control subsystem

activation per paragraph 2-39.

d. Activate (turn-on) fire control subsystem per paragraph 2-62.

e. Perform gunner's primary sight day operating procedures per

paragraph 2 -41a.

f. Adjust AIR PRESS, AIR TEMP, and POWDER TEMP controls (8, 9
and 10, Figure 2-40) on commander's sight control and alignment panel to
estimated ambient conditions.

g. Depress palm switches on gunner's control handles and observe

reticle and target in gunner's primary sight field-of-view.

h. Perform main gun activation per paragraph 2-45a. Set AMMO

SELECT switch to SABOT when performing procedure.

i. Center reticle on target aim point.

2-156
 NOTE: Laser ranging should be performed if possible.
If it is not, perform manual ranging. It is only
necessary to range before firing initial round.

j. Fire 5 rounds at target using main weapon firing procedure,

paragraph 2-46a, steps 5 through 16. Note impact point of each round and
recenter reticle on target aim point prior to firing each round.

k. With reticle on target aim point, release palm switches of gunner's

control handles.

1. Adjust MAIN GUN ZEROING SABOT EL and AZ controls (6 and 7,

Figure 2-21) on main weapon alignment control panel until gunner's primary
sight reticle is positioned in center of impact area of rounds fired.

m. Repeat steps i through j. Fire only 3 rounds to verify accurate

zeroing. If satisfactory zeroing is not achieved, repeat above procedure.

2-88. Secondary Weapon(Main Weapon Clearance Alignment

Perform the following procedure to insure that the secondary weapon

(SW) is inhibited in the turret forward sector such that the MW will not be
impacted, even in a fully elevated position, by the SW line of fire.

a. Place a piece of white tape (approximatel y three inches long)

around the top side of MW barrel so that the edge closest to muzzle is 28. 5
(+0. 5) inches from muzzle.

b. Tum on FCS per paragraph 2-62.

c. Prepare CS for use per paragraph 2-64a.

d. Align SW to CS per paragraph 2-85.

e. Establish all conditions for firing per paragraph 2-71 so that ready-
to-fire (RTF) indicator will light.

f. Raise MW to maximum elevation using commander's control

handles. Then release palm switches.

g. Set WEAPON ACTIVATE switch on commander's weapon control to

NORM.

2-157
 h. Set BORESIGHT switch (8, Figure 2-38) on commander's day/night
sight to ON.

i. Depress palm switches on commander's control handles and

acquire the target tape on MW barrel. Establish the tape edge closes to
muzzle as target edge with which to align the reticle.

j. Release palm switches. Ensure LOS is still on tape edge.

k. Adjust CAL . 50 ALIGN/MAIN GUN CLEARANCE UP /DN control

(11, Figure 2-40) on commander's sight control and alignment panel so that
RFT indicator is lighted, if it is not already lighted.

1. Adjust same control until RFT indicator goes out.

m. Adjust same control slowly until it is just past the point where the
RFT indicator lights again.

2-89. Main Weapon to Autoload Position Alignment

Prerequisites: a. Gunner's checks prior to fire control sub­

system activation performed per paragraph
2-39.
b. Fire control subsystem activation performed
per paragraph 2-62.

WARNING

Breech and main weapon moving hazard.

a. Set LOADER SELECTOR on driver's main instrument panel to H AND.

b. Set EMERGENCY CONTROL MASTER switch on driver's autoloader

control panel to ON.

c. Using gunner's elevation quadrant M-13, determine angle of tank

turret in elevation.

d. Using gunner's elevation quadrant M-13, determine angle of main

weapon in elevation.

e. If main weapon angle is greater than + 3 mils from tank turret

angle, adjust AUTOLOAD INDEX control on main weapon alignment control
panel, and repeat steps d and e until 3 mil tolerance is obtained.

2-158
 f. Set EME RGENCY CONTROL MASTER switch on driver's autoloader
control panel to OFF.

g. Set LOADER SELECTOR on driver's main instrument panel to

AUTO.

2-90. Missile Transmitter Alignment

The crew shall insure that prior to firing missiles utilizing the FC S, the
missile transmitter alignment has been performed and checked using the
appropriate GFE supplied specifically for those purposes.

2-159
2.:91. Stowing Ammunition in Automatic Loader.

a. Start vehicle engine to supply hydraulic pressure to automatic loader.

b. Rotate Fire Control switch on turret power distribution panel to "ON"

position. (figure 2- 41 ) •

c. Set Loader Selector mode switch on driver's auxiliary panel to "STOW" (figure

2- 8 ) •

d. Open stow port door at rear of turret bustle.

e. Insert conventional ammunition through stow port into cannister until the

ammunition stops are completely extended and the round is correctly positioned. (The

stow port switch must clear the round.)

CAUTION: Handle combustible case rounds carefully to avoid damage.

f. When stowing missiles, insert missile approximately 3/4 of its length then

rotate until guide key snaps into missile indexing springs in bottom of cannister.

Push the missile the rest of the way into cannister until ammunition stops are

completely extended and missile is correctly positioned. (The stow port switch must

clear the missile.)

g. Press the corresponding WP, BH, HE, AP, or M (missile) button on stow control

panel inside stow port door to identify the type of round stowed. If no round was

stowed the EMP (empty) button must be pushed.

h. Press the TRANSPORT button on stow control panel to transfer the information

into the program control memory and to index the magazine to the next position.

i. Repeat Steps e. through h. until all rounds are stowed. (The rounds may be

stowed in any sequence or combination.)

j. After rounds are stowed the commander should review magazine ammunition count

by pressing COUNT button on commander's counter panel to confirm proper stowing

identification.

2-160
 k. Set the mode selector switch on driver's auxiliary panel to AUTO position.

1. The counter display on the commander's counter panel will automatically in­

dicate the number and type of rounds contained in magazine.

m. To reconfirm the count, press the reset COUNT button on the commander's counter

panel. The display will again count and display the number and type of rounds con­

tained in the magazine.

2-92. Restowing Ammunition in Automatic Loader from inside Turret.

a. Start vehicle engine to supply hydraulic pressure to automatic loader.

b. Rotate Fire Control switch on turret power distribution panel to "ON"

position.

c. Set Loader Selector mode switch on driver • s auxiliary panel to "RESTOW11

position.

d� Open automatic loader restow door.

e. Insert conventional ammunition into restow port ( base first ) until round is

stopped in contact with full back switch.

f. When restowing missiles, insert the missile approximately 3/4 of its length,

then rotate until guide key snaps into missile indexing springs in bottom of canniste

Push the missile the rest of the way into the cannister until the missile is full
back in the cannister.

g. Press the corresponding WP, BH, HE, AP, or M ( missile ) button on the driver's

loader control panel to identify tpye of round stowed. If no round is restowed, the

EMP ( empty ) button must be pressed.

h. Press the TRANSPORT button to set the program control memory and to index the

magazine.

i. Repeat Steps e. through h. until all rounds are stoed. ( The rounds may be re­

stowed in any sequence or combination. )

2-161
 j. After the rounds are restowed the commander should review the magazine am­

munition count in the commander's counter panel.

k. Set the mode selector switch on driver's auxiliary panel to AUTO position.

1. The counter display on the commander;s counter panel will automatically in­

dicate the number and type of rounds contained in the magazine.

m. To reconfirm the count, press the COUNT reset button on commander's counter

panel. The display will again count and display the number and type of rounds con­

tained in magazine.

2-93. Automatic Transporting and Loading Ammunition.

a. Start vehicle engine and rotate Fire Control switch on turret power distri­

bution panel to 110N11 position.

b. Set the mode selector switch on driver's auxiliary panel to 11AUT011•

c. Set Weapon Activate switch on gunner's weapon control panel to 11MA.m GUN11

position. This gives the gunne r control of main weapon and automatic loader.

d. Set the ammunition selector switch on the gunner's weapon control panel to the

desired round: SABOT, BH, HEAT, WP, or MISSILE. If round selected is not available

in the magazine, the round not available lamp will light. A different selection must

be made. The magazine will now transport to the selected round.

e. Press and hold one, or both, palm switches on the gunner's control handles.

f. Depress load button momentarily on gunner's control handle ( left ) . Main weapon

goes to the load index position and the breech opens. The selected round is then auto­

matically loaded into main weapon. The loading operation may be interrupted before

the ramm er is extended into the breech by releasing the palm switch. To restart the _

loading operation, press and hold the palm switch and momentarily depress the load

button.

g. During the loading operation the load in process lamp on the gunner's weapon

control panel will light.

2-162
 h. After the round selected by the ammunition selector switch on gunner's weapon

control panel has been loaded, the respective lamp will light indicating the type of

ammunition loaded into main weapon.

i. After the main weapon has been fired, the gun does not return to the load

position unless the load button on the gunner's control handle is held depressed, or

a missile has been fired,

j. After a missile has been fired, the telescoping loading tube will extend and

extract the missile cap and eject the cap on the turret floor.

k. To load another round of the same type, continue to press and hold the palm

switch and the load button on the gunner's control handles.

1. If another type of round is desired, rotate the ammunition selector switch on

gunner's weapon control panel to desire round and repeat loading sequence •

m. The commander may gain control of main weapon and automatic loader by rotating

the weapon activate switch on commander 1 s weapon control panel to "MAIN GUN" and by

depressing and holding palm switches on commander's control handles. Operating seque:

of commander's controls is identical to that of the gunner's controls.

NOTE. Refer to Section III of this Chapter for emergency operation.

in event of hydraulic and /or electrical power is not available

to the loader.

2-94. Bore Scavenging System.

a. The bore scavenging equipment provides a predetermined volume of air at a

predetermined pressure to the main weapon to remove various gases and combustible

case remnants from the bore chamber prior to fully opening the breech after firing

a round ..

b. Pressure is maintained in the air bottles either by the vehicle mounted air

compressor or by charging the system through the slave receptacle. The system also

contains an override provision for manual discharge by the driver. Refer to Figure

2-51. 1 and 2-51.2.

2-163
 BREECH
ASSEMBLY
(GFE)

SOLENOID
REGULATOR
VALVE

STAINLESS STEEL TUBING

TURRET

,-
ROOF
_ -, -- ,--_
,
I
�--,--r--'
1 r
I I
'

', :_---�����S;- -:;

\
, COMPRESSOR ENCLOSURE

������· --\�\ ��
· �
/
COMMANDER
SHUT -OFF VALVE

CREW COMPARTMENT
;:--+-
-�----===--- _ ,_ --<..."--
..< - ::t ---
1 0::: 1
BUSTLE BULKHEAD
______ '
____! � j- .. -----
1 I . . . . . ···· ···· · ·· ·· ···· .....
AUTOMATIC LOADER
/':;..0 / WATER
I� I
-__ f ....J I
r o,-----�
,o, AIR AIR

� BOTTLE BOTTLE

BUSTLE
BOTTOM

Figure 2-51 .1. Bore Scavenging System

2-164
 0 MAIIUAL
3CAVENGE
VALVE

CONrROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL D ESCRIPTION

Air Pressure Indicates the remaining pressure in the

(Gage) system in terms of the number of rounds that
can be fired and the main weapon scavenged o

A scavenging cycle occurs after each firing

of the main weap::>n o

2 Manual Scavenge T he valve provides a mani.Jal means of scav­

(Solenoid Valve, enging in the event of an emergency situation
Manual Override) such as: the interruption of the electrical
system or the need for a second scavenging
eye leo

• MANUAL OPEN

• AUTO

Figure 2-51 .2. Bore Scavenging System Controls

2-165
 Section II. OPERATION OF AUXILIARY EQUIPMENT

2-95• Communication Equipment.

The vehicle is stowed for intercommunication equipment AN /VIC( v ) and radio receiver

set AN/VRC-12 for ground to ground communication. The major items of equipment which

comprise these sets are listed in Table 2- 3 which also indicates locations and ref-

erence figure numbers.

DESIGNATOR DESCRIPTION LOCATION FIGURE

AM-1780/VRC Audio Frequency Amplifier Commander-Right Turret 2-48
Note ( 1) Wall

C-2298/VRC lntercommunication Control Gunner-Right Turret Wall 2-30

�et (2 required) Note (f) Driver-Capsu le Left 2-14
C-2297/VRC Intercommunication Cor.: Jl Commander-Right Turret 2-47
Set (1 required) Note (1) Wall
C-2296/VRC Intercommunication Control Right Rear-Hull Exterior -
Set (1 required) Note ( 1)
RT-246/VRC Transmitter-Receiver, Radio Commander-Right Front 2-50
Note (2) Turret Basket
RT-442 /VRC Receiver, Radio Note (2) Commander-Right Front 2-49
Turret Wall
C-2742 /VRC Frequency Selector Commander-Right Turret 2-46
Note (2) Wall

Limited Number of
IT -SEC/KY -38 SCRAMBLER Vehicles with Base in 2-32
All Vehicles

Note (1). Part of AN/VIC-2(v) Intercommunication Set

Note (2). Part of AN/VRC-12 Ground to Ground FM Radio
Receiver-Transmitter Set

Table 2-3� Communication Equipment

2-166
2-96- Collective Protector M8A3.

a. Air purification for crew members is provided by an M8A3 collective pro­

tector (GFE) which furnishes up to twelve cubic feet of air per minute, purified

of toxic war gases and particulate matter.

b. The unit consists of an M2A2 air purifier and hose carrier units with face
/
masks. Toxic gases are absorbed by activated charcoal while particulate matter is

removed by a particulate filter. Existing air is filtered and delivered via hose

assemblies to protective masks worn by each tank crew member as shown in Figure 2-52.
c. The air purifier is mounted to the turret basket; the hoses are routed to the

three crew stations with the driver's passing through a pneumatic section of driver's

station slip ring. A rotary switch installed on the turret power distribution panel

(fig. 2-41) is operated by the commander to control air flow through the collective

protector system.

2-97• Ventilation Blower.

a. Crew compartment ventilation is furnished by a 1100 cfm electrically operated

blower (GFE). A dual function ballistic armor cover provides protection for both the

blower and scavenger system compressor inlets. Refer to Figure 1-10.

b. The blower, together with its own noise reducing slencer, mounts to the interior

of the turret roof just behind the driver and is controlled by a switch on the driver's

auxiliary panel.

c. When in operation, the blower draws. exterior air off the turret roof and

circulates it through the turret openings into the hull.

2-167
 DRIVER'S FACE MASK \
-�

-.___ AIR PURIFIER ASSEMBLY

Figure 2-52. Collective Protector System

2-168
 Section III. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL CONDITIONS

2- 93. Emergency Driving Controls

The vehicle is equipped with emergency driving controls which supply alternate

means of operating the vehicle in case of malfunction in the primary control

system. The turret and driver's station must be locked in the forward position and

the driver's capsule lowered to the bottom position when vehicle is to be operated

with emergency controls. These controls consist of the transmission range selector,

emergency fuel shut-off, throttle, and brake connections as shown in Figure 2-53.

a. Transmission Range Selector. The transmission range selector can be oper­

ated in three positions and is located on the hull sponson to the left of the

driver. A push-pull cable running along the hull connects the shift quadrant to a

hull-mounted bellcrank. A rod attached to the bellcrank transfers motion to the

opposite side of the transmission to a rachet which mates with a gear on the trans­

mission shift shaft. A quick disconnect pin at the bellcrank permits separation

for power pack removal.

b. Emergency Fuel Shut- Off. The "OFF-ON" fuel shut-off control is located to

the left of the driver on the hull sponson. To stop engine move control to OFF

and hold until engine is stopped then return control to ON position.

c. Throttle Control. The emergency throttle control is operated by the

driver's right foot pedal ( Fig. 2-53).

d. Brake Control. The emergency brake control is operated by the driver's

left foot pedal ( Fig. 2-53).

2- 99. Manual Release of Brakes

WARNING: Make sure tracks are properly blocked prior to manually releasing brakes

to prevent movement of vehicle.

a. Remove 2 screws ( Fig. 2-55) and lower the exhaust deflectors.

b. Remove 4 screws, 4 washers, and access plate ( Fig. 2-55 ).

2-169
 Q -QUICK RELEASE PINS

A. �--- -----::;
STEER CABLE

MAIN PANEL

VIEW A.-A.

""
I
_.

......
0

-----

----- ..

: "- -..:_ �
�__>c
� --
I

� ' '

- -=�

Figure 2-53. Emergency Driving Controls

 c. Loosen locknut and turn brake release screw into cylinder assembly until

it becomes snug. Tighten locknut.

2-100. Towing Vehicle.

WARNING: Use tow bar only for towing as towed vehicle does not have braking or

steering capabilities. Do not permit any personnel to ride in or on

towed vehicle.

CAUTION: If engine or transmission has sustained damage, final drives must be

disengaged. With final drives disengaged, vehicle may be towed at speeds

not to exceed 18 mph. Vehicles with undamaged engine, transmission, and

final drives may be towed up to 10 miles at speeds not to exceed 10 mph,

providing the transmission lever is placed in NEUTRAL and the brakes are

manually released (pa ra. 2- ). When engine is not in operation and final

drives are engaged, brakes are applied automatically and must be released

manually before vehicle can be towed.

a. Determine Reason for Towing:

(1) Non-mechanical malfunction of engine such as electrical or fuel problems.

Vehicles with undamaged engine, transmission or final drives may be

towed at speeds not to exceed 10 mph after brakes are manually released

and shift lever placed in NEUTRAL position. Tow vehicle in a forward

direction with final drives engaged to maintain lubrication in trans­

mission. Lubricating pumps in transmission do not function when vehicle

is towed backwards.

(2) Mechanical malfunctions of power plant. Final drives must be disengaged

if engine or transmission has sustained damage.

(3) Final drive malfunction or damage. Remove track on side with damaged

final drive and disengage final drive on other side.

2-171
(4) To reposition vehicle without operating engine or power plant. Manu­

ally release brakes (para. 2-55), place transmission in NEUTRAL, and

reposition vehicle as desired. Tow in reverse only to gain access to

install tow bar.

S)
HU L
WASHER". ,

NUT,

COTTER
PIN
�
".
�t (l�
GREASE
FITTINGS

1: �
PINTLE
PINTLE
MOU!';T

Figure 2-54. Tow Bar Installation

2-172
 A. EXHAUST DEFLECTOR

ACCESS PLATE

3. ACCESS PLATE

!
r BRAKE RELEASE SCREW

Figure 2-55 o Manual Release of Brakes

2-173
b. To.wi� Procedures.

(1) With final drives disengaged, vehicle may be towed at speeds not to

exceed 18 mph.

(2) Recheck towed vehicle after approximately 1/4 mile of towing to insure

that all disengaged items are properly secured (tightened or stowed).

(3) vfuenever possible, position vehicle height to normal operating

position prior to towing.

(4) Vehicle should be towed with gun in travel lock (fig. 2-56).

c. Disengage Final Drives as Follows:

(1) Place transmission shift control in " N " neutral position.

(2) Nanually release brakes (para. 2- 55).

(3) Remove six 3/8" mounting bolts retaining cap assembly (A, fig. 2- 57).

Remove cap assembly being careful not to damage or lose preformed

packing on mating assembly.

(4) Install 2 of the 6 cap assembly mounting bolts in puller holes (E,
fig. 2-?7) and turn inward (evenly) until final drive disengages.

If necessary, insert crowbar between sprocket hub and track assembly

and exert required force to relieve torque on bushing.

(5) Remove center retaining bolt (B, fiS·2-57 ). Using a slide hammer,

remove housing. Remove 2 bolts from puller holes. Invert housing.

Remove bushing and install from outside. Reinstall housing and

bushing on shaft with center retaining bolt (C, fig.2-57 ). Tighten

to 100 foot-pounds.

(6) Reinstall cap asre�mbly with 6 mounting holts. Tighten to 35-40 foot

pounds.

2-174
2-175
A. REMOVE CAP ASSEMBLY Bo REMOVE HOUSING

C. INSTALL INVERTED HOUSING

Figure 2-57. Disengaging and Engaging Final Drives

2-176
 (7) Repeat steps 3 thru 6 on opposite final drive unit. Vehicle may

now be towed. Refer to figure 2-54.

2-101. Engaging Final Drive.

a. Refer to paragraph 2-5 7 and reverse steps ..£·(3) thru ..£·(7).

b. Refer to figure 2-55 and manually adjust brakes by loosening lock nut and

turning adjusting screw outward on brake cylinder assembly •

. 2-102. Slaving Vehicle to Start Engine.

a. Assure master switch (fig. 2- 7) of slaved (dead) vehicle is in "OFF"

position.

b. Service batteries (refer to Chapter 3, para. 3-22).

\v/·RNING: Acid fumes and��r sulph�te particles are_i,!!�rious to eY,es

a�d skin�·--U�p�o��nt�ct, apply first �id and obtain medical

___

�ttentlon i��diately.

c. Position a vehicle with 2L�-vol t system and having eighi; batteries as close

as possible (side-by-side; not front-to-front) to vehicle to be slaved (dead

vehicle).

WARNING: Do not allow�rsonnel to stand in front of, or between vehicles

during slaving operation. LJck brakes on all vehicles.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to start engine or operate vehicle if batteries have

been removed or cables disconnected.

d. Connect slave cable to auxiliary power (slave) receptacle of live and dead

vehicles.

NOTE. When time permits, after connecting slave cable, charge dead vehicle

batteries for fifteen minutes before attempting to start engine.

Ensure engine of slaving unit (live ) is running at a fast idle before

attempting to start slaved (dead ) vehicle.

2-177
 CAUTION: Do not crank engine more than fifteen continuous seconds. If engine

does not start, release master switch and wait three to five minutes

before attempting to start engine again to prevent overheating

starter and draining batteries of slaving (live ) vehicles too

rapidly.

e. start engine ofslaved ( dead ) vehicle.

f. Disconnect slave cables from both vehicles.

NOTE. If vehicle is not to be driven for an extended period, set engine at

a fast idle and charge batteries for 30 minutes.

Automatic Loader Ma nual Operating Instructions.

2-103.
a. /
In the event hydraulic and or electrical power is not available to the auto-

matic loader the :nanual hydraulic control provides for the follm.,ring functions:

(1) Retraction of the loading tube.

(2) Opening and closing of the fire door.

(3) Magazine transport.

(4) Restow canister release.

b. To retract the loading tube, move loading tube valve lever to open position

( fig. 2-11 ) . Operate the hand pump ( fig. 2- 9 ) until loading tube is retracted.

c. To open fire door, move fire door valve lever to open position ( fig. 2-11)�
The fire door is closed by moving the loading tube valve lever to closed position

and operating hand pump.

d. To transport the magazine, move manual selector control ( fig. 2- 11) to

l'!AGAZIIE ADVANCE position. Open the restow front and operate the hand pump until

the desired canister magazine indexed position may be determined and aligned with

the restow port. After the canister is aligned, move the manual selector control

to the OFF position. Operate the hand pump additional strokes to extend the chain

locks.

2-178
 e. To release the canister gripper at the restow position , move the manual

selector control to GRIPPER RELEASE position. Operate the hand pump until canister

grippers are released by the restow canister release actuator. The round may be re-

moved from the restow canister. To release the canister actuator, move the selector

to OFF position and operate hand pump.

2�104. Crew Compartment Combustion Heater.

a. The crew compartment combustion heater installation { fig. 2-58) consists of

the combustion heater, fUel pump, fUel filter, fuel pressure regulator, exhaust

venting, distribution ducts, and controls.

b. The heater is an all purpose, multi-fuel, 24 volt de heater which produces

heated air in the crew compartment by actuating controls on the driver's main contra.

panel. The heated air and air for combustion are supplied by two different fans

driven by one electric motor.

c. This crew combustion heater system provides enough heat to keep the crew

0
compartment within acceptable human factors ranges at temperatures down to -50 F.

2-179
 \ \
\

,
I

I
I

\
LANYARD
\ �

\
-
EXTERNAL HANDLE (LEFT SIDE)
EXTERNAL HANDLE (RIGHT SIDE)

I /

� •sET/RESET
0

SET/RESET I �­
Ill MECHANISM MECHANISM r11
DISCHARGE OPENINGS (13)

CONTROL VALV E

Figure 2-58. Fire Extinguisher System Schematic

2-180
 Section IV. AMMUNITION

Data on ammunition not available at time of publication.

2-181
 CHAPI'F.R 3

MAI��F.NANCE INSTRUCTIONS

Section I. LUBRICATION

3-1. �ervice Intervals - Normal Conditions.

For lubrication of vehicle under normal operating conditions, refer to the

illustrated charts on pages 3-2 through 3-7.

?-2 �ervice Intervals - Unusual Conditions

Reduce lubrication intervals to compensate for abnormal ooeration and extreme

conditions, such as low or Ligh temperatures, prolonged periods of high-rate

operation, continued operation in sand or dust, or exPosure to moisture, any one

of vhich may quickly destroy the protective qualities of the lubricant Lubrica-

tion intervals may be extended during inactive periods

3-1
 PRELIMINARY DRAFT
LUBRICATION ORDER

TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152-MM GUN, XM803, PILOT VEHICLE NO.7

Intervals are based an normal operation. Reduce to compen­ Clean parts with THINNER, P AINT, MINERAL SPIRITS (TPM);
sate for abnormal operation and severe conditions or con­ or DRY CLEAN lNG SOLVENT (SD). Dry before lubricating.
taminated l ubricants. During inactive periods, intervals may (For exceptions, see nates 1 and 3). Use PL (special) on all
be extended commensurate with adequate preservation. exposed unpainted surfaces of weapons. Lubricate dotted arrow
Clean fittings, plugs, and surrounding areas before lubricating. paints on both sides of the equipment.

JINTERIOR COMPONENTSJ
Lubricant-Interval Interval- Lubr�cant

Gun-Launcher Breech D
Mechanism and
Chamber
(See Note 1)

7.62MM Coaxial
Machine Gun
(See Note 3)

Caliber .SO

Machine Gun
(See Note 3)

Turret Hydraulics OHT 0

(See Note 2)

Engine Crankcase

(Check level daily.

Refer to lubrication
instructions for CAE
engine).

Brake s Q
(Clean fiIter elements and
Transmission
bleed system).
(See Note 4)

CD Oi I Can Paints
(See Nate 5)

3-2
 I EXTERIOR COMPONENTSI

Lubricant-Interval Interval- Lubricant

Idler Arm OE Gun-Launcher Bore

(Check level and fi II quarterly. (See Note I}

To fill, remove top and 2 o'clock
plugs. FiII untiI oi I runs from
2 o'clock plug hole. Change oil
every 1500 miles or semiannually,
whichever occurs first. To drain,
locate plug at bottom and remove.
Drain only when hot after opera-
OHT Suspension System
tion}.
and Hull Hydraulics
{See Note 2)

Road and Idler Wheel Hubs OE

(Check oil level daily. Oil level

is correct when surface of oi I is
midway on sight plug. To fill, OE Track Support Rollers
remove upper plug in spindle
(Check oil level daily.
housing and fill to center of sight
Oil level is correct
plug. To drain, remove plug in
when surface of oil is
bottom of spindle housing. Change
midway sight plug.
oil every 1500 miles or semiannually,
on

To fi II, remove upper

whichever occurs first. Drain only
plug and fi II to center
when hot after operation}.
of sight plug. To
drain, remove plug at
bottom. Change oil
every 1500 miles or
semiannually, which­
ever occurs first.
Final Drive OE Q Drain only when hot
after operation}.
(Drain and fill quarter! y. To
drain, remove drain plug at
bottom. To fill, remove fill
ond overflow plugs. Add oil
in 2-ounce increments, wait
(i) Oil Can Points

2 minutes. Repeat until oil

{See Note 5)
flows from overflow hole. At
power pi ant removal, apply
I iberal amount of GMD to
coup! ing sleeve}.

3-3
 -KEY-

EXPECTED TEMPERATURES
LUBRICANT LUBRICANT INTERVAL
above +32°F +40°F to -I ooF 0°F to -65°F

HOC-LUBRICATING OIL, INTERNAL

COMBUSTION ENGINE
(MIL-L -45199)

ENGINE CRANKCASE HDO 30 HDO 10 OES

OE -LUBRICATING OIL, INTERNAL

COMBUSTION ENGINE
(MIL-L-2104)

FINAL DRIVE SPROCKET OE 30 OE 10 OES

IDLER ARM OE 10 OE 10 OE 10

ROAD AND IDLER WHEEL HUBS OE 10 OE 10 OE 10

TRACK SUPPORT ROLLERS OE 10 OE 10 OE 10

"
0
"'
o-
OES -LUBRICATING OIL, INTERNAL
- - �
COMBUSTION ENGINE, SUB-ZERO OES .....
so -DRY CLEANING
(MIL-L-10295) 0
..... SOLVENT
"' (P-D-680)
GG -GREASE, GRAPHITE w
D -Doily
(VV-G-671) ...
"' TPM -THINNER , PAINT
w

MINERAL SPIRITS
GUN/LAUNCHER THREAD AREAS GG GG GAA z (TT-T -295A)
0 0-Quarterly
GAA -GREASE, AUTOMOTIVE AND .....
< CR -CLEANING COMPOUND, or 750 miles
ARTILLERY GAA GAA GAA "' RIFLE BORE
(MIL-G-10924) w
... (MIL-C-372)
0
PL -LUBRICATING OIL, GENERAL u
PURPOSE PL (Special) PL (Special) - .....
u
(VV-L-800) "'
<
"'
LAW -LUBRICATING OIL, WEAPONS 0
- - LAW
(MIL-L-14107) ...

GO -LUBRICATING OIL, GEAR,

MULTIPURPOSE GO GO -
(MIL-L-2105)

GOS -LUBRICATING OIL, GEAR,

SUB-ZERO - - GOS
(MIL-L-1 0324)

GMD-GREASE, MOLYBDENUM DISULFIDE

(MIL-G-21164) GMD GMD GMD

GIA -GREASE, AIRCRAFT AND

INSTRUMENT GIA GIA GI A
(MIL-G-23827}

GPS -GREASE, PNEUMATIC SYSTEM

GPS GPS GPS
(MIL-G-4343)

LSA -LUBRICATING OIL, SEMI-FLUID

LSA LSA LSA
(MIL-L-46000)

OHT -HYDRAULIC FLUID, PETROLEUM

BASE, PRESERVATIVE OHT OHT OHT
(MIL-H-6083)

3-4
 CONTINENTAL AVCR-ll00-3B ENGINE

LUBRICATION SPECIFICATIONS

CAUTION: Check oil level only when vehicle is within 5° of horizontal plane.

RECOMMENDED OIL CHANGE INTERVAL: 100 Hours or 1500 Miles of operation.

RECOMMENDED LUBRICATING OIL: MIL-L-45199 SERIES 3.

TEMPERATURE RANGE GRADE

+20°F to 120°F SAE 30

-10°F to +50°F SAE 10
-65°F to +20°F MIL-L-10295 (Arctic Grade)

CRANKCASE CAPACITY: 27 Gallons Wet, 3 5 Gallons Dry

NOTE: Recheck dipstick after the engine has been run and add oil to the '7ULL"
mark.
OIL FILTER TYPE: Disposable element type.
NORMAL ENGINE OIL TEMPERA'lURE: 185°F at 60°F Ambient.
MAXIMUM ENGINE OIL TEMPERATURE: 245°F out of coolers; 265°F in sump.
NORMAL OIL PRESSURE: at 2600 rpm
40-60 psi at 220°F Oil Temperature
60-90 psi at 185°F Oil Temperature

MINIMUM OIL PRESSURE: at 850 rpm, 20 psi.

I - Oil level indicator

2 - Crankcase oil filler tube
3 - Crankcase drain plug
4 - Oil filter drain plug
5 - Oil filter cover

Figure 3-1. Engine Lubrication Chart

3-5
 rl
I
I
I
I

I
I
I
I
I P OWER P LANT
/
/
COMP ARTMEN
' /
' / FLOOR A CCESS
'-... -'---�"' COVER (6)

TRANSMISSION
ENGINE OIL
MAIN OIL
CHECK/FIL
CHECK/FILL CD OIL CAN POINTS
1.,..__
__ --L,.._
___
(SEE NO TE 5) _ ___..�,_
__
____,

Figure 3-2. Hu II Access Doors and Covers

3-6
 ENGINE EXHAUST
GRILLE

TRANSMISSION
COOLING GRILLE

TRANSMISSION
OIL FILTER

FINAL DRIVE TOWING PINTLE BRAKE ADJUST

OVERFLOW- (REFERENCE)
(LEFT SIDE)
FINAL DRIVE/ FINAL DRIVE/
TRANSMISSION TRANSMISSION
DISCONNECT DISCONNECT
AND FORDING/
SUBMERGENCE DRAIN

CD OIL CAN POINTS

(SEE NOTE 5)

Figure 3-3. Hull Rear Access Covers

3-7
 LtJBRICATTON CHARI' NarES

1. GUN LAUNCHER -
/
DAILY CLEANING AND LtJBRICATION ( AT COMPLETION OF DAY'S FIRING SCHEDULE ) -
Open breech and remove obturator seal. Use a soft rag to wipe residue,
dirt, and foreign material from obturator seal, rear face of gun tube, seal
cavity, breech chamber front face, coupling and breech chamber buttress threads,
and all exposed surfaces. Visually inspect all areas for cleanliness and
reinstall obturator seal. Apply coating of lubricating oil PL to all cleaned
areas. Spread evenly with a clean saturated rag or brush. Blow out detent
cavity with dry compressed air. Make sure coupling and breech chamber buttres�
threads are well lubricated. Hand crank breech open and closed several times
to check smooth and normal operation. Before firing, wipe all areas except
coupling and breech chamber buttress threads. Maintain lubricant on these
threads at all times.

N OTE . After firing 100 conventional rounds, notify organizational main­

tenance personnel to service detent, disassemble and clean closed
breech scavenge system check \'alve with CR or TPM.

Lenve breech backed out but not rolled over to permit air circulation and
reduce condensation.

CLEANING AND LtJBRICATION AT COMPLETION OF FIRING MISSION WHEN WEAPON WILL Nar
BE USED FOR EXTENDED PERIODS - Tmmediately after firing and on next two
following days thereafter, open breech, remove obturator seal, and thoroughly
clean bore and breech chamber with CR, making sure that all powder-contacting
surfaces ( including rifling) are vrell coated. Do not wipe dry. On third day
after firing, clean bore with CR, using CR and non-scratch pad or stiff bristle
brusn, wash obturator seal, breech chamber, front face and exposed surfaces,
gun tube rear surface and seal cavity, and coupling threaded area. Wipe dry
with clean, lint free cloth and blow out detent cavity with dry compressed air.

NOTE. Close breech and activate scavenge system manually to clear check
valve discharge port in tube.

Visually inspect for complete removal or residue, rust, and foreign matter.
Coat all cleaned surfaces with lubricating oil pr.. Spread oil with a clean
saturated cloth or brush.

NOTE. If cannon will not be fired for one month or longer, use grease,
aircraft and instrument, GIA.

Monthly thereafter, when cannon is not being fired, clean with CR, wipe dry and
relubricate with GIA. Wipe all areas dry before firing except breech chamber
and buttress threads. Maintain lubricant on these threads at all times.

NarE. Notify organizational maintenance to service check valve and detent.

3-8
 LTffiRICATION CHART Nrlr�S - Continued

Leave breech backed out but not rolled over to pennit air circulation and
reduce condensation.
°
Apply GG at temperatures above 0 F and GAA at temper­
°
atures below 0 F to threaded portions of evacuator and tube before assembling.

2. VEHICLE Hr�RAULICS - Check fluid level daily. Level is satisfactory if

hydraulic fluid reservoir is approximately half full when the vehicle is at
normal running elevation (17 inch road clearance). Check filter contamina­
tion indicators weekly. Clean filter housing and replace element as necessary.
Drain fluic'l, remove e.nd clean reservoir every 1500 miles or semiannually,
whichever occurs first. Clean reservoir with SD or TPM and check for damage.
Replace all filter elements at 1500 miles or semiannually. Semiannual
hydraulic oil changes are to be coordinated with seasonal changes where
required.

3. MACHINE GUN - Immediately after firing thoroughly clean and lubricate weapon
to maintain reliability and combat effectiveness. Disassemble gun into
groups and assemblies. Clean all metal surfaces subject to powder fouling
'lorith CR, 'loripe dry, and lubricate. Do NOT dip or submerge back plate in any
solution. Clean with swab or rag saturated with CR or SD. Keep all liquids
from solenoid of the Machine Gun. Clean solenoid with dry cloths only.
Clean bore and chamber with brush or swab saturated with CR until a clean
Si·rab can be run through barrel without detecting any contamination. Hipe dry
and lubricate. Clean all other surfaces with SD or CR, wipe dry and lubricate.
Inspect all areas where a firing residue might be deposited (chamber, bolt,
bolt locktng area, etc.) to make sure they are clean before assembly of weapon.
Ins·pect each component before assembly to insure lubricant or preservative has
been applied. Hhen lubrication or re-lubrication is required, 'loripe dry with
clean rag and apply lubricants to components. Apply LSA sparingly in grooves,
camways, rails, rollers, barrel extension assembly, and the inside of cover
and receiver assemblies of Machine Gun. Cycle function components by hand
to spread oil. Do NOT apply LSA to rate control slide. Use PL special or
T.A1'l on slide.
Apply PL special to all other com onents (except solenoid)
g
when temperature is expected to vary down to -30 F temporarily. If anticipated
that temperature will remain at 0°F to -65°F consistently, use T.A'v.J in place
of PL special.

NOTE. LSA, as used in areas specified above, is applicable at all temper­

ature ranges.

4. T RANSMISSION - Transmission (and final drive) oil level should be checked

weekly, after long operation, or after operation under unusual conditions
to ensure that it is still at the proper level for safe transmission
operation. The check procedure should be carried out on level ground.
With power package in a static condition (engine stopped), remove the
dipstick, wipe clean, reinsert, remove again, and read oil level. Add
oil only if indicated level is at or below "Add" mark. If unit has been
in operation just prior to check, allow power package to stand static
(engine stopped) for approximately five minutes before checking oil.

Select proper transmission and final drive oil based on ambient temper­
ature conditions.

3-9
 LUBRICATION CHART NOTES - Continued

Type of Oil Ambient Temperature

°
MIL-L-2104B, Grade 30 Above 0 F
MIL-L-10295, Arctic Oil °
BelOW 0 F

MIL-L-2104B, Grade 10 may also be used in an overlap range of approximately

°
+32 to -10 F if use of an oil common to that of the engine is desired.
Hhen changing from a heavier oil to a lighter one, the transmission should
be warmed up to operating temperature before draining. This will ensure
removal of as much of the heavier oil as possible.

If available, use an ultrasonic method to clean 20-micron filters; otherwise,

conventional methods •nll suffice. Drain and fill every 1500 miles or
semiannually whichever comes first. �e oil is drained by removing the
orain plug on the bottom of the center housing. If the transmission is
vrarmed up before draininf'", the oil will drain much faster and more com­
pletely. Approximately h5 gallons of oil are required for a refill.
Follow the normal oil level checking procedure to ensure the correct oil
level.

5. OIL CAN POINTS - Quarterly, or as required, lubricate hinges, latches, and

pins on all access doors, grills, and covers. Also, seat pan hinges on
cornaander's, gunner's, and driver's seats, and rails on gunner's seat.

6. AT TD1E OF ASSEMBLY OR INSTALLATION - Apply GAA to threads of hydraulic

suspension reservoir access cover, transmission fill access cover, and
transmission dipstick access cover. Apply GAA to hinges of power plant
e;rill and escape hatch. Apply GAA to driver's capsule universal shaft,
emergency shift lever, emergency control lever, turret bearing bull gear,
control console cable linkae;e, fixed fire extinguisher linkage, and spring
leaves and tube of commander and gunner hatches. Apply GIA to F&H suspension
system units. Apply G�ID to final drive coupling sleeve and hydraulic slip
ring yokes, cups and pins. Fill traverse mechanism assembly with GO or
°
GOS. Apply GG at temperatures above 0°F and GAA at temperatures below 0 F
to threaded portions of evacuator and tube.

7. 00 NOT LUBRICATE - Bilge pumps, grenade launcher solenoids, gun and turret
control handles, fixed fire extinguisher, personnel heater, machine gun
back plate assembly, and brake discs.

3-10
 Section II. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES

3-3. General

a. This section contains specific preventive maintenance checks and services of

material to be performed by the operator / crew. Checks and services will be per­

formed in numerical sequence as indicated in Table 3-1. Refer to TM 38-750 for

instructions on use of forms pertaining to preventive maintenance services.

b. Perform all Before, During, and After-operation preventive maintenance checks

and services each day that vehicle is operated in order to detect first signs of

failures and to take corrective action before extensive repairs are required. l�ile

operating the vehicle, the crew should be alert for any unusual noises, odors,

abnormal instrument readings, steering irregularities or other vehicle malfunction

indication. The crew should be familiar with quarterly organizational preventive

maintenance service requirements and assist in the accomplishment of these services.

3-4. Procedures for Unusual Conditions

Vehicles exposed to extreme cold or hot weather will require more frequent ser­

vicing. Material subjected to salt-water immersion should be evacuated to organi­

zational maintenance as soon as possible after exposure.

3-5. Specific Procedures

Refer to Table 3-1 for specific procedures. Prior to presenting vehicle to organ­

izational maintenance for quarterly services, the crew •rill remove all ammunition.

The conventional and sub-caliber ammunition will be inspected by the crew for

damage, deterioration, and contamination. Missiles will be checked by authorized

personnel to assure that all electrical circuits are operational. The vehicle will

be as clean as possible in both the interior and exterior, however, the vehicle

shall not be washed immediately prior to delivery so as not to remove visible

sign of oil leakage. Refer to Table 3-2 for servicing elements of filters

contained j_n this vehicle.

3-11
 Table 3- 1 . Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services

SEQUENCE NUMBER
0
BEFORE PURING AFTER ITEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE

NOTE. PRIOR TO INITIAT. ROAD TE�,

Organizational Maintenance should
perform prelimina � P-M Service�
shown in Chapter .

SUSPENSION

1 1 Road & Idler Wheels Check inboard side of wheel hubs for
evidence of oil leakage.

2 1 2 Suspension Units Check for hydraulic fluid leakage. Note

especially the areas where quick dis­
connect fittings are located and any
attaching lines.

3 2 3 Track Tension AdJuster Inspect for evidence of oil leakage.

4 3 Idler Arm Housing Tnspect at point where arm enters hull

for oil leaks from housing.

5 4 5 Final Drives Inspect for leakage of transmission oil.

Check oil level and contamination.
Check for loose mounting screws.
NO'T'F.. If leakage is evident in items
1 through 5 above, notify Organ.
Maint. Personnel.

6 6 Road/Tdler & Support Check for signs of overheating. Check

Roller Wheel Hubs for proper oil level. Right glass must
show half full. Add oil as required.
Note quantity and position in Tog Book.
Use back of hand (cautiously) to detect
heat level of hub prior to feeling hubs
for variations in temperature. Note
abnormally hot or cold hubs in Tog Book
and refer to Organizational Maintenance
Personnel.

7 7 Tracks Inspect for loose or missing bolts or

nuts, bent or broken center guides, loss
of road pads, excessive rubber loss,
etc. Repair or replace components as
required. Note in. Log Book.

8 8 Road/Tdler Wheels and Inspect for loose nuts, damaged or loose

Support Rollers bolts, foreign objects jammed between
wheels, etc. Inspect for excessive
rubber loss. Note discrepancies in
Tog Book.

3-12
 Table 3- ·1 • Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER

BEFORE DURING AFTER ITEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE

9 9 Sprockets and Hubs Check for excessive wear, cracks, and

defective or missing hardware.

HULL ( EXTRRIO'R)

10 10 Grilles Inspect for proper mounting, cracks,

and missing hardware. Remove any ob­
structions to air flow such as mud,
debris, etc.

11 11 T.ights Inspect headlights and taillights for

all operations and for broken lenses,
burnt out lamps, broken guards, etc.
Repair or replace as required.

12 5 12 Hull Ballistic Skirts Inspect skirts for warpage, broken or

missing hardware, and general condition.

13 Exterior Fire Extin­ Inspect handles and shields for 3eneral

guisher Handles condition. Handles must be safety
wired in off position. Tf safety wire
is broken, notify Organizational Main­
tenance.

14 Tow Pintle Inspect unit for mounting, damage, and

proper operating condition.

15 Travel IDck Inspect unit for mounting, damage, and

proper operating condition.

16 Slave Receptacle Check mounting hardware; check recepta

cle :for waterproof condition.

ENGIW. COMPARTMENT

17 6 13 Engine Check engine oil level. Add oil as re

quired and note in Log Book. Check oil
cooler lines for leaks. After warm-up,
cneck high and low idle speeds.

18 14 H ydraulic Reservoir Check hydraulic fluid level. Add oil as

required and note in Tog Book.

NOTE. Check level when vehicle is in

bottom elevation (6 inch road
clearance), Hydraulic reservoir
should register at "full" mark on
indicator.
7 Transmission After two minutes of operation at 1200
· ·----· ________ ____ _____ _ ___ ___ ��Q-�-�'- _s�
_ o_p_e�_lSine_: Che_c� !!:ans�ission
___ __

3-13
 Table 3- l . Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER -0
BEFORE DURING AFTER ITEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE

oil level. Oil must be between maximum

and minimum marks on dip stick. Add
oil as required and note in Log Book.

19 Air Cleaners Check air cleaner indicators located

on rear corners of engine compartment.
Sight gages on both sides must show
Green. If either indicator shows RED,
air cleaner element must be removed ·

and cleaned. ( para 3-12).

20 /
Fuel Oil 1-Tater Open valve and drain separated water
Separator from tank.

HULL INTERIOR

21 8 ]5 Hydraulic Lines and Visually inspect all exposed fluid lines,

Components filters, valves, junctions, etc. Notify
Organizational Maintenance of any
discrepancies.

22 9 Electrical Harnesses Visually inspect all exposed Wlnng

for frayed or damaged insulation,
broken wires, connections, etc .
..
23 17 Batteries Check ba�teries for leaks, cracked
cases, or loose posts. Clean cable
terminals, bolts, and posts if required.
Remove caps to check electrolyte level.
Clean vents, if necessary.

WARNING: Acid fumes and copper sulphate

-
particles are injurious to
eyes and skin. Upon contact
apply first aid and obtain
medical attention immed:.i ately.

24 Driver's Capsule Check all manual controls to assure

smooth unrestricted operation.

10 Check for unrestricted operation during

turret operation and assure that all
instruments and controls are operating
correctly and without excessive fluxu­
ation or unusual noises.

3-14
 Table 3- 1 . Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER

BEFORE DURING AFTER I TEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE

HULL INTERIOR ( Continued)
ll Primary.Driving Check controls for smooth operation
Controls throughout their full range. Assure
that no excessive play or binding
exists and that all instruments and
controls are operational.

12 Emergency Driving Install all emergency driving controls

Controls and assure that all control operatiqns
are smooth and vehicle response is
similar to electrical control opera­
tions; this includes brake, steer,
throttle, shift and fuel shut-off.

TURRET, FIRE CONTROL & .ARMM-lENT

25 Interphone Check condition of phone, electrical

wires, container, and lid seal for
damage or worn components.

26 Communications Check ease of operation of dials

Equipment and knobs.

13 Azimuth Indicator Check azimuth indicator for slippage

or backlash; check light bulb.

27 Ammo Racks - Hull Inspect rubber pads, clamps, and hArd­

ware for missing, damaged or malao­
jueted parts.

28 OEM - Hull Inspect for missing components and

equipment shortages.

29 lome Lights Cheyk operation of dome lights.

30 14 Seats Inspect mounting hardware for tightness

Check adjusting mechanisms for ease
of operation.

?l Turret Blower � Assure blower operates manually.

3-15
 Table 3-2. Fi Iter Service

Type
System Qty. Frequency of Service "Rlement Remarks

Engine Oil 2 Replace at 1500 miles or Disposable Accessible by re-

100 hours. moving Engine Top
Deck Cover.

Fuel
Water
Separator 2 nrain daily and clean at ( 1) Non- Accessible by rais-
1500 miles or 100 hours. Disposable ing left front Air
(1) Disnosable Tntake Grille.

Secondary 2 Replace 9.t 1500 miles or Disposable Ringle unit double

100 hours. barrel secondary
accessible by re-
moving Engine Top
Deck Cover.

Manifolo 1 Reasonable replacement Disposable Accessible when

Flame 1.rhen scheduled for cold pack is removed.
Heater ¥reather operation.

Air
Cleaner
2 2 elements each sioe.
Clean vhen indicator
Non-
Disnosable
Accessible through
doors at rear of
p
shows RET! . hull.

Transmis- 5 Filters at rear, clean Non- Accessible through

sian every 775 miles or 75 Disposable hinged exhaust
Primary / operating hours. grille.
Secondary

Brake Apply 2 Replace at 1500 miles Disposable Accessible by rais-

Hydraulics or 100 hours. ing left front Air
Intake Grille.

Hydraulics 'J
�·
Inspect the contamina- Non- Service through
System tion Indicators weekly. Disposable rear bulkhead .
Replace at 1500 miles
or 100 hours.

3-16
 Section III. TROUBLESHOariNG

3-6. Scope.

a. This section contains troubleshooting information and tests for locating and

correcting some of the troubles which may develop in the vehicle, weapon, or

sighting and fire-control materiel. Each symptom of trouble or malfunction given

for an individual unit or system is followed by a list of probable causes and

corrective actions necessary to remedy the malfunction.

b. This technical manual cannot cover all possible troubles and deficiencies

that may occur under the many conditions of operation. If a specific trouble, test,

or remedy is not covered in this manual, proceed to isolate the system in which

the trouble occurs and then locate troubles. Standard automotive theories and

principles of operation apply in troubleshooting the vehicle. Standard armament

procedures apply in troubleshooting the weapon. The greater the number of symptoms

of trouble that can be evaluated, the easier will be the isolation of the defect.

c. The tests and remedies provided in this section are governed by the scope

of the crew level of maintenance.

d. Troubleshooting information is listed in Table 3-3 which gives the symptoms

of troubles usually encountered with the necessary corrective action. If the cor­

rective action does not remedy the trouble, notify Organizational Maintenance

personnel.

3-7. Transmission Oil Level.

The transmission does not burn or use oil as an engine does. Consequently, if

transmission oil level is found to be low at frequent checking periods, cause is

due to leakage. Source of leakage must be determined and condition corrected to

avoid damage to transmission. Notify Organizational Maintenance personnel.

3-17
 Table 3-3. Troubleshooting
0
Malfunction Probable causes Corrective action

No response at all upon a. Transmission not in "Park". a. Place transmission selector

activating starter. switch in "Park".

b. Discharged batteries, loose or b. Check batteries and charge if

corroded cables and / or cable required Clean or replace
terminals. corroded cable connections,
install securely.

c. Toose o r defective starter c. Check for loose or defective

switch wiring. wiring.

d Defective master switch, d Notify Organizational Main­

neutral switch, starter relay tenance.
or starter.

Clicking sound upon a. Discharged batteries, corroded a Check batteries and charge if
activating starter. or loose cables and cable required Clean corroded
terminals. cables.

b. Defective starter relay, b. Notify Organizational Main­

defective starter solenoid, tenance.
cables or terminals.

�arte:r fails to rotate. a. Batteries discharged. a. Charge or replace batteries.

b. T�ose, corroded or defective b. Clean corroded terminals and

wiring. tighten all connections secure

c. Starter switch, starter motor, c. Notify Organizational Main­

neutral switch, relay or fuel tenance.
pressure switch defective.

Engine cranks but will a. Insufficient fuel available to

not start. engine fuel pump. ( Fuel should
be supplied from fuel tanks at
5-7 psi at primary filter. )

1. No fuel in vehicle fuel 1. Fill fuel tanks.

tanks.

2. Vapor locked fuel system, 2. Operate vehicle ( in tank)

fuel pumps and air bleed
engine secondary fuel
:1"11ters.

3. Fuel tank or vehicle fuel 3, Notify Organizational

lines clogged. Maintenance.

4. Defective vehicle fuel 4. Notify Organizational

shut-off valve, or fuel Maintenance.
pumps.

5. Improperly connected 5. Inspect fuel line routing

vehicle-to-engine and connections.
fuel lines.

6. Crushed or bent fuel lines 6. Inspect for crushed or ben

restricting fuel flow. fuel lines. Replace as
necessary.

3-18
 Table 3-3. Troubleshooting - Continued

Malfunction Probable causes Corrective action

Engine cranks but will b. Insufficient fuel at engine

not start. (cont'd) fuel injection pump. (Vehicle
fuel system operating normally,
supplying fuel to engine at
5-7 psi.)

1. Air or water in engine fuel 1. Operate vehicle (in-tank)

filters and fuel lines. fuel pumps. Bleed water
from fuel/water separator
and air and water from
engine secondary fuel
filters.

2. Vehicle fuel supply lines 2. Check vehicle fuel supply

misconnected or discon­ lines for proper rbuting
nected at engine. and connections.

3. Clogged fuel/water sepa­ 3. Remove and clea·1 fuel/water

rator. separator elements.

4 Defective engine fuel p•urrp. 4. Remove fuel outlet line from

(Engine fuel pump should. engine driven fuel pump
supply fuel to secondary r.rank engine If little or
filters at 4o psi at id.le. ) no fuel comes from pump out­
let, notify Organizational
Maintenance.

5. Clogged engine secondary 5. Replace secondary fuel

fuel filters . filters.

c. Injection pump improperly c. Notify Organizational Main­

timed or inoperative. tenance.

d. Injection pump governor d. Notify Organizational Main­

linkage. tenance.

F.ngine will not start be­ a. No fuel delivery from nozzle. a. Notify Organizational Main­
cause manifold heater tenance.
system is not operating.
(Applies to cold weather b. No spark at manifold heater b.
operation 0°F and below spark plug.
only.)
1. Electrical lead loose. 1. Tighten lead.

2. Defective wiring to com­ 2. Check electrical lead.

ponents.

3. Spark plug defective. 3. Check spark plug.

4. Exciter coil defective. 4. Check coil.

Engine has low stall a. Inadequate fuel supply . a.

speed; appears low on
power. 1. Clogged fuel/water sepa­ 1. Clean fuel/water separator.
rator.

2. In-tank fuel pumps inoper­ 2 Notify Organizational

ative, restricted fuel Maintenance.
lines or fittings, or
engine fuel pump defective.

3-19
 Table 3-3. Troubleshooting - Continued

Malfunction Probable causes Corrective action

Engine has low stall b. Inadequate air supply (indica­

speed; appears low on ted by excessive black exhaust
power. ( :aont'd) smoke )

1 Air cleaners clogged. 1. Clean or replace air .cleaner

filter elements.

2. Leaks in intake or exhaust 2. Tighten hose clamps and

systems between engine and inspect for defective .hose
turbochargers. connectors Check manifold
preheater systems for loose
spark plugs.

3- Turbochargers defective. 3- Notify Organizational Maint.

c. Restricted exhaust system.

1. Mud or other matter clog­ 1. Remove clogging matter.

ging exhaust pipes.

2. Smashed or bent exhaust 2. Notify Organizational Maint,

pipe.

Engine will not idle but a. Injection pump control linkage a. liTotify Organizational Maintenance.
runs well under load. defective or improperly
adjusted.

b Idle stop on engine at gover­ b. Notify Organizational Maintenance.

nor set improperly,

c IDw fuel pressure at idle speed, c Notify Organizational Maintenance.

d Defective governor, d. Notify Organizati.onal Maintenance

One engine bank emits a. Air cleaner plugged on one side, a. Clean air cleaner filter element.
heavy black smoke. restricting airflow.

b IDose or broken connector in b. Check air induction system for

the air induction system. leaks,

c. Failed turbocharger on same c. Notify Organizational Maintenance.

bank or nozzle malfunction.

One bank emits bluish­ a. One or more cylinders in same a. Notify Organizational Maintenance
white smoke. bank not firing,.

Both cylinder banks smoke a. Both air cleaners plugged. a Clean or replace elements.
badly with engine under
full or 3/4 load. b. Both turbochargers failed or b. Notify Organizational Maintenance.
late injection timing.

Engine exhaust is bluish­ a. One or more cylinders not a. Notify Organizational Maintenance
white at idle during cold firing or firing late.
weather.

Engine emits clicking a. IDw engine oil level, dirty a. Fill oil to full level on dipstick.
sounds at idle speeds. engine oil, defective hydraulic Change oil and replace oil filter
valve tappets or other valve elements if oil is excessively di
train components.

3-20
 Table 3-3. Troubleshooting - Continued

Malfunction Probable causes Corrective action

Engine emits smoke in a. Teaky exhaust manifolds, a. Notify Organizational Main­

cooling air blast gaskets, manifold bellows. tenance.

Engine runs properly under a Fuel supply pumps not opera­ a. Notify Organizational Main­
no load through speed ting properly at maximum tenance.
range, but appears low on delivery rate; low fuel
power and may emit puffs pressure.
of smoke;
b Partially plugged fuel/water b Drain fuel/water separator.
separator.

Rngine cannot be stopped. a Fuel shut-off solenoid at fuel a. Notify_Organizational

injection pump not operating. Maintenance.

NOTE: Bleed air from secondary

fuel filters prior to restart.

Engine or transmission a. Inadequate airflow through a.

oil overheating. oil coolers.

1. Inlet grilles clogged with 1. Clean cooler inlet grilles.

mud, sand, and so forth.

2. Shrouding bent, broken or 2. Check all engine shrouding

warped causing recircula­ for damage or distortion.
tion.

3. Fans not operating. 3. Notify Organizational Main­

tenance.

b. Inadequate oil flow through b.

coolers.

1. Clogged or damaged cooler 1. Check oil cooler visually

oil tube assemblies. for damage that could re­
strict oil flow.·

2 Notify Organizational Main­

tenance.

Low engine oil pressure a. Insufficient oil in engine. a. Fill crankcase until dipstick
registers "Full" at engine idle
(850 rpm)

b. Improper grade of oil for b. nrain engine oil and refill crank­
existing ambient temperature. case with the proper oil for the
environment.

c. Oil temperature too high- c. Notify Organizational Maintenance.

External leakage of engine

oil a. a.
1. Defective oil delivery. 1. Inspect for damage and leaks
to oil lines and fittings.

2. Defective oil pan gasket, 2. Notify Organizational Main­

accessory housing gaskets, tenance.
or other ��gine gaskets.

Fuel in cooling air blast a. Fuel leaks from injection a. Notify Organizational Maintenance.
from engine. lines and/or pumps.

3-21
 Table 3-3. Troubleshooting - Continued

Malfunction Probable causes Corrective action

Batteries do not stay a. Excessive use of electrical a. niscourage prolonged periods of

charged. equipment when engine is not electrical equipment usage when
running. engine is shut down.

b. Charging circuit defective. b. Notify Organizational Maintenance.

TRANRMTSRION

Vehicle will not move
when transmission selector
switch is turned from
"Park" position and engine
accelerated
a. Selector switch defective. a. Notify Organizational Maint.
b Electrical line s ( ) loose, b Locate problem and correct if
disconnected, or defective possible For part replacement,
notify Organizational Maintenance

c. Low oil pressure c. Check oil level and replenish

d Transmission defective d. Notify Organizational Maintenance

�L�CTRTCAL SYRTRM

Vehicle master switch a. Master switch not on. a. Turn master switch on
indicator lamp does not
light. b. Lamp burned out. b. RPplace

c. Loose electrical leads. c. Inspect and tighten connections

if required.

Fuel indicator light fails a. Lamp defective. a Replace lamp.

to illuminate when gauge
registers in red area
( NORMAL or RERERVE).

Fuel gauge fail to a. Master switch not in "ON" a. Turn master switch to "ON" position
register. position.

Headlight operates but a. Lamp burned out. a. Replace incandescent lamp

taillight does not.

b. Toose connection, broken or b. Tighten loose co'1nection: report

disconnected. lead. uncorrected defect to organiza­
tional Maintenance personnel.

Headlight or taillight a. /
Loose connection broken lead a. Tighten loose connection; report
operates intermittently uncorrected defect to Organiza­
tional Maintenance personnel

b Light switch defective. b Notify Organizational Mainten­

ance personnel.

Headlights and taillights a. Master switch turned "OFF". a. Turn master to "ON"
inoperative
b Lamp burned out. b. Replace lamp.

c. Loose or broken connection c. Tighten connection and report un­

corrected defect to Organizational
Maintenance personnel.

d. Electrical system defective. d. Notify Organizational Maintenance

personnel.

3-22
 Table 3-3. Troubleshooting -Continued

Malfunction Probable causes Corrective action

Stop and taillights a. Lamp or lamps burned out . a. Replace lamp(s).

operate but blackout
marker or drive lights b. Loose or broken connection. b. NotifY Organizational Main-
do not. tenance personnel.

stop and taillights a. Lamp burned out . a. Notify Organizational Main-

operate but drive or infra tenance personnel
red headlights do not.

PERRONNRL HEATF.R

Personnel heater inoper- a. Master switch not in "ON" a. Turn master switch to "ON"
ative position position

r.ombustion heater a. Master switch not in "nN" a. Turn master switch to "ON"
inoperative -position position

Combustion heater indica- a. Lamp defective. a. 'Replace lamp

tor light fails to illum-
inate during heater
operation.

Fresh air blower inoper- a. Master switch in "OFF" a. Turn master switch to "ON"
ative. position. position.

3-23
 Section IV. MAINI'ENANCE

3-8. Crew Maintenance

Instructions for maintenance of equipment by the crew members are provided in

this section. Basically, these instructions furnish information for inspection of

specific vehicle components and replacement or cleaning of various filter elements

installed in this vehicle. For replacement of any component ( other than specific

filter elements ) , notify Organizational Maintenance personnel and refer to Chapters

4 and 5 in this manual.

3-9. Engine Service

a. Lubrication Under Normal Conditions. Engine lubrication will be dictated by

Lubrication Chart ( see Fig. 3-1) which lists the various grade and type of lubri­

cants required under different environments and operating conditions.

CAUTION: Avoid operating the engine with i�roper grades and types Jf

lubricating oil. Use grades specified in the Lubrication Chart

for the ambient operating temperature.

b. Checking Oil Level

(1) Ensure vehicle is sitting on reasonably level ground before checking

oil level.

(2) Open engine oil fill and check access door ( Fig. 3-4). Open spring

loaded fill cap. Remove dipstick ( Fig. 3-4), wipe clean, reinsert,

remove again and read oil level.

(3) Add oil as required if indicated level is at or below the "ADD" mark

on dipstick.

c. Engine Oil. Engine oil should be changed after every 1500 miles or 100 hours

of operation or six months, whichever occurs first.

(1) Drain engine oil '\-Thile engine is warm. This aids in removing a certain

amount of sediment that is suspended in warm oil, but not in cold oil.

3-24
OIL LEVEL INDICATOR ---
-
- -L._
-
......

SPRING-LOADED CAP

OIL FILLER TUBE

3-25
(2) Remove drain plug (Fig. 3-5) from the damper end of the oil pan. When

replacing drain plug, tighten to 66-83 foot-pounds.

(3) Refill engine crankcase with 27 gallons of oil. Refer to Lubrication

Chart ( Fig. 3-1) for proper grade of oil in the existing ambient tem-

perature range. Check oil level; oil should be visible on the dipstick

at or near the "Full" mark as shown in Fig. 3-4.

(4) Start engine and run for 10 to 15 minutes between 1000 and 1200 rpm.

Recheck the oil level with the engine running at 850-950 rpm and add

oil, as necessary, to raise oil level to the "Full" mark on the dipstick.

LEGEND

1. OIL PAN DRAIN PLUG

2. COPPER GASKET
3. OIL PAN DRAIN HOLE

Figure 3-5. Removal/Installation Engine Oil Drain Plug

3-26
3-10. Secondary Fuel Filter Element Replacement ( Refer to Figure 3-6).

Preliminary Step: Open air intake grille on right side of vehicle. ( Refer

to Figure 3-3) .

a. Bleeding Air from Fuel System.

(1) Start vehicle fuel pumps by turning master switch to "DRIVE" position.

( 2) Remove fuel ·pressure sensor unit ( 9, Fig. 3-6) from fuel filter cover.

When air free fuel flows freely, reinstall fuel pressure sensor unit. Turn

master svritch to "OFF" position.

b. Draining Condensation.

(1) Place a suitable container beneath drain cocks ( item 5 ) . Oepn drain

cocks and drain condensation until water-free fuel flows.

(2) Close drain co�ks and vri-pe dry.

c . Element Replacement.

(1) PlAce e suitoble container beneath 2 drain cocks ( itern 5). Ooen

drain cocks and drain filter housings.

f'"'
,c.
) Remove 2 filter housing retaining bolts ( itern 1) .

(3) Loi·rer filter housings ( item 1+), remove and discard 2 filter elements,

( item 6), 2 gaskets ( item 3), and 2 gaskets ( item 10).

(!1) Remove deposits of foreign matter in filter housings, wash housings

thorouehly, vipe dry with clean lint-free cloth.

(5) Install nev filter elements in filter housings. Secure new gaskets

( item 3) to top of filter housings ( item 5 ). Install filter housings to cover

( itern 8) with neiv gaskets ( itern 10) and retaining bolts ( itern 1). Tighten to

25 foot-pounds.

3-27
LEGEND

l. BOLT ( 2) 6. FUEL FILTER ELEMENT ( 2) (598063 )

2. FUEL FILTER INLET 7. FUEL FILTER OUTLET
3. HOUSING GASKET ( 10885485) 8. FUEL FILTER COVER
4. FUEL FILTER HOUSING 9. SENSOR UNIT
5 • DRAIN COCK ( 2) 10. GASKET ( 8720953)

Figure 3-6. Secondary Fuel Filter

3-28
 i --�r�I

I I
FUEL TANK CAP
..-----
ACCESS COVER

FUEL TANK CAP

I �
-

( �
SIDE TANK CAP SHOWN -I
FRONT CELL CAP SIMILAR
- 1
Figure 3-7. Fuel Tank Service

3-11. Fuel Tank Service

HARNING: Make sure there is no smoking, vlelding. burning, or o'Pen fire

in area during fuel tank servicing operations as a spark or

flame could cause a fire resultin� in serious injury to

personnel.

a. Place vehicle Master Switch in the "OFT<'" position.

b. Remove side fuel tank access cover retaining pin and lift fuel tank

access cover. Remove fuel tank cap.

c. Place fueling hose in neck of fuel tank making sure hose is properly grounded.

HARTUNG: Exercise extreme care to make sure fueling hose is properly

grounded to eliminate static electricity. A non-grounded or

improperly grounded fueling hose can result in a dangerous fire.

d. Fill fuel tank exercising care not to over fill. Replace fuel tank

cap, wipe up all spilled fuel and dispose of rags in proper container.

e. Rotate turret several degrees to the left to gain access to front fuel

cellcap. Fill front fuel cell using the same procedure described above.

3-29
3-12. Engine Air Cleaner Element Service.

a. Remove 3 bolts and washers securing each air cleaner outer access door

( left and right rear corners ) ( Fig. 3-8).

b. Unscrew handle and open air cleaner inner access door ( Fig. 3-8).

c. Pull release handle on filter assembly and remove filter elements.

d. Clean elements by blowing from inside to outside with low pressure com­

pressed air (90 psi or less ) , providing carbon deposits are not present.

e. If carbon deposits are present, wash elements thoroughly with warm water

containing a non-sudsing detergent; then, blow out with air as in d. above.

f. Normally it is not necessary to replace gaskets during this operation.

Reinstall cleaned elements by reversing removal procedure outlined in a, b, and

c, aboYe.

g. Push "PRESS-TO-RESEI'" button on air cleaner indicator.

3-30
 BOLT (3)

AIR CLEANER
OUTER ACCESS r.=�...:._--...
DOOR

WASHER (3)

PRESS-TO-RESET
BUTTON
HANDLE

AIR CLEANER
INDICATOR

I
RELEASE PULL (2)
HANDLE (2)

C. AIR CLEANER ELEMENT

Figure 3-8. Engine Air Cleaner Service (Left Side Shown, Right Side Similar)

3-31
3-13. Transmission Service.

a. Checking Oil Level.

(l) Ensure vehicle is sitting on level ground before checking oil level.

NOTE. Allow 5 minutes after engine shut-down before checking transmission

oil to allow for draining.

(2) Open transmission fill and check access door (Fig. 3-9). Raise

spring-loaded fill cap and remove dip stick. Wipe clean, reinsert,

remove again, and read oil level.

b. Changing Oil.

(l) The recommended oil change and filter cleaning or replacement

interval is as follovs:

Condition Interval

Ne,., Vehicle After first 500 miles

Regular Interval Each 1500 miles or six month of
operation, whichever occurs first
After Transmission Overhaul After first 500 miles

(2) Remove transmission drain plug access plate. Place a suitable con-

tainer under drain and remove drain plug. Drain transmission.

Reinstall drain plug. Tighten to 42-50 foot-pounds.

(3) Use the following oils for temperature ranges indicated.

Type of Oil Ambient Temperature

MIL-L-2104B, Grade 30 Above 0°F.

MIL-L-10295, Arctic Oil Below

NOTE. MIL-L-2104B, Grade 10 can be used in an overlap range of approxi­

mately +32° to -l0°F �¥hen an oil common to that of the engine is

desired.

3-32
 OIL FILLER TUBE

I II IIIII\
'- - - ]
Figure 3-9. Checking Transmission Oil Level

3-33
NOTE. When changing from heavy to light oil, warm up transmission to

normal operating temperature (175 to 225 degrees F) before

draining. This will assure removal of as much of the heavier

oil as possible.

(4) Filter Service.

CAUTION: Use extreme care in removing filters so as to avoid

contaiminating filter cavities with foreign material.

NOTE. Transmission oil need not be drained to replace filters.

It is not necessary to replace filters if cleaning will

suffice.

(1) Remove two screws and lower exhaust deflectors (Figure 3-10).
(2) Remove four screws and washers, lift exhaust shroud to gain access

to filters. Support shroud with suitable tool or block (Fig. 3 -10).

(3) Remove ll screws and washers which retain five transmission oil filter

covers. Remove filters (Fig. 3-10) .

3-34
 SCR 'eN

TOOL OR
SUPPORT BLOCK RIGHT SIDE

SCREW (11)
WASHER (11)

Figure 3-10. Transmission Filter Service

3-35
3-14. Checking Hydraulic System Fluid Level.

CAUTION: Use extreme care when servicing or filling filters and reservoir

to avoid contamination of fluid. USE ONLY CLEAN NEW FLUID

(10 MICRON). To assure that only clean fluid is added to reser­

voir, obtain a five gallon can (FSN 7240-242-6153) and a spout

(FSN 7240-177-6154) for hydraulic fluid. The can and spout

should be labeled to read "CAUTION: USE FOR MIL-H-6o83 OIL ONLY".

Provide two protective caps for spout to assure cleanliness of

spout interior.

R. Lower vehicle to 6 inches ground clearance (Bottomed).

b. Remove hydraulic fluid reservoir access cover retaining pin (Fig. 3-11) and

lift off access cover.

c. Push down en hydraulic fluid reservoir cap, turn counterclockwise to remove.

d. Wipe dipstick clean, reinsert in tank; then, remove and read.

e. Add fluid (MIL-H-6o83-C) as required until level reaches "FJLL" mark.

f. Install ca) and dipstick. Install hydraulic fluid reservoir access cover,

and insert retainer pin.

3-36
 HYDRAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR ACCESS COVER-INSTALLED VIEW

"'

HYDRAULIC FLUID
RESERVOIR

CAP WITH D IPSTICK

- 'I

HY)RAULIC FLUID RESERVOIR TANl< WITH CAP INSTALLED

Figure 3-ll. Checking Hydraulic System Fluid Level

...., ....,,
3-15. inal Drive Service.

a. Remove foreign matter from immediate area of fill and overflow plugs.

1tJipe clean.

b. Remove overflow plug completely. If oil does not overflow, remove fill

plug and add oil until overflovr occurs. Reinstall overflow and fill plugs being

careful not to contaminate system with foreign material. Tighten to a snug fit.

Use applicable oil conforming to MIL-L-2104 in the following temperature ranges:

Above +32°F. OE30

From +40°F. to -10°F. OElO

NOTE: LEFT SIDE SHOWN,

RIGHT SIDE SIMILAR.

FILL
PLUG

I �(
OVERFLOW
PLUG N /"

-�)
- )
'" · _ "'

Figure 3-12. Fino I Drive Service

3-38
3-16. Idler and O"'d \\'heel Service.
• .

a. Visually check oil level in idler, road wheels, and support rollers through

sight glass. Proper oil level is when sight glass is one-half covered.

b. If oil is required, remove all foreign material from surrounding area of fill

plug. Wipe clean. . .····;··'

c. Remove fill plug and add oil (MIL-L-2104) as required to bring to prop er

level.

d. Install fill plug. Tighten to 20-24 foot-pounds.

NOTE:

FILL PLUG
11619600-3
SIGHT
GLASS

DRAIN PLUG
11619600-3

NOTE: ROAD WHEEL SHOWN, IDLER AND

SUPPORT WHEELS SfMILAR.

Figure 3-13.
3-17. Heodlight Lamp Replacement.

a. Ensure vehicle master switch is in the "OFF" position before attempting

to service headlamps.

b. Exercise extreme caution ivhen removing cover group ( Fig. 3-14, item 2)

so as not to damage cover to sealed beam gaskets.

c. Refer to Figure 3-14 and remove incandescent and sealed beam lamps in

numerical sequence.

d. After installing replacement lamp, check for proper operation. If replace-

ment lamp does not light, replace with a new lamp. If lamp still does not light,

report condition to Foreman.

e. Prior to installing cover group ( item 2), wipe lenses, cover, and body

with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth.

f. Apply adhesive FSN 80�-0-285-1104 to gasket and to groove in cover prior

to installing cover on body.

LEGEND

1. CAPTIVE SCREW
2. COVER GR OUP
3. LAMP - MS15570-1251
4. LAMP - MS35478-1683
5. SEALED BEAM UNITS
W/GASKETS

Figure 3-14. Removal/Installation Headlight Incandescent Lamps

3-40
3-18. Left Taillight LamP Replacement.

a. Ensure vehicle master switch is in the "OFF" position before attempting

to service taillight.

b. Exercise extreme caution when removing door assembly so as not to damage

preformed packing. If preformed packing is damaged, replace.

c. Refer to Figure 3-15 and remove incandescent lamp or lamps in numerical

sequence.

d. After installing replacement lamp, check for proper operation. If replace-

ment lamp does not light, replace with a new lamp. If lamp still does not light,

report condition to Foreman.

e. Before installing door assembly, wipe lenses, lamps, base, and door

assembly with a clean, dry, lint-free cloth.

f. Ensure preformed packing is firmly seated on periphery of door assembly.

LEGEND

1. CAPTIVE SCREW
2. DOOR ASSEMBLY
3. PREFORMED PACKING
4. INCANDESCENT LAMP (3 CP) (2) - MS15570-1251
5. INCANDESCENT LAMP (32 CP) - MS35478-1683
6. BODY and LEAD GROUP

Figure 3-15. Removal/Installation of Left Taillight lncandescen.t Lamps

3-41
3-19. Right Taillight Lamp Replacement.

a. Ensure vehicle master switch is in the "OFF" position before attempting

to service taillight.

b. Exercise extreme caution when removing door assembly so as not to damage

preformed packing. If preformed packing is damaged, replace.

c. Refer to Fi��re 3-16 and remove incandescent lamp or lamps in numerical

sequence.

d. After installing replacement lamp, check for proper operation. If replace-

ment lamp does not li�ht, replace with a new lamp. If lamp still does not light,

report condition to Foreman.

e. Defore installing door assembly, wipe lenses, lamps, base, and door

asseml-·ly ;.ri_th a clean, dry, lint-free cloth.

f. Ensure preformed packii1g is firmly seated on periphery of door assembly.

LEGEND

1. CAPTIVE SCREW
2. DOOR ASSEMBLY
3. PREFORMED PACKING
4. INCANDESCENT LAMP
5. BODY and LEAD GROUP

Figure 3-16. Removal/Installation of Right Taillight Incandescent Lamps

3-42
 Fl LTER SE LECTOR LEVER

Figure 3-17. Dome Light

3-20. Inspection of Dom Lights.

a. Hith master switch on "ON" position, operate dome light control switch.

Rotating switch knob energizes lamp; further rotation controls brightness of lamp.

b. Depress lever lock and actuate filter selector lever to check clear and

red lens.

c. If dome light fails to operate when switch is actuated, remove knurled nut

and check lamp. Replace if necessary.

3-43
 MASTER SWITCH lAMP TEST BUTTON

0 0 0 BATT TRACKO
ENGINE. TRA NS11SSICJ'.l FORDING
TEMP PRES TE.M? PRES 8 ILGE FO�D LOW VOLT ADJUST

-
LAM.ST e §
(I - - - - - (I

I
1---FU-'-E-L
SiART PREHEAT
___ o�

LOADER
@@
0 SELECTOR
DRIVING LIGHTS BLOWER CREW TEMP
COOL

0
BUSTLE TURRET tiE AT
AUTO RESTOW OFF ST� ON
BEAM
MRR�ER

U
LIGHT
HAND H1GH ON ON ON H.'CiH
B.O.
DRIVE
SERV. - RESERVE
@orr @
e
LIGHTS

0
LOW

0
IR
.AJJTO

0
OFF
@tOWN05TA
O�F"

0
GJ Jl 0

DRIVER1S AUXILIARY PANEL

DRIVER1S MAIN PANEL

Figure 3-18. Checking Instrument Panels Indicator Lamps

3-21. Checking Indicator Lamps on Instrument Panelr..

a. Turn master switch to "ON" position.

b. Press lamp test button on Driver1s Auxiliary Panel; all indicator lamps

identified by dotted area ( ) on both panels should light. If any lamp does not

illuminate, replace and re-test. If lamp still does not light, check for faulty

connection or defective wiring.

3-44
 TURRET BASKET

.
.
.
•

.
.
.

. \·-�·····�··············
"' it_ •

. J

Figure 3-19. Turret Basket Battery Access Opening

3. 22 Battm Tn.s.ne,c.t�l?x..o.<;;;p
�1 J..l.:r_e_ �-
a. Rotate turret. so battery access opening in :--urret basket is directly in
front of the batteries.

I
I

Figure 3-20. Batteries- Left Group- Installed View

b. Ensure vehicle master switch is in the "OFF" posi t ion before attempting
to service batteries.
c. Loosen reta.in1.ng nuts to release hooks and swing upper set of batteries
out and down.

3-45
 ..... \
'"---" .
� I BOX
l A SSY .

LEFT GROUP SHOWN-RIGHT GROUP SIMILAR

Figure 3-21. Batteries- Left Group- In Inspection Position

d. Inspect terminals, terminal lugs, electrical leads, battery box, end

retainers for corrosion.

e. Remove vent caps and check electrolyte level. Add distilled .rater as

required to bring electrolyte level up to the split ring in the fill hole. If

distilled �>rater is not available, use clean water.

CAlfriON: Do not overfill battery cells.

f. After batteries have been serviced, install vent caps and raise upper

battery trays into stowed position and secure with retaining hooks and nuts.

CAUTION: During colo weather, charge batteries (by running engine) immediately

after adding -vmter to combine electrolyte \vith water to prevent freezing.

3-46
Table 3-4. Battery State of Charge Table 3-6. Battery Specific Grav-ity
T empera ture Correct'1on Chart
Specific Gravit
�
(Corrected to 80 F) State of Charge
Temperature Specific Gravity
OF Change
1.280 lOci
1.250 75%
120 -+() .016
1.220 50%
110 -+() .012
1.190 25 %
100 -+0.oo8
1.16o Little Useful
90 -+0 .oo4
Capacity.
80 0
1.130 Discharged
70 -0.004
6o -0.008
Table 3-5. Freezing Temperature of Batteries 50 -0.012
40 -0.016
Freezing 30 -0.020
Specific Gravit
6 20 -0.024
(Corrected to 80 F) Temperature
10 -0.028
+32°F 0 -0.032
1.000
+19 °F -10 -0.036
1.100
-20 -0.040
1.150 + 5°F
1.200 -16°F
1.250 -62°F
1.280 -90°F

The state of charge in each battery cell is determined by the specific gravity of

the electrolyte (acid) in the cell. Use a hydrometer to determine the specific

gravity of each cell, and then measure the temperature of the electrolyte. Using

the specific gravity temperature correction chart, tables 3-4 (battery state of

charge) and 3-5 (freezing temperature of batteries), correct the readings to 8o°F.

(Example: Hydrometer indicates 1.28o specific gravity. Electrolyte temperature is

0°F. Referring to the temperature correction chart, note that for an electrolyte
0
temperature of 0 F, the chart indicates 0.032 is to be subtracted from the hydro-

meter reading. Therefore, the corrected reading is: 1.28o - 0.032 = 1.248). Check

the corrected hydrometer readings against table 3-4 to determine the state of charge

in each cell. The readings for all cells should be uniform; if they differ by more

than 0.025, replace the battery. If the corrected readings are uniform, but are

below 1.225, charge the battery.

3-47
 'HEATER FUEL PUMP

..

,., r ),
.) -. /,

Preliminary Step: Rotate turret so battery access opening is directly in front

of batteries et right front of crew compartment.

a. Turn master s•ritch to "ON" position, place CREH TEMP HEAT switch on driver's

auxiliary panel in "LOH" or "HIGHn and check personnel heater for operation.

b. Inspect harness for ti&�tness of connections and for any damage or defec-

tiveness in wiring.

c. Inspect pump and filter for defective connections or damaged components.

3-48
 CHAPrER 4

CHASSIS SUBSYSTEMS

Section I. GENERAL

4-1. Scope.

Maintenance information and procedures contained in this Chapter were designed

primarily to aid operating personnel in making specific minor repairs and or /

replacements in order to maintain Pilot Vehicle 7 and only hull and suspension

components of Pilot Vehicle 8.

l+-2. Preventive Maintenance Services.

These services are performed by organizational maintenance personnel with the

assistance of the vehicle crew. The items to be checked by organizational mainten­

ance personnel are listed in sequential order in Table 4-1.

4-3. Repair Parts.

a. Repair parts, tools, and equipment are available to the organizational mechanic

to perform those maintenance functions allocated to organizational maintenance

personnel by the Maintenance Allocation Chart.

b. Remove all preservative material from spare parts before install at ion.

�-�-4. Torque Specifications.

a. Specific torque specifications for suspension components, transmission, and

engine are contained on pages 4-11� through 4-19.

b. Standard torque specifications that apply to all screws, bolts, and nuts

not requiring special torque v alues are contained on page 4-20.

4-5. Special Tools.

Special tools required for maintenance of this vehicle are illustrated and

described on pages 4-21 through 4-33. Fabrication of specific special tools is

illustrated on Figures 1+- 31� and 1�- 35.

4-1
 4-6. Painting Vehicle.

Preparation of the materiel for painting, methods of painting, and material to

be used are contained in TB 746-93-1 and TM 9-213. Instructions for camouflage

painting are contained in FM 5-20.

4-7. Application of Adhesives.

a. Clean surfaces to be bonded with toluol cleaner (FSN 6810-257-2486). Surface

must be free of grease, paint, talc, soapstone or any other foreign substance.

b. Stir adhesives until fluid. Apply an even coat of adhesives to each mating

surface. Let dry to touch. ( In any event, no less than 1/2 hour - 24 hours is

optimum- temperature and humidity will be a controlling factor in drying time. )

c. Apply another even coat of adhesive to both previously coated surfaces.

Let dry until tacky ( approx. 20 min. ) but no longer transfers to the finger when

touched lightly.

d. Press rubber or fabric to metal or other mating surface applying pressure

by using a roller or other suitable tool to insure full contact between surfaces.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to pull or pry on either bonded surface after matin . �

4-2
 Table 4-1. Preventive Maintenance Ch ec ks and Services

SEQUENCE NUMBER

BEFORE DURING AFTER ITEM TO BE I NSPECTED PROCEDURE

HULL & SUSPENSION
1 Tow Pintle Grease swivel; inspect unit for
mounting, damage and operating
condition.

2 Weapon Travel Lock Lubricate hinge; inspect unit ·for

mounting, damage and proper opera­
ting condition.

3 Grilles Lubricate as required; inspect condi­

tion of grilles for proper securing,
cracks, mounting hardware, and com­
ponents.

4 Fenders Skirts/ Lubricate hinges; inspect for cracks,

, damage; inspect stowage boxes for
rust, fungus and gasket condition;
raise skirts and secure.

5 Hull Access Panels Inspect for secure mounting.

6 Road Arm Assy. (12) Inspect for structural damage and

cracks in spindle areas.

7 /
Road Idler Wheel Check oil for level and contamination;
Hubs (14) inspect for leakage and excessive
radial play; torque check mounting
hardware.

8 /
Road Idler Wheels Inspect wheel and wear ring for damage
(28) and wear; torque check mounting
hardware.

9 Support Roller Assy. Check oil for level and contamination;

(4) inspect wheel and hub for wear, damage,
leakage and excessive play; torque
check mounting hardware.

10 Idler Arm (2) Check oil for level and contamination;

inspect for leakage, damage and wear;
torque check mounting hardware.

11 Track Adjuster (2) Inspect for leakage, damage, worn bush

ing; torque check mounting hardware.

12 Sprocket (4) and Inspect s prockets for wear; torque check

Hub (2) all mounting hardware and inspect hub
for damage.

4-3
 Table 4-1. Preventive Maintenance Checks ·and Services - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER
BEFORE DURING AFTER ITEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE

13 Track Assembly Inspect for worn or dead track shoes;

worn or damaged end connectors, pads
and center guides; torque check
hardware.

14 Suspension Units (12) Inspect for oil leakage; check nitrogen

precharge; torque check mounting
hardware.

1 Height Control / Raise and lower vehicle to assure pro­

Track Adjusters; per operation of hydropneumatic sus­
Suspension Units pension system; assure that no linkage
or cable binding occurs.

1 Hubs; Roadwheel, Inspect hub temperatures by hand to

Idler Wheel and assure that no over temperature condi­
Support Roller tions exist; check for suspension oil
leakage as a result of vehicle oper­
ation.

2 Hull Structure Lubricate all hinges, latches and slip

pins; inspect hull exterior, engine
compartment, and appendages for visual
damage or cracks; steam clean engine
compartment.

3 Ammo Racks - Hull Inspect rubber pads, clamps, and com­

ponent hardware for missing, damaged
or maladjusted parts.

4 Height Control Inspect for loose or missing components;

Console check mounting hardware and assure that
cable connections are proper and no
frayed cables are evident.

POWER TRAIN & ELECTRICAL

15 Service. Lights Check operation of all service lights;

inspect housings for damage and mount­
ing; check headlight alignment.

16 Air Cleaners (2) Change air cleaner filter elements; clean

housing interior-and torque check housing
mounting hardware and seals; check coarse
dust separator for potential contaminate
build-up and clean, if required.

4-4
 T abl e 4-1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER

BEFORE DURING AFTER ITEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE

2 Front Fu�l Pumps Check capability of engine to operate

System on front tank fuel pump during normal
vehicle operation.

3 Heater Check for normal operation of individ­

ual unit and all controls.

4 Emergency Driving Install all emergency driving controls

Controls and assure that all control operations
are smooth and vehicle response is
similar to electrical control opera­
tions; this includes brake, steer,
throttle, shift and fuel shut-off,

5 Engine After warm-up, check idle speed and no

f load governed speed; assure that vehicle
has adequate pulling power, acceleration
and full speed capabilities.

6 Transmission Check for satisfactory steer response

through full steer range; check that
steer and brakes do not pull vehicle
to one side with center steer and
brake application; check that brakes
will hold vehicle on incline with (1)
transmission in neutral and (2) with
1
engine 'off"; drive vehicle in forward
and reverse to assure proper operation
in both directions.

7 Alternator/ Voltage Check operating voltage with load

Regulator applied.

5 Bilge Pump Check operation of pump; check mounting

hardware; remove inlet cover screen and
clean; clean outlet into engine com­
partment.

6 Batteries ( 8) , Clean batteries, battery terminals and

caps, and battery boxes; inspect battery
cases for cracks and retainers for deter­
ioration; check battery specific gravi
ties and fluid levels.

7 Electrical Check all hull and power train cables

Harnesses/ Cables and harnesses for chaffing, cracking,
wear or damage; check connectors and
bulkhead fittings for waterproof �ondi
tion and connection tightness; inspect
plus buss box mounting hardware and

4-5
 Table 4-1. Preventive Maintenance Checks ·and Services - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER

BEFORE DURING AFTER ITEM TO BE INSPECTED PR OC E DU RE '

8 Fuel Tank -· Front Remove hull access door and check for
fUel and/or hydraulic oU between the
fUel bladder and the hull compartment.

9 Fuel Pumps - Rear (2) Check that both rear fUel pumps are
operating; check in-tank pumps mounting
plate mounts attaching hardware and
inspect for leakage.

10 Fuel Tank - Rear (2) Inspect and clean right f'uel tank filler
screen; check physical condition of
tanks for damage or cracks; check tank
mounts and mounting hardware.

11 Fuel Valves/ Inspect all f'uel lines for damage or·

Plumbing/Water cracks; inspect all f'uel connections
for tightness and leakage; check mount
ing hardware on all components; change
. water separator filter element and
clean housing.

12 Heater - Crew Check heater mounts; inspect f'uel lines,.

exhaust ducts--and distribution ducts for
leakage or damage; clean fuel pump
filter; clean fuel filter; inspect
heater on-board wiring.

13 Fire Extinguisher Remove and weigh. bottles; operate dis

Bottles - Fixed (2) charge handles to assure that no cable
binding exists; inspect mounting
hardware.

14. Fire Extinguisher Remove and weigh bottles; inspect mount­

Bottles - Portable ing and clamps to assure that bottles
(2) are held securely but can be readily
removed.

15 Fire Extinguisher Inspect discharge tube openings; assure

Plumbing that all line connections are tight.
·

16 Final Drive (2) Check oil for level and contamination;

check fill_a.Dd ..:rent lines for tightness;
inspect for leakage on the inboard and
outboard sides; check ring gear bolt
tightness; check drive shafts for spline
damage; inspect trunnion oU seal and
seat for damage and leakage.

4-6
 Table 4-1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER

BEFORE DURING AFTER ITEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE

17 Induction system ( 2) Inspect air intake ducts for damage,

cracks and deterioration, assure that
clamps hold securely and no leakage
exists.

18 Voltage Regulator Check for secure mounti ng; assure that

all wiring connections are secure.

19 Slave Receptacle Lubricate ballistic cover hinge; check

mounting hardware; check receptacle for
waterproof condition.

20 Power Pack Remove/ install; test fire on ground;

spot check accessible engine/ transmission
split line bolts for proper torque.

21 :Engine Drain oil ( engine and oil filter ) and

refill; change oil filter elements (2)
and clean oil filter housing; change
secondary fuel filter and clean fuel
filter housing; check starter mounting
and electrical terminals; assure that
starter has gooa cranking speed; check
for loose hardware, fuel and oil leakage;
inspect all coolers for secure mounting;
air flow-obstruction and damage, clean
as required; inspect fans for damage,
cracks or excessive wear; inspect wiring
harnesses for chaffing, cracking and
water proofing; inspect all shrouds and
seals for deterioration, damage and
IOOunt.ing.

22 Accessory Drive Check motmting hardware and assure

that no oil leakage is present.

23 Alternator Check alternator mounting; assure that

no oil leakage is present; inspect water­
proofing of alternator and electrical
terminals.

24 Transmission Drain oil and refill; change/ clean oil

filter elements'f5) and clean oil filter
housings; check for loose hardware and
oil leakage; inspect control shafts and
linkages for damage or wear; inspect
brake apply indicators for proper adjust­
ment; inspect hydraulic �rake cylinder
mounting; inspect lifting eyes and lift
ing f!.ye_ ID9unti:gg har.dware._ _ __ _ __

4-7
 Ta b l e 4-1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER

BEFORE DURING AFTER ITEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE

25 Engine/ . Inspect engine mounts rubber for deter­

Tran81Dission ioration, deformation, and damage;
Mounts; Guide Rails check mounting hardware; inspect trans­
mission trunnions for damage; ingpect
trunnion inserts for damage; lubricate
rails and inspect for damage.

26 Transmission Ingpect all coolers for mounting, air

Cooling System flow obstruction and damage, clean as ·

required; check for loose hardware and

oU leakage; check tightness of hydraulic
plumbing; inspect fan drive shafts for
looseness and backlash; inspect all
shrouds and seals for deterioration,
damage and mounting; inspect fans for.
I damage, cracks or excessive wear.

27 Equipment Vent Remove filter and clean; check all lines

System for connector tightness; inspect rubber
lines for damage or deterioration.

28 Exhaust System Lubricate all hinges, inspect condition. .

TURRET, FIRE CONTROL & ARMAMENT

17 Interphone Check condition of phone, electrical

wires, container and lid seal for
damage or worn components.

18 Communications Check legibility of scales and indices;

Equipment check ease of dial and knob operations.

8 Primary Driving Check controls for smooth operation

Controls throughout their full range; assure that
no excessive play or binding exists;
assure that all gages and switches are
operational.

9 Commander • s Siiht Check full travel in azimuth and eleva­

and Secondary Weapon tion to assure smooth unrestricted oper
Drive ation, at max imum and slower speeds;
check secondary weapon travel inhibit
zones.

4-8
 Table 4-L Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER

BEFORE DURING AFTER ITEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE

10 Gun/ Turret Drive Check elevation and azimuth null; check

System full travel in azimuth and elevation to
assure smooth, unrestricted operation
at maximum and slower speeds, gunner's
and commander's controls; check manual
azimuth and elevation to assure smooth,
unrestricted operation; check main
weapon travel inhibit zones.

11 Driver's Capsule Check for smooth, unrestricted rotation

of capsule during turret rotation and
by manual positioning; assure that all
instruments and gages are operating
correctly and without excessive fluctu­
ations or unusual noises.

29 Comman der's Sight Check synchronization and boresight

accuracy with main, secondary and coax
weapons, conventional and missile.

30 Gunner's Primary Check synchronization and boresight

Sight accuracy with main and coax weapons,
conventional and missile.

31 Firing Circuits Check main weapon firing circuits from

all trig�ers and conventional and
missile mode with firing probe tester;
check secondary and coax weapon firing
circuits.

32 :Emergency Firing Check main weapon conventional firing

Device circuit when activated by emergency
firing device.

33 Azimuth Indicator Check azimuth indicator for slippage or

backlash; check light bulb.

Autoloader Inspect 24 canisters for condition of

ammunition grippers while operating
magazine transport from stow port; in­
spect grippers and latching mechanism
with rammer head extended; check condi­
tion and mounting of loading tube and
hydraulic actuator; check for hydraulic
oil leakage through manifold access
plates; check full operation of auto­
loader !u automatic and emergency modes

4-9
 Tabl e 4-1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER

BEFORE DURING AFTER ITEM TO BE I NSPECTED PROCEDURE

35 Turret structure Lubricate all hinges, latches and slip

pins; inspect structure and appendages
for visual damage or cracks; inspect
protective pads and seals on all hatches
for damage, deterioration or excessive
wear; assure that hatch locks and hold­
ing devices secure the hatches in all
positions.

Main Weapon Inspect main weapon for condition and

( Gun Launcher ) assure that proper cleaning procedures
have been used; inspect obturator seal;
inspect breech threads for erosion or
pitting; check breech operation manually
to assure smooth effortless operation;
inspection gun tube heat shroud for
damage or deterioration; check fastener
torque.

37 Missile System Lubricate transmitter door and actuating

mechanism; check all component mounting
hardware and electrical connectors for
tightness; support maintenance performs
beam pattern check.

Collective Protector Clean and inspect manifold housing;

System filter container and particulate filter
frame; inspect hoses and masks for
damage and missing components.

39 Primary Weapon Inspect mount for leakage and general

Mount condition; check operation of safe-to­
fire indicator; exercise mount with
manual elevation unit and inspect unit
for condition and leakage; inspect co-ax
weapon mount for condition; assure that
all co-ax mount adjustment and mounting
hardware are tight; check splash curtain
condition of elevation quadrant, assure
legibility of scale and indices; check
condition of level vial and adjusting
knob rotation smoothness; check accuracy
and adjustment against Ml.Al quadrant.

4o Turret Harnesses Inspect connections for tightness; inspect

and Cables /
harn�ss cables for damage, insulation
'I

cracks and deterioration.

4-10
 Table 4-1. Preventive Maintenance Checks -�n�_ �ervices - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER

BEFORE DURING AFTER ITEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE

41 Turret Junc'tion Inspect cable connections and mounting

Box hardware for tightness.

42 Dome Lights Check mounting hardware and operation

of lights and rheostats.

Driver's Capsule Lubricate all pins and rails as required;

check hydraulic oil level and assure
that platform raises and lowers through
full excursion smoothly and without
binding; assure that all protective
guards are in position and all mounting
hardware is secure.

44 Driver's Auxiliary Check operation of all switches for

Control Panel smoothness of operation; assure that
switch and knob positioning is positive;
assure that selector knobs lock in the
proper position and that set screws are
tight; check panel mounts and mounting
hardware; assure that cable connections
are tight.

45 Driver's Slip Check slip ring mounting hardware,

Ring driving rod and connections for tightness;
assure that slip ring rotates freely
without binding or interference.

46 Sight Covers (3) Lubricate doors and check operation

of actuating mechanisms.

47 Seats - All Lubricate pins, hinges and rails, as

required; inspect seats, cushions and
backrests for damage; check all mounting
hardware for tightness; assure that ad­
justing mechanisms operate freely and
seats move smoothly without binding.

48 Electro-Hydraulic Check mounting hardware, and electric

Slip Ring and hydraulic connections for tight­
ness; assure that no hydraulic oil
leakage is present.

49 Turret lock Lubricate as required; check operation

and mounting hardware torque; inspect
locking pawl for damage or cracks.

4-11
 Table 4-1. Preventive Maintenance Checks ·and Services - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER

BEFORE DURING AFTER I TEM TO BE INSPECTED PROCEDURE

50 Driver's.. Night Check oounting of unit ta assure proper

Vision Device fit and .that no leakage occ'lirs; check
unit for chips, cracks, condensate and
fungus growth; replace battery, if
required; check nitrogen precharge.

51 Vision mocks Inspect for secure mounting; assure that

no leakage occurs from the outside;
inspect units for chips, cracks, conden ·

sate and fungus growth; assure that

� roper cleaning procedures have been
used.

52 Turret Basket Inspect turret basket and appendages

for structural damage or cracks; assUJ:.e
that all mounting hardware is properly
secured.

53 Turret mower Clean blower inlet screen; assure that

�lower operates normally; lubricate
jtootor.
54 Manual Traverse Check mechanism-mounting hardware;
Mechanism check oil level.

55 Hydraulic Filters
- Change ftlter elements (3) and clean
(3) housing; inspect for chips, rubber
and shavings•

Hydraulic Remove magnetic plug and inspect for

Reservoir chips, shavings or contamination;
inspect reservoir for mounting, damage
and :>il leakage. !my evidence of con­
� amination requires that the reservoir
� e drained, cleaned and refilled with
clean hydraulic oil.

57 Hydraulic Inspect mounting hardware and connections

Accumulators ( 6) for tightness; assure that no oil leak­
age is present; check nitrogen precharge.

HYdraulic Plumbing Inspect all mounting hardware and con•

and Valves �ections for tightness and leakage;
�ssure that no damage or deterioration
�as occurred to the hydraulic lines.

4-12
 Table 4-1. Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services - Continued

SEQUENCE NUMBER

BEFORE DURING AFTER ITEM TO BE I NSPECTED PROCEDURE

59 Elevation Inspect mounting hardware and hydraulic

Actuator connections; assure that no hydraulic
leakage exists; check actuator shaft
for signs of internal binding or
scoring.

6o Traverse Gear Inspection mounting hardware and

Box hydraulic connections; assure that no
hydraulic leakage exists on the unit;
check lubricating oil level.

61 Commander's Sight Inspect all components for loose mounting

and Secondary hardware; assure that all adjusting knobs
Weapon Drive are firmly attached and operate without
binding; inspect optics for chips, cracks,
condensate and fungus growth; assure that
proper lens cleaning procedures have
been Used; check nitrogen pressures in
telescope (3 places); check nitrogen
pressure in stab head (1 place); clean
power supply fan area; check condition
of wiper blade; inspect secondary
weapon feed mechanism for damage or
deterioration.

62 Gunner's Primary Inspect all components for loose mounting

Sight hardware; assure that all adjusting knobs
are firmly attached and operate without
binding; inspect optics for chips, cracks,
condensate and fungus growth; assure that
proper lens cleaning procedures have been
used; check nitrogen pressure in periscope
(1 place); check nitrogen pressure in
telescope (1 Place); check nitrogen pres­
sure in image intensifier assembly (1
place); check nitrogen pressure in laser
illuminator range finder (1 place);
check condition of wiper blade.

4-13
 Table 4-2. Torque Specifications-Suspension Components

B = Bolt
N = Nut
NB = Nut & Bolt
NS = Nut & Shaft

Track Assembly � Thread Ft·Lbs Remarks

To attach track connector B 5/8-18 170-190 8382360

To attach guide N 1-12 700-775 8?12289-12

Installation Sus�ension

To attach suspension unit to hull B 1-12 666-814 MS90727-234

MS90727-242

To attach roadar.m to suspension unit N 1-12 36o-44o MS20364-1614c

To attach huh assembly to roadar.m N 2-16 See Note 1 MS21025-32

and idler.ar.m Pg. 4-15

To attach cover assembly to B 3/8-16 32-38 MS90728-63

huh assembly

To attach roadWheels to ar.m and N 7/8-14 355-435 8712289-11

hub assembly

To attach idler arm assembly B 5/8-18 162-198 MS90727-155

to hull MS90727-163

To attach cover to idler arm huh B 3/8-16 32-38 MS90728-63

To attach track adjuster mount B 3/4-16 288-352 MS90727-188

to hull

To attach track adjuster to N 1-1/2-12 450-550 MS35692-ll0

idler

NCYI'E. Ik> � lubricate bolts or nuts at installation.

4-14
 Table 4-2. Torque Specifications-Suspension Components-Continued

Installation Suspension (Cont'd.) � Thread Ft-Lbs Remarks

To attach support roller wheels N 5/8-18 162-198 8712289-6

to support roller hub

To attach hub assembly to roller N See Note l

spindle shaft

To attach support roller assembly B 7/8-14 450-550 MS90727-209

to hull

Drain pl�s on hub cover Plug l/4-18 20-24 11619600-3

To attach support roller cover B 3/8-16 32-38 MS90728-6l

to roller hub

NOTE 1. A - While rotating hub assembly, torque bearing retaining nut to

90-llO ft. lbs.
B - Back off retaining nut to zero torque.
C - While rotating hub assembly, torque retaining nut to line up
first slot in nut with first hole in spindle. Torque shall not exceed
20ft. lbs. (nut must be at least hand tight).
D - vfuen slot in retaining nut lines up with hole in spindle, install
cotter pin.
E - After adjustment, rotate hub assembly. To rque required to rotate
hub assembly shall not exceed 10 ft. lbs.

Suspension Unit Assembly

To attach manifold bleeder plug 28-32 AN 814-4

To attach manifold (head) assembly

to housing assembly B 81-99 M24240/4-208lO

To attach cover to housing assembly

To attach charging valve to

suspension unit N 8-10

Tighten air valve 3-5

To attach air valve cover 12-15

To attach relief valve 20-25 CPR 123175

4-15
 Table 4-2. Torque Specifications-Suspension Components-Continued

Thread Ft-Lbs. Remarks

Final Drive Assemb±Y

To attach final drive to adapter B 3/4-16 288-352 MS90727-188

plate

To attach sprocket hub to final B 1"-12 700-775 MS90727-231

drive hub

To attach sprocket to sprocket B 3/4-16 350-400 MS90727-185

hub

E ngi ne Mounts

To attach mount to hull floor B 5/8-11 145-160 MS90728-168

To attach mount to engine B 3/4-16 320 MS90727-188

B 7/8-14 500 MS90727-209'

To assemble mount NB 1"-12 150 MS90727-243

8712289-12

Transmission

To attach oil cooler flanges to B 1/2-13 72-88 MS90728-113

transmission

To attach engine flywheel housing B 3/8-24 35-40 MS90726-63

to transmission

To attach trunnion cap to trunnion B 3/8-24 41-49 MS9454-30

4-16
 Table 4-3. Torque Specifications-Engine

CAUTION

All bolts and nuts in the engine and accessory drive train must be torqued, using Lubriplate
except when otherwise specified.

Thread Inch -Lbs. Locking

Description Size Torque Method

Crankshaft Assembly
Crankshaft Flange to Crankshaft 7/1611 550 Lockwire
(10 bolts)
FlywheeI to Crankshaft Flange 9/1611 800/850 Lockwire
(12 bolts)
550/600
Transmission Drive Adaptor to
1;211 None
Flywhee I (8 screws)
Fly-End Accessory Drive Gear to 7/1611 400/500 Lockwire
Crankshaft (8 screws)
P.T.O. (or Hydraulic Pump) Adaptor, 9/16 11 800/850 Lockwire
Damper & Damper-End Accessory
Drive Gear to Crankshaft (8 bolts)

Connecting Rod Cap Bolt Nuts

(2 Nuts/Rod) 5/8 11 675 + 1 flat None

Cylinder Base Nuts (14 Nuts/Cylinder) 7/1611 600 None

Flywheel, Damper & Crankcase

Flywheel Housing Mounting Screws 7/1611 400/500 Lockwire
& Nuts (14 Nuts, 4 Screws) Screws
Damper Housing tv\ounting Nuts
(12 Nuts) 3/811 180/205 Long Stud Self-Locking
(12 Nuts) 3/811 275/325 Short Stud
Main Bearing Caps (4 Nuts/Cap) 1/2 11 0.019 in. stretch None
Crankcase Thru-Bolts (7 Bolts & Nuts) 7/1611 600 None

Camshaft, Drive Gear Bolt

(1 Bolt/Camshaft) 3/4 11 800/850 Lockwire

Oi I Pump Driven Gear Nut (1 Nut) 3/411 1600/1800 Self-Locking

Oil Pan Drain Plug (1 plug) 7/8 11 900/1100 None

(w/engine oil)

4-17
 Table 4-3. Torque Specifications-Engine-Continued
Thread Inch -Lbs. Locking
Description Size Torque Method

Oil Filter Housing Cover (12 Nuts) 3/811 275/325 Self-Locking

Injection System
Injection Pump Drive Hsg. Pillow Block
(4 Nuts) 3/811 300 None
(1 Through Bolt & Nut) 1;2 II
600 None
Injection Pump Drive Coupling
(1 Nut) 1 II
4200 None
Injection Pump Driven Coupling
(1 Nut) 3/411 3000 None
Pump Coupling Adjustment Screws
( 8 Screws) 3/811 2 8-32 ft-lbs None
Injection Nozzle Cap Nut
(1 Nut/Nozzle) 15/1611 1740 None
Injection Nozzle Clamp Nuts
(2 Nuts/Nozzle) 3/811 175 Self-Locking
Injection Pump to Coaxia I Drive Hsg.
(4 Nuts) 3/811 350/375 Self-Locking
(1 Cap Screw) 3/811 350/375 Self-Locking
Heli-coil

Secondary Fuel Filters

(2 Retaining Bolts) 275/325 None

Induction Air System

Aftercooler By-Pass Hsg. to Cooler 3/811 300 Locking Inserts
(16 Bolts/Cooler)

Elbow Flange to Intake J\.Aonifold 5/1611 150 None

(36 Screws)

Turbocharger Clamps (Schwitzer)

a. New Unit: Compressor 5/161 1 * 100/110 Self-Locking
Turbine 5/1611 200
(Torque while tapping clamp,
loosen and re-torque)
b. Cold Engine: Compressor 5/1611 * 100/110 Self-Locking
Turbine 5/1611 150/160
c. Warm Engine: Compressor 5/1611 * 100/110
Turbine 5/1611 130/140

Pressure Pick-Up Plugs (1 Plug/Cylinder) 14MM 550 Lock Nut (Jam)

4-1 8
 Table 4-3. Torque Specifications-Engine-Continued

Thread Inch -Lbs. Locking

Description Size Torque Method

Cooling Fan System

Fan Hub Retaining Nut
(1 Nut/Fan) 3/4" 800/1000 Cotterpin
Fan Rotor to Adapter Nuts
(16 Nuts/Fan) 5/1611 150/200 Cotterpin
Fan Tower Cover Nuts
(12 Nuts/rower) 5/1611 150/175 Self-Locking

Coolers
Cooler to Frame (16 Bolts) 1/2" 500/600 None

Miscellaneous Nuts and Bolts 1/4" 75/100

5/16" 150/175
3/8" 275/325
7 /16" 400/500
1/2" 550/600
9/16" 800/850

NOTE:

When cotterpins or lockwire are used to secure castellated nuts, tighten to lowest specified
torque value and then move nut to align with nearest hole in clockwise or tightening direction.

4-19
 Table 4-4. Torque Specifications-General

RECOMMENDED TORQUE VAWES FOR GRADE 8 BOLTS USED m

srEEL AND/OR CLASS "C" NtJl'S. NORMAL CONDrriON CADMIUM PLATED

NYLOK PATCH VC-3

SIZE STANDARD (MIL-F-1824o) COATING
• 190 - 24 35-45 in.lb • 35-45 in.lb.
• 190 - 32 35-45 in.lb • 35-45 in.lb.

•250 - 20 8-10 :rt.lb. 9-11 :rt.lb • 9-11 ft.lb.

.250 - 28 9-11 :rt.lb. 10-12 ft.lb. 10-12 ft.lb.

• 312 - 18 i6-20 :rt.lb • 17-21 :f't.lb • 17-21 :f't.lb.

• 312 - 24 18-22 :rt.lb. 19-23 :f't.lb. 19-23 :f't.lb.

• 375 - 16 32-38 ft.lb. 35-41 ft.lb. 35-41 :f't.lb•

• 375 - 24 34-42 ft.lb. 37-45 tt.lb • 37-45 :f't.lb.

• 437 - 14 50-6o ft.lb • 54-64 :f't .lb. 55-65 ft.lb.

• 437 - 20 54-66 ft.lb • 57-70 tt.lb. 6o-70 ft.lb.

• 500 - 13 72-88 :rt.lb • 77-93 ft.lb. Bo-95 ft.lb.

• 500 - 20 81-99 ft.lb. 86-104 :f't.lb. 90-105 :f't.lb •

• 562 - 12 99-121 :f't.lb • 106-128 ft.lb • 110-130 ft.lb.

• 562 - 18 117-143 ft.lb. 124-150 :rt.lb. 130-150 ft.lb •

• 625 - 11 144-176 ft.lb. 154-186 ft.lb. 160-190 :f't.lb.

• 625 - 18 162-198 :rt.lb. 172-208 :f't.lb. lBo-210 ft.lb •

•750 - 10 252-308 :rt.lb. 265-320 ft.lb. 275-325 tt.lb •

.750 - 16 288-352 ft.lb. 300-365 :rt.lb. 325-375 :f't.lb.

• 875 - 9 414-506 ft.lb. 434-526 ft.lb • 450-550 ft.lb.

• 875 - 14 450-550 :f't.lb. 470-570 ft.lb • 500-6oo ft.lb.

1.000 - 8 612-748 :f't.lb. 64o-775 f't.lb. 700-Boo 1"t.lb.

1.000 - 12 666-814 :f't.lb. 690-850 f't.lb. 750-900 ft.1b.

4-20
 1

� 2
)
3

Item No. Tool No. Name Usage

1 DAX 9061 Puller Adapter Used with mechanical puller

#5120-423-1596 to remove final
drive planet carrier roller
bearing.

2 DAX 8928 Washer Compressor Used to crimp washer in nut of

ratio governor.

3 DAX �63 Bearing and Seal Used to install bearing and oil
Replacer seal in final drive housing and
ou�er bearing cap.

4 DAX 8927 Socket Spanner Used to torque nut of ratio

Wrench governor.

5 DAX 6642 Seal Installer Used to install seal in speedo

drive.

Figure 4-1. Special Tools -Transmission {1 of 9)

4-21
Item No. Tool No. Name Us�e

6 DAX 10363 Beam Type Sling Used to lift transmission as an

assembly.

7 DAX 104ol Cable Sling Used to lift transmission com-

:ponents.

8 DAX 10389 Lifting Bracket Used to lift final drive as an

assembly.

Figure 4-2. Special Tools -Transmission (2 of 9)

4-22
 9

Item No. Tool No. Name Usage

9 DAX 10396 Gage Used to set brake plate clearance.

10 DAX 10395 Lifting Sling Used to remove or install forward

and reverse clutch assembly.

11 5120-423-1596 Puller Used with 8351087 and D.AX 9061 to

(arc 938) remove bearing in final drive.

Figure 4-3. Special Tools- Transmission (3 of 9)

4-23
 15
13

Item No. Tool No. Name Usage

12 DAX 104o3 Lifting Sling Used to lift hydrostatic cylinder

blocks.

13 DAX 104o6 Puller Used to remove bearing inner race

from propulsion hydrostatic shaft.

14 DAX 104o2 Lifting Sling Used to lift hydrostatic assemblies.

15 DAX 104o5 Puller Used to remove bearing inner race

from steer hydrostatic shaft.

Figure 4-4. Special Tools -Transmission (4 of 9)

4-24
 16 17
11

Item No. Tool No. Name Usage

16 DAX 104o7 Wrench Used to check steer hydrostatic

breakaway torque.

17 DAX l04o8 Wrench Used to check propulsion

hydrostatic breakaway torque.

18 DAX 10412 Replacer Used to install bearings in P2

planet carrier.

19 DAX 10413 Replacer Used to install bearing in

hydrostatic control body.

20 DAX 10414 Replacer Used to install scavenge pump

bearings.

21 DAX 10415 Replacer Used to install output oil pump

bearings.

22 DAX 10416 Replacer Used to install control pump

bearings.

Figure 4-5. Special Tools- Transmission (5 of 9)

4-25
 (�---)1
24

{t---------·
27

Item No. Tool No. Name Usage

23 DAX 10410 Replacer Used to install input oil pump

bearings.

24 7950864 Handle Used with replacers.

25 DAX 10411 Replacer Used to install input oil pump

bearings.

26 8351087 Remover Used with 5120-423-1596 and

DAX 9061 to remove bearing in
final drive.

27 7082196 Handle Used with replacers.

Figure 4-6. Special Tools - Tra nsmission (6 of 9)

4-26
 29 30

Item No. Tool No. Name Usage

28 7083778 Three Strand Used to lift components and

Sling subassemblies.

29 DAX 10417 Replacer Used to install oil seal in right

and left end covers output bore.

30 DAX 10418 Replacer Used to install oil seal in

center housing input shaft bore.

Figure 4-7. Special Tools- Transmission (7 of 9)

4 27
-
 n

Item No. Tool No. Name Usage

31 DAX 10426 Sling Used to install propulsion and

steering hydrostatic assemblies
in center housing.

32 DAX 10425 Fixture Used to shim propulsion and

steering hydrostatics U-joints.

Figure 4-8. Special Tools -Transmission (8 of 9)

4-28
 33

t!J
35
34

Item No. Tool No. Name Usage

33 DAX 10419 Gage Kit Used to check main, supercharge

and control pressures.

DAX 10443 Sleeve Assembly Used to protect forward range

shaft bearing surface at
assembly.

35 DAX 10441� Splined Adapter Used in adjusting brakes.

Figure 4-9. Special Tools- Transmission (9 of 9)

4-29
ITEM

1 HANG ER MVS 1021-400

2 PIN MVS 1021-100-1
3 WASH ER, THRUST MVS 1021-100-2
4 CABLE, SPROCKET HUB MVS 1021-300
5 FIXTURE, FINAL DRIVE MVS 1021-200
6 SCREW M24 X 2 X 55MM
7 2-PINS, GUIDE, FIN.DR.(13/1-6 X 6) MVS 1021-200-6
8 2-PINS, GUIDE, HUB (1 X8) MVS 1021-300-3
9 FIXTURE, F & H SUSPENSION MVS 1021-500
10 2-SCREW M27 X 3 X 140MM
11 2-PINS, GUIDE (7/8 X 9-1/2) MVS 1021-:500-5
12 FIXTURE, NWL SUSPENSION MVS 1021-100

Figure 4-10. Special Tools- Final Drive

4-30
 POWER PLANT LIFTIN G SLIN G - GMS 2442

,,

..

FABRICAT ED TOOLS FOR POWER PLANT INSTALLATION

(S E E FI GUR E 3-5.1)

E NGINE B ARRING TOOL

Figure 4-11. Special Tools -Power Plant

4-31
 JACK STANDS (TYPICAL)

TRACK PAD REMOVING

AND LIFTING TOOL

INSTALLATION BARS - GMS 2473

TRACK PIN
ASSEMB LING CLAMP

R OAD WHEEL ARM R EMOVAL AND

INSTALLATION SPECIAL TOOLS

DRIFT

TRACK PAD GROOVER

TRACK CONNECTING F IXTURE

(LEFT AND RIGHT)

Figure 4-12. Special Tools -Suspension

4-32
SUSPENSION ACCUMULATOR NITROGEN
PRESSURE CHARGING DEVICE

� HYDRAULIC PRESSURE CHECKING

1 HOSE AND GAGE ASSEMBLY

Figure 4-13. Special Tools- Hydraulic System

4-33
 KI I
tnJt
1-1/8 5/16
1-3/8
8.999 O.D. ..--....1/2
..
7/16
i---+--;-t-'"'T
3 4�
3 I NCH DIA.
3- 9/16
t
5- 1/16

27 INCH CHAIN

3/8

_L 1/8 TAPER

----t
-.--1----..,--.l L
A. PROTECTIVE GUIDE All GNMENT TOOL
1/4
J� !----+ -t-.-
1/2
--'-

B. FINAL DRIVE FLANGE PROTECTIVE GUIDE.

2 PIECES SAME SIZE ATTACHED BY CHAIN

r2"

l '---_____.____.__

.._,
____
5-3/4 TO BEND-----�
5/16

1_ �------�
t C. TRAN SMISSION ALIGNMENT TOOL

Figure 4-14. Fabrication of Special Tools for Power Plant Installation.

4-34
 MATERIAL: 1/41NCH AND 5/81NCH PLYWOOD, BOND AS SHOWN.
PAINT RED ( 2 REQUIRED) •

.26" '
18"

A _
___, --4 I-+- 7/811
AA
A - ENGINE COOLING FAN SHIELD

7/8 R.

16-3/411
14-7/8"' (FLAT)

1...
. __ · 1
11-1/2" .---+-�

MATERIAL : 1/16 11 SHEET ALUMINUM OR STEEL- PAINT RED (2 REQUIRED).

B - ENGINE/TURRET OIL COOLER SHIELD

Figure 4-15. Fabrication of Engine Cooling Fan and Engine/Turret Oil Cooler Shields

4-35
 Section II. VEHICLE AIR INDUCTION, FUEL, AND ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS

4-8. Scope

Organizational maintenance procedures and identification of some components of

the air induction, fuel, and hull electrical systems are illustrated and described

in this section.

4-9. Air Cleaner Blower Assembly.

a. General. Air scavenging blower assemblies sponson mounted just ahead of

the engine air cleaners in the ;power plant compartment scavenge coarse dust parti-

cles from these cleaners and exhaust them overboard. Figure 4-16 illustrates the

blower assembly on the right side of the vehicle; the blower on the left side is

mounted in a similar manner.

b. Removal Procedure.

Preliminary Steps:

0
Rotate turret 90 left or right.

Open left and/ or right air intake grille as required.

(1) Disconnect harness connector at top of blower motor.

(2) Remove 4 nuts, 8 flat washers, and � mounting screws securing blower

assemble to bracket.

(3) Loosen 2 clamps that attach straight hose to blower and external

discharge.

(4) Loosen 2 clamps that attach curved hose to blower and air cleaner.

(5) Remove air cleaner blower assembly.

c. Installation.

Reverse removal procedure.

4-36
 RIGHT FUEL TANK
{REFERENCE)

RIGHT SIDE AIR CLEANER BLOWER

ASSEMBLY SHOWN -LEFT SIDE SIMILAR

EXTERNAL
DISC HARGE

AIR CLEANER
.ASSEMBLY

AIR CLEANER BLOWER ASSY"

Figure 4-16. Removal/Installation of Air Cleaner Blower Assemblies

4-37
J�-10. Vehicle Fuel System.

a. A schematic niagram of the vehicle fuel system is shown on Figure 4-17.

This diAgram illustrates fuel flow from fuel tanks to engine and return and also

identifies ( by part number ) many of the components installed in this system.

b. /
For replacement of elements in fuel water separator, refer to paragraph

!1-11.

c. For replacement of elements in secondary fuel filter, refer to paragraph

3-10.

d. For usage of proper fuel oil, refer to engine description and data

p
· aragraph in Sect ion V of this chapter.

4-38
 r-:=--- =- ----
- ---
---------
-
� -
-- -- ---- - - -
-- --,
SELECTOR VALVE
I.T.T. General Co ntrols CHECK VALVE
Republic 583- 3/8
l� n
11
FUEL FILL
I
73760-AV23B1108C
I
FROM AIR CLEANER +-----Q----i I I
l I
--I
I
VENT LINE
HULL MOUNTED

I ISUMP LEFT TANK

CROSSOVER
r --] o...]...j FUEL FILL

I RIGHT TANK I I
r---
FRONT TANK _
FRONT TANK
I I i
I
"0-
I
rl y
BY-PASS IND. VLVE
Oronge Reseorc h P30021 B- 1
J.-­
j
v
CHECK VALVE (3)
MS-28884-12 I
,.. I
� I I
SEPARATOR - 11662921
CHECK VALVE WATER FUEL/WATER
I
FILTER- 116629 76
MS 28884-8 DRAIN

--
SEPARATOR

....i-...,. -
CANISTER- 11662977
.(
L- -----L------ -----L.-----
. -.... TO CREW COMBUSTION HEATER I

�1
I
--
.j::>..
I
c..v
'()
� �� ;
�
c
NNECT
E. G. Wiggins
Socket- JP20006
�
L-1----1--------------1--------

I ·
--- --
4 QU � �� �
E. B. Wiggins
Socket- JP200010
E
--------
QU
� � -;; �
E. B. Wiggi ns
Socket- JP200B12
0 E
----- -- ---.,
-
- -
_J

L---- ------
Nipple- JP205E8
I Nipple- JP205D10 Nipple- JP205E12

r·---- ------l1
-,

ELEMENT- 598063
.. , FUEL COOLER
I I I

H=-
o....(") WITH
SECONDARY
y THERMO-BYPASS
I I I FILTERS
I INJECTOR
PUMP

--=--=- =--=-=--=---=--..:1]
_l

---=--
-
I· f
- -
__

� AIR BLEED ..

I I CYLINDERS 1..-----------
..
I
I
ENGINE MOUNTED
I INJECTOR OVERFLOW

I RETURN

L ___________________
. ____ _____ __ _ J
Figure 4-17. Fuel System Schematic
 Figure 4-18" Replacement of Fuei;\Vater Separator Elements (1 of 2)
4-ll. /
Replacement of Fuel Hater Separator To:J..eme11 ts.

Preliminary Steps:

o Rotate turret 90° to left or right.

o Open air intake grille on left side of vehicle.

Note. The by-pass lndicator valve (Figure 4-lB) co:1tairs "' nop-uo i.rc-:. co"vo:r

button that is actuated 1rhen elements become cloc;ged and fuel ""lm·' i.s dire ct ed

around by-pass line. Check indicator button to c1ete!""1ine condi tio11 o·r- elc'rl""'l�s.

a. Remove 1+ nnts ar:d flet vnshers securil r- co·rer ·�o l,o'J.S� v:. •

b. Lift cover off bolts :::-nd remo·re fro!" ve-1-i.cJ e.

:Jote. Disconnect en-:=ine electriccl 1H' •r1esses if necessrr,-r ":o f"lc�Ll � t 8te

removal of cover <nd elemen"-,s.

c. Pe�:ove clccl'1able t7"pe f'"lter elCi.'.en-'- �11..-�?'/ ,...) rctd c�er · ·si"l · s•t:t�' le

solve:--t "'.d ronpressed "i · .

rl. �.e':!c ·e .,·,r" c1iscr>rc: c.,.,;s·"'r '�·pc ele::Je. .�.. (ll ?9�"'') . • Ec.;1_•t·e 1· "lev;

el .,,_en'-,.

4-40
 ' j NUT (4)
/) FLAT WASHER (4)

·0

CANISTER -o FILTER

ELEMENT ELEMENT

·0·

Figure 4-19. Replacement of Fuel/Water SefX!rator Elements (2 of 2)

4-41
 ELECTRICAL LEAD _

Figure 4-20. Removal/Installation Voltage Regulator

4-12. Rem.>ve /Installation Vol tace Pe:.:nl rtor.

Preli:r,ina:�·:v S�eps:

front of voltave re- tJ a�·.or.

a. Disconnect electric.. l leilt .,"- ··ol-!-.. '<:--;e re�-,ulntor.

b. Remove 1' scre·-rs nnd wrs11ers, J.i�-:'t of� rellJ.ator.

c. To install, reverse a1ove orocedu:-e.

4-42
h-13. Engine Batteries, Battery Boxes, and Electrical Leads.

a. For inspection and testing of batteries, refer to paragraphs 3-22 and 3-23.

b. For removal and installation, refer to Figure h-21 and remove components

as required. This figure illustrates one group of four batteries; the second

group is similar in installation and mounting.

c. 'l'he legend provided 'l·rj_th Figure 4-21 identifies component parts as origin­

ally j_nstalled in the vehicle and are furnished as an aid in obtaining repair

parts replacement.

4-43
 7

�\ \ �

- --
--
- --
- j-'19

'--
13
J
©---
��
a.��
� �14
1I9
18
- -

Figure 4-21. Removal/Installation Batteries, Battery Boxes, and Electrical Leads

4-44
 1. HOOK - GML2096-19 (4)

2. SPRING PIN - MS16562-38 (4)

3. ELECTRICAL HAR NESS - CPR121530

4. ELECTRICAL LEAD - GML2174-28 (4)

5. STORAG E BATTERY- MS35000-3

6. ELECTRICAL LEAD - GML2174-17 (2)

7. BATTERYHOLD-DOWN STRA P ASSEMBLY-

GML2096-22 (8)

8. SCREW - MS90727-44 (8)

9. FLAT WASHER - 1 0910174-2 (12)

10. TERMINAL (NEGATIVE)- MS75004-2 (8)

11. NUT - MS51968-6 (4)

12. ELECTRICAL LEAD - GML2174-18 (2)

13. TERMINAL COVER - GML2096-39 (16)

14. TERMINAL (POSITIVE)- MS75004-1 (8)

15. TORSION SPRING - GML2096-17 (2)

16. FLAT WASHER - 10910174-3 (4)

17. SCREW - MS90727-59 (4)

18. BATTERYBOX, LOWER - GML2096-35 (2)

19. RETAINING RING - MS16624-1056 (16)

20. ARM - GML2096-15 (4)

21. ARM - GML2096-8 (4)

22. BATTERYBOX, U PPER - GML2096:-34 (2)

Figure 4-21. Removal/Installation Batteries, Battery Boxes, and

Electrical Leads - Legend

4-45
 1·- 14. Driver's Auxiliary Panel.

a. For procedure on checking and replacing panel lamps, refer to paragraph

?-21 :in Ch2pter 3.

r. For replacement and i.dentificati.on of all s•·ritches and knobs used on the

panel, refer to Fie;ure l1-22.

5
1 '2 3. 4

I
0 1) 0
BATT TRACK0
0
AO).!.lST
MASTER SWITCH ENGt4E TRA N9AS510'4 FORDING
TEMP PRES LOW VOLT

0 u.
WA1 :H
OF\$ 0 0
S7 �l PRr :E�l
LAMP TES FUEL

LOADER
®� 0 0
Q SELECTOR
DRIVING LIGHTS eLOWER CREW TEMP
0 BUSTLE TURRET COOL fiEAT
BEAM ST(J)
LIGHT
HGH ON
B.O. SERV
DRIVE LIGHTS

IR

1 , 13 1 ,11 7.
10
12

1. KNOB - MS91528-2L-2B 8. SWITCH - MS24524-21

2. SWITCH - CPR131017-001 9. SWITCH - MS25423-22
3. SWITCH - MS24524-30 1 o. SWITCH - MS24523-21
4. SWITCH - MS24523-30 11. SWITCH - GML2162-7
5. SWITCH - MS24658-22G 1 2. SWITCH - MS24523-22
6. SWITCH - MS24659-23D 13. SWITCH - EX1 01464
7. SWITCH - MS24658-22D

NOTE. TO REMOVE A KNOB FROM PANEL, LOOSEN SET SCREW AND SLIDE OFF SHAFT.
TO REPLACE SWITCHES, DISCONNECT ELECTRICAL LEADS TO S WITCH AT REAR OF
PANEL, REMOVE SWITCH MOUNTING NUT FROM FRONT OF PANEL, AND PULL
SWITCH OUT THROUGH REAR OF PANEL.

Figure 4-22. Replacement of Switches in Driver's Auxiliary Panel

4-46
 HORIZONTAL CENTER LINE

CENTER OF SEALED BEAM

LAMP-UNIT TO GROUND

Figure 4-23. Adjustment of Headlights

�-�-15. Headlight Adjustment Procedure.

a. Park vehicle on level ground with front of vehicle facing a flat wall.

Distance betvreen headlights and wall should measure 25 feet.

b. Draw a line perpendicular to the wall passing through the center of the

vehicle axis.

c. L:>osen four headlamp mounting nuts ( Fig. 4-25) to permit head.l�ght

adjustment up or down.

d. Measure distance from center of sealed beam unit ( service side, clear ) to

ground; duplicate measurement on wall drawing a horizontal centerline for lamps.

Next, draw a parallel line 27-1/4 inches below the horizontal centerline for lamps.

This line will be used for vertical alignment ( up and down ). Aim center of highest

light intensity of low beam of service portion of headlight assembly on this line.

e. ,Tighten four headlamp mounting nuts while lamp is in this position.

4-47
4-16. Removal/Installation of Auxiliary Power (Slave) Receptacle. (Figure 4-24).

Preliminary Steps.

Rotate turret approximately 90° so weapon points over side of vehicle.

Open air intake grilles on left side of vehicle.

a. Removal.

(1) Remove cover locking pin and open cover.

(2) Remove following components in numerical sequence:

1. NUl' (4) 8. FLAT WASHER

2. SCREW (4) 9· ffi'RAP

3. GROUND LEAD SCREW 10. ELEm'RICAL HARNESS CONNECrOR AT

POWER DISTRIBUTION BOX
4. CLM-1P SCREW (2) 11. SLAVE RECEPI'ACLE W/HARNESS ASSY.

5. FLAT HASHER (2) 12. BRACKEr MOUNTING SCREW (3)

6. LOOP CLAMP (2) 13. BRACKEr

7. SCREW

Note: Slave receptacle only may be removed by 4 screws and nuts (items 1 & 2),

removing receptacle cover, disconnecting terminal screws, loosening fittings

marked A on illustration, and sliding electrical leads from box.

b. Installation.

Install auxiliary power (slave) receptacle by reversing order of removal

procedure.

4-48
 COVER

�1
12 � '',
,,
/
/

� L _
_
_

Figure 4-24. Removal/Installation of Auxiliary Power {Slave) Receptacle.

4-49
 4-17 . /
Removal Installation of Headlight Assemblies. ( Figure 4-25) .
Preliminary Step:

Ensure master switch is placed in "OFF" position.

a. Removal.

(1) Turn T-bolt handle of clamping device counterclockwise until clamp is

sufficiently loosened to clear headlight mount.

(2) Pull headlight assembly straight forward from mount to avoid damaging

pins on connector and remove from vehicle.

b. Installation.

(1) Install headlight assembly in reverse order of removal. Use extreme

caution during installation to avoid bending or breaking pins in connector.

(2) After installation, check headlights for proper operation.

4-50
 t
{ :--
NU T (4) FOR HEADLIGHT
VERTICAL ALINEMENT
/ HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY

l
_

�-

' [! l!
, ,

..
__

/'

-----.t ____ t\ --

CLAMP

HEADLIGHT ASSEMBLY

HULL FRONT SL O P E PLATE

Figure 4-25. Remova 1/1 nsta !lotion Head light Ass embly

4-51
4-18· Disassembly/Assembly Headlight Assembly.

a. Disassemble the headlight cover group and the blackout drive light com­

ponents by removing components in numerical sequence listed below and illustrated

in Figure 4-26.

l. SCREH (3) 16. LOCK WASHER (6)

2. LOCK WASHER (3) 17. REI'AINER

3. BLACKOUT DRIVE LIGHT GROUP 18. SERVICE HEADLIGHT LENS

4. SHIELD GASKEI' 19. SERVICE BLACKOUT LIGHT LENS

5. SCREH (/+) 20. GASKEI'

6. COVER GROUP 21. BLACKOUT MARKER LIGHT COMPONENTS

7. COVER GASKEI' 22. SCREW (2)

8. BODY GROUP (REFERENCE) 23. LOCK WASHER (2)

9. SCREW (2) 24. REI'AINER

10. LOCK WASHER (2) 25. REI'AINER GASKEI'

11. REI'AINER 26. FILTER

12. LENS 27. LENS

13. GASKEI' 28. LENS GASKEI'

ll+. SHIELD 29. COVER

15. SCREW (6)

b. Install components in reverse order of removal following installation

procedures described below:

(1) Use an approved cleaning solvent and clean Items 8, 14, and 29. Dry

thoroughly.

(2) Use a clean, dry, lint-free cloth, and clean all parts thoroughly.

(3) Apply sealing compound (TYPE II, MIL-S-7126) to gasket (13), shield (14),

gasket (28), And cover (29) prior to installing gaskets.

4-52
 (4) Apply adhesive (FSN 8040-1104) to gasket (7) and groove in cover (29)

prior to installing cover group (6) to body group (8).

8 6

29

-k. c::;:).:...-2- 8
�2627
�

�
21
24

Q
�2 0 � o ""�

.--d,
19K:--P
-

18

00
17
16
&-15
Figure 4-26. Disassembly/Assembly Headlight Assembly

4-53
4-19. /
Removal Installation of Headlight Sockets, Connectors, and Leads. ( Figure 4-27)
Preliminary Step.

o Remove headlight assembly from vehicle and remove sealed beam units and

incandescent lamps.

a. Removal.

(1) To remove specific part, disconnect components as required; to remove

internal electrical harness, disconnect following components:

NOTE: Numbers underlined indicate circuit numbers and not disassembly steps:

1. LEAD ( Blackout Drive Light) 15. SOCKEr ASSEMBLY (2)

( Circuit No. 19)
16. SCREW (4)
2. LEAD ( Ground ) ( Circuit No. 91)
17. LOCK HASHER
3. LEAD ( Service Blackout Upper Beam )
( Infrared ) ( Circuit No. 514) 18. GROMMET (4)
4. CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY (2) 19. LEAD ( Service Headlight Lower Beam )
( Circuit No. 18)
5. BODY
20. HEADLIGHT BODY ( Reference )
6. SPRING
21. LEAD ( Blackout Marker Light )
7. LEAD ( Circuit No. 20)
8. LEAD ( Service Blackout Lower Beam ) 22. LEAD ( Service Headlight Upper Beam )
( Infrared ) ( Circuit No. 515) ( Circuit No. 17)
9. CONI'ACT 23. SCREW (2)
10. SPRING 24. LOCK WASHER (2)
11. FIBRE WASHER 25. BLACKOtJr DRIVE LIGHT

12. FLAT WASHER 26. SERVICE BLACKOUT ( Infrared ) HEADLIGHT

13. LEAD ( Ground ) 27. BLACKOtJr MARKER LIGHT

14. BODY 28. SERVICE HEADLIGHT

b. Installation.

Install components in reverse order of removal. Make certain electrical

leads are connected properly by checking circuit numbers.

4-54
Figure 4-.27. Removal/Installation of Headlight Sockets, Connectors, and Leads

4-55
 11

Figure 4-2a Disassembly/Assembly of Headlight Body and Mounting Bracket

4-20· Disassembly/ Assembly of Headlight Body and Mounting Bracket.

Preliminary steps.

For removal of sealed beam units and incandescent lamps, refer to para. 3-17.

For removal and installation of headlight assembly, refer to para. 4-17.

a. Disassembly.

(1) Disconnect all leads on inside of headlight as illustrated in

Figure 4-

(2) Remove components in the following numerical sequence:

1. HARNESS ASSEMBLY 7. SCREW (3)

2. NUT (4) 8. SCREW (4)

3· LOCK WASHER (4) 9. MOUNriNG PLATE

1 +. FLAT WASHER (4) 10. INNER GASKET

5. MOUNTING BRACKET 11. BODY

6. OUTER GASKET

b. Assembly.

Assemble components in reverse order of disassembly.

4-56
 Section III. MAINTENANCE OF SUSPENSION Cm.1PONENT S

1+- 21. Scope.

Information contained in this section furnishes basic organizational maintenance

procedures for track and suspension components and for hydropneumatic system

components. Also some parts identification is provided to aid su�porting personnel

in obtaining proper replacements when necessary.

2t- 22. Track Assembly.

a. Loosening Track. If it becomes necessary to provide slack in the track, it

can be accomplished by using the following procedure:

(l) Raise vehicle to maximum height per instructions in paragraph 2-17,

Suspension System Operation.

(2) With track adjuster switch off, (indicator light off), and parking

brake switch ofY1 (indicator light off), lower vehicle until slack is obtained.

HARNING: If vrork is to be performed on suspension system, lower vehicle

onto blocks placed at each corner of hull blocks. Blocks should

be at least 8x8xl9 inches high. Continue lowering procedure

until gages governing quadrants read zero.

(3) A slack track can also be obtained by opening shut-off valve.

NarE. Track adjuster switch should be in "OFF" position. Close shut-off

valve after fluid has returned to reservoir.

CAUTION: Do not o�erate vehicle with slack track unless specifically

instructed to do so.

b. Removal of Track. Perform steps in paragraph 4-22 above; then, raise

ballistic shields (refer to para Lt-33); then, proceed as follm..rs:

(l) A track jack may be attached to center track guides at a position

between idler wheel and roadwheel no. 1 and tighten jack to relieve

4-57
 NUT- 8712289-12
PAD. - CPR120268
(TIGHTEN T O 700- 775
BOLT- 8382360 (TIGHTEN TO
POUNDS-FEET)
170-190 POUNDS-FEET)

\ WEDGE- CPR120153

VIEW 1-B CONNECTOR - CPR120155

T-BOLT - CPR1201 54 �---�

Figure 4-29. Track Assembly- CPR120162 (1 of 2 )

4-58
 TRACK ASSEMBLY PROCEDURE FOR 1 TRACK SHOE ASSEMBLY

1. ASSEMBLE 1 CENTER GUIDE, T-BOLT, NUT, AND 2 LINKS. HAND TIGHTEN

CENTER GUIDE NUT ONLY.

2. ALIGN LINKS SO THAT THE PIN ENDS ARE FLUSH.

3. SLIDE 2 CONNECTORS ONTO THE LINK PINS. INSTALL 2 WEDGES AND HAND

TIGHTEN CONNECTOR BOLTS. ALIGN THE PINS SO THEY DO NOT EXTEND

BEYOND THE FACE OF THE CONNECTORS AND ARE NOT RECESSED MORE THAN

1 /16 OF AN INCH INSIDE THE FACE OF THE CONNECTORS. TIGHTEN CONNECTOR

BOLTS TO 170-190 POUNDS-FEET.

4. TIGHTEN GUIDE NUT TO 700-775 POUNDS-FEET. MAKE CERTAIN THAT THE

CORNER OF THE NUT DOES NOT PROTRUDE BEYOND SIDE OF CENTER GUIDE.

DESCRIPTION PART NO. LINK PAD CONN WEDGE BOLT .GUIDE T- BOLT NUT
I

QUANTITY I

TRACK STRAND
CPR120162-3 80 0 160 160 160 80 80 80
A�SY W/0 PADS
TRACK STRAND
CPR120162- 2 80 160 160 160 160 80 80 80
ASSEMBLY
TRACK S HOE
CPR120162-1 1 2 2 2 2 1 1 1
ASS�MBLY

Figure4-29. Track Assembly- CPR120 162 (2 of 2)

4 -59
 tension on track shoes, if desired. Normally, slack in track is

sufficient to perform steps 2, 3, and 4 without difficulty.

(2) Remove nuts from track guide and remove guide ( Refer to Fig. 4-29).

(3) Remove screw from connector at each end of track shoe and remove wedges.

(Refer to Fig. 4-29).

( lt) Remove connector from each side of track to break track. (Refer to

Fig. '+-29).

(5) Drive or tow vehicle off track. For parts replacement, see Fig. 4-29.

c. Installation of Track.

( l) Lay track straight out behind vehicle so first shoe is directly in

back of no. 6 roadwheel.

(2) Start vehicle and raise suspension to full height.

(3) Use bars or other suitable tools to hold first few track shoes flst and

back or tow vehicle over track until enough track is left to extend approximately

half-way up sprocket wheel at rear of vehicle.

(4) Place winch or another vehicle directly in front of vehicle and run a

cable down through center of idler wheels, rollers, etc. from front of vehj_cle

over sprocket at rear and attach to center of track.

(5) Winch or pull track up over sprocket, and guide over rollers and idler

wheels to a point where end connectors can be installed just below idler wheels.

(6) Open track adjuster hydraulic control valve ( Fig. 2-31) to collapse track

adjuster which will furnish enough slack in track to permit connection of track ends.

(7) Move ends of track together so C-type clamps may be inserted on each

side of track.

(8) Install connectors to point where C-type clamp can be removed, then

complete installation of connectors.

(9) Install track guide.

(10) Remove slack from track.

4-60
4-23. Track Adjuster Actuator Assembly.

For identification of components and mounting instructions, refer to Figures

4-30 and 4-33·

4-24. Roadwheel Arm and Hydraulic Suspension Units.

a. For removal and installation of the roadwheel arms only, it is necessary to

remove the roadwheels; the track need not be broken.

b. For removal and installation of roadwheel arm and hydraulic suspension unit

assemblies 2 through 6, (L and R), it is not necessary to break track. For number

one units (Lor R), track must either be broken and moved to remove idler wheels

or a hydraulic pump unit attached to track adjuster to pivot idler wheel forward

to provide clearance. See Figure 4-31 for removal and installation procedure

of roadwheel arm and hydraulic suspension units after above preliminary steps have

been accomplished.

c. For identification of components, refer to Figures 4-32 and 4-33·

4-25. Final Drive Sprocket.

For identification of components and installation notes, refer to Figure 4-32.

4-26. Idler Wheel Arm Assembly.

a. For identification of components, refer to Figures 4-33 and 4-34.

b. For idler wheel hub bearing adjustment, refer to Figure 4-34.

4-27. Track Support Roller Assembly.

For identification of components and installation instructions, refer to

Figure !�-35.

4-61
 VIEW A-A WITH YOKE REMOVED

NOTE. INSTALL ITEMS 16, 18, AND 19 WITH

PISTON FULLY RETRACTED.

Figure 4-30. Actuator Assembly Track Adjuster-cPR 120117

4-62
 HYDRO-PNEUMA.TIC
SUSPENSION JN T

REMOVAL -.Jiii..:::L.
WARNING: PERFORM INSTRUCTIONS IN P<\RA. 4-22a BEFORE US NG FOLLOWING PROCEDURE.
1. RAISE ROADWHEEL ARM WITH HOIST OR JACK UNTIL ROADWHEELS CLEAR TRACK GUIDE, THE N
BLOCK UP ROADWHEEL ARM IN THIS POSITION.
2. REMOV E 10 NUTS, FLAT WASHERS, AND 2 ROADWHEELSo
3. REMOVE 2 HYDRO-PNEUMATIC SUSPENSION UN IT LOWER MOUNTING SCREWS
4. INSTALL 2 INSTALLATION BARS (GMS 2473) IN THREADED HOLES THAT CONTAINED
MOUNTING SCREWS AND SUPPORT WITH JACK STANDS ADJUSTED TO PROPER HEI GHTH.
5. REMOVE 2 HYDRO-PNEUMATIC SUSPENSION UPPER MOJNTIN G SCREWS.
6. PRY UNIT (W ITH ARM AND HUB ) STRAIGHT OUT FROM DOWEL PINS ON HULL TO PREVENT
BINDING"
7. SLIDE UNIT OUT ON RODS, IF NECESSARY TO REMOVE FROM MOUNTING AREA FOR REPAIR
OR REPLACEMENT, ATTACH SUITABLE LIFTING SLING AND REMOVE WITH HOIST.
WARNING: DO NOT SEPARATE ARM FROM HYDRO-PENUMATIC SUSPENSION UNIT WITHOUT
RELEASING NITROGEN PRESSURE WITH VALVE.

INSTALLATION
REVERSE REMOVAL PROCEDURE. SEE PAGE 4-14 FOR TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS.

Figure 4..31. Removal /Installation Suspension Unit and Roadwheel Arm Assembly

4-6 3
 ,----- ----, PRESSURE RELEASE PLUG

r-�!ifuJ·--::.,
I
\__
r- -- ,
'- -'
I

��

- -
Figure 4-32. Final Drive Sprocket Hub Assembly, Suspension Unit, and
Roadwheel Arm Assembly.

4-64
 1. SCREW-MS 90727-234 (24)

(fiGHTEN TO 666-814 POUNDS-FEET)

2. SCREW-MS 90727-242 (24)

(fiGHTEN TO 664-814 POUNDS-FEET)

3. SCREW-MS 90727-188 (54)

(fiGHTEN TO 675-825 POUNDS-FEET)

4. HUB-cPR 120371 (2)

5. SCREW-MS 90727-185 (44)

(fiGHTEN TO 350-400 POUNDS-FEET) NOTE 1.

6. SCREW-MS 90727-231 (32) PIN (ITEM 12) IN ELEVATION

(TIGHTEN TO 700-775 POUNDS-FEET) CONTROL MANIFOLD S HOULD

7. ROADWHEEL ARM ASSEMBLY BE FREE TO ROTATE ± 31 DEGREES

FRONT AND REAR-cPR 121443-2 (4) AS SHOWN. TO INSTALL S USPEN­

INTERMEDIATE-cPR 121443-1 (8) ION, SET PIN ON MANIFOLD

8. NUT-MS 20364-1614C (12) (ITEM 14), AND ADJUST SUSPEN­

(TIGHTEN TO 360-440 POUNDS-FEET) ION FEED BACK SHAFT (ITEM 13)

9. WASHER (H IDDEN)-AN 960-1616 (12) TO THE VERTICAL POSITION.

1 0. PIN-cPR 120370 (12)

11. PLUG-11619599-2 (12)

NOTE 2.
12. PIN (REF.) (SEE NOTE)
ROADWHEEL HUB AND CAP ASSEM­
13. SUSPENSION UNIT FEED BACK SHAFT (REF)
BLIES ARE THE SAME AS USED ON
14. MANIFOLD SHAFT (REF)
T HE IDLER W HEEL ARM, REFER TO
15. SUSPENSION UNIT
FIG URE 4- 34.
LEFT FRONT AND REAR- CPR123190- 1 (2)

RIGHT FRONT AND REAR- CPR123190-2 (2)

I_NTERMEDIATE LEFT- CPR123190-3 (4)

INTERMEDIATE RIG HT- CPR123190-4 (4)

16. WHEEL-cPR 121676 (28)

17. SPROCKET HUB ASSEMBL Y-cPRI2027 9 (4)

Figure 4-32 Final Drive Sprocket Hub Assembly, Suspension Unit, and
Roadwheel Arm Assembly - Legend
X- OBTAIN 1.250 ± 0.005 DIMENSION
FROM CENTERLINE OF TRACK ADJUSTER 4
MOUNTING ON IDLER ARM TO FACE OF
ADJUSTER H ULL MOUNT.

------ ----

25

NOTE.
ROADWHEEL HUB AND CAP
ASSEMBLIES ARE THE SAME
AS USED ON THE IDLER
WHEEL ARM, RE FER TO
---._ FIGURE 4-34.

Figure 4-33. Idler Wheel Arm, Roadwheel Arm, Track Adjuster, and Suspension
Unit Attaching Hardware

4-66
 1. PACKING - MS28775-240 (2)
2. RING - MS28774-121 (2)
3. PACKING - MS28775-121 (2)
4. SHIM (0.062) - CPR1201 08 (AS REQUIRED)
5. SCREW - MS90727-188 (12)
(TIGHTEN TO 288-352 POUNDS-FEET)
6. MOUNT (PILOT 7) - GMS2854 (2)
MOUNT (PILOT 8) - CPR12011 LEFT GMS2854 RIGHT
7. RING - MS28774-235 (4)
8. PACKING - MS28775-235 (4)
9. COVER - CPR1201 06 (2)
10. SCREW - MS90727-60 (8)
(TIGHTEN TO 34-42 POUNDS-FEET)
11. TRACK ADJUSTER - CPR120117 (2)
12. SUSPENSION UNIT
LEFT FRONT AND REAR - CPR123190-1 (2)
RIGHT FRONT AND REAR - CPR123190-2 (2)
INTERMEDIATE LEFT - CPR123190-3 (4)
INTERMEDIATE RIGHT - CPR123190-4 (4)
13. PLUG - 11619599-2 (12)
14. PIN - CPR120370 (12)
15. RELIEF VALVE - CPR12317 5
(TIGHTEN TO 20-25 POUNDS-FEET)
16. PACKING - MS3393-10
17. ROADWHEEL ARM ASSEMBLY
FRONT AND REAR - CPR121443-2 (4)
INTERMEDIATE - CPR121443-l (8)
18. NUT - MS20364-1614 C (12)
(TIGHTEN TO 360-440 POUNDS-FEET)
. 19. WASHER (HIDDEN) - AN960-1616 (12)
20. SCREW - MS90727-234 (24) (TIGHTEN 664-814 LBS-FT)
21. KEY- MS20067-144 (2)
22. WASHER - 10910174-14 (2)
23. NUT - MS35692-110 (2)
24. COTTER PIN - MS24665-689 (2)
25. SCREW - MS90727-155 (6)
(TIGHTEN TO 162-198 POUNDS-FEET)
26. SCREW - MS90727-163 (16)
(TIGHTEN TO 162-198 POUNDS-FEET)
27. PLUG - 11619599-3 (6)
28. PACKING (HIDDEN) - MS29513-269 (2)
29. SCREW - MS90727-242 (24)
(TIGHTEN TO 664-814 POUNDS-FEET)

Figure 4-33.1dler Wheel Arm, Roadwheel Arm, Track Adjuster, a nd Suspension

Unit.Attaching Hardw are - Legend

4-67
 5

30

1 • NUT--MS 19067-A19 (See Note 1)

2. WASHER--MS 19069-A19
(OPTIONAL WASHER-MS 172220)
3. BEARING..CPR 120021
4. SPACER..CPR 120022
5. RETAINER ..CPR 120026
6. BEARING..CPR 120025
7. SEAL ASSEMBLY..CPR 120019
8. BEARING..CPR 120020
9. LEFT ARM..CPR 120029-1
RIGHT ARM..CPR 120029-2
10. COTTER PIN-MS 24665-429
11 COVER ASSEMBLY -c PR 1 20140
• 25. BOL T..CPR120102 (10)
12. PLUG-11619600-3 (2)
(TIGHTEN TO 20-24 LBS.-FT.)
13. COVER..CPR 120139
14. PACKING-MS 28775-020
15. WINDOW-10898145
16. NUT--MS 21025-32
17. WASHER- CPR 120103
18. SCREW -MS 90728-63 (6)
(TIGHTEN TO 32-38 LBS.-FT .)
19. WASHER-10910174-3 (6)
20. GASKET..CPR 120100
21. NUT-8712289-11 (10)
(TIGHTEN TO 355-435 LBS. -FT.)
22. WASHER-10910174-9 (10)
23. HUB ASSEMBLY..CPR 120131
24. BEARING--MS 19081-109
26. HUB..CPR 120034
27. BEARING-MS 19081-138
28. WHEEL..CPR 120130 or GMS2829-1 (2)
29. SEAL ASSEMBLY ..CPR 120104-1
30. WASHER..CPR 120023

NOTE 1. TIGHTEN NUT TO 150 POUNDS-FEET.

BACK OFF NUT 1 TANG ON WASHER
TO OBTAIN 0.004-0.008 END PLAY
LOCKUP WITH TANGED WASHER.

Figure 4-34. Track Idler Arm Assembly (Left-120033-1 )�ight-120033-2)

4-68
 HUB BEARING ADJUSTMENT

1. WHILE ROTATING HUB ASSEMBLY, TIGHTEN BEARING RETAINING

9
NUT TO 90-110 POUNDS-FEET.
2. BACK OFF RETAINING NUT TO ZERO TORQUE .
3. WHILE ROTATING HUB ASSEMBLY, TIGHTEN RETAINING NUT TO
LINE UP FIRST SLOT IN NUT WITH FIRST HOLE IN SPINDLE. NUT
MUST BE AT LEAST HAND TIGHT BUT NOT MORE THAN 20
POUNDS-FEET.
4. WHEN S LOT IN RETAINING NUT LINES UP WITH HOLE IN SPINDLE,
INSTA LL COTTER PIN.
5. AFTER ADJUSTMENT, ROTATE HUB ASSEMBLY. TORQUE REQUIRED
TO ROTATE HUB ASSEMBLY MUST NOT EXCEED 10 POUNDS-FEET.

25 24 23

Figure 4-34. Track Idler Arm Assembly (Left-120033-1) (Right-120033-2) CoMinuec

4-69
 9
7
1

NOTE. HUB B EARING ADJUSTMENT IS

SAME AS IDLER WHEEL HUB B EARING
ADJUS TMEN T (FIG. 4-34).

1 • SCREW -MS90727 -209 (4)

22 21 20
(TIGHTEN TO 450 -550 POU NDS -FEET)
2. SPINDLE -CPR 120010 13. PACKING - MS 28775-020
3. SEAL -CPR 120104-2 14. WINDOW - 10898145
4. HUB ASSEMBLY -CPR 120009 15. COTTER PIN MS 24665 -359
5. BOLT -CPR 120003 (8) 16. FLAT WASHER - 10910174 - 10
6. BEARING -CPR 120239 17. NUT - 503520
7. HUB -CPR 120007 18. SCREW - MS 90728-61 (4)
8. BEARING -MS 19081-38 (TIGHTEN TO 32-38 POUNDS-FEET)
9. WHEEL -CPR 120032 (2) 19. WASHER - 10910174-3 (4)
(OPTIONAL WHEEL -CPR 120011) (2 ) 20. NUT - 8712289-6 (8)
l 0. COVER ASSEMBLY -CPR 120138 (TIGHTEN TO 162-198 POUNDS -FEET)
11. PLUG - 11619600-3 (2) 21. WASHER - 10910174-7 (8)
(TIG HTEN TO 20-24 POUNDS- FEET) 22. GASKET -CPR 120001
12. C,OVER -CPR 120137 23. SPACER -CPR 120238

NOTE. USE SEALINGCOMPOUND MIL-S-45180 ON

S PINDLE MOUNTING FLANGE.

Figure 4 - 35. Track Support Roller Assembly -CPR120013

and Attaching Hardware

4 -70
4-28. Charging Suspension System Accumulators.

a. Raise vehicle to maximum elevation.

b. Install safety blocks under each corner of the vehicle. wwer vehicle

onto blocks.

c. When vehicle is safely blocked, place operating levers in extreme forward

position.

d. Pressure in each height control must drop to zero. To assure zero pressure,

slowly loosen plugs at front of hydropneumatic suspension units 2L, 2R and either

SL or SR (see Fig. 4-� for plug location).

e. After pressure has dropped to zero in all height controls, each accumulator

(one per unit) will be charged to desired pressure with DRY NITROGEN as follows:

(1) Remove dust cover from charging valve. Check valve for leaks, using

soap bubbles.

(2) Attach accumulator nitrogen pressure charging device (Fig. 4- 13) to

charging valve on suspension unit.

(3) Open suspension unit charging valve. Pressure in accumulator will be

registered on gage of charging device.

(4) If accumulator pressure is below 1700 ± 30 psi on front 6 units or

16oo ± 30 psi on rear 4 units, charge accumulator with nitrogen until proper

pressure registers on gage.

(5) Close charging valve suspension unit accumulator.

(6) Remove gage and hose assembly.

(7) Bubble check for leaks (soap bubbles).

(8) Replace dust cover.

4-29. Hydraulic Tubes.

W�NG: When engine is in operation, hydraulic system is under 3000 psi

'
•i

pr�•sure; when engine is shut down, hydraulic system is unde r

.
4-71
 zero pressure. Make repairs on system only when engine is shut

down.

a. Figures l�-36 through 4-43 illustrates hydraulic tubes installed on these

vehicles. Defective tube seals are the most common cause of failure in hydraulic

lines. Figure 4- ltJ+ illustrates and describes proper replacement of these preformed

:packings.

b. All tubing is fabricated from specific alloys of tube steel. Replacement

of any tubing can only be determined by consulting proper drawings.

!�- 30. Hydraulic Brake Cylinder.

a. Component parts of the brake cylinder assembly are illustrated and described

in Figure h-)+ 5 .

b. For disassembly of brake cylinder, refer to Figure 4-46. Never attempt

to disassemble or assemble brake cylinder without using fixture illustrated.

4-72
I

1. CLAMP - MS21333-111
2. TUBE - GMS2121-15
NUT - MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-6 (2)
3. UNION - MS51856 -l OSS (2)
PACKING - MS3393-6 (2)
4. MANIF OLD
(TO TRACK ADJUSTER)
5. SCREW- MS90727-29

Figure 4-36. Hydrop neumatic Sus pension Plumbing Located

in Crew Compartment - Right F ront

� .;

4-73
 5
�21

�-0��
-

..,;- _,_._

1. ADAPTER - CPR134230 (2) 14. ELBOW - CPR134228

2. NUT - CPR13422l (2) NUT - AN6289-6C
3. PACKING -MS28775-020 (2) RING - WS28777-6
4. ELBOW- CPR5626-6 (1') PACKING -MS3393-6
PACKING -MS3393-6 (1) 15. TUBE - CPR121898
5. UNION -MS51856-10SS (3) NUT -MS21921-12 (2)
PACKING - MS3393-6 (3) SLEEVE - MS21922-12 (2)
6. TUBE - CPR121893 16. TUBE - CPR121894
NUT -MS21921-6 (2) NUT - MS21921-8 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2) SLEEVE -MS21922-8 (2)
7. PLUG - AN814-12J (3) 17. TUBE - CPR121895
PACKING -MS3393-12 (3) NUT - 21921-6 (2)
8. HEIGHT CONTROL MANIFOLD (REF) SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
9. ELBOW- CP�5626-12 18. UNION -MS51856-12SS
PACKING -MS3393-12 PACKING -MS3393-8
10. TUBE - CPR121897 19. PLUG - AN814-6J
NUT -MS21921-12 (2) PACKING - MS3393-6
SLEEVE -MS21922-12 (2) 20. PLUG - AN814-8J
11. CHECK VALVE -MS24423-12 PACKING -MS3393-8
12. TEE -MS51854-16SS 21. TUBE - CP� 121892
13. ELBOW-MS51852-16SS NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)

Figure 4-37. Hydropneumatic Suspension Plumbing L ocated in Crew Co;npartment -

Front Right Side

4-74
 7

5 6 \

1. C LAMP - MS21333-114 (3) 9. TUBE - CP�121899

2. SCREW - MS90727 -31 (5) NUT - MS21921-16 (2)
3. CLAMP - MS21333-111 (4) SLEEVE - MS21922-16 (2)
4. CLAMP - M S21333-112 (3) 10. CLAM P - MS21333-115
5. TUBE - C PR121895 11. HO SE AS SEMBLY - MS28762-8-0220
NUT - M S21921-6 (2) 12. C LAM P - C PR121072
SLEEVE - MS21922-6 (2) 13. HOSE ASSEMBLY - M S87029M0'214A
6. ELBOW - CPR134228 14. TEE - MS51854-20SS
NUT - AN6289-6C 15. REDUC ER - MS21916J16-12
RING - MS28777-6 16. UNION - M S51856-12SS
PACKING - MS3393-6 17. TUBE - C PR121898
7. NUT - C PK134229 NUT - MS21921-12 (2)
ADAPTER - CPR134230 SLEEVE - MS21922-12 {2)
PACKING - MS28775-020 18. TUBE -CPR121894
8. FI TTING - C PR121071 NUT - MS21921-8 (2)
PACKING - MS3393-l2 S LEEVE - MS21922-8 {2)

NOTE: ADD 0.50 EXTRA LENGTH AT

REAR OF TUBE (ITEM 9). TRIM
TO FIT INSTALLATION • .

IN STALL NUT ON O PPO£tTE

SIDE OF BULKHEAD & P � ESET
SLEEVE AT INSTA LL ATiON.

Figure 4-38o Hydropneumatic Suspension Plumbin� Located

in Crew Comp-:�rtment - Re:::�r Right Side

4-75
 I ' •

•
i I

•
'
/
t�
.
,

.....
� \

\\

Figure 4-39. Hydropneumatic Suspension Plumbing Located

in Engine Compartment- Right Side

4-76
 l. LOCKNUT - MS51860-58
2. TUBE - CPR121901
NUT - MS21921-12 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-12 (2)
3. NUT - CPR134229 (3)
ADAPTER - CPR134230 (3)
PACKING - MS28775-Q20 (3)
4. ELBOW - CPR134228 (3)
NUT - A N6289-6C (3)
RING - MS28m-6 (3)
PACKING - MS3393-6 (3)
5. TUBE - CPR133953
NUT - MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-6 (2)
6. UNION - MS51856-16SS
PACKING - MS3393-12
7. HEIGHT CONTROL MANIFOLD (REF)
8. PLUG - AN814-12J (3)
PACKING - MS3393-12 (3)
9. UNION - MS51856-1 OSS (4)
PACKING - MS3393-6 (4)
10. CLAMP - MS21333-ll1 (8)
11. SCREW - MS90727-31 (9)
12. TUBE - CPR133952
NUT - MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-6 (2)
13. TUB E - CPR121902
NUT - MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-6 (2)
Figure 4-39. Hydropneumatic Suspension Plumbing Located
in Engine Compartment - Right Side - Legend
14. ELBOW - MS51852-1OSS
15. TEE - MS51854-10SS
16. PLUG - AN814-8J (2)
PACKING - MS3393-8 (2)
17. CLAMP - MS21333-114 (3)
18. HOSE ASSEMBLY - CPR5901-G0190 (2)
19. FITTING - CPR121 070 (2)
20. NUT - MS51860-55 (4)
21. TUBE - CPR121904
NUT - MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-6 (2)
22. TUBE - CPR121905
NUT - MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-6 (2)
23. UNION - MS51856-12SS
24. CLAMP - MS21333-112
25. TUBE - CPR121906
NUT - MS21921-8 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-8 (2)
26. ELBOW - CPR5626-8SS
PACKING - MS3393-8
27. UNION - MS51856-12SS
PACKING - MS3393-8
28. CLAMP - MS21333-115
29. HOSE ASSEMBLY - CPR5822-
H0154180
Note: ADD 0.50 EXTRA LENGTH AT
FORWARD END OF TUBE OTEM 2).
TRIM TO FIT AL INSTAL LA noN.
INSTALL FORWARD NUT AND
PRESET SLEEVE AT INSTALlATION.
4-77
 1

1. HOSE ASSEMBLY - MS28762-8-0220

2. SCREW - MS90727-31 (3)
3. CLAMP - MS21333-128 (2)
4. CLAMP - MS21333-112
5. TUBE - CPi<121916
NUT - MS21921-8 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-8 (2)
6. TUBE - CPR121915
NUT - MS21921-16 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-16 (2)
7. NUT (HIDDEN)- MS51968-5
8. CLAMP - MS21333-115
9. HOSE ASSEMBLY - MS28762-8-0214
10. UNION - MS51856-12SS
11. NUT - CPR134229 16. UNION - MS51856-16SS
ADAPTER - CPR134230 PACKING - MS3393-12
PA.CKING - M$28775-020 17. UNION - MS51856-20SS
12. ELBOW - CPR134228 PA.CKING - MS3393-16
NUT - AN6289-6C 18. CHECK VALVE - MS24423-12
RING - MS28777-6 19. HOSE ASSEMBLY - MS87029K0214A
PACKING - MS3393-6 20. CLAMP - GML2095-220
13. NUT - MS51860-56 21. UNION - MS51856-20SS
14. BRACKET - GML2079-222 22. HOSE ASSEMBLY - MS87029M0214A
15. UNION - MS51812-26SS

Figure 4-40. Hydropneumatic Suspension Crossover Plumbing

(located in Crev• Comapartment)

4-78
 •
•

..

-�--
\) I

-=�-::.;
5

11 1.
�;�
NUT - CPR134229 (3)
ADAPTER - CPK 134230 (3)
PACKING - MS28775-020 (3)
2. ELBOW - CPR134228 (3)
NUT - A N6289-6C (3)
Rl NG - MS28777-6 (3)
PA.CKING - MS3393-6 (3)
3o TUBE - GML2213-1 01
2
NUT - MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-6 (2)
4. SCREW - MS90727-31 (6)
5. CLAMP - MS21333-111 (8)
6. TEE - MS51854-1 OSS
7. TUBE - G ML2095-214
8. TUBE - GML2095-213
9. FITTING - CPK121070 (2)
10. NUT - MS51860-55 (4)
12 11. HOSE ASSEMBLY - MS28762-6-0115
12. TUBE - CPR121914
NUT - MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-6 (2)
13. TUBE - CPR121913
NUT - MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE - MS21922-6 (2)
14. UNIO N - MS51856-10SS
15. HOSE ASSEMBLY - MS28762-6-0096

Figure 4-41 Hydropneumatic Suspension Plumbing Located in

Engine Compartment - Left Side

4-79
 34

35

36

34

37

I
I

38
L ___ ,
I

��������n _j

Figure 4-42 Hydropneumatic Suspension Plumbing for Hydraulic Track Adjuster Located in
Crew Compartment-Left Front

4-80
 1 • TUBE - GML2121-22
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
2. SWIVEL TEE -MS51854-10SS
3. TEE - CPR5629-6
PACKING -MS3393-6
4. TUBE - GML2121-25
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
5. TUBE - GML2121-20
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
6. SCREW -MS90727-31 (6)
7. CLAMP -MS21333-111 (6)
8. TUBE - GML2121-21
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
9. ELBOW -MS51820-25SS
10. TUBE - GML2121-15
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
11 • TUBE - GML2121-29
NUT -MS 21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
12. CLAMP -MS21333-112
13. TUBE - GML2121-24
NUT -MS21921-8 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-8 (2)
14. SWIVEL ELBOW -MS51852-1 OSS
15. REDUCER -MS21916J12-6
PACKI�G -MS3393-12
16. UNION -MS51856-10SS
PACKING -MS3393-6
17. TUBE - GML2213-107
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -M$21922-6 (2)
18. CHECK VALVE -MS24423-8
PACKING -MS3393-8
19. SWIVEL ELBOW -MS51852-12SS
20. TUBE - GML2095-304
NUT -MS21 921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
-21. TUBE - GML2095-103
NUT -MS21921-8 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-8 (2)
22. TUBE - GML2095-306
NUT -MS21921-12 '(2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-12 (2)
Figure 4-42. Hydropneumatic Suspension Plumbing for Hydraulic Track Adjus t er Located in
Crew Compart ment-Left Front- Legend
·
23. TUBE - GML2095'-'302
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
24. ELBOW - GML2213-112
NUT - AN6289-6C
RING -MS28777-6
PACKING -MS3393-6
25. ELBOW - C PR5626-6
PACKl NG -MS3393-6
26. TEE -MS51811-38SS
27. TUBE - GML2121-16
NUT -MS21921 -6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
28. TUBE - GML2121-17
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
29. VALVE - 86768-107B-6-SS
30. RELIEF VALVE - GML2121-32
31. SWIVEL TEE -MS51853-1 OSS
32. TUBE - GML2121-28
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
33. CHECK VALVE -MS24423-6
34. SOLENOID VALVE - GML2121-33
35. TEE -MS2191 0-J6
PACKING -MS3393-6
36. TUBE - GML2121 -27
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
37. TUBE - GML2121-19
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
38. PRESSURE REDUCING VALVE - GML2121-31
39. SCREW -MS90727-67 (2)
WASHER - 10910174-3 (2)
PLUG NUT - 7003392 (2)
40. TUBE - GML2121-23
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
41. TUBE - GML2121-18
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
42. TUBE - GML2121-26
NUT -MS21921-6 (2)
SLEEVE -MS21922-6 (2)
4-81
A. TYPICAL HYDRAULIC TRANSFER TUBE B. TYPICAL HYDRAULIC TRANSFER TUBE
FOR CORNER SUSPENSION UNITS FOR INTERMEDIATE SUSPENSION
(1 AND 6). UNITS (2, 3, 4, AND 5).

1. SUSPENSION UNIT
2. ELBOW..CPR5626-4 (2)
3. PACKING-MS3393-4 (2)
4. T UBING-THERMOPLASTIC,
0.625 I.D. X 0.062 WALL, 12" LONG
GR II, STYLE B, SPEC L-T-790
5. TUBE ASSEMBLY-cORNER UNIT
LEFT CORNER..CPR134227-1
RIGHT CORNER..CPR134227-2
6. HULL (REFERENCE)
7. TUBE ASSEMBLY-INTERMEDIATE UNIT
CPR134226

F igure 4-43. Suspension Unit Hydraulic Supply Transfer Tube.

4-82
I.D.

SECTION A-A
(ENLARGE D)

TUBING
DASH NO. SIZE O.D. W DIA. I. D.
-

MS3393-2 1/8 . 064 .239

-3 3/16 .301
-4 1/4 .072 .351
-5 5J16 ::.003 .414 2" 005
.

-6 3/8 .078 .466

-8 1/2 .087 .644
-10 5/8 .097 .755
-12 3/4 .116 .924
-16 1 1 .1 71
2" .006
-20 1 1/4 ::.004 1.475
-�4 1 1/2 . 118 1.720 �.010
-28 t 1 3/4 2.090
-32 2 2.337

. ALL TUBE FITTINGS IN HYDRAULIC LINES USE THIS TYPE PREFORMED

PACKING ( "0" RING). SELECT CORRECT PACKING BY DETERMINING
OUTSIDE DIAMETER OF TUBE; THEN·, REFER TO CHART. FOR EXAMPLE,
IF 3/8 INCH 0 D ·TUBING REQUIRES REPLACEMENT PACKING , USE
. .

MS 3393-6; FOR 3/4 INCH TUBE, USE MS 3393-12.

Figure 4-44. Hydraulic Lines Preformed Packing Replacement Chart.

4-83
 CAUTION: DO NOT ATTEMPT TO ASSEM!LE OR
·

Dl SASSEMBLE BRA KE CYLINDER

ASSEMBLY WITHOUT USING SPECIAL
Fl XTURE. SEE Fl GURE 4- 46.

1 • PORT - 8724502-6
2. BASE AND TUBE ASSY - GML2125-24
3. PISTON - CPR121236
4 . RETAINER- MS 16625-1400 ( 2)
5. PACKING - MS29561-214
6. RETAINER- MS28774-214 ( 2)
7. PACKING - MS2877 8-6
8. ADAPTlER- MS21900-6C
9. SCRAPER - MS28776-9
1 0. SCREW- M$ 90727-3 (3)
11. HEAD - CPR121237
1 2. RETAINER- CPR121239
13. PACKING - M$29561-342 (2)
14. RETAINER- M$28774-342 (3)
15. SPRING -CPR121238

Fi;ure 4-45. Hydraulic Brake Cylind« Aasembly

 �Y.·
.
,.,.._, . ;�
, ,.,\

_.,._
I
(X)
Vl

-,

\ f

t;
f
F;guee 4-46. D;sassembly/Asse
mbly of Hydeaul; c
Bcake Cyl; ndee
Us;ng Pea pee F;x
tuee
4-31. Cleaning or Replacing ijydraulic §ystem Filter Elements.

Preliminary step: Rotate turret so battery access opening is located at proper

access cover in rear bulkhead (Figure 4-47).

a. SupPlY and Return Filters Element Replacement.

NOTE. High pressure supply filter and return filter elements are identical.

(1) Remove 9 nuts and washers, loosen 5 screws securing T-retainers, and

remove access cover (B, Fig. 4-47) to service supply filter. Remove

14 nuts and washers and remove access cover (D, Fig. 4-47) to service

return filter.

(2) Cut lockwire securing canister to mounting head and unscrew canister

(Figure 4-48).

(3) Lift out element (AC 9645F-2410), clean with solvent or replace, if

necessary.

(4) Reinstall components in reverse order of removal. T ighten canister to

4o pounds-feet (maximum) and be sure it is lockwired in place before

installing access cover(s).

b. Pump Case Drain Filter.

(1) Remove 9 nuts and washers, loose 5 screws securing T-retainers, and

remove access cover to service filter (Figure 4-47).

(2) Cut lockwire securing canister to mounting head and unscrew canister

(Figure 1+-48).

(3) Lift out element (MS28897-8) and discard.

( !.�) Clean canister thoroughly and install new element.

(5) Reinstall components in reverse order of removal. Be sure canister is

lockwired in place before installing access cover.

4-86
 SCREW (5)
T. RETAINER (5)

REAR BULKHEAD ACCESS COVERS -RIGHT SIDE

REAR BULKHEAD ACCESS COVER -LEFT SIDE

Figure 4-47. Removal/Ins tallation Rear Bulkhead Ac cess Covers

4-87
 •
f I

Figure 4-48, Servicing Hydraulic System Filter Elements

4-88
 Section IV. MAIN'J'ENMTCE OF HULL COMPOJIJ1:i;T.frS

it- 32 Scope .

Main !·.enance procedures for corr1ponen',s i.n or on ! he hull por"· ion of :-.he vehicle

are contained in this section.

1'-33. Suspension B11llistic Skir';s.

a. General. Skirts (or shields) mount,ed on :-,he left and right side of the hull

are designed to provide hellistic protection for some portion of the suspension

components. These skirts, in a down position during normal operation, must be

raised when maintenance functions on sus-pension components are required.

b. Raise Front and Intermediate Skirts. To raise and lock front and intermed­

iate skirts (items 1, 2, 3_; Fig. 4-h9) use the following procedure:

(l) Loosen 2 nuts (item 5, Fig. 4-49) on each skirt until square-heac'led

bolts will pivot out from lower anchor blocks (item 8, Fig. 1+-�t9).

(2) Raise skirts, slide square-headed bolts into up

- per anchor blocks ana.

tighten nuts.

c. Raise Rear Skirts. To raise and lock rear ballistic skirts (item ��, Fig.

1+-49), use the following procedure:

(1) Remove screw (item 16, Fig. l-t-1t9) and screw (item 15, Fig. !t-1'9)

with lock plate (item llt, Fig. 4-49).

(2) Raise rear skirt, reinstall screw (item 15, Fig. lt-!19) through upper

support (item 9, Fig. 4-49) and screw (item 15, Fig. lt-49) with lock plate

(item 14, Fig. 4-h9) in channel (item 12, Fig. 4-1+9) at rear of vehicle as illus­

trated in Fig. 4-49. /

Tighten nuts and or screws to 162-198 pounds-foot in either

rai�ed or lowered position when vehicle is to be placed in operation.

4-89
 A o BALLISTIC SKIRTS IN PROTECTIVE POSITION
(LEFT SIDE SHOWN, RIGHT SIDE SIM ILAR)

1. FRONT SKIRT
2o FRONT INTERMEDIATE SKIRT
3. REAR INTERMEDIATE SKIRT
4. REAR SKIRT
5. NUT
6. CLEVIS
7. SPACER
8. ANCHOR BLOCK
9. UPPER SUPPORT
10. HINGE
11. S UPPORT
12. CHANNEL
13. SPACER
14. LOCK PLATE
15. SCREW
16Q SCREW
B. LOCKING DEVICES-TYPICAL
Figure 4-49. Raising Ballistic Skirts

4-90
 Sec-tion II. P01dER PL.Al'\!T

L- 3h· Removal of Po"T.orer Plant.

Preliminary S�;eps:

Rotate �.urret approximately 90° so -,.reapon is pointed over side of vehicle.

Ensure master sHitch is in "OFF" position, open grilles, and remove engine com­

partment top deck plate.

a· Refer to Figure l�-52 through 4-61 for removal of power plant.

b. During removal ( and installation ) procedure, install fabricated shields

over engine fans and over fuel rmd hydraulic coolers. For fabrication of shields

see Figure 1.:.-15.

4-35. Installntion of Pm.,rer Plant.

a. Refer to Figures 4-50 and h-51 for prelimin3T"'J steps required he fore

installation of paver :plant.

b. For installation, reverse removal procedure and refer to same fi ures

g

referenced above in step a.

c. gating connection points illustrated in Figures 4-52 through 4-61 carry

the same ident::_ficaT.ion number ':.hroughout as designated below:

1. Emergency shift lever and linkage.

2. Emergency steer lever and linkage.

3. Air cleaner- +a-turbocharger hose ( left side ) .

J•. Fuel oil return quick disconnect.

5. Engine throttle lever and linkage.

6. Electrical ground connection.

7. Electrical power leads.

8. Fuel oil supply hose quick disconnect.

9. Fuel leak off quick disconnect.

10. Manual fuel shut down linkage.

4-91
11. Hydraulic pump inlet quick disconnects.

12. Engine mounts.

13. Flame sensor and electrical lead.

lLJ. Electrical leads to transmission connectors.

15. Air cleaner-to-turbocharger hose ( right side ) .

16. Hydraulic pump outlet quick disconnect.

17. Hydraulic pump case drain quick disconnect.

18. Transmission guides and channels.

4-92
 ACCESS OPENING
. ----- �--�

1. USE SPECIAL TOOL (CIRCULAR SPACER) TO ALIGN PROTECTIVE GUIDES

ON BOTH FINAL DRIVE FLAN GE SUPPORTS.
2. TIGHTEN 4 RETAINED SCREWS ON EACH SUPPORT TO HOLD GUIDES IN
PLACE ON BOTH FINAL DRIVES, AND REMOVE SPECIAL TOOL.
�

FINAL DRIVE- RIGHT A\

.....

_,

3. AFTER POWER PLANT IS LOWERED IN PLACE, L OOSEN SCREWS AND REMOVE

GUIDES THROUGH ACCESS DOORS IN HULL FLOOR.
4. INSTALL 6 RETAINED SCREWS IN EACH CAP AND TIGHTEN TO 35-40
POUNDS-FEET.

F igure 4-50. Power Plant Insta llation Prelimin a ry Steps (1 of 2)

4-93
 A. CHANNELS WELDED TO REAR OF ENGIN� COMPARTMENT ACCEPT GUIDES
MOUNTED ON REAR OF TRANSMISSION TO INSURE PROPER LOCATION
OF POWER PLANT AT INSTALLATION.

• '
-*
•
.,
'
;
I
/
t ,. -.
•

·.

• 'l

• v

CENTER ACCESS COVER FRONT ACCESS COVER

..,<.. . �. ·(REAR SIMILAR)

•

(
# � ·�· •r-i .
··-

B. MAKE CERTAIN RECESSED ACCESS COVER IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT

FLOOR IS INSTALLED IN CENTER OPENING; OTHERWISE POWER PLANT
WILL NOT SEAT ON MOUNTS.

Figure 4-51. Power Plant Installation Preliminary Steps (2 of 2)

4-94
 1. EMERGE NCY SHIFT LEVER
2. EMERGENCY STEER LINKAGE
3. A IR CLE ANER-TO-TURBOCHARGER HOSE--LEFT
4. FUEL OIL RE TURN QUICK DISCONNE CT
5. E NGINE THROT TLE LINKAGE

NOTE: ILLUSTRATIONS ON THIS PAGE ARE NOT OF PILOT VEHICL E NO. 7,

BU T ARE FURNISHED SOL EL Y FOR REFERE NCE VALUE.

Figure 4-52. Power Plant Removal and Installation Connections­

Installed View (1 of 4)

4-95
 6. ELECTRICAL GROUND CONNECT ION
7. ELECTRICAL P OWER LEADS
8. FUEL OIL SUPPLY HOSE QUICK DISCONNECT
9. FUEL LEAK OFF QUICK DISCONNECT
1 O. MANUAL FUEL SHUT DOWN LINKAGE

NOTE: I LLUSTRATIONS ON THIS PAGE ARE NOT OF PILOT VEHICLE NO.7,

BUT ARE FURNISHED SOL ELY FOR REFERENCE VALUE.

Figure 4-53. Power Plant Removal and Installation Connections-Installed View (2 of 4)

4-96
 13. FLAME SENSOR ON ENGINE SHROUD
14. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO RECEPTACLES ON TRANSMISSION
15. AIR CLEANER-TO-T URBOCHARGER HOSE (RIGHT SIDE)

NOTE: I LLUSTRATIONS ON THIS PAGE ARE NOT OF PILOT VEHICLE NO. 7,

BUT ARE FURNISHED SOL ELY FOR REFERENCE VALUE.

Figure 4-54. Power Plant Removal and Installation Connections-Installed View (3 of 4)

4-97
 CA P (2)
S C REW (12)

~ TRANSMISSION

INSTALLED VIEW OF TRANSMISSION-TO-FINAL DRIVE CAP AS SEEN

FROM ACCESS OPENING IN HULL FLOOR PLATE--LEFT SIDE SHOWN,
RIGHT SIDE SIMILAR.

Figure 4-55. Power Plant Removal and Installation Conn ections -Installed View (4 of 4)

4-98
 LEFT FINAL
DRIVE CAP

LEFT FINAL
DRIVE GEAR

3. T URBOCHARGER-TO-AIR CLEANER HOSE (LEFT SIDE)

4. FUEL OIL COOLER QUICK DISCONNECT

6, 7. ELECTRICAL CONNECTIONS TO POWER PLANT

Figure 4-56. Power Plant Removal and Installation C onnections on Power Plant-Reference View
(1 of 4)

4-99
 8o FUEL OIL SUPPLY QUICK
DISCONNECT

9 o FUEL OIL LEAK -QFF

10. M ANUAL FUEL SHUT-DOWN

LINKAGE

11 o HYDRAULIC PUMP IN LET

HOSE QUICK DISCONNECT

16. HYDRAULIC PUMP OUTLET

HOSE QUICK DISCONNECT

17 o HYDRAULIC PUMP CASE

FRONT OF ENGINE DRAIN QUICK DISCONNECT

5. ENGINE THROTTLE LEVER

TOP OF ENGINE

Figure 4-57. Power Plant Removal and I nstal lation Connections on Power Plant-Reference View
(2 of 4)

4-100
 1. EMERGENCY SHIFT LINKAGE

2. EMERGENCY STEER LEVER

NOTE: ILLUSTRATIONS ON THIS PAGE ARE NOT OF PILOT VEHICLE NO. 7,

BUT ARE FURNISHED SOLELY FQR REFERENCE VALUE •

..... ·.

14. RECEPTACLES FOR ELECTRICAL CONNECT IONS

Figure 4-58. Power Plant Removal and Installation Connections on Power Plant-Reference View
(3 of 4)

4-101
 13. RECEPTAC LE FOR FLAME SENSOR HARNESS
15. TURBOCHARGER INLET HOSE CONNECTION (RIGHT SIDE)

Figure 4-59. Power Plant Removal and Installation Connections on Power Plant-Reference View
(4 of 4)

4-102
 Q)

A . a.-1 \
�
I

0
w

"'
\ ._
...... ,, �· \
�
....... '

Figure 4-60. Power Plant Removal and Installation Connections in Engine Compartment­
Reference View
CAUTION: P OWER PLANT WEIGHS APPROXIMAT ELY
10,000 P OU N DS. EXERCISE CAUTION IN
LIFTING PROCEDU RE.

LEFT SJ DE

RIGHT SIDE

12. P OWER PLANT ENG IN E MOUNTS (RIGHT SIDE SHOWN)

18. G U IDES TH.I\T SLIDE IN CHANNELS ILLUSTRA TED IN FIG. 4-51

Figure 4-61. Lifting Power Plant

4-104
 a . The �rimary purposes of this section of the manual are:

(l) To supply necessary technical data on the Model AVCR 1100-3B engine.

(2) To provide repair procedures on the organizational me.intenance level.

(3) To �rovioe oarts identification on s�ecific components as an aid in

obtaining replacements "men necessary.

b. Before attempting any repair on the engine, study safety precautions listed

in Table l1- 5.

c. Descriptj.on ano Data:

Make and Type Continental 12-cylinder, air cooled,

120° Vee, variable compression ratio,
compression-ignition engine.

Hodel AVCR-1100-3B

Length 67.68 inches

lhdth (Over Coolers) 58.00 inches

Height (Top of Coolers) . 34.)0 inches

Engine Dry Welcht (complete

with flywheel and 650 Amp
Hestinghouse Alternator) !+315 pounds

Haximurn Gross Horse�m.,rer 1250 GBHP at 2600 RPM

Maximum Rated RPM 2600 RPM

Gross Fuel Consumption 0.1+25 Lb/BHP.Hr. at rated poHer

O.ltlO Lb/BHP.Hr. minimum

Bore anr. Stroke 5-3/8 x 5 inches

Displacement . . 1360 cubic inches

Variable Compression Ratio Low: 9-5:1 High: 19.0:1

Firing Order . . . . lR, 6R, 31, 51, JR, 5R, 21, 1�1, 2R, hR,
11, 61. A firing impulse occurs at
every 60° of crankshaft rotation.

Crankshaft Rotation Clockwise viewed from damper end of

the engine.

4-105
Valve Seauence ana Clearance

Intake Valve Opens ho0 BTC

Intake Closes h) 0 ABC
°
Exhaust Opens 60 BBC
Exhaust Closes h0° ATC
Intake Valve Clearance (Cold). Zero, Both Valves: Set Zero lash then
turn 2.5 turns clockwise on the
adjustment screvr.

Fuel System

Fuel Metering System . . . . . Teledyne Continental Motors multi­

plunger injection pump.

Vehicle Fuel Supply Pressure 20 PSI

Ene;ine Fuel Pump Pressure. llO :?SI at 2u00 RP!1 engj_ne speed

Injection Timing Hith --//lR cyUnder on compress ion strolce

and fuel injection pump timing mark
aligned, the fl;'/lvheel is to be on
°
In marking.

Fuel:
Diesel VV-F-(j00 DF-A-Arctic
DF-1 Hinter
DF-2 Summer

Jet (Aircraft) Fuels JP-4, JP-5 (Use in Emergency Only)

Lubrication Svstem

0 0
I
o , o .
Normal Oil Temperature l oO to 2>0 F at oO F amblent

Naximum before Cooler Oil

Temperature . . . .
°
Normal Oil Pressure at !10 to 00 psi at 220 F oi� tempera1-,ure
2 )OO R"?l·i . 60 to 90 ps i at l85°F oil temperature

Minimum Oil Pressure 20 psi at :i.dle (8t_>O RPH)

Lubricatinr Oil Series 3 MIL-L-45199

Temperature Range Grade

°
+20°F to l20 F SAE 30

°
-10 F to +50°F SAE 10

MIL-L-10295 (Arctic Grade)

4-106
Accessories

� Supplier Part Number

Alternator (650 Ampere-28 Volt) Westinghouse Westinghouse #946F646

Starter Delco-Remy TCM No. CPR-1490

Fuel Supply Pump . Viking TCM No. 598720

Primary Fuel Filter

(Fuel \-Tater Separator) . Vehicle Mounted

Secondary Fuel Filter TCM No. CPR-2307

Secondary Fuel Filter Element TCM No. 599401

Oil Filter Element . . . . . . Commercial

Filter Div. TCM No. 598833

Fuel Injection Pump

AVCR-ll00-3B . TCM 598615

Accessory l'rive Ratios and Rotations

Rotation as viewed when facin8 accessory as mounted on engine.

Cooling Fans . . . 2.03:1 Damper end counter-clockwise

Flywheel end clockwise

Starter 11.0:1 Counterclockwise

Alternator (ivestinghouse). 4.65:1 Clockwise

Injection Pump • • 0.50:1 Clockwise

Fuel Supply Pump . 1.00:1 Counterclockwise

Tachometer 0.50:1 Clockwise

Oil Pump • 1.36:1 Clockwise

4-107
 Table lt-5. Engine Safety Precautions

1. Do not operate the engine in an enclosed area unless it is adequately

ventilated.

2. Do not operate the engine with inspection plates or cover plates removed
unless necessary for maintenance purposes. If it is necessary to operate
with cover plates removed, extreme caution should be used around rotating
parts such as the cooling fan and flywheel.

3. Cleaning solvents and solvent cleaning compounds are toxic and flammable and
must be used only in a well-ventilated room. Take adequate safeguards for
fire prevention in work area. Use protective clothing and avoid contact
with the skin.

4. Particles blown by compressed air during a clean operation are hazardous.

Make certain that the air stream is directed away from the user and that other
persons are not exposed. Protect the eyes and face with appropriate shields.

5. Use goggles, rubber gloves, and rubber apron when cleaning parts in carbon
removing compound. Provide adequate ventilation. Avoid inhalation of fumes
and skin contact. If compound is splashed on skin, flush with fresh water
and wash with alcohol. Alcohol containing 2 to 3 percent camphor is
preferable.

6. The oil pressure regulator cover is spring loaded. Exercise care when
removing the cover.

7. When only one cylinder is checked for compression, there is the possibility
of the engine firing on the other cylinders. To prevent the engine from
firing, remove all nozzles, then check cylinder compression.

8. At selected locations safety wire is applied to bolts to prevent loosening of

the bolts due to engine vibration. IO not defeat the purpose of the safety
wire by removL.•.g it.

9. The oil filter bypass vJlve is spring loaded. Exercise care when disassem­
bling this valve.

10. The oil filter cover is spring loaded. Exercise care when removing the cover.

There are also several recommended procedures which should be followed during
operation and maintenance activity to minimize the possibility of injury to the
equipment. They are as follows:

1. IO not operate the starter motor continuously for more than 15 seconds. Allow
a 3 to 5 minute cool-off period before re-energizing the motor.

2. Do not run engine above idle and not longer than ten minutes without cooling
1'ans.

3. Use only the recommended fuels and lubricating oils during the operation of
the engine.

4-108
 II

Figure 4-62. Adjusting Engine Cooling Fan

4-37 . Engine Cooling Fans.

Preliminary Steps.

0
o Rotate turret ap·proximately 90 so weapon is pointed over left or right

side of vehicle.

o Remove engine compartment top deck plate.

a. Adjustments.

(1) Loosen 8 screvrs securing fan ring housing to top deck shroud.

(2) Loosen 2 bolts attaching fan ring housings together.

(3) Adjust fan ring housing until minimum clearance of 0.040-inch is

obtained around entire fan.

(4) Tighten screws loosened above and recheck peripheral clearance.

4-109
 ng Fan
ti on o f En gine Cooli
nstollo
4-63. Removol/l
Figore

·
gri ll•
. i ng fan
Remo val s att ac h
o. washer
cre ws and
4 s
( 1) Rem ove
�·
ille· ve sha
o ff fan gr o m f an dri
Lift f r
(2) washer
, and
pi n , nu t
co tter
Remove
(3)
n.
off fa
Lift
(4 )

4-1\0
4-�8. Engine Oil Filter Element Replacement.

Preliminary Step. Remove engine compartment top deck cover.

NOTE: Engine oil filter has a built-in check valve in base assembly which does

not allow oil to drain back into s� when engine is static. This check valve

will open when cover assembly is removed, allowing oil to drain into s�, for

purpose of changing filter elements.

�· The engine oil filter elements will be replaced at every engine oil change.

�· Refer to Figure 4-h4, and remove 12 nuts . ( item 2) and washers ( item 3).
retaining cover ( item 1). Remove gasket ( item 4) and filter elements ( item 5).

Using a clean, dry, lint-free cloth, wipe out filter housing.

c. Install 2 new filter elements and gasket. Install cover with 12 washers

and self-locking nuts. Tighten to 23-27 foot-pounds.

d. Start engine and run for 4-5 minutes. Check for leaks around housing cover.

4-111
 LEGEND

1. COVER ASSEMBLY ( 598539)

2. NUT ( 12 ) ( MS21 095-6)
3. WASHER ( 12 ) ( MS9320-12)
4. GASKET ( 598537)
5 • E LEME NT ( 598833 )
6. HOUSING ( 598541 )
7. GASKET ( 598569)
8 • SCREW ( 1 0) ( MS90726-65)
9. WASHER ( 10) ( MS9320-12)
10.. BASE ASSEMBLY ( 598566)
11 • SCREW ( MS90726-63 )

Figure 4- 64. Engine 0 i I Fi Iter E Iement Replacement

4-112
 MOUNTING SCREW (4)
ELECTRICAL LEAD
STARTER RElAY

Figure 4-65. Removal/Installation of Engine Starting Motor Relay

4-39 . Starter Relay.

a. Inspect

(1) Place master sw.i.tch in "ON" position.

(2) Place transmission in "Neutral" position.

(3) Place vehicle START switch momentarily and back off. Listen for relay

clicking sound, which indicates proper operation.

(4) If no click is heard, check for 24 volt input to relay. If line

voltage is 24 volts, replace relay.

b. Replace

(1) Remove nuts, and washers attaching electrical leads.

(2) Remove electrical leads from studs •

(3) Remove mounting screws and washers.

(4) Remove starter relay.

4-113
 COVER
GASKET
WASHER (2)

HOUSING ASSEMBLY

1
SCREW (2)

Figure 4-66. Removal/Installation of Engine Oil Pressure Regulator Valve

4-4o. Adjustment of Engine Oil Pressure Regu1ator Valve.

The oil ·pressure regulator valve is adjustea at assembly and under normal

conditions should require no further adjusting. If adjustment is required, use

following procedure:

a. Remove two bolts, two washers, oil pressure regulator cover and gasket.

b. Each oil pressure regulator should have three washers that are used as

shims. To increase pressure, add one washer; to decrease pres'Sure, remove one

washer.

c. Reassemble regulator in place and install gasket, cover, washers, and nuts.

4-114
 CHAPI'ER 5

TURRET SUBSYSTEMS

Section I. PURPOSE AND SCOPE

5-l. Purpose.

a. This chapter covers the description and theory of operation beyond that

covered in Chapter l. of the Operator's portion of this manual. Refer to Figure 5-l.

b. Section VI of this chapter covers the design concept and operation of the

various test sets used as Support Equipment in troubleshooting turret compcmcnt

malfunctions.

5-2. Scope.

a. Section II. of this chapter covers the 15a-w Gun Launcher Assembly and Armament.

b. Section III. covers the Automatic Loader.

c. Section IV. covers the Gun/Turret Drive Systems.

d. Section V. covers the Sighting and Fire Control Systems.

e. Section VI. covers Support Equipment as follows:

(1) Gun/Turret Drive Test Set.

(2) Hydraulic Test Set

(3) Electrical Test Set

( 4) 1-leapon/Breech Test Set

(5) Automatic Loader Hydraulic Test Set

(6) Monitor Unit Test Set (Delco)

(7) Servo Unit Test Set (Delco)

(8) Portable Multimeter Test Set (Delco/Comm.)

(9) Oscilloscope Test Set (Delco/Comm.)

(10) Hydraulic/Electrical Interconnect Test Set (Delco)

5-l
 Section II. ��NT

5-3. 152 MN Gun Launcher Assembly.

a. The main weapon on the :x:r-18o3 is the XM150E6 152nun gun-launcher which has

capabilities of firing either conventional high explosive ( HEAT ) rounds, canister

rounds, or conventional high velocity kinetic energy (sABar) rounds as '"ell as

launching Shillelagh missiles.

b. The gun-l�uncher breech, engaged to the weapon by interrupted threads, is

operated through an electro-mechanical mechanism as shown in Figure 5-2 • The

hand crank ( vhen engaged ) permits manual operation of the breech mechanism should

the automatic opening feature not function.

c. The main weapon nount consists of a concentric recoil mechanism with extern8l

buffer, 2 replenisher system connected to the vehicle hydraulic povrer supply, end

a trunnion yoke assembly. This mount supports and retains the main weapon on gun

trunnion bearings in the vehicle turret, ·provides a controlled recoil and counter­

recoil reaction during gun firing operations and provides a seal between the turret

interior and the external environment for fording purposes. The combination of

"YTeapon mount, gun shield and trunnion yoke provides the frontal ballistic protection

for the turret as shown in Figure 5-3.

d. The trunnion assembly provides the mounting for the recoil mechanism and main

weapon. The yoke secures the main weapon to trunnion bearings of the turret front

main weapon opening. Trunnion caps placed over these bearings mate with the

machined yoke and are secured with bolts.

e. The homogeneous cast armor steel gun shield mounts over the primary weapon

and recoil mechanism and attaches to the gun trunnion yolce. Lifting eyes for gUJ."l.

.
sh:•_::old removal and provi sions for mounting the missile guidance transmitter, cover

and searchlight are also incorporated in the gun shield.

5-2
 f. A recoil mechanism provides a constant retarding force during the recoil

cycle to lessen the transmission of firing shock to the turret. This high-energy

absorbing recoil system contains a spring pack mounted concentric to the tube that

operates concurrently with a hydraulic fluid flow through a variable orifice to

retard the rearward motion of the weapon.

g. The counter-recoil buffer operates during the last four inches of counter­

recoil to cushion the shock of the weapon as it returns to battery position. The

counter-recoil buffer assembly produces an energy absorbing effect by passing

hydraulic fluid through orifices �1achined in the buffer piston.

h. A safe-to-fire indicator is incorporated into the recoil mechanism which

enables the gunner to visually monitor recoil mechanism precharge hydraulic

pressure. If a dangerous ( high or low ) condition exists, the gun-launcher firing

circuit is interrupted until the precharge pressure is automatically returned

to the correct level.

i.
A nylon splash curtain in the frontal area of the turret provides ballistic

protection against shrapnel or spall which may possibly ricochet around the trun­

nion yoke into the crew compartment. In addition, a trunnion seal is installed in

order to seal the turret frontal opening during submergence which prohibits gun

elevation and depression.

j. The gun tube shroud is a thermal insulator used to minimize gun tube droop

caused by the effects of solar radiation. Basically it consists of a bellows­

shaped cover on the gun shield and a blanket cover for the gun tube itself, attached

with band-type clamps. The bellows is needed for gun recoil during firing of the

main weapon. The blanket is laminated of asbestos silicon rubber / fiberglass cloth

with an aluminized surface.

c:;-1�. Secondary Weapon.

a. The M85 caliber .50 machine gun, Figure 5-4 is an automatic, recoil-operated,

metallic link-belt fed air-cooled weapon with its firing cycle triggered from open

bolt position. It is designed with a short receiver. A disintegrating type metallic

link-belt is utilized to hold the ammunition until it is fed into the weapon. Design

features include fixed headspace, quick change barrel with flash suppressor, a dual

rate of fire (high or low) and actuation either by electrical solenoid or by manual

operation. The secondary weapon is mounted above and stabilized with the Commander's

Day/Night Sight. Continuous rotation is provided in azimuth with an elevation

capability of +6o0 to -15°.

5-5. Coaxial Machine Gun.

a. The 7.62mm machine gun is a light weight air-cooled, metallic link-belt

weapon easily disassembled. It has a short receiver, is recoil-operated with a

gas assist to boost recoil, and is designed with a quick change barrel with fixed

head space. The cycle of operation and functioning is initiated from the retracted

position of the barrel extension assembly.

b. The coaxial machine gun system, Figure 5-5 consists of a bracket assembly

for mounting the coaxial machine gun to the right side of the main weapon, a 2700

round 7.62mm ammunition stowage box assembly, a power feed assist, flexible ammuni­

tion chute spent brass bellows and bag, a fumes removal blower and ducting, and a

flash suppressor for the machine gun.

c. The bracket assembly pivots to provide for boresight adjustments for traverse

ana elevation at ranges of 25.4 to 1000 meters. It also permits replacement of the

barrel from inside the vehicle.

5-6. Shillelagh Missile System (G & C)

a. The Shillelagh missile is a stabilized guided missile which is launched from

a 152mm gun-launcher. The missile is stabilized in rail attitude and capable of

maneuvering in pitch and yaw in response to commands received from the Guidance and

Control ( G&C) system mounted on and in the vehicle.

b. The basic function of the G&0 system is to constrain the missile to fly along

the gunner-generated line-of-sight ( LOS) between the launching vehicle and the

target until impact.

c. To accomplish this, the G&C system measures the missile deviation from the

LOS and the LOS rates, determines the required correction, transmits the correction

to the missile, and thereby commands missile control forces to reduce the deviation.

Measurements of missile deviation and transmission of command signals are continu­

ous and both are accomplished by infrared data links.

d. The missile G&C system is comprised of six major components as defined

below, with an interconnective cable set:

(1) Optical tracker mounted to the gunner's primary sight which receives

infrared signals from the missile while in flight.

(2) Optical transmitter used to send guidance commands to the missile.

The missile system tranFmitter is mounted on the top of the gun shield.

An armor steel cover is installed on the transmitter and on the gun

shield by means of bolts. Ballistic and submergence protection is

afforded by the cover for the transmitter.

(3) Modulator contains electronic regulators, amplifiers, and switching

circuits to provide large controlled currents to the xenon lamps in

the transmitter. This unit is mounted to turret basket floor beloi-r

the main weapon.

5-5
(h) Signal data converter ( SDC ) used to operate on the outputs of the

tracker and the control handle rate signals to generate missile guidance

control signals and also to perform the missile system self-test. This

unit is on the turret basket shelf forward of driver's station.

(5) /
Test checkout panel in gunner's station ( reference Figure 2-19).

/
provides go no-go status indication of the missile system components

following completion of the self-test and is used to indicate the

various test modes of the system. It can also be used to reset the

system during missile flight if it is necessary to abandon a missile.

(6) Power supply mounted to turret roof behind driver's capsule.

5-6
 1

30

4
28

/
· ---- ,

Figure 5-l • XM803 Turret Interior

5-7
1. PRIMARY WEAPON MOUNT
2. COAXIAL 7 .62MM MACHINE GUN
3. ELEVATION HAND PUMP ACCUMULATOR
4. COAXIAL FUME REMOVAL BLOWER
5o LASER POWER SUPPLY
6. AUXILIARY TELESCOPE
7o GUNNER1S PRIMARY SIGHT CONTROL PANEL
80 HAND TRAVERSE/AZIMUTH INDICATOR
9 o MAIN WEAPON ALIGNMENT CONTROL
10. MISSILE SYSTEM TEST CHECKOUT PANEL KIT
11. COMMANDER•s SIGHT CONTROL AND ALIGNMENT
12. AUTOLOADER LOADING TU BE
13o COMMANDER•s COMBINED SIGHT/SECONDARY WEAPON
14. ELECTRONIC RACK ASSEMBLY
15o SCAVENGER AIR SUPPLY BOTTLE
16. MAIN WEAPON AUTOMATIC LOADER
17. AUTO LOADER RESTOW PORT
18. SCAVENGER COMPRESSOR ENCLOSURE
19. CREW COMPARTMENT VENTILATOR
200 AUTO LOADER MANUAL SELECTOR CONTROL
21. TRAVERSE GEAR BOX
22. DRJVER•s CAPSULE DRIVE
23. TRAVERSE MOTOR/VALVE ASSEMBLY
24. DRIVER1S AUTO LOADER RESTOW AND EMERGENCY CONTROL
25. TURRET TRAVERSE LOCK
26. DRIVER•s AUXILIARY PANEL
27. MISSILE SYSTEM SIGNAL DATA CONVERTER KIT
28. RADIOLOG_JCAL WARN lNG AN/VCR-1 KIT
29o MAIN WEAPON ROUNDS
30. ELEVATION ACTUATOR

Figure 5-1 • XM803 Turret Interior - Legend

s-8
 GUN TUBE
COUPLING

BREECH CHAMBER

FIRING PROBE

MOTOR

PLANETRY GEARING

COVER
RING GEAR

MANUAL CRANK

SPINDLE

Figure 5-2. 152MM Gun Launcher Breech Mechanism

5-9
 GUN S
HIELD
-
�
�=·

��

\J)
I
!) BR EECH
\A NISM

�)
\\ TUR RE
T

RECOIL
M ECHA
NISM
T R UN

HOUS
NION
BEA RI
NG
I NG
'I
/
S AFE-T
O-FIRE
INDIC
A TO R
\

.
··
F ;gore
5-3.
I52M
M Gon
laonc h
er, Re
caH Me chan
;sm, and
Sh ;eld
 60 DEG. ELEVATION

READY ROUND ST OWAGE

DEPRESSION

COMMANDER•s DAY/NIGHT
DOO�S

Figure 5-4. Commander•s Day/Night Sight and Secondary Weapon

5il
 SPENT BRASS CHUTE

CLUTCH RELEASE

BOOSTER
POWER SWITCH

Figure 5-5 • Coaxial Machine Gun System

5-12
 Section III. Al1rOMATIC LOADER

5-7. General.

a. The automatic loader provides primary stowage and automatic loading of main

weapon rounds as directed by gunner or commander. The automatic loader magazine

assembly is bolted to the hinged bottom of the turret bustle of the XM803 vehicle,

and the loading tube assembly with miscellaneous control components is secured in

the turret crew compartment.

b. The automatic loader is functionally divided into three major equipment

groups: mechanical, hydraulic, and electrical. The mechanical equipment positions,

supports, and transports the ammuntion and, on command, loads it into the breech of

the main weapon. The hydraulic equipment provides power to actuate mechanical

components which in turn supplies drive power to the magazine drive, rammer drive,

loading tube and fire door drive cylinder, canister spring release cylinder, and

chain lock cylinders. The hydraulic equipment also provides for sequence control

of certain mechanical components through use of solenoid-operated valves.

c. The electrical equipment, through its logic and memory functions, controls

the operation of the solenoid valves in the hydraulics and incorporates numerous

safety and position sensors. Direct eontrol of the automatic loader and interface

with the turret fire control is also provided by the electrical equipment.

5-s. Mechanical Equipment -·

The mechanical equipment is composed primarily of the following items which are

shown in Figure 5-8.

a. Support structures. The basic support structures include the base plate (1),
side supports (2), front support (3), and rear supports (4). The base plate incor-

/
porates five access ports for removal and or adjustment of hydraulic manifolds and

removal of ammunition canisters.

5 13
-
 b. Magazine Transport. The magazine transport equipment is basically composed

of drive chains (5), sprockets (6), transfer shafts (6), a magazine index control (7),

transport chain locks (8), and canister and transport chain �ides.

c. Rammer §ystem. The rammer equipment includes the rammer drive assembly (9),

rammer head and chain assembly (10), and the rammer chain guide system (11). On

command to load, it is the function of the rammer to securely grip the round of

ammunition and push (ram) the ammunition through the canister and loading tube

assemblies into the main weapo4 breech. The rammer then releases the ammunition

and returns to its original position.

d. Canister Assemblies. The automatic loader magazine assembly conta:i.ns 24

ammunition canisters (12), which are transported and positioned by the front and

rear transport chains. The canister assembJ.ies firmly hold and position the am­

munition with spring-loaded grippers. The canister also ·provides indexing of the

missile at all times and allows guidance and passage of the rammer head during the

stroke.

e. Loading Tube Assembly. The mechanical loading tube assembly consists

basically of the stationary housing member (13), dovetailed telescoping members (14),

loading tube head (15), and mounting assembly. The loading tube forms a continuous

chute between the magazine and main YTeapon breech during the ammunition loading

operation. The loading tube also extracts the spent missile cap from the breech

and ejects it from the loading tube head. The complete loading tube assembly is

supported from the inner roof of the turret by an adjustable mounting assembly.

f. Stow Port Assembly. The stow nort (16) assembly facilitates the insertion

of ammunition into the �gazine canisters from outside of the turret bustle.
 �· Restow Assembly. The restow assembly consists of the restow sliding door

(17), restow guide (18) , and restow full back stop. This equipment provides the

Driver with the means to replenish the automatic loader ( restow ) from the interior

of the turret with the ammunition stowed in the hull.

h. Fire Door Assembly. The opening in the turret wall at the ram position is

sealed by the fire door (19) assembly at all times except during the actual

ramming of a round.

5-9. Hydraulic Equipment.

The hydraulic equipment provides the power required to operate the automatic

loader according to a planned sequence of electrically controlled events. Hydraul1c

motors are used to power the magazine drive and rammer drive. Hydraulic cylinders

produce the linear motion required to: extend and retract the loading tube tele­

scoping member, open and c�ose the fire door, release the ammunition gripper at

the stow, restow, and load positions, lock and unlock the magazine transport chains.

The hydraulics actuate five operations as described below with the equipment shown

in Figure 5·6,

a. Magazine Drive. The magazine drive hydraulics supply the power and control

required to transport the magazine drive and to operate the front and rear magazine

drive manifold assembly (1), the front and rear chain lock hydraulic cylinders,

and the magazine hydraulic motor (2).

b. Canister Spring Release. Release of the canister spring loaded grippers

from the ammunition is required at the stow, restow, and load positions, and is

the function of the canister spring release. The function is accomplished with

hydraulic actuators (3), two mounted on the rear support and one mounted on top of

the stow port, and controlled by the canister manifold assembly (h).

5-15
 c. Rammer Drive. The rammer drive controls the advance and retraction of the

rammer head as it loads the ammunition into the main weapon breech. The two

primary components are the rammer drive manifold (5) and the rammer drive hydraulic

motor ( 6).

d. Loading Tube and Fire Door. The function of the loading tube and fire door

equipment is to extend and retract the loading tube and to open and close the fire

door. The function is accomplished with a hydraulic cylinder in each case and is

controlled by the loading tube manifold assembly.

e. Manual Control Hydraulics. The manual control hydraulics are incorporated

to provide for some of the basic movements of the automatic loader in case of

/
hydraulic and or electrical power failure. The basic functions which are provided

for are: (a) Magazine Transport, (b ) Removal of ammunition from the restow port,

(c) Retraction of loading tube, and (d) Opening and closing fire door. The primary

components of the manual hydraulics are the reservoir, hand pump, ( Figure 2-9)
control cable assemblies, relief and check valves, and manual selector control for

hydrauHc power ( Figure 2-11).

5-10. Electrical Equipment.

The electrical control equipment for the automatic loader operates hydraulic

solenoid control valves in a coordinated sequence to initiate the basic movements

of the loader. The program control tL"'lit is the heart of the electrical operaticms

and provides both logic and memory circuits. The program control accepts interface

/
and or control signals from the turret fire control, automatic loader controls,

loader position sensor switches, rammer position potentiometer, and canister position

encoder. The program control then integrates these signals with its logic circuits

and operates the solenoid valves and dis:play lights in coordinated sequence. The

electrical control equipment is designed to control the automatic loader in the

following four basic modes of operation:

5-16
 a. Stow. Ammunition is stowed in the magazine from outside the turret.

b. Restow. The magazine is replenished with ammunition from inside the

turret crew compartment.

c. Automatic. Automatic control of the main weapon and automatic loader is

provided in response to input commands from the turret controls.

d. Hand. Main weapon is positioned and breech opened automatically for hand

loading of a main weapon round.

The main components of the electrical equipment, some of •rhich are shown in

Figure 5- 7 , are as follows:

a. Program Control. The program control assembly (1) provides the memory and

logic functions to control the automatic loader and main weapon in response to

electrical commands from the turret controls. The functions provided by the

program control depend on the mode ( stow, restow, automatic, or hand ) that hPs been

selected.

b. Stow Control, Driver's Loader Control1 Commander's Counter Display. Three

control and display panels provided as a part of the automatic loader are the

Stow Control (2). ( Figure 2-3), Driver's Loader Control, ( Figure 2-1), and

Commander's Counter Panel, ( Figure 2-55). The stow control is activated in the

stow mode and controls automatic loader operation during stowing of ammunition into

the canisters. The driver's loader control is located in the turret crew compart--

ment and has two sections, the restow control and the emergency control. The

restow control is activated in the restow mode and controls automatic loader

operation during restowing of ammunition into the canisters from inside the turret

crew compartment. The emergency control is activated in the hand mode and provides

for operation of the automatic loader in the event of a faulty program control.

The commander's counter display, also loacated in the crew compartment, provides

an inventory of the number and type of ammunition in the automatic loader magazine.

5-17
The counter display also incorporates the malfunction detection indicator which

displays a coded light indicating a specific malfunction or lack of interface

signal.

c. Sensor Switches. The electrical equipment incorporates 16 sensor (3) or

condition switches whose signals are relayed to the program control. The signals

are used to inhibit or enable the loader operation.

d. Harness Assemblies. Nineteen (19) harness ( cable ) assemblies provide the

electrical connections between the sensor switches, solenoid valves, controls and

displays, nnd the program control.

e. Rammer Position Potentiometer. The rammer potentiometer (4) position is

input to the program control and the potentiometer signal is used to activate the

rammer speed control solenoid valves in the proper sequence and to indicate ivhen

the rammer is full forward.

f. Canister Position Encoder. The canister position encoder is mounted on the

rear support and is driven by the rear transfer chain. The encoder signal is input

directly to the program control and supplies signals to indicate relative canister

positions. The encoder indicates to the program control the coded number of the

canister in the stoi·r, restow, or load position - depending on which mode of opera­

tion is selected.

5-18
w
>
OJ!
0 OJ!
0
1-

�
w
>
�
0
w
z

....
c
0)
5_
·:;
Cl
UJ
u
·-

....
0)
'"0
0
0
.....1
u
·.;:
0
E
.E
::>
<(

-o
I
l()
0)
....
::>
0)
i..i:

LU
OJ!
�
w
I­
VI

z
<
u

5-19
 :I:
u
1-

+-

c
a.>
E
c..
:::>
CT
UJ

0
(.)
....
+-
(.)
a.>
....J
UJ

....
a.>
"'0
0
_g
(.)
+-

0
E
E
:::>
<(
�
UJ .
1-
UJ "'
� I
l()
�Q a.>
1- ....
z :::>
w
1- .�
LL
2
�
w

�
.�

5-20
 LOADING TUBE HEAD
15 �
18 ...-..
•

\.Jl
I
1\)
I-'

FRONT
TRANSPORT
CHAIN
5
REAR CHAIN LOCK

2
RIGHT SIDE
SUPPORT

Figure 5- 8,. Automatic Loader Mechanical Equipment

THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
 Section IV. GUN/TURREI' DRIVE

5- 11. Gllll Turret Drive - Hydraulic Power.

/
a. The gun/turret drive (GTD) and hydraulic power supply for the XM8o3 consists

three groups of equipment. This equipment includes those items required to (l)

control the main vret=rpon elevation/depression, (2) control the turret in azimuth

(traverse), and (3) provide the high ·pressure hydraulic power to operate this

equipment.

b. The GrD is referenced to the gyro s�abilized Line-of-Sight (LOS) of the

Gllllner's Primary Sight Group (GPS) or the Commander's Dayj;:-Jight Sight ( CDNS),

Secondary 'vleapon Drive System and Mollllt Group and incorporates correction signals

from the Ballistic Computer Group (BCG) and from 2lignment and 2.mmllllition jwup

correction potentiometers. The GTD receives the same r2te cor;mmnds vhich ore

o.elivered from the Gunner's or tne Cor:nil.?.:1Cler1s control hnr.dles to the respective

stabilized sight and utilizes the rate commands to minimize J.;\J c.nc turret positj_on­

ing errors. The GPJl is also caoable of f,_,_nctioninc; l·rithout a stnbUj_zed position

reference, and in this configuration responds to rate commands from the Gunner's

control handles.

5- 12. Gllll Elevation Drive.

a. The gun elevation drive equipment consists of the Elevation /�ctu.'ltor P.ssembl�r

( EAA) and the elevetion amplifier which a.re functionally represented in Figure 5-9.

The EM performs the follovring functj_ons:

(l) Elevates and depresses the Main IYeapon (HW) in response to an electrical

command signal from the elevation amplifier.

( 2) H;rdraulically locks the I-,1\,1 in any selected elevation a::1gle.

(3) Controls elevation and depression limits of the J:l'i-1 and provides sn·.ib­

bing near the extremes of the Mi·T travel.

5-23
 (4) Limits the mAximum Actuator force by limiting the differential pressure

across the cylinder piston.

(5) Provides discrete signals to indicate rear deck clearance and load

index positions.

(6) Provides electrical continuity to indicate when gun lock valve is closed.

(7) Elevates or depresses the I-:lH through a secondary manual positioning

input, independent of the main power supply or electrical command signal. Manual

elevation handcrank is shown in Figure

b. The elevation amplifier functions to combine the conunands from the Gu.'1/

Turret Drive 8tabilization Amplifier and feedback from the EAA to provide control

of EAA during gun elevation operations. The elevation amplifier is an electronics

package located on the Electronics Rack.

c. 'rhe elevation actuator assembly (EAi�) consists primarily of a hydraulic

cylinder controlled by a three-stage electro-hydraulic servo valve. The FAA elevates

or depresses the main -vrea-pon assembl�r through +20° to -10° elevation at a rate pro­

portionnl to a comrn:=md signal. The EJV\ consists of the following functional sub-

8ssemblies:

(1) Hydraulic cylinder which converts servo valve output flow into linear

velocity. /
The. cylinder also establishes the ma�im�w elevation �nc or depressior.

�ngle.

( 2) !1 cross-over relief valve vrhich controls the maximum cylinder force by

limiting the cylinder differential pressure.

(3) M2nual transfer valve vhich allo�-Ts manual actuation through use of

the manual elevation system.

(4) Lock valves which, when closed, isolate the hydraulic cylinder from

the servo valve and locks the main veapon at any turret position.

5-24
 (5) Differential pressure transducer which measures the cylinder differ­

ential pressure and feeds back the rate of pressure change to damp the load resonance.

5- 13. Turret Traverse Drive.

a. The turret traverse drive equipment consists of the Traverse 1v1otor Valve

Assembly ( TMVA ) , azimuth amplifier, Traverse Gear Box (TG), and the Gear Box

Hydraulic Control Unit (GHCU ) .

b. The 'Th1VA ( Figure 5-10) performs the following functions:

(1) Generates torque to traverse the turret in res·ponse to an electrical

command signal from a fire control amplifier.

(2) Hydraulically locks the turret in any selected azimuth position.

(3) Controls motor torque by limiting the differential pressure across

the motor.

c. The traverse motor valve assembly ( TMVA ) drives the turret through 36o0 of

azimuth at a velocity proportional to an electrical common signal. The �NA consists

of the following functional subassemblies:

(1) Low leakage axial piston hydraulic motor which converts the servo

valve output flow into rotational pm.rer and speed.

(2) Three-state electro-hydraulic servo valve which controls the motor's

output speed. The valve operates on 3000 psi hydraulic pressure at flovr rrtes up

to 47 gpm.

(3) Cross-over relief valves which limit the TMVA's output torque by limit­

ing the motor's differential pressure.

(4) Lock valves which, when closed, will hydraulically lock the motor and,

therefore, lock the turret at any position.

(5) Azimuth amplifier electronics package provides the necessary electrical

power, signals, and feedback loops to operate the three-state servo valve.

d. All subassemblies except the electronics package a�e integrated into one unit

5-25
which is mounted to the traverse gear box by means of the motor flange. Hydraulic

.tJOi·rer is supplied b�r hoses from the hydraulic povrer s�ply. The electronics package

is mounted to the electronics rack.

e. The traverse gear box assembly is a mechanism vrhich positions and retains the

turret assembly in azimuth in the povrer mode. It provides reduction gearing, clutch,

anti-backlash mechanism ( complete with hydraulic controls ,) hydraulic motor mounting

surface, and output pinions for driving the turret. In addition, it includes an

instrument gear drive and cam mechanism to provide hull clearance logic.

f. The traverse gear box and the gear box hudra.ulic control unit ( Figure 5-11)

perform the follovring functions in the turret drive group:

�· The Traverse Gear Box:

(l ) Contains a series of gears to reduce speed and increase torque from

a reversible, variable speed source to provide directional rotation and azimuth

positioning of the turret.

(2) Provides an adjustable means of reducing gear tooth backlash up to a

specified output torque level to permit smooth and positive control of turret

rotation.

(3) Provides nn adjustable safety, or torque sensitive slip device, to

prevent damage to the traverse gear if a reverse drive should occur from the turret

through the pinion drive gears or in the event of a physical system blockage.

(5) Provides a means of rotating the driver's station.

(6) Provides a means of reducing the frictional drag from the power drive

components during manual traverse.

h. Gear Box Hydraulic Control Unit ( Figure 5-11):

(1) Provides variable pressure reduction and control of system hydraulic

pressure for actuation and adjustment of traverse gun anti-backlash, traverse gun

/
overload protection disengagement mechanism, and manual drive disengagement.

5-26
 (2) Provides hydraulic pressure and flovr for operation of the traverse

gun lubrication motor.

(3) Provides a controlled damping force during backflovT of hydraulic fluid

from the traverse gun anti-backlash mechanism.

5-14. Hydraulic Power Supply .

a. The hydraulic power supply provides filtered, hi�i�pressure oil through a

distribution system to components in both hull and turret. Accumulators are utilized

to provide high-pressure fluid storage to supplement pump capacity during the momen­

tary high flow demands of normal systems operation and to maintain hydraulic opera­

tion capabilities during the silent watch vehicle mode.

b. Equipment utilizing the hydraulic povrer supply on this vehicle include:

(1) Turret azimuth drive

(2) Main weapon elevation drive

(3) Suspension

( 4) Autoloader

(5) Bore scavenger

(6) Compressor drive

(7) Traverse gear box with power drive clutch

(8) Manual drive clutch

(9) Anti-backlash cylinder and lubrication pump drive

(10) Gun mount replenisher system

(11) Missile transmitter door actuator

(12) Hydraulic cooling circuit

(13) Special kits such as air conditioner and bulldozer

c. Reference Figure 5-12 for schematic layout of equipment.

d. The follm•ing components are provided to meet the operational needs of the

hydraulic systems:

5-27
 (1) �· This is an aircraft-type, axial piston, variable displacement,

pressure-compensated hydraulic pump incorporating an integral boost pump to allow

full output flm-r operation from a non-pressurized reservoir. This unit is engine­

driven from the accessory drive and provides maximum flm-rs :r;:·�ortional to engine

speed. The theoretical displacement of the pump is 3.0 cu.in./ rev. The pump provides

full flow output of 58 gpm at 3000 psi. The pump and accessory drive are shown in

Figure 5-13.

(2) Reservoir. The open reservoir h8.s a capacity of approximately 24 gallons.

A diffuser is incorporated to limit fluid entrance velocities and thereby control

foamin8. Other design features include dipstick level monitoring, a breather with

inter,ral filter to limit contamination, a fill port containing filtration provisions,

fine mesh screen protecting the outlet from larger air bubbles, baffling to reduce

slosh and a magnetic drain plug. It is fabricated from aluminum sheet and is located

in the left front corner of the engine compartment.

(3) Filters. A case drain filter unit provides 15 micron absolute filtration

1Jehreen the hydraulic pump nnd the hydraulic reservoir. Thi"" existing military

standard unit is located near the engine compartment rear bulkhe8d. High pressure

and return filters, usinc; the sDme housing and filter elements for both applications,

provide 10 micron absolute filtrC'.tion with minimum pressure drop at 60 gpm flow rates.

'.rhese filters are bypass-type which allows emergency hydraulic o·peration in the event

of a blocked filter element. The filter media has been selected to provide high dirt

retention capacity and thereby reduce maintene.nce operatj.ons. The housing contains

R pop-up type button to indicate i·Then a filter is becoming b locked and requires re­

placement. These filters are located in the engine compartment near the rear b�lkhead.

( 4) Cooling Circuit. A hydraulic oil cooler is provided as part of the paver

pack transmission oil coolers. A separate cooling oil circuit provides oil flow from

the hydraulic reservoir to the cooler and back to the reservoir. Cooling flo�s of

5-28
approximately 15 gpm in this circuit are provided by a hydraulic pump-motor combin­

ation. To achieve these flOivs, the hydraulic drive motor requires about one gpm of

main system flow. The cooling circuit is temperature-controlled, operating only

when system temperatures warrant. The cooling pump and motor are mou.."'lted on one

side of the hydraulic reservoir; the oil cooler is located slightly above the left

front corner of the transmission.

(5) High Pressure and Return Manifold. These units provide connection points

for hydraulic power supply users including turret components, suspension and track

adjuster, and the air conditioner kit when installed. These wEnifolds are located

in the hull in both the engine and crevr compartments.

(6) Turret Control Hanifold. This manifold contains the main turret shut-

off valve, the hydrm1lic system pressure-relief valve, and the accumulator bleed-

dovm valve. The main shut-off valve shuts off hydraulic pover to the turret during

travel, during times when turret opr-·retion is not required, or durin,::_: e hydraulic

emergency in the turret. The pressure-relief valve passes higr,,pressure oil back

to the reservoir should the pump compensator or some other system malfunction cause

hydraulic pressure to become excessive. The bleed-down valve drains high�pressure

oil from the accumulators back to the reservoir when the vehicle is shut down. The

main shut-off valve and the bleed-down valve are solenoid-controlled. An isolation

check valve is connected directly to the turret control manifold inlet port and

maintains fluid in the accumulators under pressure during silent watch operation.

The turret control manifold is located under the turret basket on the hull floor.

(7) Accumulators. There are six piston-type accumulators installed in the

system. These accumulators have a total internal capacity of approximately 2100

cu. in. and are pre charged with nitrogen. The accumulators hold about 4. 5 gallons

of fluid at 3000 psi and are mounted on the hull floor beneath the turret basket.

Aircraft quality accumulators weighing 135 pounds have been specified •rhich

5-29
repr�3ent a weir�t savings of approximately 80 pounds over comparable industrial

type units of the same specifications.

(8) Electro-Hydraulic Slip Ring. The electro-hydraulic slip ring transmits

electrical pm,rer and signal impulses as well as hydraulic fluid from the hull to

the rotating turret. The hydraulic system operates at a pressure of 3000 psi.

The electricnl power system steady-state voltages range from 18 to 30 vdc, signal

circuits renge from 18 to 30 vdc and up to ho vac, and frequencies up to 6ooo Hz

square wave form. The slip ring is mounted at the center of turret rotation and

attaches both to hull floor and turret basket.

(a) The APE vehicle's electro-hydraulic slip ring is designed as a

modular concept. The hydraulic circuits and the electric slip ring portion are

placed in separate modules; then, assembled together to provide a complete assem­

bly I·Thich results in decreased rnPi.ntenance and installation time. The hydraulic

module contains provisions for both pressure and return flow for the hydraulic

fluid. The signal ring module of this slip ring is also used in the driver's slip

ring. This module, a modified version of an So-ring module designed for the M60

vehicle, contains sixty rings. The use of tvro modules provides 120 signal circuits.

The ·power ring module contains six pmrer rings.

(b ) The slip ring is clamped to the hull floor and turret basket and

may be ad.justed to the center of rotation of the turret. A molded fiberglas cover

shrouds the slip ring and prevents direct contact with a possible hot slip ring

surface or hydraulic fitting.

(c ) Because hydraulic pressure is 3000 psi, the hydraulic castings

are all made of stainless steel; electrical housings are cast aluminum.

( 9) Distributi·on System. The distribution system contains hoses, tubing,

standard tube fittings and S}ecial tube fittings as component location and per­

formance requirements dictate. Line sizes are selected to limit flow velocities

5-30
 to 25 ft/ sec in high-pressure lines, and 15 ft/ sec in low-pressure lines. \1>/hen

design dictates, manifolds are utilized to simplify fluid distribution. Stainless

steel tubing and tube fittings are used. The following special distribution

system components are also utilized:

(a ) Quick disconnects to the hydraulic pump provide fast removal of

the hydraulic hoses in event of power plant removal.

(b ) Articulating hydraulic lines supply hydraulic fluid under pressure

to control the main weapon elevation actuator which provides flexibility bet;.reen

the turret and the movable actuator. These lines incorporate swivel connections

at the elevation actuator and at the mid-point of the linkage, which are satis­

factory for 3000 psi operation under all environmental conditions.

(c ) Swivel elrows are used as required throughout the hydraulic dis­

tribution system to prevent strain on tubing and components due to temperature

expansion or contraction of lines, or tolerance variation of components.

(d ) CBS compressor driven by a positive displacement axial piston

motor. Flow to the motor is supplied from the distribution system through an

/
On-Off flow control valve which limits flow to six gpm. During periods of high

/
oil usage by the gun turret drive systems, the control valve is shut off via a

priority system. The same system also shuts off flow to the air conditioner.

(e ) Manual elevation system consists of a hand pump mou.11ted on the

gunner's control brncket, an accumulator, a check valve, a relief valve, and

plumbing. The function of this system is to manually elevate or depress the main

weapon by rotating the hand pump. The accumulator retains pressure in the system

in order to offset for lost oil within the system. The hand pump, which must ;.rork

at a relatively constant displacement at slmv speeds, is the major item in the

system.

5-31
 LOAD INDEX AND REAR DECK
4----- CLEARANCE INDICATORS ELECTRIC
POWER
--------. ,--

DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE FEEDBACK

1 • ..,.. TRANSDUCER EXCITATION---. I
THIRD STAGE SPOOL
POSITION FEED BACK
.- -
,-.-ELEVATIONACTUATORASSEMBLY-.- ,-,-·�
�
1 I .
G/TD
STABILIZATION
I�lj LOCK I
ELEVATION
AMPLIFIER SIGNAL
SERVO
VALVE I C> VALVE I � ACTUATOR ----

PRIMARY
--.
AMPLIFIER OUTPUT
I I MOUNT
WEAPON

I 6 _{t I
1
G/TD POWER
SUPPLY-DC I MANUAL OPERATION
TRANSFER VALVE I
I
Jl

� I
I
A)
0
- � - - - --- �

G/TD
LOGIC CONTROL LOGIC
HYDRAULIC � ELECTRONICS
AXIAL
DISTRI­ (MW AT 0° AND
PISTON
BUTION MW LOCKED IN EL)
PUMP
SYSTEM

ELECTRICAL INTERFACE
---- _____. MECHANICAL INTERFACE
1 f> HYDRAULIC INTERFACE

Figure 5- 9. Functional Diagram - Gun Elevation Drive

 GUN/TURRET DRIVE
STABILIZATION AMPLIFIER
�
THIRD STAGE SPOOL POSITION FE�DBACK

,- - --- - -- · -- ,
1
GUN/TURRET DRIVE POWER
SUPPLY-DC L_.l AZIMUTH
CONT ROL SlGNAL
SERVO
TRAVERSE I
AMPLIFIER TRANSDUCER I I VALVE I � LOCK
VALVE
r ��------� EXCITATION
I
GUN/TURRET DRIV E STABILI-
ZATION AMPLIFIER OUTPUT I 4'�
1
\Jl
I
I 52
I l -1-- _TRAVERSE
w
w HYDRAULIC
MOTOR f GEARBOX
I
GUN/TURRET
I
DRIVE LOGIC I � TMV
L __ --------

------ ELECTRICAL
HYDRAULIC
------.MECHANICAL
DISJRIBUTION

========> HYDRAULIC SYSTEM

Figure 5-10. Functional Diagram - Traverse Motor Valve Assembly

 VEHICLE PRIME
POWER SUPPLY r------,
DC

- -- - -- - - -- ----
- -- -
I
,

1- -

I
-
--
--
- --
-,
I
I LUBE MOTOR/
=Y1
1 I
I
PUMP
I
I I
I I
I I I
�
I
HYDRAULIC I r-----v PRESSURE I I ...f DISENGAGEMENT ll AZIMUTH

I
PRESSURE
DISTRIBUTION � lJ.-... REAR DECK I
vl
SYSTEM -v REDUCTION CONTROL
I I
1 DEVICE CLEARANCE
I
STABILIZATION

I
AMPLIFIER
I
I

� I
i
\)
I

I-
'··

I
I :
�
I
ANTI-BACKLASH

I
•

I GEA� OX HYDRAULIC�ONTROL �N!.!._ : I

- TURRET
I
MECHANISM I
:
{J I
I
:
I
I
�--1_ I I
, _]

�
_ HULL/RING
TRAVERSE
___

I I I
MANUAL GEAR
MOTOR VALVE �------ GEARING
I
I
DRIVE

I
ASSEMBLY --I DRIVER'S

L L
- = _]-
- - -_
TRAVERSE GEA�OX
-- �::�7: G

---- ELECTRICAL
- -----. MECHANICAL

======�t> HYDRAULIC

Figure 5-11. Functional Diagram - Traverse Gearbox and Control

 BORE
SCAVENGER
I I
ENGINE
BULKHEAD
CONTROL VALVE I
I
I
M.W.
ELEVATION
DRIVE
..
•

Ii
MISSILE •
TRANSMITTER
DOOR
. Ill
D
i I TO A/C &
A I SUSPENSION
I
RECOIL MANUAL SLIP RING
CYLINDER ELEVATION
�EPLENISHING PUMP SUSPENSION
MA.NIFOLDS

rliGH PRESSURE
�ILTER

FROM
SUSPENSION
V1 FROM A/C &
I TEMPERATURE
w SUSPENSION
V1 I SHUT-OFF
MANUAL
VALVE AVCR
GEARBOX
11 D0-3B
ENGINE

TURRET
I
• I RETURN
• FILTER ••---,

I
HULL
....
TURRET TRAVERSE DRIVE

Figure 5-12. Gun/Turret Drive - Hydraulic Power

 J

-.
'·

W.
>
t'> ...
0

...>-..
�
VI
Q)
u
u

�
0..
E
:::>
0..

u
:::>
0
...
""0
>..
:r:

�-. ("')
if' I
1.{)

�
:::>
0)
u...
"' "l'
_,.,.
.-.J

5-36
 S ection V. SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL

5-15· Fire Control.

a. The fire control incorporates a stabilized line-of-sight ivhich provides the

cabability of effectively engaging fixed or moving targets while the vehicle is

either stationary or on the move. The concept features tvro-axis inertially stabil­

ized lines-of-sight, combined day/night vision sighting synchro control of sight/

weapon interfaces, static and dynamic ballistic corrections for the main weapon,

and semi-automatic control of multi-mode operation.

b. The fire control includes a ballistic computer, crosswind and cant sensors,

a laser ranging/illuminator, stabilized day/r.ight sights for the gunner and the

commander, and controls and displays for system monitoring, malfunction detection/

isolation, and weapon selection and control. Interface required to enable firing

and guidance of the Shillelagh missile is also incorporated into the fire control.

An auxiliary telescope is provided as a backup sighting device for the gunner.

c. Basically, the fire control provides the commander with the capability of

controlling the three major vehicle weapons (main veapon, secondary weapon, o.nd

coaxial machine gun) and the gunner vrith the capability of controlling the main

weapon and coaxial machine gun. The commander and gunner each have a stabilized

line-of-sight (LOS) and stabilized line-of-fire (LOF) Hhich incorporates computer

controlled ballistic and tracking offsets for the main weapon based on: Sensed j_nputs,

including range, turret and main weapon rate, crosswind velocity, and turret cant;

and manual control inputs, including ammunition selection, armnunitj_on jump charac­

teristics, alignment corrections, powder temperature, ambient air temperature, and

ambient air pressure. Figure 5-14 illus�rates the functional relationships of the

various component groups for the fire control. In order to insure a high first

round hit probab:'.lity, the following inherent capabilities have been incorporated

into the fire control.

5-37
 (1) Ballistic Correction. To obtain optimum main weapon accuracy when

firing conventional roimds, the main weapon line-of-fire must be displaced in

o.zj.muth and elevation to correct for factors that affect the projectile time of

flight and the projectile flight path. Figure 5-15 illustrates the basic fire

control problem. In order to determine the precise super-elevation end lead angle

required to assure a target hit, the parameters affecting projectile time of flight

and flight path are ap:plied to the ballistic computer, which uses these inputs to

cnlculnte a solution to the fire control p:!'Oblem. Target range, crossi·rind velocity,

turret cant angle and vertical acceleration are among the measured or sensed para­

meter applied to the ballistic computer to enable sclution of the fire control

problem. Nanual settings corresponding to powder temperature, ambient air pressure

and ambient air temperature are also applied to the ballistic computer. In addition,

the type of conventional round selected for use in the main weapon is identified

and this information is automatically applied to the computer. C�ilizing this

data and the data stored in the computer, the computer determines the basic offset

angles required and provides the data to the ballistic correction servo as G"lper­

elevation and azimuth offset commands ( Figure 5-15). In the ballistic correction

servo, these commands are combined ''ith azimuth and elevation offset commands

representing ammunition jump and alignment corrections. These corrections are

determined by the cre;v and set into the computer by adjustment of manual controls.

The outputs of the ballistic correction servo represent the final elevation and

lead angles required for weapon laying. These signals are combined with pointing

commands from the sight in use and are ap·pJ ied to the g�..n turret drive. In response

to these signals, the gun end turret drive orients the main weapon, displacing the

main weapon line-of-fire from the line-of-sight by the proper amount. A block

diagram of the ballistic computer is presented in Figure 5-16.

5-38
 (2) Stabilization. /
Both the commander through the commander's day night

sight, and the gunner through the gunner's primary sight, are provided with a fully

stabilized line-of-sight. The main weapon can be referenced to and controlled by

/
either the commander's day night sight or the gunner's primary sight. vfuen refer­

enced to and controlled by one of these sights, the main weapon can be considered

to be fully stabilized and can be fired while the vehicle is moving with high

accuracy. If the main weapon is controlled directly by the commander's or gunner's

control handles, the weapon is not stabilized. Conventional rounds can be fired

during vehicle movement, but accuracy is reduced. The coaxial machine gun, since

it is mecha.nically tied to the main -vreapon in azimuth and elevation, contains some

of the benefits of the main weapon stabilization system. However, superelevation

and lead angles are not automatically set in during target engagement when using the

coaxial machine gun . Thus, the crew member firing the machine gun must manually

compensate for target range, effective target movement across the field of vievr,

and crosswind.

The secondary "YTeapon, since it is mechanically lin.l{

. ed to the commander's

/
day night sight in azimuth and electrically linked to the sight in elevation, con­

/
tains the benefits of commander's day night sight stabilization. However, as is also

true for the coaxial machine gun, supereleva.tion and lead angles must be manually

set in by the commander during target engagement 'Ylith the secondary weapon.

(3) Ranging.

(a) When the gunner's primary sight is in use, the laser range­

finder may be used to determine target range. The range value determined. by the

laser rangefinder is automatically fed to the ballistic computer, which uses this

and other information to determine the main weapon elevation and lead angle dis­

placements for accurate conventional round firing.

5-39
 (b) The laser ranging capability may be employed by either the com­

mander or the gunner, provided that crew member is in control of the gunner's

primary sight. vfuen the commander controls the main weapon or machine gun and the

gunner's primary sight is in operation, a master/slave relationship exists between

the gunner's primary sight and the commander's day/night sight, allowing the com­

mander to lay the gunner's primary sight reticle on the target using his day/Light

sight. Laser ranging is initiated by actuating the laser fire pushbutton on the

control handles of the crew member controlling the gunner's primary sight. After

the laser fire pushbutton is actuated, the laser beam pulse is generated in the

laser tre,nsmitter and emitted through the gunner's primary sight to the ta;"get.

The reflected beam is gathered by the gunner's primary sight optics and is optically

transferred to the range receiver. After the laser return reaches the range re­

ceiver, signals representing target range are generated and transrr.itted to the

ballistic computer, the gunner's primary sight, and the connnander's day/night sight.

Within the ballistic computer, the range "alue is used to determine main veapon

elevation and lead angle required. The range data is also displayed in the comman­

der's day/night sight and gunner's primary sight field of views.

( l�) Day/Night Operation. The primary surveillance device for fire

control is the commander's day/night sight. The prima�J target engagement sight is

the @illner 1 s primary sight, vlhich is also a day/night sight. The gunner's auxili­

ary telescope, i·Thich serves as an emergency sight for the gunner, is not equipped

for use at night.

(5) Missile Firing.

(a) During target engagement using the Shillelagh missile, the

gunner's ·primary sight reticle is placed on target by the gunner or by the com­

mander, if he has control of the main weapon. 1-Jhen the commander controls the main

weapon, a master/slave relationship exists behreen the gunner's primary sight and

5-ho
 /
the commander's day night sight. /
Placing the commander's day night sight reticle

m• target causes the gunner's primary sight reticle to be placed on the same target.

The main vreapon axis is offset slightly in elevation to compensate for missile drop

when the missile leaves the main weapon muzzle. Because the main w·eapon is slaved

to the gunner's primary sight and the sight is fully stabilized, missile launching

and subsequent missile guidance while the vehicle is moving can be accomplished.

( b) The missile may be launched when the sight reticle is on the

target and a ready-to-fire light appears in the sight field-of-view. At this point,

the firing trigger is actuated. After the missile is launched, all that need be

done �� guide the missile to the target is to maintain the sight cross hairs on

the target.

( c) The fire control equipment is divided into seven (7) major

component groups which are identified and discussed in the following paragraphs.

5-16. Gunner's Primary Sight Group.

.§· /
The gunner's primary sight group is an integrated day night sight which

provides the gunner with a gyro stabilized optical sighting capability to enable

target tracking and weapon usage under dynamic conditions. In addition, the group

/
enables the determination of day night target range and night target illuminatio�

/
through the use of a laser rangefinder illuminator system. The �roup also provides

for guidance of the Shillelagh missile after launch through use of the interfacing

missile system equipment. The equipment contained in this group is shmm in

Figure 5-17.
b. The gunner's primary sight periscope ( Figure 5-17) consists of a stabil­

ized prism assembly, a sight head cover assembly, and a main body assembly which

has the combined function of pro,�iding a controllable optical path for the fixed

optical paths of other gunner's primary sig..'lt assemblies.

5-41
 c. The stabilized prism assembly provides two-axis stability for the line­

of-sight. of the gunner's primary sight. stabilization is achieved by coupling

the sight optical prism to two rate-integrating gyros. Angular motion about the

gyro �latform axis causes the gyros to produce signals which torque the gyro plat­

form to a null in azimuth and elevation. This arrangement Pllows the gunner's

primary sight field-of-view to remain stable while the vehicle is traveling over

rough terrain.

d. The main body assembly provides mounting surfaces and optical devices

for the gunner's primary sight telescope, laser rangefinder/illuminator components,

and missile tracker. A dichroic i,lirror is incorporated whic'-1. diverts the optical

path from the main prism to the day channel or night channel of the telescope

assembly while allowing infrared energy from an in-flight missile to enter the

missile tracker. Devices for checking and adjusting the optical alignment of the

laser rangefinder, missile tracker, and gunner's primary sight telescope with. the

gunner's periscope are also included. A unity vision feature is included in the

gunner's primary sight periscope by the inclusion of a flip mirror which provi· .es

unity vision when manually selected.

e. The stabilized sight head cover is attached to the main body assembly

and completely encloses the stabilized sight head. An optical •rindow in the cover

allows full field-of-view under all conditions of azimuth and elevation axis offset.

The sight head cover also contains devices for washing, wiping, and defrosting the

external optical window.

5-17. Gunner's Primary Sight Telescope.

a. The gunner's primary sight telescope (Figure 5-17) provides dual power
° ° °
(8 at Bx/5 at l2.5x) field-of-view for day sighting, single power (4 at 14x) for

night viewing, and a day/night rangjng capability. A monocular eyepiece is used for

both day and night channel operation. The night channel is utilized with the image

5-42
intensifier assembly and laser transmitter to provide pulse gated viewing.

b. A mechanical shutter is provided which interrupts the day channel line­

of-sight of the gunner vhen firing the laser, or during the muzzle flash when

firing the main gun, /

to prevent possible eye damage and or flash blindness. The

same functio·1 is performed in the night channel by momentary cutoff of the image

intensifier tube.

c. The image intensifier assembly is mounted in the gunner's primary sight

telescope. This unit consists of an image intensifier tube, oscillator and high

voltage multiplier, power supply, and a high voltege pulse amplifier. The image

intensifier assembly provides image intensification in the night channel of the

gunner's primary sight telescope. Through the control input from the range elec­

tronics unit, the image intensifier assembly provides precise control of the gain

of the night channel to allow effective pulse gated vision.

d. Controls and displays on and in the telescope are shown in Figures 2-23

and 5-21.

e. The laser transmitter is mounted on the gunner's primary sight periscope.

The unit consists of a laser cavity and interferometer, transmit optics, heat

exchanger, pluse forming network, and control electronics. The lAser transmitter

operate�� in two distinct r.1odes: range mode and view mode.

f. In the range mode, the gunner has the capability to perform a�curate

laser ranging during day or night operation of the gunner's primary sight. The

laser transmitter, in the range mode, provides a single pulse of energy suitable

for effective fair weather ranging when used in conjunction with the range receiver

function of the gunner's primary sight. The beam is projected through the stabilized

sight head, coaxially with the gunner's line-of-sight.

5-43
 �· In the view mode, the laser transmitter provides a continuously pulsed

input to the gunner's primary sight periscope assembly. This pulsed energy pro-tides

effective pulse gated night vision when used in conjunction with the night channel

in the gunner's primary sight telescope.

h. The range receiver (Figure S�l 7) is mounted on the gunner's primary sight

telescope. The range receiver consists of a photodetector, amplifier threshold and

time programmed gain controls, threshold detector, short range blanking and discrete

pulse generator. The primary function of the range receiver is to detect the

optical range signal established in the gunner's primary sight periscope and tele­

scope and provide an electrical indication of the presence of the signal to the

range electronics unit.

i. The re.nge electronics unit (Figure 5-17) is mounted on the electronics

racl� assembly. The rn.nge electronics unis processes target informatj_on from the

range receiver in order to determine the final target range, the existence of

multiple tare;et returns, or the absence of targets. This target information is

then conditioned for interface compatibility. The range electronics unit also

provi�es control and regulation of the range displays and imsge intensifier tube

operstion. Another function provided by the range electronics unit is a manual

range data entry cho.nnel i·rhich permits range data entry into the ballisttc computer

completely independent of the laser range function. Malfunction Detection Isolation

(MDI) circu:l.try is included for mcnitoring and to provide a discrete output sie;nal.

to the MDI logic.

.J· The loser rover supply (Figure 5-17) is mounted in the gunner's station.

The laser power supply consists of a de to de converter, converter control circuitry

and an internal de pmver supply. The laser pmver supply provides a regulated high

voltage output for charging the energy storage capacitors located in the laser

transmitter.

5-44
 k. The gunner's primary sight de power supply (Figure 5-17) is mounted on

the electronics rack assembly. This unit converts vehicle prime power to the

regulated de voltages for operation of the gunner's primary sight group. tftDI

circuitry is included to monitor one of the outputs and to provide a discrete output

signal to �IDI logic.

1. The gunner's primary sight azimuth amplifier (Figure 5-17) is mounted on

the electronics rack assembly. This unit processes azimuth input command signals

originating from the rate integrating gyro in the sight prism assembly. The output

signals provide the drive to the azimuth torque motor in the sight prism assembly

which positions the gunner's primary sight line-of-sight to correspond to the input

command signals.

MDI circuitry is included to monitor operation and to provide a discrete output

signal to MDI logic.

m. The gunner's primary sight elevation amplifier (Figu�e 5-17) is mounted

on the electronics rack assembly. This unit processes elevation input command

signals originating from the rate integrating gyro in the sight prism assembly. The

output signals ·provide the d:tive to the elevation torque motor in the sight prism

assembly which positions the gunner's primary sight line-of-sight to correspond to

the input command signals.

MDI circuitry is in�luded to monitor operation and to provide a discrete output

signal to MDI logic.

5-18. Gunner's Auxiliary Telesc�.

a. The gunner's auxiliary telescope (Figure 5-18) provides an emergency

°
sighting and 1-Teapon aiming device for the gunner. It is a single power u�x at 8

F.o.v.), monocular, articulated sighting device for daylight use.

b. The forward section of the telescope is rigidly fixed to the main weapon

yoke and is optically aligned to the main weapon line-of-fire. The aft section of

5-45
the telescope, which is connected to the forvrard section through an optic�tl joint,

remains :r0l.ative:J_y stationary as the forward section moves in the elevation place

�ori th the rna in >-reepon .

c. The g1mner1 s auxiliary telesco·pe incorporates an adjustable brow pad and

an adjustable eyepiece for viewing comfort and eye accommodation. It has a 'ballis­

tic t;,rpe reticle 'l.·rith graduations to aiCJ in providine; superelevation and leaCJ angle

offsets for main vreapon AP and HE round firinG;. The reticle is adjustable to

provide for boresight alignment and rna�- be illuminated using vehicle prime power

or an emergency battery provided with the telescope.

d. f,ince the gu..rmer1s telescope does not interface vrith either the laser

ranc;efir.der or the missile tracker, tne gu.'1ner' s auxiliary telescope may not be

employed for laser ranging or missile firing. lllso, when the gunner's auxiliary

telescope is used as a sightine; device and the gun/turret drive is directly con­

trolled via the gunner's control handles, the telescope is stabilized by the gun/

turret drive system.

5-19. Ballistic Computer Group.

a. The ballistic computer group provides modified elevation tracldng rate

commands for the gunner's primary sight group and main ,,reapon elevation and azimuth

offsets for the gun/turret drive group. Measurement of turret cant angle and cross­

wind are additional functions of the ballistic computer group. The group consists

of the ballistic computer, cant sensor, and crossv:ind sensor as shown in Figure 5-19.

b. The ballistjc comnuter provioes solutions to ballistic equations for the

computation of main weapon elevation and azimuth offsets for conventional round fire

from a stationary or moving tank. The main weapon offsets are based on the follow­

ing ballistic computer inputs: Gunner's primary sight tracking rates, target range,

turret cant angle, turret crosswind velocity, air temperature, air pressure, powder

5-46
temperature, ammunition type, and operation mode. ( Reference Figure 5-11�).
c. The ballistic computer ( Figure 5-19) is mounted or.. the electronics rack

assembly. The ballistic computer provides solutions to tracking equations for the

computation of elevation tracking rates for the gunner's primary sight line-of-sight.

The computed tracking rates assist the gunner in tracking targets from a moving

tank. The tracking rates are based on the following ballistic computer inputs:

azimuth and elevation tracking rates from the operator's control handles, manual

or laser target range, gunner's line-of-sight vertical acceleration, and turret

cant angle.

d. The ballistic computer also supplies HDI discrete outputs Rnd prov'.des

regulated de power for other associated equipment.

e. The cant sensor ( Figure 5-19) is mounted in the driver's station. The

cant sensor is mounted in an orientation that provides measurement of the angl�

between the main weapon trunnion axis and a place perpendicular to the local gravity

vector. The unit contains a tvro-degree-of-freedom gyro whose gimb<l displacement

about the cant output axis indicates the angular deviation from the local vertical

axis. The gyro effectively serves the same purpose as a pendulum with the advantage

that a maneuver does not cause it to oscillate. MDI circuitry is included to monitor

operation and to provide a discrete output signal to MDI logic.

f. The crosswind sensor ( Figure 5-19) is mounted on the intercom of the

turret bustle roof vrith mast exposed. The crosswind sensor is mounted in an orien-­

tation that provides measurement of the component of air velocity parallel to the

main weapon trunnion axis. The unit consists of a transducer and associated

electronics.

5-20. /
Commander's Day Night Sight, Secondary Heapon Drive and Mount Group.

a. /
The commander's day night si
. ght, secondary vrea�pon drive and :::1ount :-sroq_p

provides the commancer -vrith the capability for surveillance, t1:1rr,et acquj_sition end
:.racki.nr:, te.rget des i (r,n H : . io n , cmcl for controllinf;, stab il i zine; , a:J.d fi.rl.ng ·�he

mei'.1 weapon and secondary veapon. The conunander's day night. sigh;, is an in�.ec;ra'ed
/

dAy night -,;elescope with line-of-sight stabilization and scanning capability of

/

360° i n azimuth and -15° to +60° in elevation. This group equipment is shown in

Figure 5-20.
b. 'rhe commander's sight stabilized head and weapon mount ( Figure 5-20) provides

both elevation �md a:?.imuth freedom ( t-vro-degree-of-freedom ) stabilized line-of-sight

and n two-degr2e-of-fref'dom mounting structure for the secondAry wespon. Sight

stnbilize.t.i.on is achieved by coupling the sj_ght optical prism to tvro platform-

mo,Jnted rPte gyros, one in azimuth and one in elevation. An[':1J�ar motion ahout

the f.:,rro inout Axes produces signals which torque the gyro platform to a nu�l in

azimuth �mel elevR.tion. This arrangement allovs the commander's day/nit;ht sir::;ht

field-of-vi.e•r to remain stable while the vehicle is traveling over rouch terre.in.

c. The secondary weapon is a standard M8) c8liber .')0 machine e;un located on

/
top of the ballistic housinc; of the COll1Iilander1 s day night sight. Dri.ve for the

veRpon in elevation ( -15° to +60°) is provided vri thin the ballistic housing, i.e.,

electric motor and gear segments which synchronize the -vreapon line-of-fire -vr:ith the

sight. Rotational motion of the weapon is accomplished by the ballistic housing

which rotates Hith the line-of-sie,ht, in turn, rot11ting the weapon. ?;lectronic

control and power requirements of the stabilized sight head and machine �1n com­

ponents are satisfied through a slip ring package mounted in the stationary portion

of the s'i.ght support. The Heapon is activated by a rotery switch on the com.:�a�<der1s

He8pon control pnnel and is controlled in elevation and azimuth by the eont"li2nder1 s

control handles.

d. The fe.�d system for the cR.liber . 50 weapon ,.rill consist of a specially

designed o.mrnunition 1)ox ann feed belting mounted externally to the ballistic shield.

'I'he present desir,n per 1its 200 ready-racked rounds to l·,e stored e.t the veapon.

5-48
The mount and slip ring group consists of three (3) subgroups of equipment.

e. The basic support and housing structure equipment includes:

(1) Cast armor steel housings to enclose combined sip�t stntilized

head, and support the machine gun mount.

(2 ) Covers, doors, and supports for reL.ted components of t.he basic

structure. The doors to protect the sj_g."lt opening are ce.st o.rmor ::: � eel Rnd

are "linged to the main support housings and can be lockeo in eiti.1.er the o-pe:-'. or

closed position by a locking pin a�·rangement.

f. The machine gu_r1 mount and ammunition feed equipment includes:

(1) M85 machine gun cradle which mounts to the support honsin�; and

provides the pivoting poi.nt for the machine g1m :i.n elevation. T:bi.s is a c0.st

steel structure. An electric rna,?;Tietic brake holds -'-;he eJ evation and de:J:ress'ir;:' ,., "

the vreapon ,.rhen deactivated.

( 2) Electrically contrc,lled g"JJ.1 safety ac�uator solenoid :,1ou:--.teil to ·_. ·c

gun cradle.

( 3) Electrically ·powered machine gu..'! charcint; mechan i sm v·�ich c1e1 i ':ers

a charging stroke of 8. 5 inches utilizing an electric motor, cl'J.tciJ e.nd gear tra Lr,

arrangement to drive a chain and sprocket to move the bolt.

(h) Linked ammunition welded sheet metal stowage box and standard feed

chuting with a last round indicator switch.

(5) Spent cartridge link/ deflection devices.

(6) Electrical circuitry for the items above.

�· The self-contained slip ring package consisting of ninety (90) sj_gnal and

fourteen (lh) power annular circuit rings, mounted in rotating platter-t:me supports.

h. The commander's sight telescope (Figure 5-20) provides day and nif,_�t viev� .· ..,y

capability. The day and night channels share a portion of the objective lens, t:H'?

derotation prism, and the monoculartype eyepiece.

5-49
 i. The day channel provides tvro manually selectable levels of magnification:

3-power with a field-of-view of 20 degrees, and 8-power with a field-of-view of

7. 5 degrees. The night channel provides a fixed 11-power magnification 1,rith a

field-of-view of 5 degrees .

.J.. 'l'he night passive vision channel, incorporates an image intensifier assembly

that is used to collect and amplify ambient light. Controls for operation of the

night channel include adjustments for focus, intensity, and brightness.

1<. _A mechanical shutter is provided -vrhich interrupts the day channel line-of­

sight of the commander when the laser is fired or during the muzzle flash of the

main weapon to prevent possible eye damage and or flash blindness.

/ 'rhe ssme

fu.nction is pe:rfonned in the night chA.nnel by momentary cutoff of the image intensi­

fier tul:e.

1. The reticle is projected into the optical system before the objective lens

and rotates with the sight head to maintain a constant reticle image oriente.tion

at the eyepiece. Controls and displays on and in the telesco':le are shovm j_n

Figures

m. The commander's sig.ht washer assembly consists of a washer fluid reservoir,

a _pump and motor assembly, and interconnecting hoses. The unit provides a means

of spraying a stored washer fluid on the external surface of the commander's sjf�t

vrindovr. Controls for operating the sight washer assembly are located on the com­

mander's sight control and alignment unit. The washer reservoir is molli�ted on the

external surface of the secondary weapon mount.

n. The commander's sight power suppl y � Figure 5-20) is mounted on the turret

floor under the commander's foot tray. This unit provides :h5 vdc and +120 vdc

regulated power for the commander's day night sight group.

/ The commander's sight

power supply has a self-contained forced air system for cooling. i'IDI circuitry is

included to monitor operation and provide a discrete output signal to r1DI logic.

5-50
 o. The commander's Sight azimuth amplifier ( Figure 5-20) is a plu£-in module

mounted on the electronics rack assembly. The unit provides the e..mplificatio�,

demodu.1ation, compensation and povrer necessary to drive the commander's sight

azimuth axis motor in all modes of operation. 1v1DI circuitry is included to monHor

operation and provide a discrete output signal to MDI logic.

E.· The commander's si gl1t prism elevation amplifier ( Figure 5-20) is a. plug-:'_n

morlu1e mo1J.nt.ec1 011 the el�ctro:1ics rack assembly. This unit provides the ar.1.pli:"'j cP-.

t.ion, demodulation, compensation, And po1.rer :1ecessary to drive �he s:i. .;-:·J.t nr; em e)_P-
.

vc;.tion axis motor in all modes of operation. HDI circuitr:,.r is incLtded. to r.1onitor

operation and provide a discrete output sic,nal to !•IDI logic.

_g. The secondary vrenpon elevation amplifier ( Figure 5-20) is a plup;-in mod·ue

mounted on the electronics rack assem'bly. This unit IJrovides the ampl:i_ficAtion,

demodulation, compensation, and po,,rer necessary to drive the secondary vee.pon

elevation axis motor in the sy11chro slaved mode of ope rat ior1 for th0 cor.r,wnder' s

sir,ht. rmr circuHrJ is inch:.C:ed to enable testing of the a:npl:�fier.

5-21. /
Fire Co:'ltrol Displays Controls, Logic and Interconnect Gro·.J_o.

a. This group consists of vehicle replaceable items ( VRI's ) vrhic'-1. are sho.,n:. i:.-:

Figure 5-21, except for the breech electronics unit, and the control 1-,_andJ.es. ':"he

major functions of this equipment group are to:

.
(1) Provide the commander and gunner vrith the necessar::;� controJ s ar1d '
U lS-

plays to operate the main weapon, seconoary •reapon and coaxial mechine £SU...'1 .

(2) Indicate the status of the three weapons Bnd associated fire control

system groups.

(3) Provide the necessary internal logic and soritching functions requ:i.red

for the operation of the fire control system.

(h) Provioe the cabling for interconnectinG the fire control system '.rri's

and interfacing the fire control system with other vehicle subsystems.

5-51
 b. The following are the fire control, controls and panels illustrated in the

following figures.

(1) Main Weapon Alignment Control - Figure 2-21

( 2) Gunner Is vJeapon Control Panel - Figure 2-16

(3) Primary Sight Washer - Figure 2-23

(h) Gunner's Heapon Control Handles - Figure 2-17

(5) Gunner's Primary Sight Control Panel - Figure 2-18

( 6) Commander's Heapon Control Pc>nel - Figure 2-36

( 7) Commander 1 s Heapon Control Handles - Figure 2-37

( 8) Commander's Sight Control and Alignment - Figure 2-40

(9) Turret Power Dis';ribution Panel - Fig'.lre 2-41

(10) r.:elfu_nction Detection/Isolation Panel - Fic;J.re 2-42

c. The control logic electron::.cs unit ( Fic;ure 5-21) is a pluc-in module mounted

in the electronics rack assembly. This unit provides the required logic interfaces

between the fire control and other vehicle components as i.vell as betvreen the various

components of the fire control. The functions provided include mode control, arm­

ing of main and secondary weapon firing circuits, autoloader interface control,

breech control, missile system interface control, main vreapon scavenging control

and laser transmitter interface logic. To accomplish these functions, the control

logic electronics unit utilizes inputs from the gunner's, commander's and driver's

controls as well as from various sensors and interlocks which specify the status

of the fire control system, automatic loader, main weapon breech, and missile

system ( when installed ) .

d. The primary function of the control logic electronics unit is system mode

control which automatically establishes the proper fire control system configuration

for each mode of operation. This function controls sunchro loop interface switching

5-52
operations, switching of input commands, selections of main 1-reapon o:'fset servo

inputs, and moding commands to the ballistic computer. lviDI cjrcuitry is inr-luC.ec1

to monitor operation and prov-l.de a discrete signal output to l,!I!I loGi.c..

e. The breech electronics u.11it is the portion of the turret electrj_cal system

which converts low level logic commands originating from the fire control into the

higher power nece3sary to activate the breech motor, the scavenger s ystem and

machine gun solenoid. In addition, hif.,h voltage power is provided for the tr.Rin

weapon. This electronics unit is mounted like a drawer into the tmTet power

distributbn panel which is located in the crew compartment.

f. The two electronics rack assemblies (Figure 5-21) are located 8t thr. r�"'�:r of

the crew compartment. (See F�_gu.re 5-l for location diagram.) Se.ch electronics

rA.ck assembly consj_sts of a mounting rack for electronic plu,r.::-in modules, ar i ,1�;er­

connect harness, and module cooling equipment. The interconnect �erness provides

interconnection for the rack-mmmted electronics modules Hi th other turret

mounted components.

�· The module cooling equipment ineJur'!es cooling surfaces O.!ld 8 :'orced. 2 'r

coolj_ng system to maintain modules within safe operating terrrperature limits. ·?:ne

electronic rack assembly also contains MDI test connectors ha'.ri :1g buffered test

points, and a temperature sensing system which deactivates the :f':.re cont::-ol syster.t

if abnormal operating temperatures occur.

5-22. 1+00 Hertz (Hz ) Power Supply.

a. The 400 Hz power supply is a vehicle replaceable item -vrhich i s mom1ted on

the electronics rack assembly. Th�s unit provides two-phcse, 400Hz (±0·5 percent)

power for the fire control equipment. Vehicle prime po-.rer and various Dodin g dis­

cretes are required inputs for the hOO Hz power supply.

b. The 4oo Hz po¥rer supply consists of a frequency ste.ndnrd, a pu.lse ;.ridti1

converter, and an inverter. '.rhe converter provides regulated and isolated de

5-53
voltages for po1-rering the inverter and power supply control electronics. The

inverter transforms its de input into a high frequency output, modulated at a

constant L�oo Hz rate. After filtering, the inverter provides IJ.QO Hz, two-phase,

sine wave outputs. 1'1DI circuitry is included to monitor o-peration and provide a

discrete output siGnal to MDI logic.

5-23. Gun / Turret Drive Electronics Group.

a. The gun/ turret d! i ve electronics alone; with hydraulic povrer supply group is

a position servo system 1-rhich controls the main -vreapon in elevation and turret in

azimuth. This equipment is referenced to the gyro stabilized line-of-sight of

either the gunner's primary sier,ht or the commander's day night sight anc/ is capable

of followj -G commands from the sights with correction signals from the ballistic

computer system. Tne gun turret drive is also capable of functioning without
/ a

stabilized position reference by responding directly to rate conunailds from the

gunner's control handles. The gun turret drive and hydraulic povrer su:-.ply group
/

is comprised of :four subgroups: hydraulic power supply, turret azimuth drive, main

1-1enpon elevation drive, and. stabilization. The power required to position the gu..'1

and turret are provided by the hydraulic power supply subgroup. The vehicle replac­

able i terns of the stabilization subgroup only are described below and shown in

Figure 5-22. See Paragraph 5-ll for description of the hydraulic power suup!_y group.

b. Tne gun / turret drive stabilization amplifier ( Figure 5-22) is an electronic

plug-in module mounted in the electronics rack assembly. The unit nrov:i.des aur:>li­

ficRtion, demodulation, Rnd compensation required to provide signals to the eleva­

tion and azimuth hydraulic servo amplifiers vhich,

r in turn, drive the hydraulic

actuators to position the guYJ. and turret. The gun turret drive stabilization
/

amplifier consists of the following assemblies: azimuth stabilization amplifier,

elevation stabilization amplifier, and roll rate gyro excitation.

5-54
 c. The of fset servo unit (Figure 5-22) is an electronic plug-in module :nou.."1ted

to the electronics rack assembly. This unit sums the computer offsets, j U"ll1J
..

corrections, and boresj_ght alignment sicnnls into an offset 1::ias. i'J..:;;o, t'1c �n:it

sums the ezim'lth and elevatio·': s�n1chro sJ;:,::lrds from the u:mer' s _prirr1sry s:�c:n�� ;.ri.. �h.

t.1:1e offset bias to offset the turret and main 1·reapon wit11 res } ee-l: to t'Je 1 j :;e-:-:->"t'­

sight of the gunner's pri.mary s i ght. IIDI cir c u itry is included to monitor azimut'_,

and elevation channels and to provi.de discrete out}')ut signals to �1DI locic.

d. The f:jU11 trunnion s;ynchro ( Figure 5-22) is located on the main vreapon tru�1-

nion axis. It is accessible from within the turret without remov i nt; the mah:

vreapon. The p:un trunnion synchro is a dual speed synchro control transformer Hith

sine;le speed ( coarse) and eleven speed ( fine) windings vrhich provide signa.l s

:represPntative of the main weapon p o s iti on vith respect to tl'c turret. ':"he o�.;.tp'.lts

o�· the gun t::-unnion synchro provide control signals to the gu..n/tu:rre� dri-;e ele­

vation stabilization amplifier.

e. 'rhe hull azimuth rate gyro ( Figure 5-22) j_s mounted on th e in-:,erio:r of t11e

vehicle on the right hull vrall. The hull azimuth rate gyro senses l;ull azimutr;

motion and provides an output signal proportional to the hull ezimuth rate. The

/
output signal is routed to the gun turret drive azimuth stabilizatio-:1 ar.rpliEer.

The unit consists of a rate gyro subassembly and a preamplifier subnssembl:'l·

f. The gun eleYation angular accelerometer ( Figure 5-22) is motmted on t�e

breech end of the main '"eapon. The unit senses gun ane;ular acceleration e.nd pro­

/
vides an output signal to the gun turret driYe eleYa tion stabilizatior: ampllfier.

The gw'1 elevation angular accelerometer consists of an anguJ.ar a c c elerometer sub­

assembly and a preamplifier subassembly.

z.. /
The turret gyro accelerometer unit ( Figure 5-22) is mounted +;o the tur:::·et.

This unit proYides turret eleYation, azimuth, and roll rate signals, cDd en 2zi:�rJ.-t>1

an:::;ular acceleration sic;nal. ThFse output si�nals are utilized by the gun/turret

5-55
drive electronics, commander's day night sight electronics,
/ and eunner1s primary

sight electronics. The turret gyro accelerometer

/ unit consists of the follo1ving

i.tems and their Gssociated preamplifiers: elevation turret rete gyro, azimuth

turret rate f;-JTO, roll rate gyro and azimuth angular accelerometer.

h. The gun/turTet drive de power supply ( Figure 5-22) i.s an electronic pluc;­

in module mounted on the electronics rack assembly. The unit provides sufficient

1JOVe:r at rateCJ voltae;e levels to satisfy the de 1JOWer requirements of tbe gun/

turret 0rive e;roup.

i. r.mr circuj_try :is included to monitor operation an(: to provide output

discrete signals to t!1e �.mr lot:;ic.

5-56
 POINTING COMMANDS

l
GUN TURRET DRIVE
•
GUNNER'S CONTROLS GUNNER'S PRIMARY
AND D ISPLAYS SIGHT
--- -- -- - - - - -

-------------
----- ------- • STABILIZATION

• CONTROL HANDLES e STABILIZED SIGHT SYSTEM

e LASER CONTROL • DAY AND NIGHT • HYDRAULIC/

CHANNELS M ECHANICAL
• MODE CONTROL
• L ASER ILLUMINATOR/ DRIVE SYSTEM
ELEVATION
RANGEFINDER
AND
e MISSILE TRACKER AZIMUTH
OFFSET

t
ANG LAR
RATES
AN 1LES

JUMP & ALIGNMENT

CORRECTIONS
RA GE
J
BALLISTIC
COMPUTER

HANDLES TRACKING RATES SYSTEM

AMMO SELECT
• COMPUTER TARGET
;.
HA..
.;.;. N
...;.; .;.;. D
;;..:
I L=E: S
:;..:.
T.. Rt:;...;
�CK , :..:...IN
...:.. A� G
l:...: : ..:.:...R.: tA
::... E. : ·
T:.::
':..:. S:.c.-�
r- e CROSSWIND DESIGNATE
AMMO SELECT M ANUAL
SENSOR
SETTINGS
• CANT SENSOR
COMMANDER MAIN
WEAPON CONTROL t
TURRET-TO-HULL
ANGLE
I
I TURRET AZ. RESOLVER I
COMMANDER'S CONTROLS
AND DISPLAYS

• CONTROL HANDLES
COMMANDER'S DAY/N IGHTSIGHT
e MODE CONTROL
AND SECONDARY WEAPON
• MANUAL SETTINGS
• STABILI ZED SIGHT AND
POWDER TEMP.
SECONDARY WEAPON
AIR TEMPERATURE
• DAY AND NIGHT CHANNELS
AIR PRESSURE
• M-85/CALIBER . 5 0 WEAPON
e MDI

Figure 5-14. Basic Fire Control Block Diagram

5-57
 'SUPER ELEVATION

I
LEAD ANGLE I
ANGULAR RATE OF LOS TIMES PROJECTILE
I
I TIME OF FLIGHT
I
SUPER I GRAVITY DROP OF PROJECTILE DURING
I
ELEVATION I TIME OF FLIGHT
I
I

TIME OF FLIGHT I FUNCTION OF

I
I TYPE OF AMMUNITION
I RANGE
I
AIR PRESSURE
I
I AIR TEMPERATURE
I POWDER TEMPERATURE
I
I
OTHER I CROSSWIND
CORRECTIONS I VEHICLE CAN'T ANGLE
I
I VERTICAL ACCELERATION

I
FIRE ON MOVE I REQUIRES STABILIZATION OF SIGHT AND
I GUN/TURRET AGAINST TANK MOTIONS
- I
I

Figure 5-15. Basic Fire Control Problem

5-58
 --
r- - �

BALLISTIC COIVtPUTER SYSTEM

,....__HE SELECT
GUNNER'S WEAPON
f- SABOT SELECT
CONT ROLS I
�MAIN WEAPON SELECT
I
I
-

E- ELEVATION
COMMANDER'S POWDER TEMP. AIR TEMP. AIR PRESSURE SET-IN
OFFSET COMMAND
COMPUTER CONTROLS I
I
RANGE
A - AZIMUTH OFFSET
GUNNER'S
COMMAN D
OR ELEV. AND AZIMUTH COMMAND RATES BALLISTIC
V1 COMMANDER'S I COMPUTER
Z :
I
V1
CONTROL HANDLES - VERl ICAL ACCELERATION COMPUTER SYSTEM
\.0
MDI DISCRETE
V •

0s
CROSSWIND CW - CROSSWIND
GUNNER'S PRIMARY AZIMUTH RATE
t--- SENSOR VELOCITY
SIGHT GROUP I SIGHT COMMAND
C- CANT ANGLE l

I
0

CANT e
S ELEVATION
400HZ 400HZ P O)'VER
I
I SENSOR

n
RATE SIGHT
POWER SUPPLY I
I I COMMAND
-- --

VEHICLE DC POWER

Figure 5-l6o Ballistic Computer Block Diagram

 MOUNTING
BRAC KET

PRIMARY SIGHT
P ERISCOPE

LASER TRANSMITTER
PRIMARY SIGHT TELESCOP E

RANGE R E CE IVER

PRIMARY SIGHT RANGE ELECTRO NICS

AZIMUTH AM PLIFIE-R UNIT

PRIMARY SIGHT PRIMARY SIGHT

E LE VATION POWER SU PPLY- DC
AM PLIFIER
LASER P OWER SUPPLY
T URRET BACKWALL

Figure 5-17. Gunner1s Primary Sight Group

 DIOPTER
ADJUSTMENT CONTROL

RETICLE AZIMUTH
ALIGNMENT CONTROL

BROW PAD
ADJUSTMENT LOCKS

RETICLE ELEVATION ALIGNMENT CONTROL

NOTE.

NOT INSTAL LED ON PILOT VEHICLE NO. 7

Figure 5-18. Gunner's Auxiliary Telescope

5-61
 CANT SENSOR

CROSSWIND SENSOR

BALLISTIC
COMPUTER

Figure 5-19. Ballistic Computer Group

5-62
 COMN\ANDER'S SIGHT POWER SUPPLY- DC

/
I

- -
//
COMMANDER'S SIGHT STABILIZED HEA D AND WEAPON MOUNT

� /--- d'
(\ '"'
'
----

-�-

COMN\ANDER'S SIGHT TELESCOPE

SECONDARY WEAPON
COMN\ANDER'S SIGHT AZIMUTH ELEVATION AMPLIFIER
COMN\ANDER'S SIGHT PRISM
AMPLIFIER
ELEVATION AMPLIFIER

Figure 5-20. Commander's Day/Night S ight, Secondary Weapon Dr ive System

and Mount Group

5-6J
 I I o 1 • t • t ..

0000000000
.. ..
<I •I •• t ot • Je
0 ()' 6
ooooooooo··..
rl,. " "' ,, " .. ... .. 0
<DO 00 0 000 0 0::\:
• • • 0 • •

GUNNER'S PRIMARY SIGHT MALFUNCTION DETECTION/ISOLATION

CONTROL UNIT PANEL

MAl N WEAPON
All GNMENT CONTROL COMMANDER'S

GUNNER'S WEAPON WEAPON CONTROL

CONTROL

!
tM..kAL..-11

:0Jt®1
$ '""' •••••• ........ -·-

TURRET POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL

e:o -�:
0 �: 0 e.:
-··-- -·---

' ·'
CONTROL LOGIC ELECTRONICS UNIT

COMMANDER'S SIGHT CONTROL

AND All GNMENT UNI T

ELECTRONICS RACK ASSEMBLY

Fig ure 5-21. Fire Control Displays/Controls, Logic and Interconnect Group

5-64
 GUN TRUNNION
SYNCHRO
TURRET GYRO /
ACCELEROMETER
UNIT

GUN ELEVATION ANGULAR

ACCELEROMETER
HULL AZIMUTH
RATE GYRO

Figure 5-22. Gun/Turret Drive System Components

 Section VI. SUPPORT EQUIPMENT

5-24. General Purpose and Scope.

a. The XM803 maintenance support equipment consists of three categories of equip-

ment as follows:

(1). Standard ( Common ) Tools and Test Equipment.

(2) Special Tools and Test Equipment.

(3) Auxiliary Portable Test Equipment ( APTE )

b. The first category of equipment includeds those items which are common to DOD

inventory and will not be covered in this manual. The other two categories of equip­

ment are Peculiar Support Equipment ( PSE ) items since they will be unique to the XM803.

These two categories are separated as shmm due to the inherent differences in design

requirements. The Special Tools and Equipment include the less complex items such as

torque adapters, suspension tools, slings, alignment fixtures, etc. To date these

items have not been clearly defined therefore are not totally included in this manual.

The Auxlialiary Portable Test Equipment specifically includes various test sets

which are peculiar to certain components and /or equipment groups - e.g., gun /turret

drive, vehicle hydraulics, fire control, and automatic loader. The design goal of each

APTE test set is described as to functions, design concept, and operation, with special

emphasis being given relative to the interface with the on-board Malfunction Detection

and Isolation ( MDI ) equipment.

c. The equipment described in Table 5-l are either preliminary design concepts or

preprototype items of hardware which are intended for use during the testing and main­

tenance of Pilot Vehicle No. 7.

5-66
 Table 5-l. Auxiliary Portable Test Equipment

Test Set Application

Electrical To provide a means of monitoring, diagnosing, and isolating

(Para. 5- 25) malfunctions in the vehicle hull and turret electronic equip­
ment.

Hydraulic To provide a means of diagnosing and isolating malfunctions

(Para. 5- 26) in the hydraulic equipment to a vehicle replaceable item.

Weapon/Breech To isolate any functional failure in a vehicle replaceable

(Para. 5- 27) item of the weapon/breech equipment compatible with the
maintenance support concept. This capability will allow a
minimization of time and skill level required to �solate
failures.

Gun/Turret Drive a. Perform turret weapon loop operations with G/TD

(Para . 5- 28) electronics.

b. Perform malfunction detection and isolation of amplifiers

and actuators.

c. Adjust amplifier scale factors and null.

d. Operate actuators on test bench or load simulator.

(Para. 5-29)
Automatic Loader Isolate eltro/hydraulic malfunctions in automatic loader.

The following test sets are designed for isolation of functional failure modes to a
Fire Control Subsystem (FCS) vehicle replaceable item and are supplied with operating
instructions .:in Paragraph 5- 30.

Monitor Unit Test Set Portable Oscilloscope Test Set

Servo Unit Test Set Portable Hydraulic/Electrical Interconnect

Test Set
Portable Multimeter Test Set

NOTE.
The test sets listed in above Table are described within this
Section, however, detail operating instructions are covered
in separate Manuals included with each test set.

5-67
5-25. Electrical Test Set (ETS ).
a. Design Concept. The design goals of the electrical test set ( ETS ) is to

provide a means of monitoring, diagnosing, and isolating malfunctions in the XM803

vehicle hull and turret electrical and electronic equipment. The ETS concept

provides a single portable unit and associated electrical interface cables. The

proposed control panel for the ETS is shown in Figures 5-23 a nd 5-24. ETS opera­

tional power may be either 110 vac or 24 vdc vehicle power. Circuit design has been

simplified to provide for low power consumption, low cost, and rugged construction.

Display lights are light emitting diodes (LED) which, in addition to being rugged

and require low power, also provide high reliability, long service life, low tem­

perature operation, fast switching, and no warm-up. The ETS will have the capa­

bility of performing the following tasks:

(1) Monitoring and checkout of the hull electrical distribution box

operations.

(2) Monitoring and checkout of hull electronics box operation.

(3) Monitoring and checkout of the power disconnect box operation.

(4) Monitoring and checkout of driver control handle operation.

(5) Circuit monitoring to detect and isolate malfunction to replaceable

items.

(6) Cable checkout to detect continuity, short circuit, and open lines.

(7) Checkout individual electrical components for functional failure.

(8) Provide interface connection for utilization of co!IDD.o n electrical test

equipment, i.e., oscilloscope, multimeter, VTVM, in conjunction with ETS operation.

A block diagram of a typical test mechanization representing the intended util­

ization of the ETS is shown in Figure 5-25. The ETS will be contained in a fiber­

glas case with an approximate unit size of 17 inches ( length ) by lO t inches ( width )
by st inches ( height ) . Projected weight of this unit is 19 pounds ( less harness . )

5-68
This case configuration will permit entry and utilization inside turret.

b. Operation. Refer to Instruction Manual in the Electrical Test Set case for

detail operating instructions.

5-69
THIS PAGE LEFT BLA.NK INTENTIONALLY
 �
. . ,

tlltJXui-JJ/��ii:I.JG§

Figure 5-23. Electrical Test Set

5-71
 11 5 6

@ 1

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

10
� b <f}j@ 0000000000
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
2
SCOPE 0000000000
20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29

·(?)@ c)ooooooooo
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39
MULTIMETER
0000000000
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49

0000000000
50 51 52 53 54 55 s6 57 58 59
G
\Jl
0000000000
I
....:j
1\) 9" MONITOR/CONTINUITY INDICATOR 3
�

8
7" 13 12 14

Figure 5-24. Electrical Test Set Control Panel

 Table 5-2. Electrical Test Set

GROUP CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

CONNECTORS l. 28 VDC (J2) Connector for 20/28vdc input for test set from vehic
battery, turret distri bution box, or external source.

2. llOVAC (J1} Connector for 110 vac input for test s et from
externa 1� source.

3. MONITOR (J3) Connector for interface harness between test

set and vehicle equipment for monitoring and
also used during cable continuity testing.

4. CONTINUl TY (J4) Connector for vehicle harness continuity

testing. Us ed with the MONI TOR connector.

POWER 5. POWER SELECTOR

(3-Position Toggle Switch}

o AC AC power selected for test set input a nd

(Lamp) indicator illuminates (Red}.

o OFF Power not applied to test set circuits.

o DC DC power selected for test set input and

(Lamp) indicator illuminates (Red}.

6. CI RCUI T Provides test set circuit protection for either

BREAKERS (2) 28 vdc or 110 vdc with reset capability.

OPERATION 7. J3 PIN SELECTOR I Selects one of sixty test set leads at MONITOR
(6-Position and connector for monitoring with other test equip­
10-Position Rotary ment e.g. , multimeter, scope.
Switches)

8. J3 PIN SELECTOR II Selects one of sixty test set leads of MONITOR

(6-Positi on and connector for monitoring with other test equip­
10-Position Rotary ment in conjunction with J3 PIN SELECTOR I.
Switches} Also used to select lead for continuity testing of
vehicle harnesses.

5-73
 Table 5-2. Electrical Test Set - Continued

GROUP CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

OPERATION 9. (2-Position Toggle Switch)

(continued) MONITOR Interconnects the MONITOR connector leads
selected on J3 PIN SELECTOR I and II with
the MONITOR jacks.

CONTINUITY Interconnects J3 PIN SELECTOR II with

CONTINUITY INDICATOR and harness under­
going continuity testing.

10. MONITOR (2-Jacks)

MULTIMETER Output jack for use with mu ltimeter.

SCOPE (BNC) Output jack for use with oscilloscope.

11. CONTI NUlTY Display used during continuity testing of

DISPLAY (60 Lamps) vehicle harness. Lamp illuminates (Red) when
lead selected on J3 PIN SELECTOR II has
continuity.

12. LOGIC SELECT Selects logic to be tested.

(2-Position
Rotary Switch)

13. INDICATOR TEST (+) High Press-to-Test ( 0-59)

(Push Button (2) ) (-) Ground Press-to-Test ( 52-59 only).

5-74
 ENGINE
BULKHEAD

HULL TURRET HULL

ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL ELECTRICAL
INTERFACE INTERFACE INTERFACE

SLIP RING

BATTERIES

V1
I
---.:j POWER
V1
ALTERNATOR DISCONNECT
BOX

REGULATOR
115 VAC OR 28 VDC
+----�• - - -EXTERNAL POWER
--'
NOTE: SOURCE
,...- -

1 OTHER TEST CONNECTORS

• DRIVERS CONTROL HANDLES
• HULL ELECTRONICS BOX TEST
CONNECTOR ElECTRICAL
ELECTRICAl
NOTE 1 TEST EQP.
.. .
I
1'--- TEST
2 VEHICLE CABLE ADAPTERS '--- - --- e.g. SCOPE
SET
PROVIDED FOR CONTINUITY, NOTE 2 MUlTIMETER
OPEN AND SHORT CIRCUIT
TESTING OF CABLES

Figure 5-25. Block Diagram ETS Test M echanization

5-26. Hydraulic Test Set. ( HTS )
a. Design Concept. The HTS concept provides for two individual portable units.

The principal unit is a direct readout test set which includes test transducers

and harnesses, and the control panel illustrated in Figure 5-2G. The second unit

consists of a two-channel strip recorder. The direct-readout unit is utilized for

all checks of the hydraulic equipment with the recorder intended primarily for use

in recording pressure variation in the automatic loader. Both units are being

developed for operation on either 110 vac or 24 vdc vehicle power. The HTS 'rill

have the capability of performing the following tasks:

:1) Supply 1% regulated excitation for four (4) transducers.

(2) Provi�e for measurement of hydraulic pressure ( 0-4000 psi ).

(3) Provide for differential pressure measurement between two hydraulic

pressures in two ranges (0-400 psi and o-4ooo psi ) .

(4) Provide simultaneous self-test of pressure and differential pressure

meters as well as basic excitation voltage.

(5) Provide periodic calibration for transducer output balance and pressure

meter adjustment.

(6) Provide chart recording of any transducer output.

A block diagram of a typical test mechanization representing the intended util­

ization of the HTS is shown in Figure 5-�9.

b. Operation. Refer to the Instruction Manual in the Hydrauli

c Test Set case

for detail operating instructions.

 -- _J

STORAGE FOR TEST SET

HARNESSES, TRANSDUCERS
& AND SPARE 0-RINGS

·�\
�\ •

QH Cl
'
tOOO ·�it - ,
,_,, ...(,.
<••
•.•..•

_ I _1 ... . .,
"' '"' " .. n •.. �·u

...

Figure 5-26. Hydraulic Test Set

)-77
 ss
lth Horne
esI Se I .,
u 1\ c 1
\-1ydro
5- 27
f\ gu re
.
THIS PAGE LEFl' BLANK INTENTIONALLY
 12 5 8 1

13

9
u R
115 VAC-'
T 400 400
p
u
HYDRAULIC DIFFERENTIAL
T PRESSURE PRESSURE

GND
1 3 �- Ml M2

ON ( 0-4000 PSI ) HIGH ( 0-4000 )

\Jl
I

g> 7

-4
M1
OFF B B METER
RANGE
SELECT
M2 RANGE

OFF-
SELECT
1-3,
10

'1
3

3
G)
�

12 14 15 17
Figure 5-28. Hydraulic Test Set Control Panel

'
 Figure 5-3. Hydraulic Test S et

GROUP CONTROVDISPLA Y FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

INPUT POWER 1. 28 VDC Connector for 28 vdc input power for test
set from vehicle power or external source.

2. 110 VAC Connector for 11 0 vac input power for test

set from externaI source.

INPUT POWER 3. Power Selection

CONTROl (3-Position Toggle Switch)

0 OFF Power not applied to test set circuit.

0 DC ON DC power selected for test set input and

(lamp) !,�·:Hector illuminates (White). Press-to-test
'�:�at.Jre of lamp wi II verify output of interne I
tesT set power sup;:>ly.

0 AC ON AC power selected for test set input and

(lamp) indicator illuminates (White). Press-to-test
feature of lamp will verify output of internal
test set power supply.

4. Circuit Breakers (2) Provides test set circuit protection for either
PRESS TO RESET 28 vdc or 110 vac with reset capability.

PRESSURE 5. HYDRAULIC PRESSURE Displays hydraulic pressure in pounds per

DISPLAYS & (PSI) (Meter) square inch (psi) as inputted from transducer.
CONTROLS (0-4000 psi).
.. " . - . -· - - ..
I

6. METER ON-QFF
(2-Position Switch)

0 OFF

0
ON HYDRAULIC PRESSURE meter reads selected
(lamp) transducer output, 0-4000 psi.

7. PRESSURE SELECT Selects one of four transducers for display on

(5-Position Rotary Switch) HYDRAULIC PRESSURE meter.
OFF, 1, 2, 3, 4

5-81
 Figure 5-3. Hydraulic Test Set - Continued

GROUP CONTROl/DISPlAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

8. DIFFERENTIAl PRESSURE Display pressure differential in pounds per

(PSI) (Meter) square inch (psi) between any two trans­
ducers. Two seale ranges, 0-400 psi or
Q-4000 psi, are provided. Meter reading
may be either direction.

9. METER RANGE SELECT

(2-Position Switch)

0 HIGH Selects high range, 0-4000 psi, of

DIFFERENTIAl PRESSURE meter.

0 LOW Selects low range, 0-400 osi, of DIFFEREN­

(lamp) TIAL PRESSURF meter. S'·:i:·ch il!•n,;· 1ates
(Amber) with low range se leeted.

1 o. DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE Selects one combination of transducers for

SELECT display on DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE meter.
(7-Position Rotary Switch)
OFF, 1-2, 1-3, 1-4, 2-3, 2-4, 3-4

11. PRESS TO SELF-TEST Causes both meters to deflect a specific

amount and METER RANGE SELECT switches.
LOW range illuminates (Amber).

T RANSDUCER 12. Connectors for up to four Interface connectors between test set and
INPUT/OUTPUT transducer cables vehicle hydraulic via the transducer cables
1 I 2, 3, 4 provided with test set. Input is 20 vdc with
output range of 0-5 vdc.

PRESSURE 1 3. Monitor Jacks Interface jacks between test set and strip
MONITOR 1, 2, 3, 4, GND recorder or other test equipment, e.g.,
meter, scope for each transducer.

14. MONITOR DJFF. Interface jacks between two pressures selected

PRESSURE by DIFF. PRESS. SELECTOR and strip recorder
or other test equipment, e.g., meter, scope.

TEST SET 15. BALANCE POTS Covered balance potentiometers are provided
ADJUSTMENTS (Covered) to allow periodic calibration of test set. One
balance pot is provided to calibrate each
transducer (4), and one balance pot is pro­
vided for the low and high ranges of each
meter (4).

5-82
 Figure 5-3. Hydraulic Test Set - Continued

GROUP C ONTROl/DISPlAY FUNCTIONAL DESC RIPTION

TEST SET Power Supply Sealed adjustment for internal DC trans­

ADJUSTMENTS Adjustment ducer power supply.
(cont.) (Not Illustrated)

16. LOW RANGE LIGHT

17. PRESS TO TEST

BUTTON for 16.
 ..,__

LOW P RESSURE

HYDRAULIC HIGH P RESSURE HYDRAULIC

P OWER _..,. P OWER
SUP P LY �� USER f ,

· TEST TRANSDUCER
INTERFACE

TRANSDUCER
EXCITA TION/RESPONSE

DIRECT STRIP
M AXIMUill
OF FOUR
TRANSDUCERS
READOUT
UNIT
RECO RD ER
UNIT

EXTERNAL POWER
SOURCE O R
VEHICLE POWER

Figure 5-29. Block Diagram HTS Test Mechanization

5-84
5-27. p /
Wea or Breech Test Set.

a. g
Desi n Conce t. p /
The design goal of the Heapon Breech Test Set ( H/ BTS ) is to

isolate any functional failure in a vehicle replaceable item of the '"eapon breech /
equipment compatible with the maintenance support concept. This capability will

allow a minimization of time and skill level required to isolate failures.

(1) /
The H BTS is designed to permit entry through the commander's hatch for

utilization inside the turret. Refer to Figure 5-30 for test mech. block diagram.

The test set uGeG vehicle 24 vdc power as primary power input when operated to

perform the following task:

(a ) Provide monitoring of electrical response of simulated weapon

firing through existing vehicle connections with harness included with the test

set. S pecific consideration will include: a ) Signal inputs to Breech Electronics

Unit (BEU), and b ) BEU outputs to breech components.

(b ) Provide capability to monitor Breech Electronics Unit internal

operations, gun mount safe-to-fire and in-cattery switch functions, and weapon

breech operation.

'

b. p
O eration. /
Refer to Instruction Manual in the Weapon Breech Test Set case

for detail operating instructions.

5-85
 WEAPON TEST CONNECTOR
CONTROL
PANEL
MAl N WEAPON
I I
BREECH
ASSEMBLY

WEAPON
I .
TURRET 1 BREECH � t r ...
AFE-TO-FIRE ie-
CONTROL ... DISTRIBUTION ELECTRONICS SWITCH
\Jl
I
HANDLES BOX .. UNIT
co I IN-BATTERY
.._
..
()',
SECTION

COAX. MG je-

.TEST STIMULI AND RESPONSE

•
24V DC � W/B TEST
VEHICLE POWE { SET

Figure 5-30. Block Diagram W/B Test Mechanization

5-28. Gun Turret Drive Test Set.
/ (G/TDTS)
a. Design Concept. The G T'ffrS control panel is shown in Figures 5-31-32.
/ The G/TDTS.

will utilize either 110 vac or 24 vdc as primary power input when used to perform

the following tasks:

(1) Supply electrical power to G TD amplifier. /

� 15 vdc @ 5% regulation
� 26 vdc @ 5% regulation

(2) Supply command signal to servo amplifiers using either a ) external source,

b ) dual axis control handle, or c ) togg le control switch as an input. A plug-in

receptacle rack for the trav. and elev. servo amplifiers is provided with test set.

(3) Adjust null pot and or scale factor of servo amplifiers.

/
(4) Supply excitation vehicle malfunction detection and isolation (MDI) and

monitor response.

(5) Operate the Vl valve.

(6) Duplicate palm switch functions to operate lock valves and traverse

gear box actuator unit.

(7) Monitor operations of elevation actuator and rear deck ( position ) logic.

(8) Monitor operations of azimuth equipment including spool position, differ-

ential pressure, and command signals.

(9) Provide single axis-functional ( lock ) switch.

A block diagram of the test mechanization is shown in Figure 5-37. The test set

case will permit entry and utilization inside the turret as well as being implemented

for use from the turret roof.

b. Operation. Refer to the Instruction Manual in the Gun Turret Drive Test
/
Set for detail operating instructions.
 TEST SET HARNESS STORAGE

.-! �
....... .
"···�
..
..... ..o•

•
..
(.Htl(M

•• :.i· ••• ..
• II.

.... .
c.OMf'Ot""' , rtt1
. ' Jl
•• ·�...
. ."
.. � n.q ....

.,.o
J3 ., t.0H1t0l .
IXTI.NAL 1NPU1

nSTsn •2�1!

S"OOL

A
TRAVIaSI

u w
"'

••
1'0Wtl
J4
21 voc
ILIYATION
......., Tt&VUSI

Tt&V.
�r
•
'-:�

��,
(l0\10 C\OU

J5 \\0 VI

- V'
0"
"
lw'
1..,1 C(W

�
O"

•
POWlR ll voc
'" (o•<Uol
.. , .... , �.
J6 VDC l\0 VAC

�
Off
e
VI<C
TR AV.
NUll NUll
H. • I TRAV.
INPUT .. , .. , INPUT
A j ........ �'\
,... .... ITt tnnrT Tr"'rT

Figure 5-31. Gun/Turret Drive Test Set

5-8t3
Figure 5-32. Gun/Turret Drive Test Set with Harness

5-89
 \ }
TRA VERSE TRAVERSE TURRET
ElEVATION HYDRAULIC
ACTUATO R
MOTOR
VALVE
•••• GEAR
BOX
CONTROL
lv\AN IFOLD
K::= POWER

� t- Vl � BlEED
BACK DECK ClUTCH URE
SWITCH VALVE

\.11
I

'8

AM?. RACK
ENGINE PRIMARY
ELEVATION ,. DRIVING
SERVO l I STOV �
C,ONTROLS
AM?LIFIER GUN/TURRET
DRIVE VEHICLE POWER (28 VDC
.TEST SET )
AZIMUTH
SERVO
· ··- .

AMPLIFIER

OTHER TEST EQUIPMENT

Figure ?-33. Block Diagram G/TDTS Test Mechanization

...
5-29. Automatic Loader Hydraulic Test Set.

a. Design Concept. The purpose of the tester is to determine hydraulic system

integrity. The test set consists of a recorder, flowmeter, two pressure transducers,

recorder harner, remote switch cable, remote extension cable and two hydraulic hose

assemblies. Refer to Figures 5-34, 5-35, 5-36, and Table 5-6.

(1) The recorder is housed in an aluminum case and is sealed for use in

normal atmospheric conditions encountered during testing. The Techni-Rite recorder

is a two channel portable recording system with a time event marker.

(2) Chart loading for the recorder is quick;y accomplished from the front.

The protective cover is held in place by four spring-loaded fasteners. Chart capacity

is 200 foot with a chart takeup device with a partial roll capacity. Also, a hand­

operated, knurled knob is located on the front of the recorder to allow manual advanc­

ing of the chart.

(3) All of the controls;. speed selector ( power /

on off ,) frequency to DC converter

switch, stylus heat, gain and position are located near the top rear of the recorder.

Controls are inside the enclosure behind locking type weather and radiation tight door.

(4) The recorder description and specifications for the various component stages

is as follows:

( a) Pen motors:

High torque,

D'Arsonval movement,

Magnetically shielded.

(b) Writing method:

Pressure thermal,

Rectilinear tract display.

( c) Electronics:

Solid state,

/
Integrated Circuit design

5-91
 "'

y
/
Figure 5-34 • Automatic Loader Test Set and Components 1n Packing Box

5-92
Figure 5- 35 • Automatic Loader Test Set Recorder Control Panel

5-93
 RECORDER HARNESS NO. 201

CHANNEL 2

� 17"
.
NSDUCERS
�
�
oJ BOX
DER
K5
J,
lf
�
TO FLOWMETER
FLOWMETER
FLOWMETER
HARNESS
NO. 205

Figure 5- 36 . Automatic Loader Test Set Components

Table 5-4. Automatic Loader Test Set Legend and Specifications

cz 2. /"IANDi-E 7�iJ7 1{0,12�7 BRAINERD �

Ii-I IZ rt.T IIDNotUJSC-{ /YO�,<�I'Ii4 ",R19SS 3

'O I H'tX BOLT 343-1'- � Z ;.'z I.. C. STL 3

51 ¥- co�Nl!� 735'0 NO.I'f-51 L/.lli'IIIVEif:D 3

SB If PLAIN WASH� I? /"0� �/)Oi.T STL .3

�? 2.. HeX L$OLT :f'B-/6>tlft/.,L LG- .STL. .3
st.. ¥ WIN<:; N<IT -'43 -I� STL 3
!i� 'I HEX /'lt..IT ��-(6 5TL .3
.fll I /,'ex BDLT �6-I..-.J<Zi'f�_4f STL 3
�� 3 CATCN 735071 N'o. OBZ 7 B.R19t.</Eif:.t> 3
§2 18 lTHPAIMPSC� , tV0.5;<5/e� llR'ISS 3
5'/ If CORNER 755'07 ;Ia. 'flJZ 8R/ttNERD 3
50 Z'f RP NO /tltJOP S&e, /YO. y J( Y.z. L6 8RI9SS 3
4f I ?LATE 'VJ<,;.> Jfc. Tilt'< .ZCZi/·OALV"f ..'5
118 "" RDNP;./OtJPSCR Ko.,;;x (/z L6 .§RAS.S .3
'17 I CL/1/YJP PAL> CENEh'TEP COII.fTR 3
'16 I ·c· Ci.AHP h'I9ROWOOD 3
+':S I CONT/KUOV.5 /{1� 7,5'07 130JI'IJ·50{"'/J:t I!R/tiNEif:D 3
¥1' I ct.AM,P ST�AP /119R/)W000 .3
'13 I CASE 5EE ITEM 3
'IZ
..
""" Wli'E(Al+i; NO. 20) 9219'1 1856/19 ALPIIA 2
4-1 I COIIN[CTO!C MS 3121FZ0·16P
<;10 6 .L>.('II"c .SCR�W M.521.31B-20 ltZ
.39 I L19MPtiOLD£e ??l,l.!l SOB-7538-SOft .L>119(.CO z
38 I ILI9MP 7261� RJl·XJt(J·/�71·600 .:?;19(.CO 2
37 I :.9dt.ECL.AMP AC305719-<i1 z
TRAN5
. 1TI01/ OtJ7-'S .!182-"02.3-� '.MYCLA.L>��
�
35 �-
I BOOT. STIVII4H T 087'15 202AIZI-.J t.'IIYCLAD TV81S INC -4-
2
3'1 I CONNECTO.E! hi531Zb-FIZ·3S 2
33 I HI/ME FUTE 733'/Z NO. 3800 ALLISON I
3Z II.D CABLe, Sfii(LD£0 'nl9'1 321'6 ALPIIII 2
31 I HVT· >lt(- LOCliNG M5 21083-NO'I ,lll·'IQTIIO 2.
3" 1 sce.:w, r/IN NO MS3S206·213 ,Ill· '(0TIIC>t'.lSLf'. 2
:� .- :AP liND CH/1/N
I 7/UtJ CA '2209·5003 CAN'#a.¥ 2
�:-;� ..1. ONNECT02 M� 3/fXMI<'S -55 2
21. #• _IU3li-.5Htt"LDEO 9219. 3Z31 Al.I''HA. 2
lb n�o Wli?E(AW41/0./o) !Ji'l�� /858/1� ,1/lPI/A 2
zs z CONNECTOR. Jl/"13 I'T06A·I0·6S(S�) /3CIID/ t CORi' z
H I CON#CCTO!l. MS 3/ZIFIZ·3P z
23 I CONNECTOK M5 3106£ ·IOSL. ¥5 z
22 I TRA!IS!TION 08795 5b2A011-� ItArCtAD TVBCS 1)1( 2
21 I BAND 'fiJS� 9·1606 NATIONAL J3ANI)( T!l<i 2
..
20 IIQO TIIB!II(o·NEOf'RENE 08795 NT.S/8 RAYCLIID TV/Jl$_11. z
19 2 CO!INCCT02 MS 31Z,r20·1bS 2
18 I Tli'ANS!TION 087-'5 ��ZAOIZ-� �YCLAP Tt14ES INC 2
'
17 :/oo TIJBIN� ·NEOPJUN£ 087,5 NT 3/8 t.'AYCLAD T<IBiS !IIC z
-
lb I N!MfcPLATc t-'MICOIP .c... 2
IS 8 (3AN0 9135'1 9·!60!i NATIONAL BAitOt TA4 z
I 'I I CA/31[ CtAMP M5 30S7A-6 z
/3 2 C.ONNECTOi!. hiS 3 106A I45 ·.Sf' z
12 I CASU CON!IECTOI! 031'13 C6,1275 APPLETON 2
II I LAMP 91929 35b NIICRO SWI TCif z
10 I SWITCH 919Z9 PTY ZIOcB MICRO SW!TCII z
9 I STANOAtD ?LATE 91�Z'I f'TN 821 N/1</lO SWITCH z
8 I FL<!SH f'tiiTE 91929 PUCO/ M!CilO 5W! TCH z
7 I 801 [11(105111!£ 9192'1 PTE 801 MIC�O SWITCH 2
b I FLOW!t!ETU! 13819 ANIO COX IIISTI!IJI</EN7 I
.5 2 Wroi'AUtiC COVI'LJNa. OObZ'/ 3'100- 'I AEtOQt/IP I
'I 2 HOSE OObZ'I 1503-'1-12 AEROQV1P I
3 'I STtAI"/7 FITT!N4 0062'1 'I/!.· 'IS AEi'OQUIP I
2 2 T�ANSPVCeR SEE ITEM I
I I REC.ORDEE? 15057 T/2-880- 575 TECIINI•It/71!: I
JI'EM IVO. NOM£NCLAT'l..IRE CODE PART OR w.:.T{i?I.JL 511
NO. � 00 OR OESCil!PTION IOENT ICCNf!Tft.'Vt; NO ��f£5 NO.
FOR PJJRT 10£/VTIFICArtON ITEM IVUM8£R5 ARE £.rPR=55£0 AS 0A5H NU"B£RS (/r THIS 8A5IC
OR.JWfNG, EXCEPT Wl-l[li[ A NUMBER A�£AR5 IN Tf'l( PARf ()10 IDENT'f'Y'N$ N.JM8£R COUMN

5-95
(d) Chart loading:

Front end,

Self aligning,

Rewinder (partial roll capacity),

Chart capacity 200 foot,

Manual advance control.

(e) Stylus:

Low mass,

Dual strut design,

Plug-in stylus heat.

(f) Controls:

Dual stylus heat,

Stylus position (locking type),

Gain control (locking type),

Speed selector (power on/off),

Frequency to D.C. converter (in/out).

(g) Operating specifications:

Sensitivity 600 mv/mm - lOOK ohms input impedence

Event marker - Actuation voa 26 V.D.C. - 80 ma

Channel width 50 Millimeters, each channel 50 division,

time axes ruled in 1 millimeter division,

heavy grid line every 5 millimeters.

Channel One - Measures either hydraulic system flow of pressure.

Channel Two - Measures hydraulic pressure.

Operating power- 26 V.D.C. 45 watts.

Chart speeds 50 and 25 millimeters/second, switch selectable.

Linearity % .25 divisions maximum.

5-96
 Operating range 50,° F to 100 ° F

Shielding In accordance with MIL-I-6181 for electro/

magnetic interference, preventing conducted

as wel as radiated interference.

Running time - Duty cycle - 10 minute running followed by

10 minutes off.

Size 8-1/2 x 8-1/2 x 12 inches.

Weight 27.2 pounds

( h) No special handling of the test set is required other than�that normally

accorded electronic equipment.

(5) Test Set specifications:

( a) Dimensions ( storage box } - 32 in. length, 21.5 in. width, 12.75 in.

height.

( b) Weight 102 pounds

(c } Flo'WIIleter 1.25 - 12.5 gallons/minutes calibtated at

130 F and 275 F for MIL-H-5606 oil.

( d) Pressure transducer 0-3500 PSI range.

b. Preparation for Use. carefully inspect the test ·.set for readily apparent

physical damage such as a dented, burned, or crushed case, burned or torn cables, and

loose parts. If abuse is suspected, initiate appropriate specific inspections and

troubleshooting. Although the test set may appear in good condition as it is removed

from a badly crushed or dented packing box, the box is indicative that maltreatment

occurred therefore, inspect for obvious internal damage before applying power.

c. Specific Inspections. Visual inspections. Inspect test set for the following:

(ii Inspect for scratches, dents, dust, grease, paint runs, fuzzy edged en­

gravings, broken glass ( lamps and meters } , foreign material loose and adhered, peeling,

blistering, discoloration or other evidence of misuse, or equipment malfunction.

5-97
THIS PAGE LEFT BLANK INTENTIONALLY
 d. Stylus Adjustment.

( 1 ) Adjustable Stylus Stops. The stylus travel stops are set at the factory

to eliminate excursion approximately 2 mm beyond full scale on right and left. Located

at the left front and left rear of the pen ,otor cap, these chrome adjusting nuts may

be rotated � degrees by means of an "X celite" Model P-4-1/8 in. nut driver to set
the desired limits of stylus deflection by positioning the stylus full right, then

full left and adjusting the nuts a few degrees at a time until satisfactory adjustment

is attained.
(2) Damping Control. A miniature screwdriver adjustment is located on top

of the pen motor. This control adjusts the integrated amplifier/pen motor for
optimum response to fast-rising signals. Damping is set at the factory for optimum
response. If it is necessary to change the damping, proceed as follows: with chart
in motion, insert a one cps square wave signal of 50 mm p-p amplitude and adjust damp­

ing control for 1/2 to 1-1/2 mm overshoot. This sets the system for best overall
frequency response.

(3) Event Markers. The two event markers are actuated by an external source

of 24 to 28 VDC, 80 milliamperes per marker. If they are equipped with surge suppresso
diodes, note the polarity of the diodes before applying power to avoid burning out the
power supply.

(4 ) Stylus Replacement. To replace the stylus proceed as follows:

(a) Disconnect stylus heat leads by pulling plug from receptacle located
on top of pen motor.

( b) Using a 5/64 in. Allen key, loosen set screw which secures stylus
body to the pen motor shaft and lift off stylus.
( c) Place new stylus on pen motor shaft, taking care to center the stylus
as close as possible to center zero ! 1/2 div. on chart. Tighten set screw.
 (d) Check stylus pressure for 2-4 grams pressure at the tip. Any pressure

in this range will yield accurate recording. Stylus may be adjusted by moving stylus body

up or down on shaft or, carefully bending (bow) the front quarter of stylus.

(e) Insert stylus heat plug in receptacle in pen motor.

e. Chart Rewinder.

The chart rewinder receptacle is located on the right side of the recorder front

panel. When the chart rewinder is inserted into this receptacle, both electrical

(110 VAC) as well as mechanical connections are made. To operate the rewinder, simply

thread the chart paper between the finger and turn the switch on the rewinder to "ON".

The rewinder will rewind paper at any recorder speed.

f. Chart Loading.

Unroll approximately ten inches of chart from a new roll, position it such

that the chart unwinds from the bottom of the roll, with the printed side up. Open

the chart magazine and snap the roll of chart into place between the spring-loaded

mounting buttons (no mandrel or adapter is necessary). There must be no loose turns

on the chart roll. Run approximately three feet of chart to assure that chart is

"locked in11• Should chart drift from side to side after three feet of chart, check

to see that a loose turn is not present on the chart roll. Remove any loose turn by

turning the chart roll.

g. Operating Instructions. (Refer to Figures 5-�& , 5-39 , and 5-40 ).

(1) Connect harness 201 directly to 203 recorder.

NOTE. Cable 205 and switch assembly 202 are used only for

remote operation of recorder from tank.

(2) Connect channel 1 for flowmeter for pressure transducer as follows:

(a) Flowmeter: (Refer to Figure 5- 4o).

1. Remove dummy flowmeter hydraulic tube section from supply line in

turret.

)-100
 2. Install Item 6 flowmeter in supply line.

3. Connect 201 harness end marked "Flowmeter" to flowmeter.

4. Place frequency converter switch in "Via F V Conv" position.

/
5. Adjust stylus as outlined in d, 5-29.

(b) Pressure Transducer:

1 Connect transducer Item 2 to 201 harness end marked "Channel 1"

of automatic loader hydraulic system. Refer to automatic loader preliminary operation

and maintenance manual for pressure test points.

2 Connect hose Item 204 to transducer and to pressure test point

of automatic loader hydraulic system.

3- Place frequency converter switch in "Dir" position.

4. Adjust stylus as outlined in d, 5-29.

(3) Connect channel 2 for pressure transducer as follows:

(a) Connect transducer Item 2 to 201 harness end marked "Channel 2".

(b) Connect hose Item 204 to transducer and to pressure point of auto­

matic loader hydraulic system

(c) Adjsut stylus as outlined in d,· 5-29.

(4) Disconnect K5 harness from Loader J Box in turret.

(5) Connect 201 harness connector marked 11Loader J Box K5" to Loader J Box.

(6) Connect 201 harness connector marked "Loader K5 Cable" to K5 cable.

(7) Operating Controls.

(a) See Figure 5- 35.

(b) Refer to Manual in Test Set ( Techni-Rite ).

( 8) Chart Loading.

(a) Remove chart takeup spool

(b) Unroll approximately ten inches of chart from a new roll, position

it such that the chart unwinds from bottom of roll, with printed side up.

5-101
 ( c) Open the chart magazine by depressing the clip lock at the right

side of the magazine.

( d) Snap the roll of chart into place between the spring-loaded mounting

buttons.
NOTE. There must be no loose turns on chart roll.

( e) Center chart over top edge of magazine and close magazine.

( f) Fold four inch length of chart and form a straight edge.

(g) Feed chart between rollers '.and center between magazine sides.

( h) Run approximately three feet of chart to assure that chart is

''lock in". Should the chart drift from side to side after three feet of chart have

been run . Check to see that a loose turn i s not present o n chart roll, chart i s not

off center over top edge or, not centered in rollers.

( i) Install chart takeup spool.

(9) Stylus Scale Calibration

(a) Pressure Transducer

.Q.� Connect transducer to a hydraulic pump with calibrated·gage from

0-3000 PSIG or to a dead weight tester.

2. Connect transducer to Channel 1 and 2 as desired.

3. With recorder operating, apply zero pressure and zero stylus at

zero MM line.

4. With recorder operating, apply 2000 psi pressure and adjust gain

control to set stylus to 50 MM line.

5. Recheck zero and 2000 psi point.

( b) Flowmeter

1. With harness 201 flowmeter connector pins shorted together, operate

recorder and zero stylus at zero line.

5-102
 2. Connect flowmeter connector pins of harness 201 to an oscillator

3. With recorder operating, apply a 1600 CPS (Ref flowmeter calibra·

tion chart) signal from an oscillator and adjust gain control to set stylus to 50 MM

line.
NOTE. 1600 CPS equals 16 gallons per minute flow at 130 F.

4. Recheck zero and 1600 CPS point.

h. Remote Operation.

(1) For remote operation of the recorder from the automatic loader, harness

205 and switch harness Item 202 are provided. Each harness is 100 feet long.

(2) Connect harness 202 switch between recorder and harness 201.

NOTE. If Item 202 switch is not required, connect shorting plug

to switch end of 205 harness.

(3) Connect Item 202 to switch end of harness 205.

NOTE. When using 202 harness, electrical voltage must be

24 VDC or above.

(4) Connect 201 harness per initial setup steps (2) and (6).

h. Refer to 110peration and Service Instructions11 manual packed in test set box.

for additional service, troubleshooting, and maintenance instructions.

5-103
5-30. APTE For Fire Control Subsystem.

�- Design Concept. The purpose of this particular set of APTE is to provide for isolation
of functional failure modes to a Fire Control Subsystem (FCS) Vehicle Replaceable Item (VRI),
using MDI test connectors, Interconnect Cable Set and Electronics Rack Assembly connector
interfaces, hydraulic fluid test points, or pneumatic test points. The test points are selected
and displayed using the following pieces of test equipment, w hich comprise the APTE for the
FCS:

LONG NOMENCLATURE SHORT NOMENCLATURE

Monitor Unit, Test Set Monitor Unit

Servo Unit, Test Set Servo Unit

Multimeter, Portable, Test Set Multimeter

Oscilloscope, Portable, Test Set Oscilloscope

Interconnect Set, Hydraulic/Electrical, Portable

NOTE: All material pertaining to the Interconnect Set, Hydraulic/Electrical, Portable is

for information only because the Interconnect Set, Hydraulic/Electrical, Portable
is not provided for support of the PV-7 FCS.

This ruggedized portable equipment minimizes the time and skill required to isolate
functional failure modes to a VRI. The Monitor Unit and Servo Unit, shown in Figures 5-A
and 5-B, operate on vehicle 28VDC power. The tasks for which this APTE are designated
are broken down generally as follows:

(l) Voltage measurements

*(2) Continuity measurements

*(3) Resistance measurements * The Interconnect Set , Hydraulic/

Electrical, Portable is required
(4) Logic Status determination in order to perform these tasks.

(5) Generation of servo loop test signals

*(6) Fluid measurements

*(7) Pneumatic measurements

5-104
\J1
I

b
\J1

Figure 5-A. Monitor Unit, Test Set

 �\ i /' �·
:
N

I !
# -- - � ' :_ ,..
! '"---- �..
= l!

_._,
.....
s::
:::>
0
>
H
Q.)
rn
.
�
I
tt:l
Q.)
H
::s
btl
.....
�

5-106
 b. Operation. Operate this test equipment in the following test modes: voltage, logic,
servo, continuity and resistance.* Remove the covers of the equipment items, obtain the
appropriate cables stored in the covers and hookup the equipment in the desired test con­
figuration. The individual tests are discussed in detail in the material that follows, and
test hookup diagrams are provided to support the text.

To enable either the Monitor Unit or Servo Unit to be operated, simply set the POWER ON/OFF
circuit breaker to ON. Power is routed to the units via their power cables, which are stored
in their respective equipment covers. When power is applied to a unit and switched on, a red
indicator lamp in the upper left-hand corner of the unit will be lighted. In the case of the
voltage and resistance test modes, power is not required.

Functional descriptions of each control and indicator for the Monitor Unit and the Servo
Unit are provided in Tables 5-A and 5-B, respectively. These tables should be used in con­
junction with the illustrations of the equipment in Figures 5-A and 5-B.

Operating instructions for the Multimeter and Oscilloscope are found in TM 9-6625-1754-
14 and TM 11-6625-1706-15, respectively.

(1) Voltage Test Mode. Voltages are routed to the Monitor Unit from selected MDI test
connectors via the Y adapter cable (stored in the cover of the Monitor Unit). (The two branches
of this cable are identical.) Switches S1 and S2 of the Monitor Unit route the desired highs
to the MULTIMETER HI jack, and S3 and S4 route the desired lows to the MULTIMETER LO
jack. The Multimeter is usually used to monitor these voltages, but the Oscilloscope can be
used when optional monitoring capability is required. Hookup the equipment as shown in
Figure 5-C to make the voltage measurements. Note that the Monitor Unit requires no 28VDC
power in this mode.

The MDI test connectors used in these voltage tests are Jll, J12, J13, J14, J6, J7, J8,
J4, J2 and J3. Table 5-C lists all of the voltages (in the connector order just given), giving
the names, test point name and the types. The table also provides the Monitor Unit switch
configurations to select each of the voltages listed.

(2) Logic Test Mode. Various logic levels are routed to the Monitor Unit from MDI test
connectors J13, J14 and J3 via the Y adapter cable. (Since the two branches of the cable are
identical, either branch can be used for this test.) With 28VDC power applied to the Monitor
Unit, the logic level "ones" that are routed to the Monitor Unit will light LOGIC/CONTINUITY
DISPLAY indicators on the front panel of the unit. Table 5-D provides a cross reference
between the pins of the Monitor Unit receptacle J3 and the corresponding indicators.

CAUTION
Take normal precautions not to short any of the connectors of the
unused Y adapter branch. Power will be present at those connectors.

Hook up the equipment as shown in Figure 5-D to make the logic tests.

5-107
 /
COAX POWER
CABLE CABLE
MUL TIMETER

� OSCILLOSCOPE TO J1 ON TPDP

Y A DAPTER CABLE

�
0 TO MDI TEST
HI LO SCOPE CONNECTOR

MONITOR UNIT

NOTE: USE OF OSCILLOSCOPE

IS OPTIONAL.

Figure 5-C. Voltage Test Hookup

POWER CABLE

TO J1 ON TPDP
D/ MONITOR UNIT

(NOT TO MDI TEST

CONNECTED)
CONNECTOR
J3, 13 OR 14
Y ADAPTER CABLE

Figure 5-D. Logic Test Hookup

5-108
 (3) Servo Test Mode. Voltage highs at various points in servo loops are routed, together
with appropriate lows, to the Servo Unit from MDI test connectors Jll, J12 and J6 via the
interconnect cable for the Servo Unit. Input points to the servo loops are also accessible via th
interconnect cable. The INPUT switch on the Servo Unit selects the input point, the SERVO
OUTPUT switch selects the output point, and the settings on the FREQUENCY (HZ) and AMPL
TUDE (VOLTS) switches determine the nature of the stimulus to be applied to the servo loop.
vating the SIGNAL ON/OFF switch applies the input, and the Oscilloscope monitors the respor
(The Multimeter can also be used if optional monitoring capabilities a re required.)

Hook up the equipment as shown in Figure 5-E to perform these servo tests. Note that in
addition to the 28VDC power normally applied to the Servo Unit via its power cable, 26-volt,
400-Hz power is also applied via the interconnect cable. The latter power is required for a
demodulator within the Servo Unit.

Table 5-E lists the input points according to the position of the INPUT switch. Note that
when the switch is in the A, B or C positions, the servo responses which are selected by the
SERVO OUTPUT switch are referred to as Group A and are listed according to SERVO OUTP(
switch position in Table 5- F. When the INPUT switch is in the D or E positions, the servo
responses selected by the SERVO OUTPUT switch are referred to as Group B and are listed
according to SERVO OUTPUT switch position in Table 5-G.

OSCILLOSCOPE
MULTIMETER
TRIG INPUT
COAX
IN 1
CABLES

POWER
CABLE
�

HI LO SCOPE SCOPE
1 2
INTERCONNECT TO MDI TEST
__ _ _ _ _ _ --------�
CABLE D CONNECTOR
J6, 11 OR 12

SERVO UNIT

-POWER
CABLE

NOTE: USE OF MULTIMETER

IS OPTIONAL.
TO J1 ON
TPDP

Figure 5-E. Servo Test Hookup

5-109
 (4) Resistance Test Mode.* With closed circuits provided between the pins of Jl and J2 of
the Monitor Unit, resistance checks can be made with the Multimeter. Cable extenders and
adapters (provided with the Interconnect Set, Hydraulic/Electrical, Portable) establish
continuity to the cable or ERA (as shown in Figure 5-F), and the desired circuits are
selected via switches Sl, S2, S3 and S4 on the Monitor Unit. The pin-switch position cross
reference is provided in Table 5-D.

MULTIMETER

CABLE OR
CABLE ERA UNDER
EXTENDERS TEST

~
HI LO �-o o�---o-�
MONITOR UNIT

CABLE
ADAPTERS

Figure 5-F. Resistance Test Hookup

(5) Continuity Test Mode.* With closed circuits p rovided between the pins of Jl and J3
of the Monitor Unit, contmuny checks of the cable or ERA circuits can be made using the
LOGIC/CONTINUITY DISPLAY indicators. Cable extenders and adapters (provided with the
Interconnect Set, Hydraulic/Electrical, Portable) establish continuity to the cable or ERA
(as shown in Figure 5-G), and the desired circuits are selected via switches Sl and S2. The
pin-switch position cross reference is provided in Table 5-D. (Also see Table 5-A.) In this mode,
28VDC power must be provided (via power cable) to drive the lamps.

* Because the Interconnect Set, Hydraulic/Electrical, Portable is not provided for support
of the PV-7 FCS, the resistance and continuity test mode material has been provided here
for information only. Further, material covering engineering and troubleshooting analysis
of the signals obtained from these five test modes is beyond the scope of this manual.

5-110
 POWER CABL E CABLE OR
CABLE EXTENDERS ERA UNDE:

u-Lu
TEST

TO Jl ON
TPDP J4
\

MONITOR UNIT CABLE

ADAPTERS

Figure 5-G. Continuity Test Hookup

5-111
 Table 5-A. Monitor Unit (Sheet 1 of 2)

GROUP CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTION DESCRIPTION

POWER Red Indicator Lights when power is applied to Monitor Unit
and ON/OFF switch is ON.

ON/OFF Applies power and provides overload pro­

tection for LOGIC and CONTINUITY modes.
Resettable after overload is cleared.

MONITOR MULTIMETER HI Jacks for red and black test leads, respec­
&LO tively, of multimeter. Make voltages
routed to Monitor Unit from FCS accessible
for monitoring.

SCOPE Connector for oscilloscope coax test cable.

Provides optional means of monitoring
voltages routed to MULTIMETER HI and
LO jacks.

FUNCTION Selects mode of operation for Monitor Unit:

SELECT (1) continuity measurement (2) logic status
determination, or (3) voltage and resis­
tance measurement.

DISPLAY Press to test LOGIC/CONTINUITY DIS­

TEST PLAY lamps. Lamps 00 thru 59 shall light.

LOGIC/ Lamp 00 In CONTINUITY mode, lights whenever

CONTINUITY S1 and S2 are both set to 0.
DISPLAY
Lamps 01 thru 55 In LOGIC mode, indicate which logic levels
are on which pins of J3 of the Monitor Unit.
A lighted lamp indicates a logic-one level
(+15 VDC). An unlighted lamp indicates a
logic-zero level (0 VDC). See Table 5-D
for a cross reference between pin and lamp.

In CONTINUITY mode, indicate continuity

between like pins of J1 and J3 of Monitor
Unit. Twenty-eight (28) VDC power must
be applied to Monitor Unit via J4 in this
mode. Pin selection is made with switches
S1 and S2 (J1 PIN SELECT). See Table
5-D for pin-switch position cross refer­
ence. S1 represents the tens digit in the
switch combination and S2 represents the
units digit.

In V /RES mode, the lamps have no significance.

5-112
 Table 5-A. Monitor Unit (Sheet 2 of 2)

GRO UP CONTROL/ DISPLAY FUNCTION DESCRI PTION

LOGIC/ Lamps 56 thru 58 Not Used.

CONTINUITY
DISPLAY Lamp 59 In CONTINUITY mode, lights when selec­
(Cont) ted pin is shorted to ground.

Jl PIN Sl and S2 In LOGIC mode, these switches have no

SELECT significance.

In CONTINUITY mode, see LOGIC/CON­

TINUITY DISPLAY (Lamps 01 thru 55)
above.

In V / RES mode, these switches connect the

pins of Jl of Monitor Unit to MULTIMETER
HI jack. See Table 5-D for pin-switch pos­
ition cross reference: Sl represents the
tens digit in the switch combination and S2
represents the units digit.

J2 PIN S3 and S4 In LOGIC mode, these switches nave no

SELECT significance .

In CONTINUITY mode, these switches

have no significance.

In V /RES mode, these switches connect

the pins of J2 of Monitor Unit to MULTI­
METER LO jack. See Table 5-D for
pin-switch position cross reference. S3
represents the tens digit in the switch
combination and S4 represents the units
digit.

5-113
 Table 5-B. Servo Unit (Sheet 1 of 2)

GROUP CONTROL/DI SPLAY FUNCTIONAL D ESCRIPTION

POWER Red Ind icator Lights when power is applied to Servo Unit
and ON/OFF switch is ON.

ON/OFF Applies power and provides overload pro­

tection. Resettable after overload is
cleared.

MONITOR MULTIME TER HI Jacks for red and black test leads, res­
& LO pectively, of multimeter. Makes voltages
routed to Servo Unit accessible for moni­
toring. Provides an optional means of moni­
toring voltages routed to SCOPE 2 connector.

SCOPE 1 Connector for oscilloscope coax test cable.

Used to route trigger signal, generated with­
in Servo Unit, to TRIG IN connector of
oscilloscope.

SCOPE 2 Connector for oscilloscope coax test cable.

Used to route servo response signal to
INPUT 1 connector of oscilloscope.

SERVO Selects FCS test point to be monitored by

OUTPUT oscilloscope (via SCOPE 2 jack). Tables
5-F and 5-G list the servo response signals
according to positions of this switch and
according to the MDI test connector being
monitored. The signal response group -
and therefore, the table to be referenced -
is dictated by the position of the INPUT
switch.

Also, see note at the end of this table.

SIGNAL INPUT Selects FCS test point to which Servo Unit

input signals will be applied. Simultane­
ously, this switch selects which group of
response signals are to be monitored:
group A or B. Table 5- E lists the input
points and response groups according to
the positions of this switch. The signal
selected from a response group is dictated
by the position of the SERVO OUTPUT
·

switch.

Also, see note at the end of this table.

5-114
 Table 5-B. Servo Unit (Sheet 2 of 2)

GROUP CONTROL/DISPLAY FUNCTIONAL DESCRIPTION

SIGNAL FREQUENCY (HZ) Selects the type of signal to be applied to

SELECT FCS: sinusoidal or square wave. One of
(CONT) seven frequencies can be selected for a
sinusoidal input: 0. 5, 1. 5, 2. 5, 3. 0, 8,
20, and 36Hz. The square wave has a fixed
frequency of 0. 5 Hz.All of the signals vary
symetrically about zero, including the
square wave.

AMPLITUDE Selects one of five amplitudes (. 05, 2, 1. 0

•

(VOLTS) 2. 0 or 4. 0 - all zero-to-peak) for the signal

being issued to the FCS.

SIGNAL ON/OFF When turned ON, the selected signal is

issued from Servo Unit to FCS. When turned
OFF, the signal is no longer applied to
the FCS.

NOTE: Self test of the Servo Unit can be performed by setting the INPUT switch to
position A, B or C and the SERVO OUTPUT switch to position 7. This
switch configuration blocks the servo response signals returning from the
FCS and enables the oscilloscope to monitor (via the SCOPE 2 connector) the
signals being issued from t he signal generator within the Servo Unit itself.

5-115
 Table 5-C . Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 1 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No.* Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. S1 S2 S3 S4

Jll-A Chassis Gnd GPS DC P/S-1 Gnd - - 0 1

J11-B Az Torq. Mtr.Current #1 GPS Az Amp-6 DC 0 2 0 3
Jll-C Az Torq. Mtr. Current #2 GPS Az Amp-7 DC - - 0 3
Jll-D El Torq. Mtr. Current #1 GPS El Amp-6 DC 0 4 0 5
Jll-E El Torq. Mtr. Current #2 GPS El Amp-7 DC - - 0 5
Jll-F Spare 0 6 0 6
J11-G DC Sum Amp Input (El) GPS El Amp-40 DC 0 7 1 3
Jll-H DC Sum Amp Input (Az) GPS Az Amp-40 DC 0 8 1 3
Jll-J Spare 0 9 0 9
Jll-K Spare 1 0 1 0
Jll-L Derotation DC Test Input CS Az Amp-B7 DC 1 1 1 3
Jll-M +15 V GPS GPS DC P /S-64 DC 1 2 1 3
Vl
J11-N ±15 V Return (SPL) GPS Pr. Pwr. DP Ref Lo - - 1 3
I
I-'
Jll-P -15 V GPS GPS DC P/S-65 DC 1 3 1 4
I-'
CJ\
Jll-R 26V, 400 Hz ¢A (GPS) GPS Az Amp-11 AC 1 5 1 6
Jll-S 26V, 400 Hz Comm (GPS) GPS Az Amp-12 Ref Lo - -
1 6
Jll-T Enable CDR Range Display REU-A19 Discrete 1 7 2 6
Jll-U Spare 1 8 1 8
J11-V -15V (Missile) GPS DC P/S-56 DC 2 0 1 9
Jll-W ±15V Return (Missile) GPS DC P/S-44 Ref Lo - - 2 0
Jll-X Derotation Comp. Output CS Az Amp- B6 DC 2 1 1 3
Jll-Y Spare 2 2 2 2
Jll-Z +5V (REU) Hi GPS DC P/S-52 DC 2 3 2 4
Jll-a +5V (REU) Lo GPS DC P/S-54 Ref Lo - - 2 4
Jll-b +15V (REU) Hi GPS DC P/ S-49 DC 2 5 2 6
Jll-c +15V (REU) Lo GPS DC P/S-50 Ref Lo - - 2 6
Jll-d Az Target Designate Hi GPS Az Amp-31 AC(2) 2 7 2 8
Jll-e Az Target Designate Lo GPS Az Amp-32 Ref Lo - - 2 8
Jll-f +15V (Missile) GPS DC P/S-58 DC 2 9 2 0
J11-g Spare 3 0 3 0
Jll-h El Target Designate Hi GPS El Amp-31 AC 3 1 3 2
J11-i El Target Designate Lo GPS El Amp-32 Ref Lo - - 3 2
Jll-j Az Target Hold Hi GPS Az Amp-44 DC 3 3 3 4

* This information identifies test point locations as to FCS component and circuit . (See end of table for
explanation of abbreviations.) Test point numbers stem from equipment �echanization drawings.
 Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 2 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. S1 S2 S3 S4

Jll-k Az Target Hold Lo GPS Az Amp-45 Ref Lo - - 3 4

Jll-m El Target Hold Hi GPS El Amp-44 DC Lo 3 5 3 6
Jll-n El Target Hold Lo GPS El Amp-45 Ref Lo �
- 3 6
Jll-p Spare 3 7 3 7
Jll-q Spare 3 8 3 8
Jll-r Spare 3 9 3 9
Jll-s Man.Range Cont. Inc Slow(G) REU - A15 Discrete 4 0 2 6
Jll-t GPS Laser Go View CLEU-A16 Discrete 4 1 4 6
Jll-u View Compute REU-A4 Discrete 4 2 2 6
Jll-v 400 Meters Hi REU-A2 Discrete 4 3 2 6
Jll-w Lin. Compens. Output (Az) GPS Az Amp-38 DC 4 4 1 3
Jll-x El Rate Int. Gyro PA Hi GPS El Amp-23 AC 4 5 1 3
Vl
Jll-y Logic Pwr Lo CLEU-A95 Ref Lo - - 4 6
I
......
J11-z Az LOS Rate (Msl) GPS Az Amp-20 DC 4 7 2 0
......
Jll-AA Az Rate Int. Gyro PA Hi GPS Az Amp-23 AC 4 8 1 3
�·
Jll-BB Lin. Compens. Output (El) GPS El Amp-38 DC 4 9 1 3
Jll-CC El LOS Rate (Missile) Hi GPS El Amp-20 DC 5 0 2 0
JU-DD GPS Laser Go Range CLEU-A20 DC 5 1 4 6
J11-EE Manual Range Hi REU-A7 Discrete 5 2 2 6
Jll-FF Range Warning REU-A40 Discrete 5 3 2 4
Jll-GG Laser Ranging REU-A6 Discrete 5 4 2 6
Jll-HH Range Gate Reset REU-A9 Discrete 5 5 2 6
J12-A Chassis Gnd CS Az Amp-Al Gnd - - 0 1
J12-B Az Torq. Mtr. Current #1 CS Az Amp-B12 DC 0 2 0 3
J12-C Az Torq. Mtr. Current #2 CS Az Amp-B13 DC - - 0 3
J12-D El Torq. Mtr. Current #1 CS El Amp-51 DC 0 4 0 5
J12-E El Torq. Mtr. Current #2 CS El AMP-52 DC - -
0 5
J12-F MDI 120 V de (P/S) Hi CS DC P/S-J DC 0 6 1 3
J12-G CS El DC Pwr Amp Input CS El Amp-42 DC 0 7 1 3
J12-H CS Az DC Pwr Amp Input CS Az Amp-Bl5 DC 0 8 1 3
J12-J SW El T orq. Mtr. Curr. #1 SW El Amp-61 DC 0 9 1 0
J12-K SW El Torq. Mtr. Curr. #2 SW El Amp-62 DC -
- 1 0
J12-L SW El DC Pwr Amp Input SW El Amp-32 DC 1 1 1 3
 Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 3 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. S1 S2 S3 S4

J12-M CDR Palm Switch CLEU-A57 Discrete 1 2 4 6

J12-N 120 V de (Az) Lo CS Az Amp-B32 Ref Lo - - 1 3
J12-P -15 V de (CS Az) CS Az Amp-B20 DC 1 8 1 4
J12-R 26V 400 Hz ¢A (CS) CS El Amp-64 AC 1 5 1 6
J12-S 26V 400 Hz Comm (CS) CS El Amp-65 Ref Lo - -
1 6
J12-T +15 V de (CS Az) CS Az Amp-B18 DC 1 7 1 8
J12-U ±15 V de Return (CS Az) CS Az Amp-B19 Ref Lo - - 1 8
J12-V Az CT Output Fine Hi CS Az Amp-A23 DC 1 9 2 0
J12-W Az CT Output Fine Lo CS Az Amp-A24 Ref Lo - - 2 0
J12-X SW Position Hi SW El Amp-35 AC 2 1 2 2
J12-Y SW Position Lo SW El Amp-36 Ref Lo - - 2 2
J12-Z Derotation CT Out Hi CS Az Amp-A35 AC 2 3 2 4
Vl
I
J12-a Derotation CT Out Lo CS Az Amp-A36 Ref Lo - - 2 4
1-' J12-b El CT Output Fine Hi CS El Amp-25 AC 2 5 2 6
1-'
OJ J12-c El CT Output Fine Lo CS El Amp-26 Ref Lo - - 2 6
J12-d Stab. Az R. G. PA Out Hi CS Az Amp-A25 AC 2 7 2 8
J12-e Stab. Az R. G. PA Out Lo CS Az Amp-A26 Ref Lo - - 2 8
J12-f El CT Output Coarse Hi CS El Amp-27 AC 2 9 3 0
J12-g El CT Output Coarse Lo CS El Amp-28 Ref Lo - - 3 0
J12-h El S. R. Gyro PA Out Hi CS El Amp-39 AC 3 1 3 2
J12-i El S. R. Gyro PA Out Lo CS El Amp-40 Ref Lo - - 3 2
J12-j CDR Az Handle Rate Hi CS Az Amp-B21 DC 3 3 3 4
J12-k CDR Az Handle Rate Lo CS Az Amp-B22 Ref Lo - - 3 4
J12-m CDR El Handle Rate Hi CS El Amp-14 DC 3 5 3 6
J12-n CDR El Handle Rate Lo CS El Amp-15 Ref Lo - -
3 6
J12-p Az CT Output Coarse Hi CS Az Amp-A21 AC 3 7 3 8
J12-q Az CT Output Coarse Lo CS Az Amp-A22 Ref Lo - - 3 8
J12-r GTD Reg Pwr Lo ERA P7-N Ref Lo - - 3 9
J12-s Az Drift Correction Hi CS Az Amp-A49 DC 4 0 1 3
J12-t Derotation Mtr Drive Hi CS Az Amp-A33 DC 4 1 1 8
J12-u Spare 4 2 4 2
J12-v Az Tach Out Hi CS Az Amp-A37 DC 4 3 1 3
J12-w CS Az (Main Channel) Comp CS Az Amp-B14 DC 4 4 1 3
Out
-
 Table 5-C. Voltage Iden tification And Location (Shee t 4 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. Sl S2 S3 S4

J12-x GTD +15V ERA: P7-L DC 4 5 3 9

J12-y Logic Pwr Lo CS Az Amp-A9 Ref Lo - - 4 6
J12-z CS El Loop Null CS El Amp-18 DC 4 7 1 3
J12-AA GTD -15V ERA: P7-M DC 3 9 4 8
I
J12-BB CS El (Main Ch annel)Comp
Out
CS El Amp-58 DC 4 9 1 3
I
J12-CC El Drift Correction Hi CS El Amp-59 DC 5 0 1 3 I
J12-DD CDR Sel SW Aircraft (108) CS Az Amp-A48 Discrete 5 1 1 3
J12-EE SW El Position Error SW El Amp-49 DC 5 2 1 3
Jl2-FF El (Dist) Bucking Hi SW El Amp-51 DC 5 3 1 3
J12-GG SW El Sum Amp Out SW El Amp-63 DC 5 4 1 3
J12-HH El Tach Out Hi CS El Amp-33 DC 5 5 1 3
Ji3-A Chassis Gnd CLEU-Al Gnd -
- 0 1
Vl
I J13-B Spare 0 2 0 2
f-'
f-' J13-C Slave SW to GTD (109) CLEU-A34 DC 0 3 0 6
\.0 J13-D Logic Power (H) Hi CLEU-A81 DC 0 4 0 6
J13-E Logic Power (L) Hi CLEU-B19 DC 0 5 0 6
Jl3-F Logic Power (L) Lo CLEU-A95 Ref Lo - - 0 6
J13-G Spare 0 7 0 7
J13-H Spare 0 8 0 8
J13-J Logic Power (W) Hi CLEU-A53 Discrete 0 9 0 6
Jl3-K Out of Battery CLEU-B70 Discrete 1 0 0 6
J13-L Spare 1 1 1 1
J13-M Cdr Weapon Trigger CLEU-A47 Discrete 1 2 0 6
J13-N Charge SW ERA J7-GG Discrete 1 3 0 6
Jl3-P Fire SW CLEU-Al05 Discrete 1 4 0 6
J13-R Enable CS in Az (106) CLEU-A65 Discrete 1 5 0 6
J13-S Enable CS in El (101) CLEU-B2 Discrete 1 6 0 6
J13-T CDR Sel SW & Palm Switch CLEU-A56 Discrete 1 7 0 6
J13-U Enable CS Gyro (102) CLEU-B4 Discrete 1 8 0 6
J13-V MW Locked in Autoload CLEU-B84 Discrete 1 9 0 6
J13-W Mon/Targ Design. (107) CLEU-A44 Discrete 2 0 0 6
J13-X Spare 2 1 2 1
J13-Y Spare 2 2 2 2
 Table 5-C. Voltage Ide ntification And Location (Sheet 5 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No . S1 S2 S3 S4

J13-Z CDR Load MW Charge SW CLEU-A59 Discrete 2 3 0 6

J13-a Target Designate (13) CLEU-A35 Discrete 2 4 0 6
J13-b Cdr Controls CS CLEU-B30 Discrete 2 5 0 6
J13-c Gnr Selects MW CLEU-A76 Discrete 2 6 0 6
J13-d Gnr Palm Switch CLEU-A83 2 7 0 6
J13-e Gnd Loads MW CLEU-A85 2 8 0 6
J13-f MW to Autoload Position CLEU-B79 Discrete 2 9 0 6
J13-g GPS Operational CLEU-A14 Discrete 3 0 0 6
J13-h Enable GPS (Rly 1) CLEU-A15 Discrete 3 1 0 6
J13-i Load MW CLEU-B77 Discrete 3 2 0 6
J13-j Enable HV Firing Ckt CLEU-B64 Discrete 3 3 0 6
J13-k Gnr Weapon Trigger CLEU-A82 Discrete 3 4 0 6
J13-m Cdr Over. Targ Design. (G) CLEU-B45 Discrete 3 5 0 6
V1
I J13-n Target/Designate Hi Rate CLEU-A70 Discrete 3 6 0 6
1-'
1\)
J13-p Spare 3 7 3 7
0
J13-q MDI Mode 1 Logic Discrete CLEU-B90 Discrete 3 8 0 6
J13-r MDI Mode 2 Logic Discrete CLEU-B91 Discrete 3 9 0 6
J13-s MDI Mode 3 Logic Discrete CLEU-B93 Discrete 4 0 0 6
J13-t MDI Mode 4 Logic Discrete CLEU-B102 Discrete 4 1 0 6
J13-u MDI Mode 5 Logic Discrete CLEU-B88 Discrete 4 2 0 6
J13-v MDI Mode 6 Logic Discrete CLEU-B87 Discrete 4 3 0 6
J13-w MDI M�de 7 Logic Discrete CLEU-B94 Discrete 4 4 0 6
J13-x MDI Mode 8 Logic Discrete CLEU-B101 Discrete 4 5 0 6
J13-y MDI Mode 9 Logic Discrete CLEU-B100 Discrete 4 6 0 6
J13-z MDI Mode 10 Logic Discrete CLEU-B98 Discrete 4 7 0 6
J13-AA MDI Mode 11 Logic Discrete CLEU-B96 Discrete 4 8 0 6
J13-BB MDI Mode 12 Logic Discrete CLEU-B97 Discrete 4 9 0 6
J13-CC MDI Mode 13 Logic Discrete CLEU-B99 Discrete 5 0 0 6
J13-DD MDI Mode 14 Logic Discrete CLEU-B92 Discrete 5 1 0 6
J13-EE MDI Mode 15 Logic Discrete CLEU-B95 Discrete 5 2 0 6
J13-FF CDR Controls MW CLEU-A50 Discrete 5 3 0 6
J13-GG Slave SW to CS (105) CLEU-A39 Discrete 5 4 0 6
J13-HH Enable SW in El (116) CLEU-A38 Discrete 5 5 0 6

--
- -- ------
 Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 6 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. S1 S2 S3 S4

J14-A Chassis Gnd CLEU-A1 Gnd - - 0 1

J14-B Spare 0 2 0 2
J14-C Driver Selects Autoload CLEU-B73 Discrete 0 3 0 6
J14-D MW Safe to Fire CLEU-B59 Discrete 0 4 0 6
J14-E Loader Clear of Recoil CLEU-B72 Discrete 0 5 0 6
J14-F Logic Power (L) - Lo CLEU-A95 Ref Lo - - 0 6
J14-G Spare 0 7 0 7
J14-H Spare 0 8 0 8
J14-J GPS Ready CLEU-B62 Discrete 0 9 0 6
J14-K Gnr Fires MG-Aux CLEU-A21 Discrete 1 0 0 6
J14-L Spare 1 1 1 1
J14-M Laser-Close Shutter Cmd CLEU-A31 Discrete 1 2 0 6
J14-N Close Shutter Cmd CLEU-A68 Discrete 1 3 0 6
Vl
I J14-P Fire Missile CLEU-A7 Discrete 1 4 0 6
I-'
[\) J14-R Driver Manual Scavenge CLEU-B82 Discrete 1 5 0 6
I-'
J14-S Fire MW CLEU-B65 Discrete 1 6 0 6
J14-T Driver Selects Handload CLEU-B71 Discrete 1 7 0 6
J14-U Breech is Open CLEU-B56 Discrete 1 8 0 6
J14-V Breech Sea venge Enable CLEU-B57 Discrete 1 9 0 6
J14-W Emer. Operation Selected CLEU-B86 Discrete 2 0 0 6
J14-X Spare 2 1 2 1
J14-Y Spare 2 2 2 2
J14-Z Fire MW - Aux CLEU-A77 Discrete 2 3 0 6
J14-a Solenoid Release (Auto Recyc) CLEU-A5 Discrete 2 4 0 6
J14-b In Battery CLEU-B67 Discrete 2 5 0 6
J14-c Driver Select Stow/Restow CLEU-B81 Discrete 2 6 0 6
J14-d Missile Hatch Open CLEU-B61 Discrete 2 7 0 6
J14-e Breech Ready to Load CLEU-B83 Discrete 2 8 0 6
J14-f Breech Not Fully Closed CLEU-B54 Discrete 2 9 0 6
J14-g Breech Not Fully Open CLEU-B69 Discrete 3 0 0 6
J14-h Bore Seavenge Enable CLEU-B55 Discrete 3 1 0 6
J14-i Round Has Fired (Eject) CLEU-B80 Discrete 3 2 0 6
J14-j All Hatches OK CLEU-A106 Discrete 3 3 0 6
 Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 7 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. Sl S2 S3 S4

J14-k Breech Closed CLEU-B60 Discrete 3 4 0 6

J14-m MW in Autoload Position CLEU-B38 Discrete 3 5 0 6
J14-n Open Breech CLEU-B66 Discrete 3 6 0 6
J14-p Spare 3 7 3 7
J14-q Close Breech CLEU-B68 Discrete 3 8 0 6
J14-r Fire MG CLEU-B58 Discrete 3 9 0 6
J14-s Gnr Laser Trigger CLEU-A73 Discrete 4 0 0 6
J14-t Cdr Laser Trigger CLEU-A55 Discrete 4 1 0 6
J14-u Missile Enable CLEU-A4 Discrete 4 2 0 6
J14-v SW at 0° El or Above CLEU-B1 Discrete 4 3 0 6
J14-w View Mode Enable CLEU-A30 Discrete 4 4 0 6
J14-x Logic Pwr (B)-Hi CLEU-B24 Discrete 4 5 0 6
J14-y Recycle Missile System CLEU-A6 Discrete 4 6 0 6
V1
I J14-z Ready Laser CLEU-A32 Discrete 4 7 0 6
1-'
1\) J14-AA Dichroic Command CLEU-A19 Discrete 4 8 0 6
1\)
J14-BB Gnr Emer Trigger CLEU-A80 Discrete 4 9 0 6
J14-CC
J14-DD
MW Locked in E1 (Autoload)
Fire Laser
CLEU-B35
CLEU-A29
Discrete
Discrete
5
5
0
1
0
0
6
6
I
I

J14-EE SW Slew Zone CLEU-A66 Discrete 5 2 0 6

J14-FF SW Track Zone CLEU-A49 Discrete 5 3 0 6
J14-GG SW Az Slew CLEU-B26 Discrete 5 4 0 6
J14-HH Scavenge Missile CLEU-B85 Discrete 5 5 0 6
J6-A Chassis Gnd GTD DC P/S-1 Gnd - - 0 1
J6-B Spare 0 2 0 2
J6-C Spare 0 3 0 3
J6-D Spare 0 4 0 4
J6-E Spare 0 5 0 5
J6-F El Actuator Position Lo ERA J10-N Ref Lo - - 0 6
J6-G El DC Test Input GTD S.A.-A32 DC 0 7 1 3
J6-H Az DC Test Input GTD S.A.-A59 DC 0 8 1 3
J6-J El Actv. Position Hi ERA J10-P DC 0 9 0 6
J6-K Gun Depression Discrete GTD S.A.-B24 DC 1 0 3 6
J6-L Spare 1 1 1 1
J6-M Engage Az Hydr Drive GTD S.A.-A6 DC 1 2 3 6
 II!')

Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 8 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. S1 S2 S3 S4

J6-N GTD Reg Pwr Lo GTD DC P/S-41 Ref Lo - - 1 3

J6-P 26V 400Hz ¢B 400 Hz P /S-58 AC 1 4 1 6
J6-R 28V 400Hz ¢A 400 Hz P /S-57 AC 1 5 1 6
J6-S 26V 400 Hz Comm 400Hz P /S-59 Ref Lo - -
1 6
J6-T Not Manual Load GTD S.A.-A13 DC 1 7 1 3
J6-U 16V Logic Power Lo GTD S.A.-B39 Ref Lo - - 1 8
J6-V 20V rms Sin9Hi GTD S.A.-B25 AC 1 9 2 0
J6-W 20V rms Sine Lo GTD S.A.-B26 Ref Lo - - 2 0
J6-X Turret El RateHi GTD S.A.-A8 AC 2 1 2 2
J6-Y Turret El Rate Lo GTD S.A.-A9 Ref Lo - - 2 2
J6-Z GPS/CS El CX CoarseHi GTD S.A. -B18 AC 2 3 2 4
J6-a GPS/CS El CX Coarse Lo GTD S.A.-B19 Ref Lo - - 2 4
J6-b ElHandle RateHi GTD S.A.-A35 DC 2 5 2 6
J6-c ElHandle Rate Lo GTD S.A.-A36
\Jl
I Ref Lo - - 2 6
I-' J6-d
r\) Turret Az RateHi GTD S.A.-B55 AC 2 7 2 8
w J6-e Turret Az Rate Lo GTD S.A. -B56 Ref Lo - - 2 8
J6-f Turret Roll Rate Sin 9Hi GTD S.A.-B20 AC 2 9 3 0
J6-g Turret Roll Rate Sin 9 Lo GTD S.A.-B21 Ref Lo - - 3 0
J6-h Hull Az RateHi GTD S.A.-B1 AC 3 1 3 2
J6-i Hull Az Rate Lo GTD S.A.-B2 Ref Lo - - 3 2
J6-j AzHandle RateHi GTD S.A.-A45 DC 3 3 3 4
J6-k AzHandle Rate Lo GTD S.A.-A46 Ref Lo - - 3 4
J6-m RDC OK in Az GTD S.A.-B23 DC 3 5 1 3
J6-n Prime Pwr (GTD) Lo GTD DC P/S-4 Ref Lo - - 3 6
J6-p Az CT Fine OutHi GTD S.A.-B30 AC 3 7 1 3
J6-q Spare 3 8 3 8
'
!
J6-r Spare 3 9 3 9
J6-s Az Servo Valve Enable (L) GTD S.A.-B37 DC 4 0 1 8
J6-t El Servo Valve Enable (F) GTD S.A.-B34 DC 4 1 1 8
J6-u GTD Enable (Rly 5) GTD S.A.-B35 DC 4 2 1 8
J6-v RDC Discrete GTD S.A.-B22 DC 4 3 3 6
J6-w Turret Az AccelHi GTD S.A.-A57 DC 4 4 1 3
J6-x El CT Fine OutHi GTD S.A.-A21 AC 4 5 1 3
 Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 9 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. S1 S1 S3 S4

J6-y Az ALVDT Lo ERA J10-q Ref Lo - - 4 6

J6-z El Lock Valve Sol. Hi GTD S.A.-B53 DC 4 7 3 6
J6-AA El CT Coarse Out Hi GTD S.A.-A23 AC 4 8 1 3
J6-BB Az A P LVDT Hi ERA J10-p DC 4 9 4 6
J6-CC El CT Tert Out Hi GTD S.A.-A25 AC 5 0 1 3
J6-DD MW Az Loop Null GTD S.A.-B48 DC 5 1 1 3
J6-EE Disc. Turret Rate Gyro (15) GTD S.A.-B32 DC 5 2 1 8
J6-FF El AP Transducer Fdbk Hi GTD S.A.-A27 DC 5 3 1 3
J6-GG El Ang Accel Hi GTD S.A.-A33 DC 5 4 1 3
J6-HH MW El Loop Null GTD S.A.-A12 DC 5 5 1 3
J7-A Chassis Gnd OSU-A1 Gnd - - 0 1
J7-B El Servo Valve TM Lo El HydrS.A. -40 Ref Lo 0 - 0 2
J7-C El Servo Valve TM Hi El HydrS.A.-38 DC 0 3 0 2
\J1
I J7-D Az Command Hi Az HydrS.A.-18 DC 0 4 3 7
�
1\) J7-E Az Spool Position Monitor Hi Az HydrS.A.-21 DC 0 5 3 7
+:-
J7-F GTD Reg Pwr Lo GTD PS/DC-41 Ref Lo - - 0 6
J7-G Spare 0 7 0 7
J7-H Spare 0 8 0 8
J7-J El Spool Position Monitor Hi El Hydr. S.A.-21 DC 0 9 3 7
J7-K Computer ON (Rl y A) Ball. Comp.-B52 DC 1 0 2 1
J7-L Spare 1 1 1 1
J7-M GTD +10V±O. 5% GTD DC P/S-32 DC 1 2 0 6
J7-N GTD -10V±O.5% GTD DC P/S-35 DC 0 6 1 3
J7-P El Command Hi El Hydr.S.A.-19 DC 1 4 3 7
J7-R GTD 26V Hi GTD DCP /S-21 DC 1 5 0 6
J7-S GPS Az Align Hi OSU-A40 DC 1 6 2 2
J7-T Az HE Jump Hi OSU-A38 DC 1 7 2 2
J7-U GPS Az CX Fine S1 OSU-B60 AC 1 8 - -
J7-V GPS Az CX Fine S2 OSU-B61 AC 1 9 - -
J7-W GPS Az CX Fine S3 OSU-B62 AC 2 0 - -
J7-X Logic Pwr Lo OSU-B90 Ref Lo - - 2 1
J7-Y Selected Lo OSU-A21 Ref Lo - - 2 2
J7-Z SW El CX Coarse S2 OSU-B30 AC 2 3 - -

-------
 Table 5-C. Voltage Ide ntification And Location (Shee t 10 of 17 )

Conn. Signal Name Test Point- Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type U nit Sw. Pos.
No. S1 S2 S3 S4

J7-a SW El CX Coarse S3 OSU-B31 AC 2 4 - -

J7-b GPS El CX Fine S1 OSU-B47 AC 2 5 - -
J7-c GPS El CX Fine S2 OSU-B48 AC 2 6 - -
J7-d GPS El CX Fine S3 OSU-B49 AC 2 7 - -
J7-e GPS El CX Coarse S1 OSU-B57 AC 2 8 - -
J7-f GPS El CX Coarse S2 OSU-B58 AC 2 9 - -
J7-g GPS El CX Coarse S3 OSU-B59 AC 3 0 - -
!
J7-h SW El CX Fine S1 OSU-B26 AC 3 1 - -
J7-i SW El CX Fine S2 OSU-B27 AC 3 2 - -
J7-j SW El CX Fine S3 OSU-B28 AC 3 3 - -
J7-k Az Sabot Jump Hi OSU-A46 DC 3 4 2 2
J7-m Heat Jump Correction (Rly B) OSU-B88 DC 3 5 2 1
J7-n Sabot Jump Correction (Rly C) OSU-B87 DC 3 6 2 1
V1
I J7-p GTD ±15V Return Az Hydr. S. A. -31 Ref Lo 3 7 3 7
1-'
1\) J7-q Super El (Exc Rly D) OSU- B85 DC 3 8 2 1
V1
J7-r Handload (Rly 10) OSU-B82 DC 3 9 2 1
J7-s E nable A A & A E (Rly E) OSU-B86 Discrete 4 0 2 1
J7-t El Sabot Jump Hi OSU-A36 DC 4 1 2 2
J7-u El Heat Jump Hi OSU-A24 DC 4 2 2 2
J7-v GPS El Align Hi OSU-A26 DC 4 3 2 2
J7-w CS El Align Hi OSU-B18 DC 4 4 2 2
J7-x Slave GTD to CS (Rly 34) OSU-B80 DC 4 5 2 1
J7-y El CDX Coarse R1 OSU-B2 AC 4 6 - -
J7-z El CDX Coarse R2 OSU-B3 AC 4 7 -
-
J7-AA El CDX Coarse R3 OSU-B4 AC 4 8 - -
J7-BB Az Servo Value TM Lo Az Hydr. S.A.-40 Ref Lo - - 4 9
J7-CC El CDX Fine R1 OSU-B5 AC 5 0 - -
J7-DD El CDX Fine R2 OSU-B6 AC 5 1 - -
J7-EE El CDX Fine R3 OSU-B7 AC 5 2 - -
J7-FF Index MW for loading (Rly 3) OSU-B84 DC 5 3 2 1
J7-GG Az Servo Valve TM Hi Az Hydr S.A.-38 DC 5 4 4 9
J7-HH SW El CX Coarse S1 OSU-B29 AC 5 5 - -

I
 Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 11 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. Sl S2 S3 S4

J8-A Chassis Gnd Ball. Comp. -AI Gnd - - 0 1

J8-B Spare 0 2 0 2
J8-C Spare 0 3 0 3
J8-D Spare 0 4 0 4
J8-E Spare 0 5 0 5
J8-F Soare 0 6 0 6
J8-G Spare 0 7 0 7
J8-H Spare 0 8 0 8
J8-J Spare 0 9 0 9
J8-K Spare 1 0 1 0
J8-L Crosswind Vel (Vcw) Lo Ball. Comp-A39 Ref Lo - -
1 1
JS-M Crosswind Vel (V CW) Hi Ball. Comp-A40 DC 1 2 1 1
••

\J1 J8-N Vertical Accel (Z) Lo Ball. Comp-A59 Ref Lo - -

1 3
I
t--' JS-P Vertical Accel (Z) Hi Ball. Comp-A60 DC 1 4 1 3
r\)
0'\ J8-R Cant Angle Hi Ball. Comp-A64 DC 1 5 1 6
JS-S Cant Angle Lo Ball. Comp-A65 Ref Lo - -
1 6
JS-T Target Range ROI Hi Ball. Comp-B61 DC 1 7 1 8
JS-U Target Range RO I Lo Ball. Comp-B62 Ref Lo - - 1 8
J8-V Target Range R02 Hi Ball. Comp-B63 DC 1 9 2 0
J8-W Target Range R02 Lo Ball. Comp-B47 Ref Lo -
- 2 0
JS-X Target Range R03 Hi Ball. Comp-B48 DC 2 1 2 2
J8-Y Target Range R03 Lo Ball. Comp-B49 Ref Lo - - 2 2
JS-Z Target Range R04 Hi Ball. Comp-B50 DC 2 3 2 4
JS-a Target Range R04 Lo Ball. Comp-B51 Ref Lo - - 2 4
J9-b Target Range R05 Hi Ball. Comp-B34 DC 2 5 2 6
J8-c Target Range R05 Lo Ball. Comp-B35 Ref Lo - - 2 6
JS-d Target Range R06 Hi Ball. Comp-B36 DC 2 7 2 8
JS-e Target Range R06 Lo Ball. Comp-B37 Ref Lo - - 2 8
J8-f Target Range R07 Hi Ball. Comp-B38 DC 2 9 3 0
JS-g Target Range R07 Lo Ball. Comp-B39 Ref Lo - - 3 0
JS-h Target Range ROB Hi Ball. Comp-B22 DC 3 1 3 2
J8-i Target Range R08 Lo Ball. Comp-B23 Ref Lo - - 3 2
J8-j Target Range R09 Hi Ball. Comp-B24 DC 3 3 3 4
 Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet I2 of I7)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. SI S2 S3 S4

J8-k Target Range R09 Lo Ball. Comp-B25 Ref Lo - -

3 4
J8-m Target Range RIO Hi Ball. Comp-B26 DC 3 5 3 6
J8-n Target Range RIO Lo Ball. Comp-B12 Ref Lo -
- 3 6
J8-p Target Range Rll Hi Ball. Comp-BI3 DC 3 7 3 8
J8-q Targe Range Rll Lo Ball. Comp-BI4 Ref Lo - - 3 8
J8-r Comp Reg Pwr Lo Ball. Comp-B3 Ref Lo - - 3 9
J8-s + 10V de Computer Ball. Comp-B60 DC 4 0 3 9
J8-t -10V de Computer Ball. Comp-B59 DC 3 9 4 I
J8-u + I5V de Computer Ball. Comp-B28 DC 4 2 3 9
J8-v Tracking Computed (Rly J) Ball. Comp-A64 DC 4 3 4 6
J8-w BH Round (BH) Hi Ball. Comp-A37 DC 4 4 4 6
J8-x Sabot Round (Sabot) Ball. Comp-A38 DC 4 5 4 6
J8-y Logic Power Lo Ball. Comp-A25 Ref Lo - - 4 6
Vl J8-z MW Selected Ball. Comp-B65 DC 4 7 4 6
I
I-' J8-AA Atmos. Temp (TA) Hi Ball. Comp-A48 DC 4 8 3 9
1\)
� JB-BB Atmos. Pressure (PA) Hi Ball. Comp-A35 DC 4 9 3 9
J8-CC Powder Temp (Tp) Hi Ball. Comp-A49 DC 5 0 3 9
. .
J8-DD Az Rate Cmd Out (�S) H1 Ball. Comp-A57 DC 5 I 3 9
J8-EE El Rate Cmd Olt (9 S) Hi Ball. Comp-A47 DC 5 2 3 9
J8-FF Az Offset Cmd (A) Ball. Comp-A45 DC 5 3 3 9
J8-GG El Offset Cmd (E) Ball. Comp-A55 DC 5 4 3 9
J8-HH -I5 V de Computer Ball. Comp-BI5 DC 3 9 5 5
J4-A Chassis Gnd Laser Xmtr Gnd - - 0 I
J4-B Motor Drive Laser Xmtr DC 0 2 I 8
J4-C PFN SCR Trigger Laser Xmtr DC 0 3 I 8
J4-D Charge Enable Laser Xmtr DC 0 4 I 8
J4-E Remove Optics Laser Xmtr DC 0 5 I 8
J4-F Discrete Source Laser Xmtr DC 0 6 I 8
J4-G Spare 0 7 0 7
J4-H Spare 0 8 0 8
J4-J View Discrete Laser Xmtr DC 0 9 I 8
J4-K Optics Change Lockout Laser Xmtr DC 1 0 I 8
J4-L Spare 1 I I 1
J4-M Recv. 12V Laser Xmtr DC I 2 I 8
-
 Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 13 of 17)

Conn.
& Pin
No.
Signal Name Test Point -
No.
Signal
Type
S1
Monitor
Unit Sw. Pos.
S2 S3 S4
I
J4-N Mag. Pickup Laser Xmtr DC 1 3 1 8,
J4-P Test Enable Laser Xmtr DC 1 4 1 8.
J4-R Power Monitor Laser Xmtr DC 1 5 1 8i
J4-S Optics In Laser Xmtr DC 1 6 1 8
J4-T Close Shutter Laser Xmtr DC 1 7 1 8
J4-U Gnd (MDI #1) Laser Xmtr Ref Lo - -
1 8
J4-V Recv. 240V Laser Xmtr DC 1 9 1 8
J4-W Simmer HV Laser Xmtr DC 2 0 1 8'
J4-X PFN HV Laser Xmtr DC 2 1 1 8 .I
J4-Y Shutter Closed Laser Xmtr DC 2 2 1 81
J4-Z Charge Enable (Delay) Laser Xmtr DC 2 3 1 8
J4-a Range Discrete Laser Xmtr DC 2 4 1 8
J4-b Spare Laser Xmtr 2 5 2 5
Vl
I J4-c Spare Laser Xmtr 2 6 2 6·
......
1\) J4-d Spare Laser Xmtr 2 7 2 7'
CX>
J4-e Spare Laser Xmtr 2 8 2 8
J4-f Spare Laser Xmtr 2 9 2 9
J4-g Spare Laser Xmtr 3 0 3 0
J4-h Spare Laser Xmtr 3 1 3 1
J4-i Spare Laser Xmtr 3 2 3 2
J4-j Spare Laser Xmtr 3 3 3 3
J4-k Spare Laser Xmtr 3 4 3 4
J4-m Spare Laser Xmtr 3 5 3 5
J4-n Spare Laser Xmtr 3 6 3 6
J4-p Spare Laser Xmtr 3 7 3 71
J4-q Spare Laser Xmtr 3 8 3 8
J4-r Spare Laser Xmtr 3 9 3 9
J4-s Spare Laser Xmtr 4 0 4 0
J4-t Spare Laser Xmtr 4 1 4 1
J4-u Spare Laser Xmtr 4 2 4 2
J4-v Spare Laser Xmtr 4 3 4 3
J4-w
J4-x
Spare
Spare
Laser Xmtr
Laser Xmtr
4
4
4
5
4
4
4
5
1

_
____ ( ___
 �

Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 14 of 17)

Conn. Signal Na me Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. S1 S2 S3 S4

J4-y Spare 4 6 4 6
J4-z Spare 4 7 4 7
J4-AA Spare 4 8 4 8
J4-BB Spare 4 9 4 9
J4-CC Spare 5 0 5 0
J4-DD Spare 5 1 5 1
J4-EE Spare 5 2 5 2
J4-FF Spare 5 3 5 3
J4-GG Spare 5 4 5 4
J4-HH Spare 5 5 5 5
J2-A Chassis Gnd TPDP-1 Gnd - - 0 1
J2-B SW Bus Lo TPDP-10 Ref Lo -
- 0 2
J2-C Prime Power (Laser) Hi TPDP-3 DC 0 3 0 6
Vl
I J2-D APP (Missile) Hi TPDP-4 DC 0 4 2 1
1-' J2-E MW Hi Voltage Power TPDP-5 DC 0 5 2 1
1\)
\() J2-F Fire Control Bus Lo TPDP-12 Ref Lo - -
0 6
J2-G Spare 0 7 0 7
J2-H Spare 0 8 0 8
J2-J SW Bus Hi TPDP-9 DC 0 9 0 2
J2-K Fire Control Bus Hi TPDP-11 DC 1 0 0 6
J2-L Spare 1 1 1 1
J2-M Spare 1 2 1 2
J2-N Automotive Power Bus Hi TPDP-13 DC 1 3 2 1
J2-P Spare 1 4 1 4
J2-R Spare 1 5 1 5
J2-S 400 Hz (C s (FC) On Rly) TPDP-16 DC 1 6 0 2
J2-T 400 Hz (GTD) On Rly TPDP-17 DC 1 7 0 6
J2-U 400 Hz (GPS) On Rly TPDP-18 DC 1 8 0 6
J2-V 400 Hz (COMP) On Rly TPDP-19 DC 1 9 0 6
J2-W Spare 2 0 2 0
J2-X Automotive Pwr Bus Lo TPDP-14 - - 2 1
J2-Y B attery Volt Sensor Input Lo TPDP-52 Ref Lo - - 2 2
J2-Z SW Charge Mtr Sol Hi TPDP-23 DC 2 3 0 2
J2-a SW Firing Sol TPDP-24 DC 2 4 0 2

I
 Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 15 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. S1 S2 S3 S4

J2-b MG Vent Fan Control Hi TPDP-25 DC 2 5 2 1

J2-c Scavenge Air Control Hi TPDP-26 DC 2 6 2 1
J2-d Spare 2 7 2 7
J2-e Spare 2 8 2 8
J2-f Breech Motor TPDP-29 DC 2 9 2 1
J2-g MG Sol Hi TPDP-30 DC 3 0 2 1
J2-h Spare 3 1 3 1
J2-i Spare 3 2 3 2
J2-j Radio Com (GFE) Hi TPDP-33 DC 3 3 2 1
J2-k Grenade Launcher Control Hi TPDP-34 DC 3 4 2 1
J2-m PP (Autoloader) Hi TPDP-35 DC 3 5 0 6
J2-n Searchlight Control Pwr Hi TPDP-36 DC 3 6 0 6
\Jl
J2-p Logic Pwr Lo TPDP-15 Ref Lo - -
3 7
I
1-'
J2-q Cdr Vision Block HTRS Hi TPDP-38 DC 3 8 2 1
w
0
J2-r Veh. Lit. & Heat Hi TPDP-39 DC 3 9 2 1
J2-s Turret Blower Power Hi TPDP-4 0 DC 4 0 2 1
J2-t GAT & C-R DET Pwr Hi TPDP-41 DC 4 1 2 1
J2-u Bustle Blwr & Hdlight Pwr Hi TPDP-42 DC 4 2 2 1
J2-v CL TV Protector Hi TPDP-43 DC 4 3 2 1
J2-w Spare 4 4 4 4
J2-x Transmission Controls Hi TPDP-45 DC 4 5 2 1
J2-y DR Hatch Switch Input TPDP-46 DC 4 6 3 7
J2-z Spare 4 7 4 7
J2-AA Spare 4 8 4 8
J2-BB CS ON TPDP-49 DC 4 9 0 2
J2-CC 400 Hz Pwr On TPDP-50 DC 5 0 3 7
J2-DD Bat. Volt. Sensor Inp Hi TPDP-51 DC 5 1 2 2
J2-EE Spare 5 2 5 2
J2-FF Temp Sensor (CS P / S) TPDP-53 -
5 3 2 1
J2-GG Temp Sensor Driver ERA TPDP-54 -
5 4 2 1
J2-HH Temp Sensor Cdr ERA TPDP-8 -
5 5 2 1
J3-A Chassis Gnd MDI Panel-1 Gnd - -
0 1
J3-B Spare 0 2 0 2

"
 Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 16 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. S1 S2 S3 S4

J3-C MDI Power Hi MDI Panel-3 DC 0 3 0 6

J3-D MDI Logic Power Hi MDI Panel-4 DC 0 4 0 6
J3-E MDI Rate Command MDI Panel-5 Discrete 0 5 0 6
J3-F MDI Power Lo MDI Panel-6 Ref Lo - - 0 6
J3-G MDI Offset Stimulus MDI Panel-7 Discrete 0 7 0 6
J3-H MDI Az Stimulus MDI Panel-8 Discrete 0 8 0 6
J3-J MDI El Stimulus MDI Panel-9 Discrete 0 9 0 6
J3-K MDI Stimulus Reverse MDI Panel-10 Discrete 1 0 0 6
J3-L MDI SW El Stimulus MDI Panel-11 Discrete 1 1 0 6
J3-M MDI Comp Test Cmd MDI Panel-12 Discrete 1 2 0 6
J3-N MDI Blast Door Interrogate MDI-Panel-13 Discrete 1 3 0 6
J3- P MDI Monitor Power MDI Panel-14 DC 1 4 0 6
Vl J3-R Off-line Test in Process MDI Panel-15 Discrete 1 5 0 6
I
t--' J3-S MDI GTD El (NW) Discrete MDI Panel-16 Discrete 1 6 0 6
w
t--' J3- T MDI GTD El f:NW) Discrete MDI Panel-17 Discrete 1 7 0 6
J3-U MDI GTD Az (NW) Discrete MDI Panel-18 Discrete 1 8 0 6
J3-V MDI GTD Az f:NW) Discrete MDI Panel-19 Discrete 1 9 0 6
J3-W MDI Hull Az Rate Discrete MDI Panel-20 Discrete 2 0 0 6
J3-X Spare 2 1 2 1
J3-Y Spare 2 2 2 2
J3-Z MDI Turr El Rate Disc MDI Panel-23 Discrete 2 3 0 6
J3-a MDI Az Offset Discrete MDI Panel-24 Discrete 2 4 0 6
J3-b MDI El Offset Discrete MDI Panel-25 Discrete 2 5 0 6
J3-c MDI GPS Az (NW) Discrete MDI Panel-26 Discrete 2 6 0 6
J3-d MDI GPS Az f:NW) Discrete MDI Panel-27 Discrete 2 7 0 6
J3-e MDI GPS El (NW) Discrete MDI Panel-28 Discrete 2 8 0 6
J3-f MDI GPS El f:NW) Discrete MDI Panel-29 Discrete 2 9 0 6
J3-g MDI CS Az (NW) Discrete MDI Panel-30 Discrete 3 0 0 6
J3-h MDI CS Az f:NW) Discrete MDI Panel-31 Discrete 3 1 0 6
J3-i MDI CS El (NW) Discrete MDI Panel-32 Discrete 3 2 0 6
J3-j MDI CS El f:NW) Discrete MDI Panel-33 Discrete 3 3 0 6
J3-k CS El (Dist) R. G. Disc MDI Panel-34 Discrete 3 4 0 6
J3-m MDI Computer Discrete MDI Panel-35 Discrete 3 5 0 6
J3-n MDI Cant Sensor Discrete MDI Panel-36 Discrete 3 6 0 6
 Table 5-C. Voltage Identification And Location (Sheet 17 of 17)

Conn. Signal Name Test Point - Signal Monitor

& Pin No. Type Unit Sw. Pos.
No. Sl S2 S3 S4

J3-p Spare 3 7 3 7
J3-q MDI CWD Sensor Disc. MDI Panel-38 Discrete 3 8 0 6
J3-r MDI Hyd Fluid Overtemp MDI Panel-39 Discrete 3 9 0 6
Disc.
J3-s MDI Hyd Pressure (Low) MDI Panel-40 Discrete 4 0 0 6
J3-t MDI Inhibit Offsets MDI Panel-41 Discrete 4 1 0 6
J3-u MDI Laser Discrete MDI Panel-42 Discrete 4 2 0 6
J3-v MDI 400 Hz P/ S Discrete MDI Panel-43 Discrete 4 3 0 6
J3-w MDI GTD P/ S Discrete MDI Panel-44 Discrete 4 4 0 6
J3-x MDI GPS P/ S Discrete MDI Panel-45 Discrete 4 5 0 6
J3-y MDI CS-SW P/ S Discrete MDI Panel-46 Discrete 4 6 0 6
J3-z MDI Mode 7 Status Discrete MDI Panel-47 Discrete 4 7 0 6
J3-AA MDI Mode 5 Status Discrete MDI Panel-48 Discrete 4 8 0 6
\Jl
I J3-BB MDI Mode 8 Status Discrete MDI Panel-49 Discrete 4 9 0 6
I-'
w J3-CC MDI Mode 14 Status Discrete MDI Panel-50 Discrete 5 0 0 6
r\)
J3-DD MDI Control Logic Dis�. MDI Panel-51 Discrete 5 1 0 6
J3-EE GPS Operational Out Dis.c. MDI Panel-52 Discrete 5 2 0 6
J3-FF Clock Pulse Tl MDI Panel-53 Discrete 5 3 0 6
J3-GG External Clock MDI Panel-54 Discrete 5 4 0 6
J3-HH MDI Turret Roll Rate MDI Panel-22 Discrete 5 5 0 6
--------
-- -----

GPS Gunner's Primary Sight GTD Gun/Turret D rive

RED Range Electronic Unit S. A. Stabiliz ation Amplifier

cs Commander's Sight Az Hydr S. A. Azimuth Hyd raulic Servo Amplifier

CLEU Control Logic Electronics Unit osu Offset Servo Unit

sw Secondary Weapon Ball. Comp. Ballistic Computer

ERA Electronic Rack Assembly TPD P Turret Power Distribution Panel

 Table 5-D. Pin-Lamp/Switch Position Cross Reference
PIN LAMP/SW. POS.
A 01
B 02
c 03
D 04
E 05
F 06
G 07
H 08
J 09
K 10
L 11
M 12
N 13
p 14
R 15
s 16
T 17
u 18
v 19
w 20
X 21
y 22
z 23
a 24
b 25
c 26
d 27
e 28
5-133
PIN LAMP/SW. POS.
f 29
g 30
h 31
i 32
j 33
k 34
m 35
n 36
p 37
q 38
r 39
s 40
t 41
u 42
v 43
w 44
X 45
y 46
z 47
AA 48
BB 49
cc 50
DD 51
EE 52
FF 53
GG 54
HH 55
 Table 5-E. S ervo Test Input Points and Signal Response Groups

INPUT MDI INPUT , SIGNAL'

SWITCH TEST RESPON SE
POSITION CONN. GROUP*

A Jll DC SUM AMP. (AZ.) A

A J12 CS AZ. DC PWR. AMP. A
A J6 AZ. DC TEST A
B Jll DC SUM AMP. (EL.) A
B J12 CS EL. DC PWR. AMP. A
B J6 EL. DC TEST A
c Jll - -

c J12 SW EL. DC PWR. AMP. A

c J6 - -

D Jll DC SUM AMP. (AZ.) B

D J12 CS AZ. DC PWR. AMP. B
D J6 AZ. DC TEST B
E Jll DC SUM AMP. (EL.) B
E J12 CS EL. PWR. AMP. B
E J6 EL. DC TEST B

* B indicates those signals which are AC and are processed through the
Servo U nit demodulator. A indicates those signals which are not processed
through the demodulator. (Also, see the functional description of the INPUT
switch in Table 5-E.) The response groups are itemized in Table 5-G.
 Table 5- F. Group A - Signal Response

SERVO MDI TEST CONNECTOR & SIGNAL HI's and LO's

OUTPUT
SW. POS. Jll (GPS) J12 (CS) J6 (GTD)

1 Az TM Current# 1 (Hi) Az TM Current# 1 (Hi)

Az TM Current# 2 (Lo) Az TM Current# 2 (Lo)

2 EL TM Current# 1 (Hi) EL TM Current# 1 (Hi)

EL TM Current# 2 (Lo) EL TM Current# 2 (Lo)

3 SW EL TM Current# 1 (Hi)
SW EL TM Current# 2 (Lo)

4 Az Target Hold Hi CDR Az Handle Rate Hi Az Handle Rate Hi

Az Target Hold Lo CDR Az Handle Rate Lo Az Handle Rate Lo

9 Linear Compens. Output CS Az (M. Channel ) Comp. Turret Az Accel. Hi

(Az) (Hi) Out. (Hi)
\.n
I ±15V Return (Special) (Lo) 120 VDC (Az) Lo GTD Reg. Pwr. Lo
t-'
w
\.n
10 Linear Compens. Output CS EL (M. Channel) Comp. Az �p LVDT Hi
(EL) (Hi) Out. (Hi)
±15V Return (Special) (Lo) 120 VDC (Az) Lo GTD Reg. Pwr. Lo

11 Disturb. Bucking Hi EL �p Transducer FDBK. Hi

120 VDC (Az) Lo GTD Reg. Pwr. Lo

12 SW EL Sum. Amp. Out (Hi) EL Angular Accel. Hi

120 VDC (Az) Lo GTD Reg. Pwr. Lo
 Table 5-G. Group B - Signal Response

SERVO MDI TEST CONNECTO R & SIGNAL ill's AND LO's

OUTPUT
SW. POS. Jll (GPS) Jl2 (CS) J6 (GTD)

5 SW Position Hi Turret EL Rate Hi

SW Position Lo Turret EL Rate Lo

6 EL CT Output Coarse Hi Turret Roll Rate Sin 8 Hi

EL CT Output Coarse Lo Turret Roll Rate Sin 8 Lo

7 Az Target Designate Hi Az Stab. Rate Gyro PA Turret Az Rate Hi

Output Hi
Az Target Designate Lo Az Stab. Rate Gyro PA Turret Az Rate Lo
Output Lo

8 EL Target Designate Hi EL Stab. Rate Gyro PA Hull Az Rate Hi

Output Hi
EL Target Designate Lo EL Stab. Rate Gyro PA Hull Az Rate Lo
\J1
I Output Lo
I-'
w
0\
9 Az Rate Int. Gyro PA Hi
±15V R �turn (Special) (Lo) EL CT Coarse Output Hi
GTD Reg. Pwr. Lo

10 EL R ate Int. Gyro PA Hi EL CT Fine Output Hi

±15V Return (Special) (Lo) GTD Reg. Pwr. Lo

11* Az CT Fine Output Hi

GTD Reg. Pwr. Lo

0
* Phase lag of 38(±10) applied to monitored signal.
 APPENDIX A

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

The following Maintenance Allocation Chart is in preliminary draft

status and is intended only as a suggested allocation of maintenance

activity.

Al
 --- -------
MAl NTENANCE ALLOCA Tl ON CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAL''-l''HER, MBT/XMS03
·--

( 1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAl NTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
NO .
UJ
f-
_J
:::J REMARKS
f-
UJ f- _J UJ
<{ a EQUIPMENT
u �
�

u 1./1 z _J u � :r: _J
UJ
:::J C!)
- <{ <{
a..
V')
f- >
<:>::
-, () _J
f-
1./1
_J <{
<:>::
UJ :::J
1./1
z a ::; <{
a.. 0... > C!)
-
UJ UJ z UJ UJ UJ
f- l/) <{ <{ u <:>:: <:>:: 0 <:>::

01 EI'-IGI NE
)>
I
w
0100 POWER PlA N T 0 0 0

ENGINE 0 0 c F F F H D

0101 CYLINDER ASSEMBLY F F F H D

0102 CRANKSHAFT ASSEMBLY

0103 FLYWHEEL ASSEMBLY

0104 PISTON & CONNECTING R OD ASSEMBLY F F F H D

0105 VALVES, INTAKE AND EXHAUS T F F F

0106 LINES, BREATHER, CRANKCASE 0 0 0

COOLER, OIL, ENGINE 0 0 0 F

VALV E, OIL COOLER BYPASS F

VALVE, 01 L PRESSURE REGULATOR F F

PAGE
 '

I
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT /XMS03
( 1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNC TION

GROUP
NO FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
LJ.J
1-
...J
::J REMARKS
1-
LJ.J 1- ...J LJ.J EQUIPMENJ
u
LJ.J
u Vl z � ...J u 0::
<{
:c
a
...J
co
::J � <{
a...
Vl
1- > -, <.:> ...J ...J <{
0::
LJ.J ::J
Vl 0:: Vl
z UJ UJ
a ...J <{ a... a...
> a)
<{ z UJ LJ.J UJ
- 1- Vl <{ u 0:: 0:: 0 0::

.
01 ENGINE (CONT'D)

0106 FILTER ASSEMBLY, OIL, ENGINE 0 0 0 F .

ELEMENT, ENGINE 01 L Fl LTER ASSEMBLY 0

LINES, OIL, EXTERNAL 0 0

.

PUMP ASSEMBLY, ENGINE 01 L F F

)>
I
0108 MANIFOLDS, EXHAUST AND INTAKE 0 0 F
..

0109 DRIVE, ACCESSORY 0 0 F H

03 FUEL SYSTEM

0301 NOZZLE, FUEL INJECTOR 0 F F H -

0.302 HOSES AND FITTINGS 0 0

LINES, FUEL (HIGH PRESSURE) 0 F

PUMP I FUEL (FUEL TANK) 0 0 0

PAGE
 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/L.A.::-. :HER, MBT/XMS03
-

( 1) (2) (3) ( 4) (5)

',.J
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP i
FUNCTIONAL GROUP . UJ ..J TOOLS AND REMARKS
NO . f- �
f- w f- ..J w <( 0 EQUIPMENT
u
w u Vl z 6£ ..J u c.:: :r:
::) co <( <( c.::
-'
0... f- > 0 f- ..J ::)
Vl Vl c.:: -, ..J Vl <( w
0 0... 0... > co
z w w -' <( z w UJ UJ
- f- Vl <( <( u c.:: c.:: 0 c.::

)> 03 FUEL SYSTEM (CONT'D)

I
81
0302 PUMP, FUEL SUP PLY (ENGINE) 0 F F 0 F

PUMP, FUEL (PERSONNEL HEATER) (SEE GROLJl

2200 FOR HEATER)
-
PUMP, FUEL, INJECTION 0 F F F F

0304 AIR CLEANER ASSEMBLY c c 0

FILTER, AIR CLEANER c c 0

H OSES AND FITTINGS c 0

BLOWER ASSEMBLY, AIR CLEANER c 0 F

DUCTS, SNORKEL, AIR CLEANER c c c 0 0

'
0305 TURBO CHARGER 0 F H

AFTERCOOLER 0 0 0 F

PAGE
· - ·-·--------�
MAl NTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

(1) (2) (3) . (4) (5)

MAl NTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
NO FUNCTIONAL GROUP w _J TOOLS AND I
:J REMARKS I
t- w
t-
_J w EQUI PMENt
t- _J <( 0 I
u
w u V'l z � u a;: I _J
.'I

0... :J co <( a;:

V'l t- > • l? _J � _J <( w :J
V'l a;: 0 V'l 0... 0... co
z w w _J <( w w >
t- V'l z w
- <( <( u a;: a;: 0 a;:

03 FUEL SYSTEM (CONT'D)

l

!
0306 TANK, FUEL, REAR F F
'
0 c

CELL, FUEL, FRONT 0 c F F

HOSE S, LINES AND FITTINGS 0 0

VALVE, FUEL SHUTOFF 0 0 0

)>
I
()-. 0309 FUEL Fl LTER AS SEMBLY, PRIMARY/WATER
SEPARATOR c c 0 F

FUEL FILTER AS SEMBLY, SECONDARY c c 0 F

ELEMENT S I FUEL FILTER I PRIMARY 0 0 0

ELEMENTS, FUEL FILTER, SECONDARY 0 0

"

0311 MANIFOLD HEATER 0 0 0 0

PUMP, FUEL (MANIFOLD HEATER) 0 0

PAGE
 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-T RACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

(1) ( 2) (3) (4) ( 5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP T OOLS AND
NO
w
f.-
_,
:::)
REMARKS
f.- w f.- _, w
<t: 0
EQUIPMENT
u u <n � _, u �
w z ::r: _,
:::) co <t: <t: �
a.. f.- > 0 f.- :::)
-, _, _, <t: w
<n
<n . � <n ·a.. a.. co
z w w 0 ::i <t: >
z w w w
- f.- <n <t: <t: u � c.:: 0 �
·-

03 FUEL SYSTEM (CONT'D)

)>
I
''-J 0312 LINKAGE, EMERGENCY THROTTLE 0 0 0 0 0

MOTOR, ACTU ATOR 0 0 F

EMERGENCY THROTTLE C ONTROL c 0 0 0 0

-

04 EXHAUST SYSTEM

0401 EXHAUST PIPES AND DUCT c c 0 0

I

05 L
coo 1 NG SYSTEM

0502 SEAL, POWER PLANT SHROUD 0 0

SHROUD, POWER PLANT 0

0505 CLUTCH, FAN 0 ��� I

ROTOR, FAN 0 r'F

SEAL, 01 L, VERTICAL (FAN DRIVE) 0

PAGE
 - --

MAl NTENANCE ALLOCA Tl ON CHART

FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XM803

(1) \.... (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP w _J TOOLS A ND
NO 1- ::J REMARKS
1- w 1- _J w EQUIPMENT
u V') � _J u <( a .-.
w u z CJ<: I _J
a... ::J co <( <( CJ<:
V') 1- > -, 0 _J 1- _J <( w ::J
V') CJ<: a V') a... a... co
z w w _J <( z w w > w
- 1- V') <( <( u CJ<: CJ<: 0 CJ<:

I
06 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

0601 ALTERNATOR 0 0 0 F H

0602 REGULATOR, VOLTAGE 0 0 0 0 F H

·0603 M OTOR, STARTING .0 0 0 0 F H

)>
I
co RELAY I STARTER 0 0 0 F

0607 PAhiELS, INSTRUMENT AND CONTROLS,

DRIVING c 0 0 F

LAMPS c c
.

I NS TR UME NTS c 0 0
.,

SWITCHES c 0 0

LIGHTS - c 0 0

PAGE

•
 MAINTENANCE ALL OCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAl NTENANCE FUNCTION

...

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
NO UJ
1-
__.
=> REMARKS
1-
UJ 1- __. UJ
<{ 0 EQUIPMENT
u
UJ
u V') z � __. u 0:: I __.
co
=> � <{ 0::
a...
V')
1- >
0::
• 0 __. V')
__. <{ UJ =>
V')
z UJ 0 __. <{
a... a... > co
UJ z UJ UJ UJ
- 1- V') <{ <{ u 0:: 0:: 0 0::
·-

06 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (CONT'D)

)>
I
�
0607 SPEED OMETER G F 0 F .

0608 BOX, HULL DISTRIBUTION 0 0 0 F H

RECEPTACLES, SLAVE c 0 0 0

BOX, POWER DISCONNE C T 0 0 0 F H

BOX, PRIMARY DRIVING CONTROLS, HULL 0 0 0 F H

ELE CTR ONI C S

0609 DOME LIGHTS c 0 0

LIGHTS, DRIVING c 0 0 0 �

.
LAMPS c l
I
0610 UNIT S, SENDING 0 0 u!

0612 BATTERIE S c 0 c 0 F

PAGE
 MAl NTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-T RACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

( 1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP --' TOOLS AND
NO
UJ
1- REMARKS
1- UJ 1- UJ ::J
EQUIPMENT.
u u V) �
--'
u <{ a ..
UJ z <{
--'
oe: :r: --'
a... 1- > ::J
(?
en
1- <{ oe:
V) V) oe: -, --'V) --' <{ UJ ::J
z UJ UJ a <{ z a.. a.. <X)
1- Vl <{
--'
UJ w > UJ
- <{ u oe: oe: 0 oe:

06 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (CONT'D)

Il
0612 BOXES, BATTERY c 0 0 0

CABLES, BAT TERY c 0 0

0613 :iARNESSES, WIRING, H ULL 0 0 F 0

HARNESSES, WIRING, POWER PLANT 0 0 0 0 0

)>
I
0614 SLIP RING, TURRET 0 0 0 F H
�

0616 TURRET VENTI LA TOR 0 0 0 F

BLOWER, MACHINE GUN EXHAUST c 0 0 F

BLOWER, BUSTLE c 0 0 F

0618 BOX, DRIVER'S BRAKE CONTROL 0 0 0 F

BOX, DRIVER'S INTERCOM CONNECTOR· 0 0 0 F

BOX, MACHINE GUN ACC ESSORY CONTROl 0 0 0 F

PAGE
 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRA CKED: 15 2 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
•

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP UJ � TOOLS AND
NO 1- REMARKS
1- UJ 1- � UJ ::::>
EQUIPMENT '
u u V') � � u <( a "

UJ z co
0<: I �
0... <( 0<:
� �
::::>
V') 1- > -, (J � <( UJ ::::>
V') 0<: a � Vl 0... 0... co
z UJ UJ <( UJ UJ > UJ
- 1- Vl <( <( u z 0<: 0<: 0 0<:

06 ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (CONT'D)

)>
I

0618 BOX, MAl N TEMPER A TURE SENSOR F

_.

0 0 0

BOX, AUXILI ARY TEMPERATURE 0 0 0 F

BOX., BUSTLE BLOWER 0 0 0 F

SOX, GRENADE LAUNCHER CONTROL c 0 0 F

I
SWIT<;:HES, TRAVERSE, INTERFER ENCE c 0 0 0

0620 H AR � ESS, WIRING, TURRET 0 0 F 0

I
'

07 TRANSMISSION

0705 THROTTLE VALVE CONTROL O H H

I
c 0 0 D

STEER CONTROL c 0 0 C' I c

!
BRAKE APPLY c 0 0 c F

ELECTRICAL CONTROL c 0 ' 0 F F H D

PAGE
·--·---- ·-----; ·-

MAl NTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMB03

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAI NTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP _J TOOLS AND
NO UJ
1- REMARKS
1- ::J
UJ 1- _J UJ
<( 0 EQUIPMENT
u
UJ u Vl z � _J u 0<: :X: _J
Q.. ::J al <( 0<:
1- � �
Vl
z
Vl
UJ
�
UJ
-.
0 _J
_J
<(
V'l _J
Q..
<(
Q..
UJ
>
::J
al
- 1- z UJ w w
V'l <( <( u 0<: 0<: 0 0<:
.
07 TRANSMISSION (CONT'D)

0705 EMERGENCY SHIFT c. 0 0 0 0 .

0710 TRANSMISSION 0 0 c 0 F F H D

INPUT AND OJTPUT SHAFT SEAL 0 0

.

COVERS, END 0 H H
)>
I
_....
RANGE CLUTCH, PLANETARY UNITS H H H
"'

OUTPUT PLANETARY UNITS H H H

0713 CLUTCHES H H H

0714 CONTROL ASSEMBLY, HYDRO STEER F F F H H D

ft
. CONTROL ASSEMBLY, HYDRO PROPULSION F F F H H D

VALVE ASSEMBLY, MAIN PRESSURE

REGULATOR BODY F p F H H D

PAGE

•
 MAl NTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT FULL-T RACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03
,
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
NO w
1-
...J
:J REMARKS
1-
w 1- ...J w
< c EQUIPMENT
u u V) z � ...J u IX ::r: ...J
w
1- :J
0
cc
� < IX
�
a..
V) .. ...J ....J < w :J
z
V)
w LU
c ...J <
V) a.. a.. > cc
< < z LU LU LU
- 1- V) u IX IX 0 IX

)> 07 TRANSMISSION (CONT'D)

I
�

w 0714 BODY ASSEMBLY, GO/ERNOR VALVES F F F H H D

CONTROL ASSEMBLY, SHIFT AND TRIP

VALVE F F F H H D

VALVE ASSEMBLY, MODE SELECTOR F F H H D

-
!=

PLATE ASSEMBLY, GOVERNOR MODULATOR F F F H H D

HYDROSTATIC UNITS H H

0721 COOLER , OIL 0 0 0 F

. FILTER OIL 0 0 J

ol
,

FILTER , ELEMENT 0 0

LINES AND CONNECTIONS 0 )I

·-'

TUBE, OIL FILLER AND LEVEL GAGE c 0 0

PAGE
I
_....__�.......,j

MAl NT ENANC E ALLOCATION CHART

FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5) I

MAl NT ENANC E FUNCTION

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP . TOOLS AND
NO LU
1-
_J
:::> REMARKS
1-
LU _J LU EQUIPMENT
u u
1-
V) z � _J u Oc:
4:
I
0
_J
UJ co 4:
a...
V)
1-
V)
-,
:::>
� 0 () _J
1-
V)
4:
_J
a...
4:
a...
Oc:
w :::>
co
-
z LU
1-
LU
V) 4:
_J
4:
4:
u
z LU
Oc:
w
Oc:
>
0
w
Oc:

07 TRANSMISSION (CONT'D)

0721 PUMP, OIL , • H� H

0726 BRAKES, SERVICE 0 0 Ff* H .

08 FINAL DR:VE
·-

0801 FINAL DRIVE c c 0 F H D

)>
......
I
1206 CONTROLS AND LINKAGE, E MERGENCY
.j:>,.
BRAKE c 0 0 0 0

13 WHEELS AND TRACKS

1301 . ARM, ROADWHEEL ASS EMB LY c F H

HUB, ROADWHEEL, ASSEMB LY c 0 0 F

. RO ADWHEEL ASSEMBLY c 0 D

'JNIT, HYDR OPN EUMATIC, SUSPENSION c 0 0 F H H D

- ,. P AGE

•
 MAINTENANCE ALL OCATION CHART
-
I
FOR
!
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LA ·n CHER, MBT/XMS03
-
( 1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
NO FUNCTIONAL GROUP w -J TOOLS AND
.
1- 1- ::> REMARKS
w 1- -J w <( EQUIPMENT
u u V') z � -J u � a
-J
..
w ::> co J:
0... 1- > 0 � <( �
V') V') � -, -J V') -J <( w ::>
z w w a -J <( z 0... 0... > co
1- V') <( w w w
- <( u � � 0 �

13 WHEELS AN D TRACKS (CONT'D)

)>
I
VALVE, NITROGEN
......
01 0 0

CONSOLE, CONTROL, HEIGHT 0 F F H

CONTROLS,, CABLES, LINKAGE 0 0 F F

MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY, ELEVATION

CONTROL F F

COUPLING DISCONNECT F F

1302 TRACK SUPPORT ROLLER ASSEMBLY c 0 0 F

WHEEL, TRACK SUPPORT R OLLER, ASSEMBLY c 0 D

1303 ARM, COMPENSATING IDLER, ASSEMBLY c 0 0 F

WHEEL, COMPENSATING IDLER c 0 D

CYLINDER, TRACK ADJUSTER ACTUATING c F F H

PAGE
-- ---- - ---··
l

MAINTENANCE ALLOCA TION CHART

FOR
T ANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/L AUNCHER, MBT/XMB03

( 1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINT ENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
NO FUNCTIONAL GROUP T OOLS AND
w
1-
....J
=> REMARKS
1- UJ 1- ....J UJ
<( 0
EQUIPMENT
u
UJ u V) z 6£ ....J u � I ....J
=> co <( �
a..
V) 1- > -. () � ....J <( UJ =>
V) 0<: 0
....J V) a.. a.. co
z UJ UJ ....J <( z UJ UJ > UJ
- 1- V) <( <( u � � 0 �

13 WHEELS AND TRACKS (CONT'D)

HUB, COMPENSATING I DLER, ASSEMBLY c 0 0 F

HYDRAULIC CONTROL, ASSEMBLY c F F F

B OX, CONTROL, TRACK ADJUSTER c 0 0 0

·-

YOKE, TRACK ADJUSTER, ASSEMB ..Y c 0

)>
.!.. BRACKET, TRACK ADJUSTER c F F H
('

1304 HUB, DRIVE SPRCX::KET c 0 H

SPROCKET c 0

1305 TRACK ASSEMBLY c c 0 c D

1401 C ONTROLS AND LINKAGE, EMERGENCY

,
STEERING c 0 0 0 0

PAGE
 .
I
I
-
MAINTENANCE ALL OCATION CHART
FOR
TA NK, COMBAT, FULL-T RACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

\1.1 (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
•

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND REMARKS
NO UJ ...J
:::>
EQUIPMENT
1-
1-
UJ ...J UJ <t: 0 .....
u
UJ u
1-
Vl z � ...J u a<: I ...J
co <t:
:::> � a<:
0..
Vl 1- >
·a<: -. 0 ...J Vl
...J <t: w :::>
Vl 0 0.. 0.. co
z w w ...J <t: z w w > UJ
- 1- V') <t: <t: u a<: a<: 0 a<:

)> 15 FRAME, TOWING ATTACH. AND DRAWBARS

I
......
" 1503 PINTLE, TQWING c c 0 0

18 HULL
--

1801 LOCK, TRAVEL, GUN c c 0 0

COVERS, PLATES A ND DOORS c c 0 0

GRILLES c c 0 0

SEALS (DOORS, PLATES, COVERS) c 0

EQUIPMENT VENT SYSTEM 0 0 0

I
1802
/�I)�-
FENDERS
1/AIC.HES; !J,(AfA./
C'
c.
c 0 0
00
1
1808 BOXES, BRACKETS, A ND STRAPS c c ::·· 0
I
RACKS, STOWAGE, AMMUNITION c c 0

-
PAGE
...,

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-T RACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

( 1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

G ROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP UJ _, TOOLS AND
NO REMARKS
EQUIPMENT
1- :::>
1-
UJ 1- _, UJ <t: 0
u Vl z � _, u � J: _,
....
UJ u
<t: �
a... 1- > :::>
0
co
� _, <t: :::>
Vl Vl � -. _, Vl a.. UJ co
z UJ UJ 0 _, <t: z a... >
- 1- Vl <t: <t: u
w
�
w
� 0
w
�

19 TURRET '·

1901 BEARING A? SEMBLY, TURRET F F F D

SEATS AND BACK RESTS, ASSEMBUES,

'

COMMANDER'S AND GUNNER'S c 0 0

LOCK, TURRET TRAVERSE c

.
c 0 0

)> P ADS, CRASH c 0 0

I
�

00
1902 DRIVER'S CAPSULE c 0 c 0 0 0

BEARING, CAPSULE . c c 0

SEAT AND BACK REST, ASSY., DRIVER'S c c 0 0

DRIVE, CAPSULE c c 0 F
t

WIRING HARNESS, DRIVER'S CAPSULE 0 0 F 0

SUP RING, DRIVER'S CAPSULE 0 0 0 F H

PAGE
 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XM803

(I) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
• I
I 6

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP ...J TOOLS AND
NO w
1- ::J REMARKS
1- ...J w EQUIPMENT
� 4:
UJ
u
1- 0
w
u Vl z ...J u 0<:: :::c ...J
a..
Vl
1- > ::J
-. (j
co
...J
� 4:
...J 4:
0<::
w ::J
� Vl
z
Vl
0 ...J 4:
a.. a..
> co
w w
4: z w w w
- 1- Vl 4: u 0<:: � 0 0<::

19 TURRET (CONT'D)
I
)>
I
1902 VIS I ON BLOCKS c 0 c c 0
_.

-.o

DRIVER'S NIGHT SIGHT c F c , c o l F

IN STRUMENT PANEL AND CONTROLS (SEE

GROUP 0607)

1903 HATCHES, DRIVER'S, GUNNER'S AND

COMMANDER'S c c 0 0

COVERS, SIGHT AND TRAN SMITTER c 0 c 0 0 0

5'11/ELO I g,4(_{._ /$riC 5 c c F
1904 TRAVERSING MECHANISM, MANUAL
(INCLUDES AZIMUTH INDICATOR) c 0 0 F H

PUMP, ELEVATION (MANUAL) c 0 F H H

.

1905 GEAR BOX, TRAVERSING (POWER) 0 0 F F H

MOTOR,NALVE, HYDRAULIC, TRAVERSING

(POWER) 0 F F F H

PAGE
··-· .. ... -�· -· -·1 �

MAl NTENANCE ALL OCA T1 ON CHART

FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LA UNCHER, MBT/XMS03

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5}

MAINTENANCE F UNCTION

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP UJ -l TOOLS AND
NO 1- ::J REMA RKS
1- UJ 1- -l UJ EQUIPMENT
u � <( 0 ..
UJ u VI z -l
u � :::c -l
::J co <( <( �
0... 1- > • 0 1- -l ::J
VI VI � -l VI <( UJ
UJ 0 <( 0... 0... > co
z UJ -l
z UJ UJ w
- 1- VI <( <( u � � 0 �

19 TURRET (CONT' D) I

1905 ACTUATOR, ELEVATION 0 F F F H

1906 RACKS, STRAPS AND BOXES, IN TERIOR AND

EXTERIOR c c 0 0

1907 BOXES, AMMUNITION c 0

)> 1912 AUTOMATIC LOADER c F c F F F F F D

I
N
0 FIRE DOOR ASSEMBLY F F F F F F

MAGAZINE ASSEMBLY F F F F F F

SPROCKET, FRONT TRANS. DRIVE F F

SPROCKET, REAR-CROSS DRIVE F F

,
SPROCKET, INDEXING- MAGAZINE DRIVE F F F F

CHAIN ASS'Y., FRONT TRANSPORT F F F

PAGE
 MAl NTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-T RAC KED: 152 MM GUN/LAI:N.�HER, MBT /XMS 03
--
(l) (2) (3) (4) (5)
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GRO UP
FUNCTIO NAL GRO UP TOOLS AND
NO . UJ ...J
REMARKS
1- ::J
1-
EQUIPMENT
�
UJ 1- ...J UJ
u ...J u <t: a
UJ u VI z a,; ::r: ...J
a..
VI
1- > ::J
-, 0
co
...J
� <t:
...J <t:
a,;
UJ ::J
VI a,; VI
z UJ a ...J <t:
a.. a..
> co
UJ z UJ UJ UJ
- 1- VI <t: <t: u a,; a,; 0 a,;
'

19 T URRET {CONT'D): · ·
)>
I

CHAIN ASS'Y., CR OSS DRIVE - REAR

I'V
1912 F F F

CHAIN ASS 'Y., RAMMER DRIVE RH F F

C HAIN ASS'Y., RAMMER DRIVE LH .F F

·-·

II
LOCK, FR ONT TRANSPORT CHAIN F F F
i
CYLINDER ASSEMBLY, HYDRAULIC F F

LEVER, L OCK ACTUATOR - REAR TRAN S.

CHAIN F F

CY LINDER ASS'Y., HYDRAULIC F F

MOTOR ASS'Y., HYDRAULIC - MAGAZINE

DRIVE F F F H

M OTOR ASS'Y., HYDRAULIC RAMMER DRIVE F F F H

RAMMER HEAD ASSEMBLY 0 0 H

I
PAGE
'--· . - - .. "· --·1

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL- TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GRO UP
NO
FUNCTIONAL GROUP w _J TOOLS AND
REMARKS
t- :::>
t-
U.J _J w <t: EQUIPMENT :
u
w u
t-
Vl z � _J u � :r:
0
_J
a... :::> co <t: <t: �
Vl t-
Vl � -, 0 _J t-
Vl _J <t: w :::>
co
z w w 0 _J <t: z 0...
w
0...
w > w
- t- Vl < <t: u � � 0 �
.

19 TURRET (CONT'D)

1912 RAMMER D RIVE ASSEMBLY F F F .

ACTUATOR ASS'Y. 1 CANISTER - STOW PORT F F H

ACTU ATOR ASS'Y. 1 CANISTER- LOAD AND

-
RESTOW F F H

)> STOP ASS'Y. 1 FULL BACK- RESTOW F F F

I
N
N
CANISTER ASS'Y., MAGAZINE 0 0 F

STOW PORT ASSEMBLY F F F F F

LOADING TUBE ASSEMBLY F F F D

ACTUATOR ASSEMB LV 1 LOAD TUBE 0 F F H

.
1'
. MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY, CANISTER F F F H

MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 1 LOADING TUBE 0 F F H

PAGE
 I

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART I

FO R
I
I
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03
i
(l) (2) (3) (4) (5)
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

G ROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
NO UJ
......
--l
:::> REMARKS
......
LU ...... --l UJ
4: a EQUIPMENT
u
UJ
u V') z � --l
u 0<! :r: --l
co
:::> � 4:
c...
V')
...... >
0<!
--. t') --l V')
--l 4:
0<!
UJ :::>
V')
z lU UJ a --l 4:
c... c... > co
I
z UJ UJ UJ
- ...... Vl 4: 4: u 0<! 0<! 0 0<!
I
. '
TURRET (CONT' D)
I
19 I
I
)>

I
I
I
tv
w MANIF OLD ASSEMBLY, MAGAZINE DRIVE 0 F F H .

MAN IF OLD ASSEMBLY, RAMMER DRIVE 0 F F ! H

CONTROL SYSTEM, MANUAL- H YDRAULIC

F F F F
-
MANIF OLD

CONTROL ASSEMBLY, DRIVE LOADER RESTOW

AND EMERGENCY 0 0 D

CONTROL BOX ASSEMBLY, PROGRAM 0 0 D D

GEARBOX ASSEMBLY, ENCODER & SPROCKET 0 0 0 0 D

VARIABLE RESISTOR DRIVE ASSEMBLY 0 0 0 0

I

COUNTER BOX ASSEMBLY, COMMANDER 0 0 D

iI
.

PAGE
�><-:-.r.�

I MAl NTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

TANK, COMBAT, FULL-T RACKED:

FOR
152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XM803
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
NO w _J
REMA RKS
� :::>
�
U.J � _J w
<X: 0
EQUIPMENT
u
w
u Vl z � _J u � :::c _J
:::> CQ <X: <X: �
0..
Vl
� >
�
-. <..? _J
� _J <X: w :::>
Vl Vl
z w w
0 _J <X:
0.. 0.. > CQ
<X: <X: z w w w
- � Vl u � � 0 �

19 TURRET (CONT'D)

1912 CHAIN LOCK (FRON T OR REAR) 0 F .

ENCODER GEAR BOX A SSEMBLY 0 0 F .

RAMMER DRIVE MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 0 F F

.

MAGAZINE DRIVE MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 0 F F

)>
I
"' CANISTER RELEASE MANIFOLD ASSEMBLY 0 F F
�

PROGRAM CONTROL 0 F F F

RAMMER DRIVE POTENTIOMETER 0 F F

HARNESSES, WIRING, AUTOMATIC LOADER 0 F F 0

PAGE
 MAl NTE NANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAL \ICHER, MBT/XMS03
-

( 1) ( 2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
II

GROUP
FUNCTIONA L GROUP TOOLS AND
NO -
UJ ...J
RE MARKS
EQUIPME NT
1- :J
1-
u
UJ.
u
1-
V') �
...J UJ
u <t: 0
UJ z ...J
oc I ...J
a..
V') 1- > :J
<.:>
co
� <t:
...J <t:
oc
:J
V') oc -.
0
...J V') a.. a..
UJ
co
z UJ UJ
...J <t: z UJ w
>
- 1- V') <t: <t: u oc oc 0
UJ
oc
.

22 HULL AND ACCESSORY ITEMS

)>

� 2201 CANVAS, COVER ASSY., NIGHT VISION DEV c c 0 F .

CANVAS, COVER, ASSY., SE ARCHLIGHT,

INFRARED AND VISIB LE LIGHT c c 0 F

CANVAS COVERS, VE HICULAR c c 0 F

2202 B OX, E XTERNAL, INTERPHONE c 0 c 0 0

HE ATER, SPACE , 30,000 BTU/HR., MULTIFUEL,

24 v. c 0 0 0 H

PUMP, FUEL FILTER VALVE AND LINE S c 0 0 0

CONTROL, ASSEMBLY c 0 0

. IGNITER 0 0 0 0

CABLE, ASSEMBLY, MANUAL c 0 0

M OTOR, BLOWER, COMBUSTION AIR, ASSY. 0 0 F F

PAGE
---�-1
.

:I MAINTENANCE ALL OCATION CHART

FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LA UNCHER, MBT/XMS03

( 1) (2) (3) (4) (5 )

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GROU?
NO FUNCTIONAL GROUP T O OLS AND
UJ
t-
....J
:::l REMARKS
t-
UJ ....J UJ EQUIPMENT
u
UJ
u
t-
(/') z � ....J u 0::
<(
:c
0
....J
0.... :::l ro <( <( 0::
<:) t- :::l
(/')
t-
(/') � -.
0
....J (/')
....J
0....
<(
0....
UJ
> co
z UJ UJ
....J <( z UJ UJ UJ
t- V'l <( <( u 0:: 0:: 0 0::

.
22 HULL AND ACCESS ORY I TEMS (CONT'D)

2202 BLOWER, ASSEMB LY F F

'
0 0 .

WASHER/WIPER, DRIVER'S c 0 c 0 0

2205 8.1 LGE PUMP SYSTEM c 0 c F

2210 PLATE, CAUTI ON c 0

)> PLATE, DATA, SHIPPING

I
c 0
N
0"·
PLATE, IDENTIFICATION c 0

PLATE, INSTRUCTION c 0

PLATE, DATA c 0

2� HYDRAU LIC AND FLUID SYSTEMS

,

2400 RESERV OIR, HYDRAULIC c c F F

MANIFOLDS c F F

PAGE
 -

MAl NTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-T RACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
..

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP w ....J TOOLS AND REMARKS
NO :J
EQUIPMENT
1-
1- w ....J w
1- <t: a
u
w u Vl z � ....J u 0:: J: ....J
:J co <t: <t: 0::
0... 1- > 0 1- ....J :J
V') V') 0:: -. ....J V') <t: w
a ....J 0... 0..
> co
z w w <t: z UJ UJ UJ
- 1- V') <t: <t: u 0:: 0:: 0 0::

24 HYDRAULIC AND FLUID SYSTEMS (CONT'D) I

)>
2400 ACCUMULATORS c 0 0 F l F
I
�
'I
DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, HULL c 0 i F

DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM, TURRET c 0 F

-

HYDRAULIC COOLING SYSTEM c 0 F

I,

FILTER,ASS£MBLY, OIL, HYDRAULIC c 0 F F I.

ELEMENTS, FILTER F 0 !

HYDRAULIC PUMP c 0 F D

26 TOOLS AND TEST EQUIPMENT

2604 SPECIAL TOOLS * * * *As required per inc ·vi-

'
dual special tool.
* * *
I
2606 TEST EQUIPMENT, SPECIAL *As required per inc VI-.
dual special tool. I

P AGE
 -

MAl NTENANCE ALLOCA TION CHART

FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-T RACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT /XMB03

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
.

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
NO w
f.-
...J
:::> REMARKS
f.-
...J w EQUIPMENT
�
w
u
f.-
<( 0 ..
w
u V'l z _J u 0<: I _J
a..
V'l
f.- > :::>
-. 0
co
_J
� <(
_J <(
0<:
w :::>
V'l 0<: V'l
z w 0 _J <(
a.. a..
> co
w z w w w
- f.- V'l <( <( u 0<: 0<: 0 0<:

I
33 KITS, SPECIAL PURP OSE

3301 CONTAINERS, REU S ABLE, SHIPPING F F F D I F

i
3303 KIT, WINTERIZATION 0 0 0 '
0 F '0

BOX, RELAY AND CONTROLS c 0 0 F

)>;
I
"" ' HEATERS I BATTERY c 0 9 0 0
00

H ARNESSES� ELECTRICAL 0 0 F 0

EXHAUST HEAT DUCTS 0 0 0

HEATER, ENGINE OIL 0 0

, HEATER, TRANSMISSION ·0 0

3305 KIT, SUBMERGENCE c c c c

3307 KIT, BULLDOZER c c F 0

KIT, DESERT c F 0 F F
 �

MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART

FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMB03

( 1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND REMARKS
NO LU .....1
f-- ::>
f--
LU .....1 UJ
<( 0
EQUIPMENT
u
UJ
u
f--
l/') z � .....1 u � I .....1
.-.

a.. ::> CX) <( <( �

f-- > 0 f-- .....1 <( ::>
l/') l/') �
-, .....1 l/') a..
w
0 .....1 a.. > CX)
z w UJ <( z UJ UJ w
- f-- l/') <( <( u a<: a<: 0 a<:

33 KITS, SPECIAL PURPOSE (CONT'D)

)>
I
3307 KIT, AUXILIARY POWER UNIT c 0 c 0 F 0
�
POWER UNIT, AUXILIARY c 0 c 0 0 F H D

BATTERY, Nl CAD 0 0 0 0 F

REGULATOR, VOLTAGE 0 0 0 0 F

CON TROL PANEL, APU c 0 0 F

BOX, RECTIFIER/RELAY 0 0 0 F

-- . . --
 MAl NTENANCE ALLOCA TION CHART
' I FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
NO FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
w
1-
-'
REMARKS
1-
w 1- -' UJ
�
<X: 0 EQUIPMENT
u u VI z � -' u
w co <X:
0::: :::c
0:::
-'
1- �
0 �
�
. a..
VI VI -. -' VI a..
-' <X: LU co�
z w LU 0 a..
w w > w
1- VI <X:
-'
<X:
<X:
u z 0::: 0:::
-
0 0:::
91 CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, AND
RADIOLOGICAL ?CBS} EQU IPMENT
9111 MAIN FAN 0 0 0 F
9112 CONTROLS, A IR SUPPLY c 0 0 F
SWITCH, BOX, ASSEMBLY 0 0 0 F
)> VALVE, DEEP FORDING c 0 0 F
I
w
0

'

.
,

I
l
.

..

PAGE
-'
 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK , COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03
( 1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
I
MAINTENANCE �=L�NCTION

G ROUP
NO FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
w ._J
:J REMARKS
EQUIPMENT
1-
""-
�
._J w
u
w ""- <: c
u <n z ._J u � :r: ._J
;:;
w
:::::> co
<:
. ·a...
<n
""- > ....., (.) ._J _, <:
Cl<:
w :::::>
<n
)> z
In Cl<:
c ._J <:
n.. 0... > co
w w
z
0
L..J
- ""- <: <: u �
w
Cl<:
w
I In Cl<:
u'
3904 CONTROL BOX c 0 0 F
REMOVE CONTROL BOX c 0 0 F
1
3909 WIRING HARNESSES c 0 0 F
76 FIRE FIGHTING EQUI PMENT COMPONENTS
7638 FIRE EXTINGUISHER, PORTABLE c 0 F 0
7639 CYLINDER, CF BR c 0 F 0
3
TUBING, DISCHARGE c . o 0
CONTROLS, LINES AND FITIINGS c 0 0 0 0
91 CHEMICAL, BIOLOGICAL, AND
RADIOLOGICAL (CBR� EQUIPMENT
9110 COLLECTIVE PROTECTION EQUI PMENT c 0 0
9111 GAS PARTICULATE FILTER UNIT, EMD 0 00 0 F
INTAKE HOUSING & FAN (PRE-cLEANER) 0 0 0 F
HOUSING, FILTERING CONSOLE 0 0 F
...
FILTER, GAS c 0
�

FILTER, PARTICULATE c 0
 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK , COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS 03

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP w -l TOOLS AND
NO � :::) REMARKS
�
w � -l w EQUIPMENT
u
w u V'l z � -l u �
<{
:r:
a
-l
co
:::) � <{
�
�
. 0..
V'l � ' 0 -l -l <{ w :::)
V'l a -l
v. 0.. co
z w w <{ w
0..
w > w
- � V'l <{ z
<{ u � � 0 �

34 ARMAMENT, SIGHTS, AND FIRE CONTROL

CONTROL MATERIEL {CONT'D}

3403 ERROR AMPLIFIER ASSEMBLY F F F F

TRACKER CONTROL ASSEMBLY F F F . F

TEST ACCUMULATOR ASSEMBLY F F F F

)>
I ANALOG TEST ASSEMBLY F F F F
(�)
"'
TEST DISPLAY ASSEMBLY F F F F

WIRING HARNESS ASSEMBLY F F F F

TEST CHECKOUT PANEL ASSEMBLY c c c 0 c F D

TEST CHECKOUT PANEL F F F F D

MODULE BOARD ASSEMBLY F F F F .

CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY F F F F F

RATE SENSOR F F 0 F F D

CABLE ASSEMBLIES, GUIDED MISSILE SUBSYS. F F F i

.
39 SEARCHLIGHT
-
3901 SEARCHLIGHT ASSEMBLY c c c c 0 0 F II

P AGE
_.
 - --

MAl NTENANCE ALL OCATI ON CHART

'I FOR
TANK , C OMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

•
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

G ROUP
NO FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
REMARKS
w ...J
1- :::)
1-
w 1- ...J w EQUIPMENT
u
w
u Vl z ;;? ...J
u 0:::
-<X:
:r:
0
...J
:::) co
;:5 -<X: 0:::
. a..
Vl
1- > ......, 0 ...J ...J -<X: lU :::)
Vl 0::: Vl
z 0 ...J -<X: a.. a..
> co
)> -
w lU
-<X: -<X: z w w w
I
1- Vl u 0::: 0::: 0 0:::
(-.)
( ,) 34 ARMAMENT, S IGHTS, AND FIRE CONTROL
MATERIEL {CONT'D�

3403 DETECTOR S IGNAL AMPLIFIER F F I F F F F D

O PTICAL TRAC KER SUBASSEMBLY F F F F F -F D

IRIS AND DETECTOR SUBASSEMBLY F F F D D D D

DETECTOR SUBASSEMBLY F F F D D D

MODULATOR c c c 0 0 F D

CHASSIS ASSEMBLY F F F F F D

WIRING HARNESS F F F F F

S IGNAL DATA CONVERTER c c c (, 0 F D

REFLECTANCE FILTER ASSEMBLY F. F F F F

AM PLIFIER ASSEMBLY F F F F

DEMO DULATOR ASSEMBLY F F F F

'
TRACKER FILTER ASSEMBLY F F F F
...
PROGRAM TIMER ASSEMBLY F F F F
.

COMMAND G ENERATOR ASSEMBLY F F F F

 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK , COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03
(I) (2) (3) (4) (5)
MAl NTENANCE �='UNCTION
i
G ROUP
NO FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
REMARKS
UJ ....J
f- f- :::>
UJ f- ....J UJ
<( 0 EQUIPMENT
u
UJ
u Vl z � ....J u � I ....J
. 0.. f- :::> 0
co
� <( �
c.n > --. ....J <( :::>
c.n � 0
-l c.n 0.. 0..
UJ
ro
z UJ w ....J <( z w w > w
- f- c.n <( <( u � � 0 �
34 ARMAMENT, SIGHTS, AND f,IRE CONTROL
MATERIEL {CONT'D�
3403 400HZ POWER SU P PLY 0 F 0 F
3403 DRIVER'S NIGHT SIGHT 0 F c 0 F
3403 INDICATOR ASSEMBLY, AZIMUTH c 0 0 F
)>, 3403 SHILLELAGH GUIDANCE & CONTROL SYSTEM
a

� POWER SU PPLY c c c F 0 0 F D
WIRING HARNESS ASSEMBLY F. r F F D
O PTICAL TRANSMITIER c c c F F 0 0 F D
RETICLE ASSEMBLY F F F F
OPTICS BARREL RETICLE ASSEMBLY F- F F D D D
PROJE CTION SYSTEM CELL ASSEMBLY F F F D D D
ADJUSTABLE BRACKET ASSEMBLY LH F F F F
ADJUSTABLE BRACKET ASSEMBLY RH F F F F
MIRROR SUBASSEMBLY .
F F F F D D D
.
O PTICAL TRACKER c c c F 0 0 F D
i ·-- -·

PAGE
..J
 MAINTENANCE ALLOCA TION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNC HER, MBT/XMS03
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
MAINTENANCE FUNCTION
II

GROUP
NO FUNCTIONAL GROUP w _, TOOLS AND
.... ::J REMARKS
....
w _, EQUIPMENT

ui�
u
....
� _, <( 0
w u VI z I _,
::J d) <( <( -
�
�
·a...
VI
.... ' 0 _,
1-
_: <( LU ::J
VI VI
z w 0 _, <( -'- 0...
> d)
)>
w
<( <( z .1 UJ UJ
- 1- V') u � � 0 �
I

� 3403 COMM ANDER'S DAY/NIGHT SIGHT EQUIP.

(CONT'D) I

CS WASHER ASSEMBLY 0 F c IJ F
SECONDARY WEAPON ELEVATION AMPLIFIER 0 F 0 F
3403 FIRE CONTROL DISPLAYS/CONTROLS,
LOGIC AND INTERCONNECT EQUIPMENT
GUNNER'S WEAPON CONTROL 0 F c 0 F
GPS WASHER ASSEMBLY 0 F c 0 F
MAIN W EAPON ALIGNMENT CONTROL 0 F c 0 F
COMMANDER' S WEAPON CONTROL 0 F c 0 F i
COMMANDER'S MDI PANEL 0 F c 0 F I

CS CONTROL AND ALIGNMENT UNIT 0 F c F

TURRET POWER DISTRIBUTION PANEL

INTERCONNECT CABLE SET
0 F
F(c F
c

.
I�
F(c)
F
F F(c)-contact T earn
I

ELECTRONICS RAC K ASSEMBLY ". . F(c F F(c) F

.
CONTROL LOGIC ELECTRONICS UNIT 0 F 0 F
BREECH ELECTRONICS UNIT 0 F 0 F
P AGE
 MAl NTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

(l) (2) (3) (4) (5)

MAl NTENANCE FUNCTION

G ROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
NO w
1-
-l
:::::> REMARKS
1-
w 1- -l w
<( 0 EQUIP MENT
u
w
u c.n z � -l u 0<: I -l
a:l
:::::> 0 � <( 0<:
�
. a.. 1-
. c.n ....... -l c.n
-l <( w :::::>
c.n
z w w 0 -l <(
a.. a.. > a:l
<( z w w w
- 1- c.n <( u 0<: 0<: 0 0<:

;
3403 SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL
(ELECTRIC7ELECTRONIC� MATERIEL (CONT'D

LASER POWER SUPPLY 0 F 0 F

R ANGE ELECTRONICS UNIT 0 F 0 F

IMAGE INTENSIFIER ASSEMBLY 0 F 0 0 F

)>: 3403 GUNNER'S AUXILIARY TELESCOPE 0 F 0 c 0 F

I

� 3403 BALLISTIC COMPUTER EQUIPMENT-

BALLISTIC COMPUTER 0 F 0 F

CANT SENSOR 0 F 0 F

C ROSSWIND SENSOR 0 F c 0 F

3403 COMMANDER'S DAY/NIGHT SIGHT EQUIP.

, CS AZIMUTH AMPLIF IER 0 F 0 F

CS "PRISM ELEVATION AMPLIFIER 0 F 0 F

CS POWER SUPPLY 0 F 0 0 F

CS STABILIZED HEAD & WEAPON MOUNT- F( c F 0 c F(c) F f(c) -Contact Team

.

CS TELESCOPE 0 F 0 c 0 F

P AGE
.�
 MAINTENANCE ALL OCATION CHART
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03

(1) (2 ) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

GROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP T OOLS AND REMARKS
NO w
1-
__,
:::>
1-
w 1- __, w
<{ 0 EQUIPMENT
u u 1.1') z ;:£ __, u � I __,
w
:::> co <{ <{ �
0
�
. a.. 1-
1.1')
1- ...... __, Vl
__, <{ w :::>
1.1') 0 a.. co
z __, <{ a.. >
)> -
w
1-
w
Vl <{ <{ u
z w
�
w
� 0
w
0<:
I

ARMAMENT, SIGHTS, AND FIRE CONTROL

(�)
'-! 34
MATERIEL (CONT1D}

3402 CHARGER, ASSEMBLY c F

MOUNT, LAUNCHER, GRENADE c c 0 0

3403 SIGHTING AND FIRE CONTROL

(EL�CTRIC/ELECTRONIC} MATERIEL

L
GU NER'S PRIMARY SIGHT EQUIPMENT

GPS POWER SU PPLY 0 F 0 F

GPS AZIMUTH STABILIZATION AMPLIFIER 0 F c F

GPS ELEVATION STABILIZATION AMPLIFIER 0 F 0 F

GPS PERISCO PE F 0 c F o'c) F F (c) -contact Team

LASER TRANSMITTER 0 F 0 c 0 F
.
RANGE RECEIVER 0 F c 0 F ..

GPS TELESCO PE 0 F 0 c 0 F

PAGE
 MAl NTENANCE ALL OCATION CHART
I FOR
'
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMB03
r-�--.-----------------------
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
MAl NTE NANCE FUNCTION

,j·
G ROUP
FUNCTI ONAL GROUP � T OOLS AND
NO REMARKS
w ..... .....1 w S 0
<: EQUIPME NT
tJ
w U Vl
�
Z � -:;; u oc: ::r: .....�
·a..
Vl� > :::> 0 co ....J
.....
� <{
� <{ w 0::: :::>
0::: �
Z w w '-' ....J <l: z � a.. > co
- 1- Vl <l: <: u � � 0 �

34 ARMAMENT, SIGHTS,AND FIRE CONTROL

MATERI EL (C ONT'D)

3402 RECE IVER GROU P C C F H

I
BELT, FEEDER C C F H

)> MACHINE GUN, 7 .62MM, M73 C C C C C C F D

I

� BUFFER, REAR, ASSEMBLY 0 0 H

.•

BOLT, ASSEMBLY C C C H

TRIGG ER, MECHANICAL ASSEMBLY C 0: H

SEAR, BUFFER, ASSEMBLY C C H

,.
FEEDER, SLIDE AND EJECTOR GROU P C C H

RECEIVER GROUP C 0 H
•

BELT, FEEDER, R.H. C C C C F H

•

BARREL, EXTENSION, ASSEMBLY C C F

L.-.---'----'-- �----- ---

PAGE
.....
 MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION n.ARr
FOR
TANK, COMBAT, FULL-TRACKED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMB03
..
(1) (2) (3) (4) (5)
MAINTENANCE r:uNCTION
.
I

G ROUP
NO FUNCTIONAL GROUP TOOLS AND
w
I-
_,
� REMARKS
I-
w I- _, w
<: 0 EQUIPMENT
u u V) z � _,
u 0! :r: ....J
w
� a:l
� <:
.
. c..
V)
I- > ...., 0 ....J ....J <:
0!
w �
)> z
V) �
0 :::i <:
V) c.. c..
> a:l
-
w w
<: <: z w w UJ
I
I- V) u � � 0 �
(,,
'-" 34 ARMAMENT, SIGHTS, AND FIRE
CONTROL MATERIEL {CONT1D}

3401 MOUNT, COAXIAL c c 0

SCAVENGER SYSTEM c 0 F

COMPRESSOR/MOTOR ASSEMBLY c 0 F H

3402 MACHINE GUN, CAL. 50, M85 c c c c c F D

BARREL W /FLASH SU ?PRESSOR c c F

BOLT, ASSEMBLY c c F H

RETAINER, FEED ACTUATOR HOUSING c c F H

ROD, GUIDE c c

SLEEVE, BUFFER c c
.
S PRING, HELICAL, COMPRESSION c c .

SEAR, BUFFER, ASSEMBLY c c F H

n A r"C::
 MAl NTENANCE ALL OCA TION CHA RT
FOR
TANK , COMBA T, FULL- TRACK ED: 152 MM GUN/LAUNCHER, MBT/XMS03
-

( 1) (2 ) (3) (4) (5)

MAINTENANCE FUNCTION

G ROUP
FUNCTIONAL GROUP T O OLS AND
NO UJ _j
:::> REMARKS
EQUIPMENT
I-
I-
UJ _j UJ
u
I-
� <l:: 0
UJ
u Vl z _j u 0::: :r: _j
:::> a)
<l::
. 0..
Vl
I- > -, c.:> _j
� _j <l::
0:::
lU :::> :
Vl 0::: Vl
z UJ 0 _j <l::
0.. 0.. > a)
w z UJ UJ UJ
- I- Vl <l:: <l:: u 0::: 0::: 0 0::: I

34 A RMAMENT, S I G HTING AND FIRE CONTROL

MAT ERIAL

3401 152MM GUN/LAUNCHER, c c 0 F·

XM 150E6 AND MOUNT •

MECHANISM BREECH A CTU ATING c c F 0 F

>
I
.�
0 DEVICE, EMERG ENCY FIRING c c 0 F

TU BE, GUN LAUNCHER c c 0 F

MO TOR, ELE'CTRI C DRIVE 0 0 F

SWITCHES, BREECH A CTU ATING 0 0 0

� RECO IL MECHANISM c c c F D

VALVE, SAFETY 0 F 0 F
I

BUFFER, ASSY ., COUNTER-RECOIL .

c c 0 F
.

SWITCH, IN BATTERY 0 0 0

PAGE
-i